Ford - Escape 2wd - Workshop Manual - 2009 - 2009 (2)

Factory Workshop Manual Make Ford Model Escape 2wd Engine and year V6-3.0L (2009) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 22 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 23 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set TSB 09-14-3 07/27/09 SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) ^ SYNC display menus/options blank ^ USB port inoperative ^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity ^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative ^ Lack of APIM communication ^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery disconnect/reconnect. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels: ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 28 button and select the SYNC button. 1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS. a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2. b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3. 2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if communication can be established. If not, perform an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery. a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3. b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM. 3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure. NOTE SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. NOTE CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID AND PASSWORD. a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. c. Turn the ignition key to the on position. d. Launch IDS tool. e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. f. Close the IDS tool. g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. i. Press read APIM button. j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. k. Program the processor in the APIM. l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port. m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 29 n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 39 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 40 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set TSB 09-14-3 07/27/09 SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) ^ SYNC display menus/options blank ^ USB port inoperative ^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity ^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative ^ Lack of APIM communication ^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery disconnect/reconnect. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels: ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 45 button and select the SYNC button. 1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS. a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2. b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3. 2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if communication can be established. If not, perform an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery. a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3. b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM. 3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure. NOTE SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. NOTE CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID AND PASSWORD. a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. c. Turn the ignition key to the on position. d. Launch IDS tool. e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. f. Close the IDS tool. g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. i. Press read APIM button. j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. k. Program the processor in the APIM. l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port. m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 46 n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 47 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 50 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 51 Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM) C240A Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 52 C240A Part 2 C240B Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 53 C240C Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Communications Control Module: Procedures Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool. 4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port. 5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). 6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet. 7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level. - The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels. 8. The scan tool displays the following information: - Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM - Installed date: date the APIM was installed - Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle - HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number - Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled - S/N: APIM serial number - Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation - VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time - CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 56 - Description: a description of the content of the software revision - History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation - VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time - CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time - Description: a description of the content of the software revision - Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected - Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision - VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection - CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection - Description: a description of the content of the software revision 9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software level, if desired. 10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB port, or exit the OASIS screen. Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode Audio Systems Without Navigation 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode. 3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins. - The display indicates each speaker as it is tested. 4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after step 3 by turning the ACM off. Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 57 5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off. Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval - Vehicles Without Navigation 1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode. 2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously. - The Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) displays on the screen. 3. Record the SDARS module ESN. 4. Turn the audio system off. Navigation Audio System 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode. 3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins. - The display indicates each speaker as it is tested. 4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to complete on its own. Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 58 5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu: 6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 59 Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement Audio Control Module (ACM) Audio Control Module (ACM) All Except Navigation Navigation Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 60 Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool. 2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel. 3. Remove the 4 ACM screws. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation). - To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation). Navigation 4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors. All except navigation 5. If equipped, remove the 4 screws and the ACM side support brackets. 6. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM. Remove the 2 ACM brackets. All vehicles 7. Remove the ACM. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the ACM. Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software and hardware level when a new APIM is being installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being replaced. Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 61 2. Remove the floor console. 3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical connector. 4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM. - Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port Floor Console Trim Panels Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port and Cable Removal and Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 62 NOTE: The original equipment Universal Serial Bus (USB) port and cable is part of the wiring harness. It can only be serviced by overlaying a new USB port and cable. 1. Remove the transmission selector level bezel by pulling straight up. 2. NOTE: Open the floor console storage bin door. Remove the floor console finish panel by pulling straight up. - Disconnect the electrical connector, if necessary. 3. Remove the center instrument panel lower panel by pulling straight back. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the USB cable and port. - Disconnect the cable from the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). - Cut the USB port and cable ends and secure them to prevent NVH concerns. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Secure the new USB port and cable, as necessary, to prevent NVH concerns. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set TSB 09-14-3 07/27/09 SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) ^ SYNC display menus/options blank ^ USB port inoperative ^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity ^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative ^ Lack of APIM communication ^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery disconnect/reconnect. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels: ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 71 button and select the SYNC button. 1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS. a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2. b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3. 2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if communication can be established. If not, perform an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery. a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3. b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM. 3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure. NOTE SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. NOTE CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID AND PASSWORD. a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. c. Turn the ignition key to the on position. d. Launch IDS tool. e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. f. Close the IDS tool. g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. i. Press read APIM button. j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. k. Program the processor in the APIM. l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port. m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 72 n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality TSB 09-13-5 07/13/09 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 77 a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. 2008-2009 Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 Escape / Mariner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 78 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 79 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the male side of the connector (17C712 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2009 Expedition/Navigator only). 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only. ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 80 ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 F-150 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 81 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2009 F-Super Duty Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 82 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 Flex Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 83 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Focus Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 84 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim. 2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 85 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 86 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional information. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 87 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector (mirror) are no longer used. ^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set TSB 09-14-3 07/27/09 SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) ^ SYNC display menus/options blank ^ USB port inoperative ^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity ^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative ^ Lack of APIM communication ^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery disconnect/reconnect. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels: ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 93 button and select the SYNC button. 1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS. a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2. b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3. 2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if communication can be established. If not, perform an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery. a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3. b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM. 3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure. NOTE SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. NOTE CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID AND PASSWORD. a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. c. Turn the ignition key to the on position. d. Launch IDS tool. e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. f. Close the IDS tool. g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. i. Press read APIM button. j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. k. Program the processor in the APIM. l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port. m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 94 n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality TSB 09-13-5 07/13/09 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 99 a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. 2008-2009 Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 Escape / Mariner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 100 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 101 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the male side of the connector (17C712 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2009 Expedition/Navigator only). 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only. ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 102 ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 F-150 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 103 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2009 F-Super Duty Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 104 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 Flex Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 105 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Focus Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 106 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim. 2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 107 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 108 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional information. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 109 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector (mirror) are no longer used. ^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade TSB 09-11-8 06/15/09 SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE SOFTWARE FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date. ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911 assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS) website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates: ^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009 ^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009 ^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008 ^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008 ^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report features and do not require updating. To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC 911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded. The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM). The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles operated within the US and Canada. Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure proper functionality before continuing. Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the latest software version. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 114 For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website. 1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete. 2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. 4. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session. 6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher. 7. Close the IDS tool. 8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the go button. 9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab. 10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR. 11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM. NOTE TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON THE SYNC MENU. 12. Set ignition to off. 13. Open and close driver side door. 14. Set ignition to on. 15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu. 16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows. 17. Clear all DTC's on all modules. 18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator vehicles. Navigation Radio Instructions 911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation. 1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu. 2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display. 3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display. 4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display. 5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display. Non Navigation Radio Instructions 911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation. 1. Press phone button on steering wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 115 2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok. 3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok. 4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed. Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if that application is desired. NOTE IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911 ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade TSB 09-11-8 06/15/09 SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE SOFTWARE FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date. ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911 assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS) website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates: ^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009 ^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009 ^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008 ^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008 ^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report features and do not require updating. To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC 911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded. The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM). The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles operated within the US and Canada. Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure proper functionality before continuing. Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the latest software version. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 121 For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website. 1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete. 2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. 4. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session. 6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher. 7. Close the IDS tool. 8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the go button. 9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab. 10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR. 11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM. NOTE TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON THE SYNC MENU. 12. Set ignition to off. 13. Open and close driver side door. 14. Set ignition to on. 15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu. 16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows. 17. Clear all DTC's on all modules. 18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator vehicles. Navigation Radio Instructions 911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation. 1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu. 2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display. 3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display. 4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display. 5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display. Non Navigation Radio Instructions 911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation. 1. Press phone button on steering wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 122 2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok. 3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok. 4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed. Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if that application is desired. NOTE IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911 ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode Entertainment System Control Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode TSB 09-11-9 06/15/09 NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on. ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19C116 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode Entertainment System Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode TSB 09-11-9 06/15/09 NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on. ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19C116 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 144 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 145 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 151 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 152 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Navigation Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 161 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 162 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 168 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 169 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 173 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 174 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Parking Aid Module (PAM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being installed. Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool. 2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows: - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Disengage the clips. - Remove the parking aid speaker. 4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows: - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Remove the 2 screws. - Remove the PAM. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the PAM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 179 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 180 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Relay, Passenger > Page 185 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 188 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Driver Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 191 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 192 Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 193 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 197 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration TSB 09-20-3 10/19/09 ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12 MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H) FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h). ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C219 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration TSB 09-20-3 10/19/09 ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12 MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H) FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h). ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C219 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 212 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 213 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 214 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 215 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicles shown, hybrid vehicles similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly. All vehicles 1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. Non-hybrid vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 216 2. Remove the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). All vehicles 5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Configure the ABS module. 8. Calibrate the ABS module. - For non-hybrid vehicles, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence following the scan tool directions. - For hybrid vehicles, carry out the Multi-Calibration routine following the scan tool directions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 222 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 223 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 226 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 227 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 228 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 229 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 230 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 235 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 236 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 240 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Relay (A/CCR) Note: The PCM parameter identifiers (PIDs) wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff (WAC) and wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WAC_F) are used to monitor the A/CCR output. The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C operation and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position), the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/CCR. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 241 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 242 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC > Page 247 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-DATC Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 250 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 251 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-EMTC Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 252 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 271 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 276 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 277 Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center console finish panel. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 282 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 283 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 286 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 287 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 288 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 289 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 290 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 295 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Smart Junction Box (SJB) Removal NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box (SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB. NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows: - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 299 Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. 2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 4. Remove the floor console finish panel. 5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB. Installation 1. Install the SJB. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB cover. 4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6 seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key. NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the SJB. 5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful, this step will clear DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. 7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position. This will make sure that all displays are visible under all lighting conditions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 303 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 308 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 309 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 310 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 311 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 312 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 315 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 316 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 317 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 318 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 319 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 320 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 321 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 322 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 323 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 326 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 327 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 328 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation Torque-Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Overview The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions. Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of torque-based ETC are: - eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: - The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). - There are two designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. - An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. - The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. - The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. - There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also two throttle position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle. Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control Components. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 334 allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken. ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management: a - ETC illuminates or displays a message on the message center immediately; MIL illuminates after 2 driving cycles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 335 ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management: Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation: a - Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. APP and TP Sensor Inputs Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 336 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check: Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the PCM. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional DTC information. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check: a - Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the PCM, TP inconsistent with requested throttle plate position. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional DTC information. Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output Electronic TAC Operation Check: a - Note: For all DTCs, in addition to the MIL, the powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) is on for the concern that caused the FMEM action. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 5 seconds to register a concern. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts TSB 09-19-5 10/05/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E (SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is: a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14. b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps. 2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs. Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 353 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 12A650 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts TSB 09-19-5 10/05/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E (SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is: a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14. b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps. 2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs. Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 371 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 12A650 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 376 Engine Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 377 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 378 Engine Control Module: Diagrams Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 379 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 380 Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 381 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 382 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 383 Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 384 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 385 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Control Module: Procedures Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block is displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Neutral Profile Correction In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is reset. Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been completed. To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any misfire DTCs. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 388 At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 389 Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS). Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM. 5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged. Installation 1. Install the PCM cowl seal. 2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 390 4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt. 5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset 7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 394 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 395 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Control Module Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur. Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 403 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 407 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 408 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 413 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 414 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 415 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 416 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 417 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Restraints Control Module (RCM) Removal WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: When installing a new Restraints Control Module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option that is disabled. The RCM and Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) must be configured correctly to fully support 911 assist functionality. 1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 418 2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts. 4. Remove the RCM access cover. - Remove the scrivet. - Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover. 5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector. 1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops. 2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector. 7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM. Installation 1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting to connect the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 419 3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM on an angle can cause bad electrical connections and damage components. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM. - NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM) before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt. 4. Connect the RCM electrical connector. - Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place. 5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in. 6. Install the RCM access cover. - Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace. - Install the scrivet. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 420 7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws. 8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module Installation (PMI). 10. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 424 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 429 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 430 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 436 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 437 Steering Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 438 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 439 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 440 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 445 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 446 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 453 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 454 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 455 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 458 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 459 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 460 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 461 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Parking Aid Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear bumper cover removal for access. Remove the rear bumper cover. 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s). - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 465 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 466 Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair Parking Aid Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Console Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 475 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 478 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 479 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 480 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 481 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Door Lock Control Switch NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior Door Handle - Front. 2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 485 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 486 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 487 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 488 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 489 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Exterior Mirror Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH sail panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch. - Press the 2 retaining tabs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 493 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 494 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 495 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 496 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 497 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 498 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch Liftgate Release Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 504 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 509 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 510 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 511 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch Seat Control Switch Removal and Installation NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front. 1. Remove the recliner handle cover. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. 3. Remove the outboard side shield. - Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield. - Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the knob and seat control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 515 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 516 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 517 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 521 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 530 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 536 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration TSB 09-20-3 10/19/09 ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12 MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H) FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h). ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C219 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 547 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 548 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 556 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 560 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 561 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. - To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 565 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 566 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Stability/Traction Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel. 2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel TSB 09-5-5 03/23/09 LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT 10/21/2008-10/31/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from 10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage. 2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics. 3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs. Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 575 Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Correct Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3K186 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel TSB 09-5-5 03/23/09 LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT 10/21/2008-10/31/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from 10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage. 2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics. 3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs. Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 581 Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Correct Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3K186 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 584 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 585 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 586 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 589 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 590 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 591 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. - When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 594 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer. 5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the front wheel speed sensor. 9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 595 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. - When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. 3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 596 - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor. 8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 597 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Removal 1. Remove the front halfshaft. 2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 598 1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the previous illustration. 2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 599 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Removal and Installation Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut. - To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). 3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles 5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired separately. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan clutch. For additional information on the cooling fan clutch, refer to the Cooling Fan Clutch. Cooling Fan Clutch with Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) Cooling Fan Clutch with FSS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 608 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 612 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 613 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. Typical CHT Sensor Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 614 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced. 1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 619 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 622 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch Speed Control Switch Escape and Mariner shown, Hybrid similar Removal and Installation 1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch > Page 630 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Deactivator Switch Speed Control Deactivator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn. 3. Remove the speed control deactivator switch. 4. NOTE: When installing the speed control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to the correct position. Do not pull up or push down on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the speed control deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 635 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 636 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing. Remove the engine oil filter. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees. 3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the EOP switch. - To install, tighten to 14 Nm (124 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 644 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 645 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests Ambient Temperature Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 649 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 650 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Blower Motor Speed Control Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the blower motor speed control. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 654 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 655 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown. In-vehicle temperature sensor similar. Removal and Installation 1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument cluster finish panel could result. Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor. 2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor electrical connector. 4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing. 5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel. 6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing for installation. When installing the venturi, it must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to indicated that it is correctly attached. Remove the venturi (if needed). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 658 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper. 2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 662 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Air Conditioning Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary evaporator core on hybrid vehicles. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air temperature. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels. On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator core to warm to acceptable levels. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning > Page 665 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Control Components Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects. The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling and improve defrost/demist performance. Note: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts. A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 666 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away from the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector. 4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 670 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Engine Control Components Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to the Climate Control System Air Conditioning System Overview. Also, refer to the applicable Wiring Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. For additional information, refer to wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff (WAC). Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 673 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch Engine Control Components Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled for electric fan applications, or single function for all others. For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve. For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high speed fan to help reduce the pressure. For additional information, refer to the Climate Control System, Air Conditioning System Overview or the Wiring Diagrams. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 674 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor Engine Control Components Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control. A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage Vs Pressure Chart Typical ACP Transducer Sensor Typical ACP Transducer Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Solar Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 680 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 681 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 682 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 683 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 684 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 685 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 686 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 687 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 688 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 689 Solar Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 690 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 691 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 692 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 693 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 694 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 695 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 696 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 697 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 698 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 699 Solar Sensor: Description and Operation SOLAR AMPLIFIER (SUNLOAD SENSOR) The solar amplifier (dual-channel sunload sensor), supplies information to the DATC module indicating LH side and RH side sunload. The sunload senor is capable of sensing the intensity and direction of the solar rediation entering the cabin of the car through the windshield for comfort of the driver and front passenger. The smart junction box processes this information to control the air conditioning system. For information on the location and service of the sunload sensor. See: Locations Diagrams By Number, Diagram set 55-004 Auto Climate Control System. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 700 Solar Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the A/C sunload sensor from the instrument panel upper finish panel. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC) finish panel. 2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from behind. Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 708 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module Engine Control Components Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 713 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir Engine Control Components Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 716 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 717 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 718 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 719 7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 723 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 724 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. - To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 730 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 733 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 734 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair Light Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 738 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 739 Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Reversing Lamp Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set TSB 09-15-1 08/10/09 TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light, a slight brake drag condition may be observed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement. NOTE DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH CAN OCCUR. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set TSB 09-15-1 08/10/09 TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light, a slight brake drag condition may be observed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement. NOTE DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH CAN OCCUR. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 753 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 754 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 755 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 756 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Stoplamp Switch Removal and Installation NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur. 1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. 2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Console Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 763 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 767 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 770 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 771 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 772 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 773 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 777 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 778 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 779 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 780 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Headlamp Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 787 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 791 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 792 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 793 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 799 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 800 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 2-Track APP Sensor Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 804 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 805 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals. Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 806 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 807 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 812 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 815 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 816 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 817 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 824 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 828 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 829 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 830 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 831 4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 835 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 836 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. Typical CHT Sensor Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 837 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced. 1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Level Input (FLI) The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 843 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 844 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 845 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 846 7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 847 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sender Fuel Level Sender Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Pump/Service and Repair/Fuel Pump Module. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the locking tabs and remove the fuel level sender from the FP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 848 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 852 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 853 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 857 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 858 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are two types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use two IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type MAF Sensor Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type MAF sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 863 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 866 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 867 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 868 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Removal Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS) 1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the KS. Engine block-mounted KS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 869 3. Remove the lower intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector. 5. Remove the bolt and the KS. Installation Engine block-mounted KS 1. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 2. Connect the KS electrical connector. 3. Install the lower intake manifold. Cylinder head-mounted KS 4. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Connect the KS electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 873 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 874 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 875 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the MAP sensor. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). - When installing the sensor, if the bolt fails to hold specified torque, relocate the sensor and retain, using the auxiliary bolt hole in the upper intake manifold. 3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 883 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 884 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 885 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 888 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 889 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 890 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Engine Control Components Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 893 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Engine Control Components Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner, the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio. The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a signal that comes directly from the sensor. The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal HO2S does not need access to outside air. Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM. Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum accuracy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 896 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and Installation LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the LH HO2S. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench Adapter Formulas in the Appendix . - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). RH HO2S 5. Disconnect the RH HO2S electrical connector. 6. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 897 Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the RH HO2S. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench Adapter Formulas in the Appendix . - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). All HO2S 7. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 898 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor Catalyst Monitor Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench Adapter Formulas in the Appendix . - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 903 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 907 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 913 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Engine Control Components Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6F35 Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 917 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 918 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 919 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 920 locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 8. Position the main control cover in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 921 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 922 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. 3.0L Engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 923 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Engine Control Components Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 928 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Engine Control Components Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling. Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 933 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 938 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 939 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 2-Track APP Sensor Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 943 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 944 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals. Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 945 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 946 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 950 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 954 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 958 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 959 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel cone held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the cone breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch. Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 960 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch 1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 966 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Engine Control Components Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 972 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 975 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 976 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 977 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 981 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 982 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 983 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 984 4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 994 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 1000 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1001 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be replaced. 1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 1006 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 1009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1010 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1011 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Removal Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS) 1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the KS. Engine block-mounted KS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1012 3. Remove the lower intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector. 5. Remove the bolt and the KS. Installation Engine block-mounted KS 1. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 2. Connect the KS electrical connector. 3. Install the lower intake manifold. Cylinder head-mounted KS 4. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Connect the KS electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1017 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1022 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1023 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1024 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1025 Impact Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1026 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1027 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1028 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1029 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1030 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1031 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Diagrams Front Impact Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 1034 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 1035 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 1036 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor Front Impact Severity Sensor Removal and Installation WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 1039 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar NOTE: RH shown, LH similar. Removal WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor. - Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 1040 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Removal WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor. - Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 1045 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 1048 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation Safety Belt System WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog. Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1055 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1058 Removal NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips. 1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. 4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1059 5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. 6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad. 7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM. 9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly with the bladder. Installation NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1060 Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening. 3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan. 8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. - To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest. 10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector. 2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan. 4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1061 12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset. 14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. 16. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1062 sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1063 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1064 Removal WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)) must be installed as an assembly. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left unplugged and secured by a tie strap. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS. 2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. 4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1065 6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan. 8. Remove the OCS. - Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. Installation NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1066 before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. 3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is not used. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 3. Install the rivets. 4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan. 5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1067 - To aid in installation, recline the seat. 6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose. Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan. 3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside. 5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside. 8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the OCS system reset. 10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. 12. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1068 - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. 13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS. The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company. Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder, OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part OCS only). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1072 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1073 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Seat Position Sensor NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the driver seat. 2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip. Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat position sensor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1079 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1080 Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1081 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 1084 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 1094 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 1100 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1101 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be replaced. 1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 1108 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. NOTE: Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1114 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1115 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Column Shift) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Floor Shift) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6F35 Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1127 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1128 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1129 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1130 locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 8. Position the main control cover in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1131 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1132 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. 3.0L Engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1133 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 TSB 09-8-6 05/04/09 6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706, P0707, P1702 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before 10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707, P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR. 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9. 2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS connector from the solenoid body lead frame. 3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor wires during the installation of the main control. 4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr. 2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 1142 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 1148 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 TSB 09-8-6 05/04/09 6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706, P0707, P1702 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before 10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707, P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR. 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9. 2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS connector from the solenoid body lead frame. 3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor wires during the installation of the main control. 4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr. 2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 1153 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 1159 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1160 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1161 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor 6F35 Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1164 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor 6F35 Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1165 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1166 11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1167 Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly Of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1168 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1169 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1170 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1180 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1181 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1182 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 1185 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 1186 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 1187 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1190 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1191 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1192 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1193 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1194 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1195 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Window Control Switch Removal and Installation NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar. NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. 1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1200 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1201 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1202 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1203 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1204 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1208 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1209 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1210 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1211 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1212 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation Alignment: Specifications Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 1218 Alignment: Specifications Material Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 1219 Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications Alignment Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 1220 Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Wheel Alignment Angles Camber Negative and Positive Camber Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct effect on tire wear. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 1223 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Wheel Alignment Angles Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest caster. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 1224 Alignment: Description and Operation Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Wheel Alignment Angles Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 1225 Alignment: Description and Operation Drift/Pull Wheel Alignment Angles Drift/Pull Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep the vehicle going straight. Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel. - A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect. - Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 1226 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Wheel Alignment Angles Camber Negative and Positive Camber Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct effect on tire wear. Caster Wheel Alignment Angles Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest caster. Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Wheel Alignment Angles Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 1227 Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking. Drift/Pull Wheel Alignment Angles Drift/Pull Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep the vehicle going straight. Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel. - A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect. - Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown). Nibble Wheel Alignment Angles Nibble Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel. Poor Groove Feel Wheel Alignment Angles Poor Groove Feel Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center." - Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch. - In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between wander and poor groove feel. Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Wheel Alignment Angles Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn or steering correction. Shimmy Wheel Alignment Angles Shimmy Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements. Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface. Toe Wheel Alignment Angles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 1228 Toe Positive Toe (Toe In) Negative Toe (Toe Out) The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability. Wander Wheel Alignment Angles Wander Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment Camber and Caster Adjustment Front Camber and Caster Adjustment 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. 3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5. 4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position. NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle. Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment. 5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position. NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle. Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1231 6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1232 Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement Ride Height Measurement Front Ride Height Measurement NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel. 1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position. 2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge position (measurement 2). 3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the forward lower arm bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position. 4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge position (measurement 3). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1233 5. Subtract measurement 3 from measurement 2 to obtain the front ride height. - Refer to Specifications. Rear Ride Height Measurement NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel. 1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower bolt (measurement 2). 2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower arm inner bolt (measurement 3). 3. Subtract measurement 2 from measurement 3 to obtain the rear ride height. - Refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1234 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position using a suitable holding device. 3. Check the toe settings following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is rotated. Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s). 5. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut(s). - Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie-rod threads. 6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe. 7. NOTICE: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut, or damage to the boot can occur. NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s). Tighten the tie-rod end jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1235 9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. Rear Toe Adjustment 1. NOTICE: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping. NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean the area using only mild liquids. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position. Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment. 2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut. Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts. 3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification. 4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts. - Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel knuckle bolt. - Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). 5. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and Testing of Steering. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)............................................................................................................... .........................................................379 kPa (55 psi) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1240 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Pressure Test WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L engines do not have a Schrader valve. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Vehicles with 2.5L engine 3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine 5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1241 6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve. Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine 7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube. All vehicles 9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system pressure. Install the FP fuse. 10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool. Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional information, refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Measured/PID Values Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................ 689.5 RPM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose TSB 11-3-5 03/15/11 3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner housing. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-12. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose TSB 11-3-5 03/15/11 3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner housing. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-12. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Intake Air System Components - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Firing Order.......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 1270 Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification Engine Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Spark plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.15-1.25 mm (0.045-0.048 in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 1275 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications Spark plugs........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................15 Nm (133 lb-in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1276 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ ....................................................................CGSF-22F Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1277 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. - Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. - Install a new spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. - Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. - Correct the oil leak concern. - Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. - Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1278 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. - Install new spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1281 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1282 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs Spark Plugs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug. 2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 3. Inspect the spark plugs. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the gap as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1283 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1284 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1285 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition RH Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1286 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1290 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams Drive Belt: Diagrams Accessory Drive Accessory Drive Belt Routing Accessory Drive Belt Coolant Pump Drive Belt Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Noise/Flutter Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter Accessory Drive Component Tests Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter NOTICE: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism may occur. Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley. To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft direction or at an angle to the straightedge. Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on an accessory pulley under certain conditions. A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start up and shut down or during very rapid engine acceleration and decelerations, such as: - Wide Open Throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back-out shifts on automatic transmissions. - WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions. These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur: - if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged. - the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked. - the A/C anti-slugging strategy executes after a long hot heat soak. - if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after several minutes) exceeds specifications. - if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory. - if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and rinsed with clean water. - if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt. - NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding. Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Noise/Flutter > Page 1296 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation Accessory Drive Component Tests Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation NOTICE: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys. Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive belt. Incorrect Installation Correct Installation With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur. Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking condition exists, proceed with the following: - Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises. - With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary. - Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. - Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Drive Belt: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1299 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Accessory Drive Belt Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. NOTE: Refer to the illustration for correct drive belt routing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose TSB 11-3-5 03/15/11 3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner housing. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-12. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose TSB 11-3-5 03/15/11 3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner housing. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-12. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Intake Air System Components - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations Cabin Air Filter: Locations A cabin air filter is available for this vehicle as a dealer installed accessory. The accessory cabin air filter will be located in the air inlet under the RH side of the cowl panel grille, if installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 1321 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair A cabin air filter is available for this vehicle as a dealer installed accessory. The accessory cabin air filter will be located in the air inlet under the RH side of the cowl panel grille, if installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter Removal 1. Remove the camshaft phaser and sprocket. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket. 2. NOTE: RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) system oil filter shown, LH similar. Remove and discard the VCT system oil filter from the camshaft. Installation 1. NOTE: RH VCT system oil filter shown, LH similar. Install the new VCT system oil filter in the camshaft. 2. Install the camshaft phaser and sprocket. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Coolant Inlet Pipe - 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on the hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the Throttle Body (TB). 4. Remove the 2 coolant inlet pipe housing bolts. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the coolant inlet pipe from the coolant inlet pipe hose. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 6. Remove and inspect the O-ring seal, install new seal if necessary. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine coolant. 8. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line - 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield. 4. Remove the front bumper cover. 5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1337 6. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1338 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser To Receiver Drier Line Condenser to Receiver Drier Line Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the compressor manifold and tube bracket nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1339 - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal. 6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 8. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 9. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seal and O-ring seal. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1340 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line Evaporator Inlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the evaporator inlet line bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. Remove the evaporator inlet line. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1341 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line Evaporator Outlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield. 4. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. Detach the wire harness clip from the evaporator outlet line. 6. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1342 - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket. 8. Remove the evaporator outlet line. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and a new O-ring seal. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE FLUID Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. PM-1-C Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................................. WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications HYDRAULIC CLUTCH FLUID Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. PM-1-C Ford Specification .................................................................................................................................................. WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity Coolant ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................. 9.5 Quarts ( 9.0 Liters ) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1354 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. VC-7-B Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................ ................................................ WSS-M97B51-A1 NOTE: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines TSB 09-20-13 10/19/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground. Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines. 1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93 °C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1) 2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h). 3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time. 4. Start and run the engine for: a. 5 minutes before towing each day b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less. c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1359 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Fluid Capacity....................................................................................................................................... ............................................................8.5L (9 quarts) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1362 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - Motorcraft Mercon LV Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Number - XT-10-QLV Ford Specification - MERCON LV Note: The use of any transmission fluid other than what is recommended for this transaxle will cause transaxle damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing will be carried out using the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included with the machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present before proceeding. 1. Check and top off fluid level of the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent tank with transmission fluid. 2. Allow the fluid in the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent 15-30 minutes to heat up to 60°C (140°F) before using. 3. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler lines. 4. NOTE: The TOP transaxle cooler tube on the transaxle is the pressure line. Attach the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent red line to the transmission fluid cooler pressure line quick disconnect fitting. 5. Attach the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent blue line to the transmission fluid cooler return line quick disconnect fitting. 6. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the cooler lines and cooler prior to starting the flushing procedure. 7. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the cooler in a normal flow direction for an additional 10-15 minutes. 8. Clean the transaxle mounted fluid cooler tubes by hand. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 1365 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill NOTE: In order to completely clean the torque converter, this procedure needs to be carried out 3 times. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present, the transaxle will need to be overhauled. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 3. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid. 5. Start the engine and let it run for 3 minutes. Move the range selector lever into each gear position. Repeat Steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 two more times. After the transmission fluid has been changed a total of 3 times, check the transmission fluid level for a final time, making sure that the transmission fluid is at the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid - M/T: Specifications Manual Transmission Fluid Type Ford Part Name ................................................................................................................................... ............................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil Ford Part Number ............................................ ..................................................................................................................................................... XT-4-QGL Ford Specification .............................................................................................................. ...................................................... WSS-M2C206-A1 and GL-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1369 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Transaxle Draining and Filling 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid. 3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug. Install the drain plug. - Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 4. Remove the fill level inspection plug. 5. Remove the transaxle fill plug. 6. Fill the transmission with gear oil until level with the fill level inspection plug hole. 7. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill plug. Install the transaxle fill plug. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1370 - Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 8. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug. Install the fill level inspection plug. - Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter ............................................................................................................................................ ..................................................... 5.7 Liters (6.0 Qt) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1375 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Ford Part Name ....................................................................................................................................... Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Ford Part Number ................................................................... ...................................................................................................................... XO-5W20-QSP Ford Specification ......................................................................................................................................... WSS-M2C930-A with API Certification Mark Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Power Steering Fluid This vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power-Assisted Steering (EPAS) System. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification........................................... ......................................................................................................................................................WS H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................... ...................................................................0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1383 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification........................................... ......................................................................................................................................................WS H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................... ...................................................................0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1384 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Refrigerant Identification Testing Refrigerant Identification 1. NOTE: A Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer must be used to identify gas samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system. Follow the instructions included with the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer to obtain the sample for testing. 2. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer will display one of the following: - If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS LED will light. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons and air will be displayed on the digital display. - If refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an alarm will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display. - If hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light, "Hydrocarbon High" will be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will also be displayed on the digital display. 3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or greater. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer eliminates the effect of air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is not considered a contaminant, although air can affect A/C system performance. When the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer has determined that a refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is 98% or greater by weight) and air concentration levels are 2% or greater by weight, it will prompt the user if an air purge is desired. 4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the refrigerant is indeed contaminated. Contaminated Refrigerant Handling NOTICE: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R-134a recovery/recycling equipment. Recovery of contaminated refrigerant will contaminate the recovered refrigerant supply and may damage the recovery/recycling equipment. NOTE: A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the A/C system flushing procedure. 1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant only. - If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in the area with the correct equipment to carry out this service. 2. Determine and correct the cause of the customers initial concern. 3. Flush the A/C system. 4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local regulations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging Refrigerant: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging Refrigerant System Recovery NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1387 facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer procedures and instructions. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends the use of R-134a refrigerant management equipment that meets the requirements of the SAE J2788 standard. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out recovery. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system recovery may be accomplished using a separate recovery station. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Prior to recovering, the purity of the refrigerant must be verified. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Identification Testing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Refrigerant Identification Testing. 2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. Note the amount of oil removed during the refrigerant recovery (if any). Add that same amount back into the system once repairs are complete. 4. Once the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine has recovered the refrigerant, switch OFF the power supply. 5. Allow the system to set for about 2 minutes, and observe the system vacuum reading. If the vacuum is not lost, disconnect the recovery equipment. 6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for 2 minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs. Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out recovery, evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes. 3. Turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again. Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Vacuum Pump NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out evacuation of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Connect the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the low-side and high-side service gauge port valves. 2. Connect the center (yellow) hose from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the suction port on the Vacuum Pump. 3. Open all valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and both service gauge port valves. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1388 4. Turn on the Vacuum Pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes. 5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set (not the service gauge port valves) and turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. 6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again. Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. 2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low-side and high-side service gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. 2. Assemble the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set, Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a supply tank following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating instructions. 3. Charge the refrigerant system following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating instructions. 4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the engine, select MAX A/C operation and allow the refrigerant charge to complete. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1389 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation WARNING: Use extreme care and observe all safety and service precautions related to the use of refrigerants as outlined on refrigerant tank and on recovery and charging equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer's procedures and instructions. NOTICE: On vehicles being serviced for an internal compressor or desiccant failure, a new suction accumulator or receiver/drier, Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) or evaporator core orifice and any hoses containing mufflers must be installed prior to filtering the Air Conditioning (A/C) system. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible to correctly remove any foreign material. These components are typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses without mufflers can normally be reused unless they are clogged with foreign material. The filter is intended for use on one vehicle only. 1. Orient the filter inlet toward the A/C condenser core. 2. NOTICE: The flexible extension adapters included in the A/C Flush Adapter Kit are designed for low-pressure flushing and are not designed for use with a charged refrigerant system. Do not make the condenser fitting connections using the flexible extension adapters or damage to the adapters and loss of refrigerant will occur. NOTE: The F8VZ-19E773-AB pancake filter is not permanently installed and will be removed at the end of this procedure. Disconnect the condenser outlet fitting and temporarily install the pancake filter between the 2 halves of the fitting. - Use flexible refrigerant hose of 17,238 kPa (2,500 psi) burst rating. - Make the connections using the correct adapters from the A/C Flush Adapter Kit and/or A/C Flush and Purge Fitting Kit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1390 3. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. 4. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 5. Check all refrigerant system hoses, lines and the position of the newly installed filters to be sure they do not interfere with other engine compartment components. If necessary, use tie straps to make adjustments. 6. Provide adequate airflow to the front of the vehicle (with a fan, if necessary). Select A/C operation and set the blower motor speed to maximum. Start the engine and let it idle briefly. Make sure the A/C system is operating correctly. 7. Gradually bring the engine up to 1,200 rpm by running it at lower rpms for short periods (first at 800 rpm, then at 1,000 rpm). Set the engine at 1,200 rpm and run it for one hour with the A/C system operating. 8. Stop the engine. 9. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 10. Remove the adapters, flexible hoses and pancake filter from between the condenser and the condenser to evaporator tube. 11. Discard the pancake filter. It can be used one time only. 12. Reconnect the condenser outlet fitting. 13. Evacuate, charge and leak-test the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification............................................... ..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................ ......................................148 ml (5 fl oz) See: Service and Repair Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1395 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification............................................... ..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................ ......................................148 ml (5 fl oz) See: Service and Repair Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1396 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Refrigerant Oil Adding Refrigerant Oil Adding NOTE: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed, some of the PAG oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part. 1. Refer to the chart below for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation. a If an excessive amount of PAG oil is lost due to a hose rupture/separation or other damage, the total system PAG oil capacity must be added. b The amount specified may be used for one or multiple O-ring leak repairs. Do not multiply the PAG oil amount by the number of O-ring leaks being repaired. Adding Refrigerant Oil After A/C Compressor Replacement Service A/C compressors shipped without clutch and pulley 1. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft 6 to 8 revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring device. - If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 oz), pour the same amount plus 30 ml (1 oz) of clean PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) (YN-12-D) WSH M1C231-B or equivalent into the new A/C compressor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1397 - If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5 oz), pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) or equivalent into the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 oz), pour 85 ml (3 oz) of clean A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) or equivalent into the new A/C compressor. Service A/C compressors shipped with clutch and pulley 2. Rotate the old A/C compressor shaft 6 to 8 revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring device. - If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is less than 89 ml (3 oz), remove 118 ml (4 oz) from the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 89 ml (3 oz), remove 89 ml (3 oz) from the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 118 ml (4 oz), remove 59 ml (2 oz) from the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 148 ml (5 oz), remove 29 ml (1 oz) from the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is greater than 148 ml (5 oz), remove 0 ml (0 oz) from the new A/C compressor. Adding Refrigerant Oil After New Suction Accumulator or Receiver/Drier Replacement NOTE: This refrigerant oil adding method is to be used when a new suction accumulator or receiver drier only has been installed. If a new A/C compressor and evaporator core orifice or TXV have also been installed due to system contamination, refer to the appropriate heading. 1. Drill one 12.7 mm (1/2 in) hole in the old suction accumulator or receiver/drier cylinder and drain the oil into a clean measuring cup. 2. Add the same quantity of new PAG oil, plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery and 60 ml (2 fl oz). Adding Refrigerant Oil After Multiple Component Replacement After A/C System Contamination NOTE: This refrigerant oil adding method is to be used when a new A/C compressor, suction accumulator or receiver drier and evaporator core orifice or TXV have been installed due to system contamination and the A/C system has been flushed. NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without refrigerant oil. 1. Add 60 ml (2 fl oz) directly to the new A/C compressor suction port. 2. Inject the total vehicle PAG oil capacity minus 60 ml (2 fl oz) to the low-side service port during system charging. For the total PAG oil capacity specification, refer to the Specifications table. Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector NOTE: If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the dye may be added to the dye/lubricant injector, from the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set, along with the PAG oil. 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector and the correct adapters from the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set to match the amount of refrigerant compressor oil to be injected. 3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed. 4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of clean, new PAG oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1398 5. Install the dye/lubricant injector between the low-side service gauge port valve and the refrigerant service station or manifold gauge set. 6. Open all valves and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding Master Cylinder Component Bleeding Master Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system. Hybrid vehicles 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air bubbles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1403 5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. - Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Non-hybrid vehicles 6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir. 7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air bubbles. 9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. All vehicles 10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake System Bleeding. Brake Caliper Component Bleeding Brake Caliper WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1404 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Wheel Cylinder Component Bleeding Wheel Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1405 - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1406 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to pressure bleed this system. 1. Clean all the dirt from around the brake fluid reservoir cap and remove the cap. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1407 4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw. 7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw. Pressure Bleeding WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any components upstream of the HCU are installed new. NOTE: Pressure bleed the brake system at 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi). NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to pressure bleed this system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1408 1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. - Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system. 5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose. 6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw. - Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to Specifications. 7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. 8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm. - If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any remaining air from the system. Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1409 plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. All vehicles 1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. 2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Service Bleed instructions. 3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. Hybrid vehicles 4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1414 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1415 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition to OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. 8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1416 clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1417 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1418 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1419 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1420 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. - When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1421 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 1427 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 1428 Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 1429 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1432 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1433 Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1434 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1439 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1440 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1441 Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1442 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1443 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1446 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1447 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1448 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1449 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1450 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1451 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1452 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1453 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1454 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1455 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1456 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1457 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1458 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1459 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1460 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1461 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1462 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1463 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1464 Fuse Block: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1465 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1466 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1467 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1468 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1469 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1470 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1471 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1472 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1473 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1478 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1479 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1480 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1481 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1482 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1485 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1486 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1487 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1488 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1489 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1490 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1491 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1492 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1493 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1496 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1497 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1498 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. - The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol. - The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately four seconds. - The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: - an emission-related concern and DTC exists. - the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL controlled through the communication link). - the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS). - The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or three consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern. - For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/No Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) Present Symptom Chart Index. - If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist. - If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low. - The MIL flashes after a period of time with the ignition in the RUN position (engine not running) if DTC P1000 is set. CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON, or ISO Standard Engine Symbol Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Oil Life An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center. USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS. To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change ( approximately 7,500 miles ( 12,000 km ) or 12 months ) perform the following: 1. Press and release the SETUP control to display "OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW". 2. Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds and release. Oil life is set to 100% and "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed. 3. While "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed, if a lower oil life is start value is desired , press and release the RESET control to reduce the start value. Each press of the RESET control reduces the value by 10 percent. Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles ( 12,000 km ) or 12 months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life start value to 4,500 miles ( 7,200 km ) and 108 days. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation Jacking and Lifting WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other purpose. NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on lift without first checking for possible interference. NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. NOTE: Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1515 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1516 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. NOTE: Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1522 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1523 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises TSB 09-5-8 03/23/09 ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009 and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF THE POWERTRAIN. 1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h). 2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting noise. 3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 1532 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises TSB 09-5-8 03/23/09 ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009 and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF THE POWERTRAIN. 1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h). 2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting noise. 3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 1538 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1543 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. 2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise. 2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1544 5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1545 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Bearing - Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1546 Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor ring. 4. Remove the brake drum. 5. Using the Front Hub Remover and Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent tools, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1547 6. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using a suitable press and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, press the inner bearing race from the wheel knuckle. 7. Remove and discard the wheel bearing snap ring. 8. Using the Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent and the Axle Bearing Remover, remove the bearing from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Using the Half Shaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. Install the wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the brake drum. 6. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the new wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1548 - Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to..................................................................................... ..............................................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft). Front Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to..................................................................................... ..............................................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Install the 5 wheel nuts. Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern. Tighten to....................................... ............................................................................................................................................................1 35 Nm (100 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Studs Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub. - Discard the wheel stud. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1558 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Studs Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove a wheel stud. Damage to the wheel hub may result. 1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, remove the wheel stud. 3. NOTE: Make sure to use washers that have an ID that is larger than the OD of the wheel stud serrations. Use enough washers (approximately 4) to allow the wheel stud to fully seat against the hub flange. Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made by the original wheel stud. - Place approximately 4 washers over the outside end of the wheel stud and thread a standard wheel nut onto the wheel stud with the flat side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1559 against the washers. - Tighten the wheel nut until the wheel stud head seats against the back side of the wheel hub flange. 4. Remove the wheel nut and washers. 5. Install the brake shoes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement Technical Service Bulletin # 10L06 Date: 100419 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED Yes, OASIS will only be activated on stock vehicles for this service action. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website for stock vehicles only on April 19, 2010. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES Dealer action is not required. Owner Guide Supplement booklets are being mailed to owners beginning April 30, 2010. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1568 Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS Stock Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets for stock vehicles are being mailed to dealerships the week of April 19, 2010. The package will be sent to the attention of the service manager. Sold Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets and installation instructions are being mailed directly to customers of the affected vehicles. A small quantity of booklets have been set aside in case an Owner Guide Supplement booklet is misplaced. To order an additional Owner Guide Supplement booklet, contact the Special Service Support Center. A VIN number will be required for each replacement booklet ordered. DEALER PRICE Dealers will not be charged for Owner Guide Supplement booklets ordered for this program. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1569 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1570 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1571 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1572 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1573 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1574 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1575 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1576 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement Technical Service Bulletin # 10L06 Date: 100419 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED Yes, OASIS will only be activated on stock vehicles for this service action. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website for stock vehicles only on April 19, 2010. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES Dealer action is not required. Owner Guide Supplement booklets are being mailed to owners beginning April 30, 2010. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1582 Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS Stock Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets for stock vehicles are being mailed to dealerships the week of April 19, 2010. The package will be sent to the attention of the service manager. Sold Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets and installation instructions are being mailed directly to customers of the affected vehicles. A small quantity of booklets have been set aside in case an Owner Guide Supplement booklet is misplaced. To order an additional Owner Guide Supplement booklet, contact the Special Service Support Center. A VIN number will be required for each replacement booklet ordered. DEALER PRICE Dealers will not be charged for Owner Guide Supplement booklets ordered for this program. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1583 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1584 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1585 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1586 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1587 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1588 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1589 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1590 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement Technical Service Bulletin # 10L06 Date: 100419 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED Yes, OASIS will only be activated on stock vehicles for this service action. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website for stock vehicles only on April 19, 2010. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES Dealer action is not required. Owner Guide Supplement booklets are being mailed to owners beginning April 30, 2010. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1596 Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS Stock Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets for stock vehicles are being mailed to dealerships the week of April 19, 2010. The package will be sent to the attention of the service manager. Sold Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets and installation instructions are being mailed directly to customers of the affected vehicles. A small quantity of booklets have been set aside in case an Owner Guide Supplement booklet is misplaced. To order an additional Owner Guide Supplement booklet, contact the Special Service Support Center. A VIN number will be required for each replacement booklet ordered. DEALER PRICE Dealers will not be charged for Owner Guide Supplement booklets ordered for this program. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1597 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1598 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1599 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1600 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1601 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1602 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1603 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1604 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines TSB 09-20-13 10/19/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground. Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines. 1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93 °C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1) 2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h). 3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time. 4. Start and run the engine for: a. 5 minutes before towing each day b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less. c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1609 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines TSB 09-20-13 10/19/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground. Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines. 1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93 °C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1) 2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h). 3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time. 4. Start and run the engine for: a. 5 minutes before towing each day b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less. c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1615 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1621 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation Jacking and Lifting WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other purpose. NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on lift without first checking for possible interference. NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set TSB 10-19-1 10/11/10 3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/1/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List and production fix date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010. a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for normal diagnostics. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2. 2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs. Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 1636 101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs. Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set TSB 10-19-1 10/11/10 3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/1/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List and production fix date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010. a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for normal diagnostics. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2. 2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs. Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 1642 101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs. Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 1645 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 1648 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1649 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Overview The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT systems. - Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have four operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the Testing and Inspection section. For additional information, refer to the Engine System - General Information. Verification of incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine System - General Information. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP, throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1650 achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. VCT System Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH or RH valve cover. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1657 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Tighten the LH camshaft bearing cap bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to. .............................................................................................................................................................. .........................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Stage 2: Individually loosen and then tighten each camshaft bearing cap to.................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Tighten the RH camshaft bearing cap bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to. .............................................................................................................................................................. .........................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Stage 2: Individually loosen and then tighten each camshaft bearing cap to.................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Tighten the 3 LH camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts to..............................................................................................................................18 Nm (159 lb-in) Tighten the 3 RH camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts to.............................................................................................................................18 Nm (159 lb-in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft: > 09-17-8 > Sep > 09 > Engine Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise Camshaft: Customer Interest Engine - Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise TSB 09-17-8 09/07/09 3.0L INTERMITTENT CYLINDER HEAD CAMSHAFT KNOCK/THUMP NOISE FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-11-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles, equipped with 3.0L engine, may exhibit an intermittent knocking or thumping type noise from the cylinder head. After engine temperature reaches 210-220 °F (99-104 °C), the noise is typically heard from the rear of the engine as the vehicle comes to a stop. An example would be coming to a stop at the end of a highway exit ramp. Noise will continue 45-60 seconds and then diminish. Noise will occur again once engine reaches 210-220 °F (99-104 °C) and vehicle comes to another stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Is noise a 45-60 second knock/thump from a hot engine as the vehicle comes to a stop? a. Yes - Go to Step 2. b. No - Stop as this procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04 diagnostics. 2. Using Chassis Ears, isolate the noise to Right Hand (RH) (Bank 1) or Left Hand (LH) (Bank 2) cylinder head. Noise is typically heard as 45-60 second knock/thump as the vehicle comes to a stop after engine reaches 210-220 °F (99-104 °C). a. Isolate noise to RH - Listen to the cylinder head by the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid connectors. There will also be a vibration felt at the VCT solenoid connector when noise is present. Noise from RH - go to Step 3. b. Isolate noise to LH - Listen to the cylinders 4 and 6 valve cover fasteners (number 6 is by the coolant pump). There will be a significant difference in transmitted noise between the cylinder 4 and 6 fasteners when noise is present. Noise from LH - go to Step 4. NOTE THE RH AND LH NOISES HAVE DIFFERENT CAUSES. FOLLOW ALL STEPS CAREFULLY FOR PROPER DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR. 3. Replace the RH cylinder head per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-01B. a. Verify repair by repeating Step 2. If noise is still present then proceed with normal engine NVH diagnostics per WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Remove LH valve cover. Refer to WSM, Section 303-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft: > 09-17-8 > Sep > 09 > Engine Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise > Page 1673 a. Rotate the engine clockwise until cylinder number 6 exhaust cam lobes are pointing up and valves are fully closed. Exhaust camshaft needs to be left in this position for all bearing caps in Step 4b. (Figure 1) b. On the LH exhaust camshaft only, starting at the front of the engine with the thrust bearing cap (1L), perform the following on all 5 camshaft bearing caps: (Figure 2) NOTE EACH CAM CAP MUST BE COMPLETELY REMOVED AND INSTALLED, PER INSTRUCTIONS, BEFORE PROCEEDING TO NEXT CAM CAP OR DAMAGE TO THE ENGINE MAY OCCUR. (1) Loosen both bolts. (2) Remove cap. (3) Install cap and push cap toward intake camshaft while tightening bolts, excluding thrust bearing cap (1L). (4) Torque bolts to 89 lb-in (10 N.m) starting with bolt closest to intake camshaft. (5) Proceed to next cam cap. NOTE CYLINDER HEAD CAMSHAFT BEARING CAPS MUST BE ASSEMBLED IN THEIR ORIGINAL POSITIONS AND ORIENTATION. FAILURE TO INSTALL THE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAPS IN THEIR ORIGINAL POSITIONS AND ORIENTATION MAY RESULT IN SEVERE ENGINE DAMAGE. c. Install the LH valve cover. Refer to WSM, Section 303-01. d. Verify repair by repeating Step 2. If noise is still present then proceed with normal engine NVH diagnostics per WSM, Section 100-04. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091708A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 9.4 Hrs. Engine: Replace The RH Cylinder Head. Includes Time To Road Test And Diagnose (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091708B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 2.1 Hrs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft: > 09-17-8 > Sep > 09 > Engine Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise > Page 1674 Engine: Remove The LH Valve Cover, Remove And Install LH Exhaust Camshaft Bearing Caps. Includes Time To Road Test And Diagnose (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091708C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 9.5 Hrs. Engine: Replace The RH Cylinder Head, Remove And Install LH Exhaust Camshaft Bearing Caps. Includes Time To Road Test And Diagnose (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6049 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft: > 09-17-8 > Sep > 09 > Engine - Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise Camshaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise TSB 09-17-8 09/07/09 3.0L INTERMITTENT CYLINDER HEAD CAMSHAFT KNOCK/THUMP NOISE FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-11-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles, equipped with 3.0L engine, may exhibit an intermittent knocking or thumping type noise from the cylinder head. After engine temperature reaches 210-220 °F (99-104 °C), the noise is typically heard from the rear of the engine as the vehicle comes to a stop. An example would be coming to a stop at the end of a highway exit ramp. Noise will continue 45-60 seconds and then diminish. Noise will occur again once engine reaches 210-220 °F (99-104 °C) and vehicle comes to another stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Is noise a 45-60 second knock/thump from a hot engine as the vehicle comes to a stop? a. Yes - Go to Step 2. b. No - Stop as this procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04 diagnostics. 2. Using Chassis Ears, isolate the noise to Right Hand (RH) (Bank 1) or Left Hand (LH) (Bank 2) cylinder head. Noise is typically heard as 45-60 second knock/thump as the vehicle comes to a stop after engine reaches 210-220 °F (99-104 °C). a. Isolate noise to RH - Listen to the cylinder head by the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid connectors. There will also be a vibration felt at the VCT solenoid connector when noise is present. Noise from RH - go to Step 3. b. Isolate noise to LH - Listen to the cylinders 4 and 6 valve cover fasteners (number 6 is by the coolant pump). There will be a significant difference in transmitted noise between the cylinder 4 and 6 fasteners when noise is present. Noise from LH - go to Step 4. NOTE THE RH AND LH NOISES HAVE DIFFERENT CAUSES. FOLLOW ALL STEPS CAREFULLY FOR PROPER DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR. 3. Replace the RH cylinder head per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-01B. a. Verify repair by repeating Step 2. If noise is still present then proceed with normal engine NVH diagnostics per WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Remove LH valve cover. Refer to WSM, Section 303-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft: > 09-17-8 > Sep > 09 > Engine - Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise > Page 1680 a. Rotate the engine clockwise until cylinder number 6 exhaust cam lobes are pointing up and valves are fully closed. Exhaust camshaft needs to be left in this position for all bearing caps in Step 4b. (Figure 1) b. On the LH exhaust camshaft only, starting at the front of the engine with the thrust bearing cap (1L), perform the following on all 5 camshaft bearing caps: (Figure 2) NOTE EACH CAM CAP MUST BE COMPLETELY REMOVED AND INSTALLED, PER INSTRUCTIONS, BEFORE PROCEEDING TO NEXT CAM CAP OR DAMAGE TO THE ENGINE MAY OCCUR. (1) Loosen both bolts. (2) Remove cap. (3) Install cap and push cap toward intake camshaft while tightening bolts, excluding thrust bearing cap (1L). (4) Torque bolts to 89 lb-in (10 N.m) starting with bolt closest to intake camshaft. (5) Proceed to next cam cap. NOTE CYLINDER HEAD CAMSHAFT BEARING CAPS MUST BE ASSEMBLED IN THEIR ORIGINAL POSITIONS AND ORIENTATION. FAILURE TO INSTALL THE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAPS IN THEIR ORIGINAL POSITIONS AND ORIENTATION MAY RESULT IN SEVERE ENGINE DAMAGE. c. Install the LH valve cover. Refer to WSM, Section 303-01. d. Verify repair by repeating Step 2. If noise is still present then proceed with normal engine NVH diagnostics per WSM, Section 100-04. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091708A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 9.4 Hrs. Engine: Replace The RH Cylinder Head. Includes Time To Road Test And Diagnose (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091708B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 2.1 Hrs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft: > 09-17-8 > Sep > 09 > Engine - Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise > Page 1681 Engine: Remove The LH Valve Cover, Remove And Install LH Exhaust Camshaft Bearing Caps. Includes Time To Road Test And Diagnose (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091708C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 9.5 Hrs. Engine: Replace The RH Cylinder Head, Remove And Install LH Exhaust Camshaft Bearing Caps. Includes Time To Road Test And Diagnose (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6049 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Camshaft: Procedures Camshaft Journal To Bearing Clearance - OHC Engines Camshaft Journal to Bearing Clearance - OHC Engines NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. NOTE: The camshaft journals must meet specifications before checking camshaft journal clearance. Measure each camshaft bearing in 2 directions. - Subtract the camshaft journal diameter from the camshaft bearing diameter. Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, measure the camshaft end play. 2. Position the camshaft to the rear of the cylinder head. 3. Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge. 4. Move the camshaft to the front of the cylinder head. Note and record the camshaft end play. - If camshaft end play exceeds specifications, install a new camshaft and recheck end play. - If camshaft end play exceeds specification after camshaft installation, install a new cylinder head. Camshaft Surface Inspection Camshaft Surface Inspection 1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the contact area. Minor pitting is acceptable outside the contact area. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1684 Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. Measure each camshaft journal diameter in 2 directions. Camshaft Lobe Lift Camshaft Lobe Lift NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. Use the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure camshaft intake/exhaust lobe lift. - Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest Dial Indicator Gauge reading from the highest Dial Indicator Gauge reading to figure the camshaft lobe lift. Camshaft Runout Camshaft Runout Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1685 NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. NOTE: Camshaft journals must be within specifications before checking runout. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, measure the camshaft runout. - Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest Dial Indicator Gauge reading from the highest Dial Indicator Gauge reading. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1686 Camshaft: Removal and Replacement Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the timing drive components. For additional information, refer to Timing Drive Components See: Timing Components/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 3. NOTICE: Do not allow the camshaft to rotate from the neutral position while removing the camshaft phaser and sprocket or damage to the engine may occur. NOTE: Install a 3/8-in ratchet and extension into the D-slot on the rear of the LH intake camshaft to hold the camshaft in place for removal of the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH camshaft phaser and sprocket. - Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 4. NOTICE: Do not allow the camshaft to rotate from the neutral position while removing the camshaft phaser and sprocket or damage to the engine may occur. NOTE: Install a 3/8-in ratchet and extension into the D-slot on the rear of the RH intake camshaft to hold the camshaft in place for removal of the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH camshaft phaser and sprocket. - Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - Exploded View LH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1687 LH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshafts Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1688 Coolant Pump Belt and Pulley RH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring RH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshaft Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1689 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Camshafts - LH Camshafts - LH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1690 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1691 Removal 1. Remove the coolant pump belt. 2. Remove the timing drive components. For additional information, refer to Timing Drive Components See: Timing Components/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 3. NOTICE: Failure to use the correct special tools, assembled as shown in the illustration, will result in damage to the coolant pump pulley and/or special tools. Using the Water Pump Pulley Plate, Water Pump Shaft Protector and the Crankshaft Vibration Damper Remover, remove the coolant pump pulley. 4. NOTICE: Do not scratch the camshaft sealing surface while removing the camshaft oil seal. If scratched, camshaft oil seal leakage may occur. Using the Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the camshaft oil seal. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the camshaft oil seal retainer. - Discard the press-in-place gasket. 6. NOTICE: The camshafts must be in the neutral position before removing the bearing caps or damage to the engine may occur. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1692 Verify the LH camshafts are in the neutral position. 7. NOTICE: Do not allow the camshaft to rotate from the neutral position while removing the camshaft phaser and sprocket or damage to the engine may occur. NOTE: Install a 3/8-in ratchet and extension into the D-slot on the rear of the intake camshaft to hold the camshaft in place for removal of the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH camshaft phaser and sprocket. 8. NOTICE: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps must be assembled in their original positions. Some engines have factory markings on the camshaft bearing caps (as shown in illustration). Engines that do not have the factory markings must be marked for correct position and orientation prior to removal. Failure to install the camshaft bearing caps in their original positions may result in severe engine damage. If necessary, mark the camshaft bearing cap position and orientation as shown in the illustration. 9. NOTICE: After loosening all of the camshaft bearing cap bolts, remove the camshaft bearing thrust caps (1L and 5L) first, or damage to the thrust caps may occur. NOTE: Make sure the camshaft bearing caps are marked as instructed in the previous step. Loosen the bolts evenly in the sequence shown. 1. Remove the camshaft bearing thrust caps (1L and 5L). 2. Remove the remaining camshaft bearing caps. 3. Remove the camshafts from the cylinder head. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1693 Installation 1. Position the camshaft phaser and sprocket onto the intake camshaft. - Install the 3 bolts finger-tight. 2. Lubricate the LH camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts onto the cylinder head. - Align the LH camshafts as shown. 3. NOTICE: Cylinder head camshaft journal caps and cylinder heads are numbered to verify that they are assembled in their original positions. If not reassembled in their original positions, severe engine damage may occur. NOTICE: Do not install the camshaft journal thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps have been installed or damage to the thrust caps can occur. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the LH camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil and install the bearing caps. - Loosely install the bolts. 4. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the LH camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil and install the bearing thrust caps. - Loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1694 5. NOTE: Make sure to tighten the camshaft bearing cap bolts in sequence in 2 stages. Tighten the LH camshaft bearing cap bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages. - Stage 1: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Stage 2: Individually loosen and then tighten each camshaft bearing cap to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 6. NOTICE: Do not allow the camshaft to rotate from the neutral position while tightening the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts or damage to the engine may occur. NOTE: Install a 3/8-in ratchet and extension into the D-slot on the rear of the intake camshaft to hold the camshaft in place for tightening of the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts. Tighten the 3 LH camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 7. NOTE: Clean the sealing surfaces with metal surface prep before installing a new press-in-place gasket. Install the camshaft oil seal retainer and the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1695 8. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft oil seal with clean engine oil. Using the Camshaft Oil Seal Installer, Camshaft Oil Seal Protector and the Power Steering Pump Pulley Installer, install the camshaft oil seal. 9. NOTICE: Failure to use the correct special tools, assembled as shown in the illustration, will result in damage to the coolant pump pulley and/or special tools. Install the Camshaft Pulley Installer in the camshaft as shown in the illustration. - Adjust the collar on the Camshaft Pulley Installer screw to get the best thread engagement in the rear of the camshaft. 10. NOTICE: Failure to use the correct special tools, assembled as shown in the illustration, will result in damage to the coolant pump pulley and/or special tools. NOTE: Only the roller collared nut from the Power Steering Pump Pulley Installer (211-185) is used on Camshaft Pulley Installer (303-458). Position the coolant pump pulley over the previously installed Camshaft Pulley Installer and on the end of the camshaft. Install the Camshaft Pulley Installer, Power Steering Pump Pulley Installer and the Water Pump Pulley Spacer as shown in the illustration. Using the Camshaft Pulley Installer, Power Steering Pump Pulley Installer and the Water Pump Pulley Spacer, install a new service coolant pump pulley flush with the end of the camshaft. 11. Install the timing drive components. For additional information, refer to Timing Drive Components See: Timing Components/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 12. Install the coolant pump belt. Camshafts - RH Camshafts - RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1696 Removal 1. Remove the timing drive components. For additional information, refer to Timing Drive Components See: Timing Components/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. NOTICE: The camshafts must be in the neutral position before removing the bearing caps or damage to the engine may occur. Verify the RH camshafts are in the neutral position. 3. NOTICE: Do not allow the camshaft to rotate from the neutral position while removing the camshaft phaser and sprocket or damage to the engine may occur. NOTE: Install a 3/8-in ratchet and extension into the D-slot on the rear of the intake camshaft to hold the camshaft in place for removal of the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH camshaft phaser and sprocket. 4. NOTICE: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps must be assembled in their original positions. Some engines have factory markings on the camshaft bearing caps (as shown in illustration). Engines that do not have the factory markings must be marked for correct position and orientation prior to removal. Failure to install the camshaft bearing caps in their original positions may result in severe engine damage. If necessary, mark the camshaft bearing cap position and orientation as shown in the illustration. 5. NOTICE: After loosening all of the camshaft bearing cap bolts, remove the camshaft bearing thrust caps (5R and 1R) first, or damage to the thrust caps may occur. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1697 NOTE: Make sure the camshaft bearing caps are marked as instructed in the previous step. Loosen the bolts evenly in the sequence shown. 1. Remove the camshaft bearing thrust caps (5R and 1R). 2. Remove the remaining camshaft bearing caps. 3. Remove the camshafts from the cylinder head. Installation 1. Position the RH camshaft phaser and sprocket onto the intake camshaft. - Install the 3 bolts finger-tight. 2. Lubricate the RH camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts onto the cylinder head. - Align the RH camshafts as shown. 3. NOTICE: Cylinder head camshaft journal caps and cylinder heads are numbered to verify that they are assembled in their original positions. If not reassembled in their original positions, severe engine damage may occur. NOTICE: Do not install the camshaft journal thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps have been installed or damage to the thrust caps can occur. NOTE: Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the RH camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil. Install the camshaft bearing caps. Loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1698 4. NOTE: Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the RH camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil. Install the camshaft bearing thrust caps. - Loosely install the bolts. 5. NOTE: Make sure to tighten the camshaft bearing cap bolts in sequence in 2 stages. Tighten the RH camshaft bearing cap bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages. - Stage 1: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Stage 2: Individually loosen and then tighten each camshaft bearing cap to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 6. NOTICE: Do not allow the camshaft to rotate from the neutral position while tightening the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts or Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1699 damage to the engine may occur. NOTE: Install a 3/8-in ratchet and extension into the D-slot on the rear of the intake camshaft to hold the camshaft in place for tightening of the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts. Tighten the 3 RH camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 7. Install the timing drive components. For additional information, refer to Timing Drive Components See: Timing Components/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Procedures Valve Tappet Inspection Valve Tappet Inspection 1. Inspect the valve tappet for damage, especially in the indicated areas. If any damage is evident, inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage. Install new components as necessary. Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection 1. Inspect the hydraulic lash adjuster and roller follower for damage. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1704 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Removal and Replacement Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - Exploded View LH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring LH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshafts Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1705 Coolant Pump Belt and Pulley RH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1706 RH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshaft Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1707 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Removal and Installation 1. Remove the camshaft roller followers. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Roller Follower See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Roller Follower. 2. NOTE: Mark the positions of the hydraulic lash adjusters to make sure they are assembled in their original positions. Remove the hydraulic lash adjusters. 3. NOTE: Inspect the hydraulic lash adjusters for scoring marks and uneven wear in the bore. Install new lash adjusters if necessary. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the hydraulic lash adjusters with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Rocker Arm Assembly: Procedures Roller Follower Inspection 1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1712 Rocker Arm Assembly: Removal and Replacement Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - Exploded View LH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring LH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshafts Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1713 Coolant Pump Belt and Pulley RH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1714 RH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshaft Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1715 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Camshaft Roller Follower Camshaft Roller Follower Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH and RH valve covers. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover - LH See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Cover - LH and Valve Cover - RH See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Cover - RH. 3. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 4. Remove the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly away from the roller follower. 6. Using the Valve Spring Compressor, remove the roller followers. 7. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set TSB 10-19-1 10/11/10 3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/1/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List and production fix date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010. a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for normal diagnostics. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2. 2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs. Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 1724 101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs. Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set TSB 10-19-1 10/11/10 3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/1/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List and production fix date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010. a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for normal diagnostics. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2. 2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs. Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 1730 101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs. Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 1733 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 1736 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1737 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Overview The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT systems. - Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have four operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the Testing and Inspection section. For additional information, refer to the Engine System - General Information. Verification of incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine System - General Information. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP, throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1738 achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. VCT System Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1743 a Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1747 a Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1751 a Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1755 a Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1756 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft End Play NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. Install the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture. 2. Position the crankshaft to the rear of the cylinder block. 3. Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge. 4. Move the crankshaft to the front of the cylinder block. Note and record the crankshaft end play. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Block Heater 2.5L 3.0L Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 3. NOTICE: Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from rotating or hot components, or damage to the wiring can occur. Disconnect the block heater electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1760 4. Remove the block heater. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in) (2.5L). - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft) (3.0L). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Using the Crankshaft Vibration Damper Installer, install the crankshaft pulley. Install the bolt and washer. Tighten the bolt in 4 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to.................................................................... ...................................................................................................................120 Nm (89 lb-ft). Stage 2: Loosen.................................................................................................................................................. ..................................................one full turn. Stage 3: Tighten to........................................................ .................................................................................................................................50 Nm (37 lb-ft). Stage 4: Tighten an additional.............................................................................................................. ...................................................................90 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Pulley Crankshaft Pulley Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the accessory drive belt. 3. Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer. - Discard the crankshaft pulley bolt. 4. Using the 3 Jaw Puller, remove the crankshaft pulley. Installation 1. Lubricate the crankshaft front seal inner lip with clean engine oil. 2. NOTE: Clean the keyway and slot using metal surface prep before applying silicone gasket and sealant. NOTE: The crankshaft pulley must be installed and the bolt tightened within 4 minutes of applying the silicone gasket and sealant. Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the end of the keyway slot. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley > Page 1766 3. NOTE: Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surface with clean engine oil. Using the Crankshaft Vibration Damper Installer, install the crankshaft pulley. 4. Install the bolt and washer. Tighten the bolt in 4 stages: - Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Loosen one full turn. - Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). - Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees. 5. Install the accessory drive belt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley > Page 1767 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Exploded View - Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal Lower End Components - Exploded View Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal Flexplate and Rear Seal 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications a Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications a Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Rocker Arm Assembly: Procedures Roller Follower Inspection 1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1782 Rocker Arm Assembly: Removal and Replacement Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - Exploded View LH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring LH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshafts Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1783 Coolant Pump Belt and Pulley RH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1784 RH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshaft Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1785 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Camshaft Roller Follower Camshaft Roller Follower Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH and RH valve covers. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover - LH See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Cover LH and Valve Cover - RH See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Cover - RH. 3. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 4. Remove the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly away from the roller follower. 6. Using the Valve Spring Compressor, remove the roller followers. 7. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover - LH Valve Cover - LH LH Valve Cover (View 1 of 3) LH Valve Cover (View 2 of 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1790 LH Valve Cover (View 3 of 3) Removal NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine failure. 1. Remove the LH ignition coil-on-plugs. 2. Detach the upper radiator hose from the 2 retainers on the cooling fan shroud and position the hose aside. 3. Detach the 2 wiring retainers from the valve cover. 4. Detach the 2 wiring retainers from the valve cover stud bolts. 5. Disconnect the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1791 7. NOTE: Inspect the crankcase ventilation tube and valve cover sealing area. If either a new valve cover or crankcase ventilation tube is required, both components must be installed new. Remove the 8 bolts, 6 stud bolts and the valve cover. - Remove and discard the gasket. Installation 1. NOTE: If the valve cover is not secured within 4 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal surface prep. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a bead of silicone gasket and sealant in 2 places where the engine front cover meets the cylinder head. 2. Position the valve cover and install the bolts and stud bolts. - Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Connect the HO2S electrical connector. 4. Connect the VCT electrical connector. 5. Attach the 2 wiring retainers to the valve cover stud bolts. 6. Attach the 2 wiring retainers to the valve cover. 7. Attach the upper radiator hose to the 2 retainers on the cooling fan shroud. 8. Install the LH ignition coil-on-plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1792 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover - RH Valve Cover - RH RH Valve Cover (View 1 of 2) RH Valve Cover (View 2 of 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1793 Removal NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine failure. 1. Remove the RH ignition coil-on-plugs. 2. Detach the 3 main engine control wiring harness retainers from the valve cover stud bolts. 3. Detach the 3 main engine control wiring harness retainers from the valve cover. 4. Disconnect the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) electrical connector. 5. Detach the Crankshaft Position (CKP) wiring harness retainer from the stud. 6. Remove the 11 bolts, 3 stud bolts and the valve cover. - Remove and discard the gasket. Installation 1. NOTE: If the valve cover is not secured within 4 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal surface prep. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a bead of silicone gasket and sealant in 2 places where the engine front cover meets the cylinder head. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1794 2. Position the valve cover and install the 11 bolts and 3 stud bolts. - Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Attach the CKP wiring harness retainer on the stud. 4. Connect the VCT electrical connector. 5. Attach the 3 main engine control wiring harness retainers to the valve cover. 6. Attach the 3 main engine control wiring harness retainers to the valve cover stud bolts. 7. Install the RH ignition coil-on-plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Guide: Service and Repair Valve Guide Inner Diameter NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. NOTE: Valve guides tend to wear in an hourglass pattern. The ball gauge can be inserted into the combustion chamber side of the valve guide, if necessary. Use a ball gauge to determine the inside diameter of the valve guides in 2 directions at the top, middle and bottom of the valve guide. 2. Measure the ball gauge with a micrometer. 3. If the valve guide is not within specifications, install a new cylinder head assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements Valve Seat Inspection Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. NOTE: After grinding valves or valve seats, check valve clearance. 1. Check the valve head and seat. - Check valve angles. - Check margin width. - Be sure margin width is within specification. 2. Inspect for abnormalities on the valve face and seat. Install a new cylinder head assembly if abnormalities are found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements > Page 1802 Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Width Valve Seat Width NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. Measure the valve seat width. If necessary, grind the valve seat to specification. - Measure the intake valve seat width. - Measure the exhaust valve seat width. - Recheck the valve spring installed length after the seats have been ground, and shim the valve springs as necessary to achieve the correct installed spring length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements > Page 1803 Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Runout Valve Seat Runout NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. Use a valve seat runout gauge to check valve seat runout. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Valve Spring: Procedures Valve Spring Installed Length Valve Spring Installed Length NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. Measure the installed length of each valve spring. Valve Spring Free Length Valve Spring Free Length NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. Measure the free length of each valve spring. Valve Spring Squareness Valve Spring Squareness 1. Measure the out-of-square on each valve spring. - Turn the valve spring and observe the space between the top of the valve spring and the square. Valve Spring Strength Valve Spring Strength Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1808 NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. Use the Valve/Clutch Spring Pressure Gauge to check the valve spring for correct strength at the specified valve spring length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1809 Valve Spring: Removal and Replacement Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - Exploded View LH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring LH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshafts Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1810 Coolant Pump Belt and Pulley RH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1811 RH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshaft Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1812 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal Removal 1. Remove the camshaft roller followers. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Roller Follower See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Roller Follower. 2. NOTE: If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss of air pressure will allow the valve(s) to fall into the cylinder. A rubber band, tape or string wrapped around the end of the valve stem will prevent this from happening. Pressurize the cylinder using compressed air. 3. Using the Valve Spring Compressor, remove the key, retainer and the valve spring. 4. NOTE: Camshaft removed for clarity. Remove the valve seal. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1813 1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve guide with clean engine oil. Using the Valve Stem Oil Seal Installer, install the valve seal. 2. Using the Valve Spring Compressor, install the valve spring, retainer and key. 3. Install the camshaft roller followers. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Roller Follower See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Roller Follower. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem Diameter Valve Stem Diameter NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. 1. Measure the diameter of each intake and exhaust valve stem at the points shown. Verify the diameter is within specification. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1818 Valve: Service and Repair Valve Inspection Valve Inspection 1. Inspect the following valve areas: 1. The end of the stem for grooves or scoring. 2. The valve face and the edge for pits, grooves or scores. 3. The valve head for signs of burning, erosion, warpage and cracking. 4. The valve margin for wear. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1819 Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem To Valve Guide Clearance Valve Stem to Valve Guide Clearance NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification. NOTE: The valve stem diameter must be within specifications before checking valve stem-to-valve guide clearance. 1. NOTE: If necessary, use a magnetic base. Install a Valve Guide Clearance Gauge on the valve stem and install a Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture. Lower the valve until the clearance gauge contacts the upper surface of the valve guide. 2. Move the Valve Guide Clearance Gauge toward the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture and zero the Dial Indicator Gauge. Move the Valve Guide Clearance Gauge away from the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture and note the reading. The reading will be DOUBLE the valve stem-to-valve guide clearance. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams Drive Belt: Diagrams Accessory Drive Accessory Drive Belt Routing Accessory Drive Belt Coolant Pump Drive Belt Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter Accessory Drive Component Tests Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter NOTICE: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism may occur. Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley. To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft direction or at an angle to the straightedge. Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on an accessory pulley under certain conditions. A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start up and shut down or during very rapid engine acceleration and decelerations, such as: - Wide Open Throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back-out shifts on automatic transmissions. - WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions. These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur: - if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged. - the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked. - the A/C anti-slugging strategy executes after a long hot heat soak. - if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after several minutes) exceeds specifications. - if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory. - if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and rinsed with clean water. - if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt. - NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding. Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter > Page 1826 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation Accessory Drive Component Tests Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation NOTICE: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys. Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive belt. Incorrect Installation Correct Installation With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur. Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking condition exists, proceed with the following: - Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises. - With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary. - Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. - Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Drive Belt: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1829 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Accessory Drive Belt Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. NOTE: Refer to the illustration for correct drive belt routing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation Drive Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Automatic tensioners are calibrated to provide the correct amount of tension to the belt for a given accessory drive system. Unless a spring or damping band within the tensioner assembly breaks, or some other mechanical part of the tensioner fails, there is no need to check the tensioner for correct tension. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Belt Tensioner - Mechanical Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Belt Tensioner - Mechanical Accessory Drive Component Tests Belt Tensioner - Mechanical The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1. With the engine off, check routing of the accessory drive belt. Refer to the illustrations under Accessory Drive See: Description and Operation in the Description and Operation. 2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to release. Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, release the tension on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt from the tensioner. Carry out the following tests: - Using the release tool, move the tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make sure that there is tension on the tensioner spring. - Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition. - Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination and repair any leaks. 3. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the criteria in the previous step, install a new tensioner. If the accessory drive belt tensioner meets the criteria in the previous step, proceed to testing the tensioner dynamically. 4. If the tensioner is saturated with oil and grease internally, install a new tensioner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Belt Tensioner - Mechanical > Page 1835 Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Belt Tensioner - Dynamics Accessory Drive Component Tests Belt Tensioner - Dynamics The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory drive tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory drive belt tensioner movement is excessive without A/C clutch cycling or engine acceleration, check belt rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can cause excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a new belt. If excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory drive belt tensioner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Belt Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Belt Coolant Pump Belt Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. 3. Position the Stretchy Belt Remover under the coolant pump belt as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Belt > Page 1838 4. NOTE: Feed the Stretchy Belt Remover on to the camshaft coolant pump pulley approximately 90 degrees. With the help of an assistant, turn the crankshaft clockwise and feed the Stretchy Belt Remover evenly on the camshaft coolant pump pulley as shown. 5. Remove the coolant pump belt. - Fold the Stretchy Belt Remover over the top of the coolant pump belt. - In one quick motion, pull the Stretchy Belt Remover up and toward the RH front of the vehicle removing the coolant pump belt. Installation 1. Install the coolant pump belt on the coolant pump pulley and position it on the camshaft pulley. 2. NOTICE: Do not use any screwdrivers, pliers or other metal objects that could cause damage to the belt or camshaft pulley while installing the belt. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to seat the coolant pump belt on the camshaft pulley. 3. Install the RH lower splash shield, pin-type retainer and 5 bolts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Belt > Page 1839 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Belt > Page 1840 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. Remove the 3 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. NOTE: Refer to the illustration for correct drive belt routing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Mount: Procedures Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount Neutralizing NOTE: Refer to the appropriate system and procedure for special instructions on loosening and tightening mount fasteners. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. NOTICE: Do not twist or strain the powertrain/drivetrain mounts or damage to the mounts may occur. Start the vehicle and move it in forward 0.6-1.2 m (2-4 ft). Then move the vehicle in reverse the same distance. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Tighten the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Test the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1845 Engine Mount: Removal and Replacement Engine Support Insulators Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Lower Intake Manifold See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Lower Intake Manifold. 2. Remove the engine support insulator bracket bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1846 - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 3. Install the Engine Support Bar, Universal Adapter Brackets and a suitable piece of chain in the following sequence. 1. Position the 2 Universal Adapter Brackets on top of the cylinder block. 2. Install 2 M8 x 1.25 x 36 mm (1.41 in) bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Use a suitable piece of chain. 4. Fasten the chain to the 2 Universal Adapter Brackets with a suitable nut, washer and bolt. 4. Using the Engine Support Bar, lift the engine 12 mm (0.47 in). 5. Remove the nut and ground wire eyelet from the engine support insulator bracket stud. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. Remove the 3 nuts and the engine support insulator bracket. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 7. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine support insulator. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil pressure (Minimum at 1,500 rpm with engine warmed up after 10 minutes of idling).............................................................................172 kPa (25 psi) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1854 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Oil Pressure Test 1. Disconnect and remove the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch from the engine. 2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port. 3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached. 4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading. 5. The oil pressure should be within specifications; for additional information, refer to the specification chart in the appropriate engine system. 6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources: - Insufficient oil - Oil leakage - Worn or damaged oil pump - Oil pump screen cover and tube - Excessive main bearing clearance - Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance - Chain tensioner leak Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components Exploded View Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Oil Pump Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1859 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1860 Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Oil Level Indicator and Tube Oil Level Indicator and Tube Oil Level Indicator and Tube Upper Radiator Support Brackets Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1861 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe and the ACL. 2. Detach the upper radiator hose from the 2 retaining clips on the cooling fan shroud. - Position the hose aside. 3. Remove the 4 upper radiator support bracket bolts. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Remove the oil level indicator. 5. Remove the 3 bolts and position aside the heat shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 6. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the oil level indicator tube. 7. Remove the stud bolt and then remove the oil level indicator tube by guiding it between the radiator support and the cooling fan. - Remove and discard the O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. NOTE: Install a new O-ring seal and lubricate with clean engine oil. NOTE: Installation of the oil level indicator may require the assistance of a second technician to align the tube with the orifice. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter ............................................................................................................................................ ..................................................... 5.7 Liters (6.0 Qt) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1866 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Ford Part Name ....................................................................................................................................... Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Ford Part Number ................................................................... ...................................................................................................................... XO-5W20-QSP Ford Specification ......................................................................................................................................... WSS-M2C930-A with API Certification Mark Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Tools and Equipment Oil Cooler: Tools and Equipment 1/2" Oil Cooler Line Rem. AST tool# 8023 Used to disconnect 1/2" transmission oil cooler lines. - Used for R and R of Transmission Oil Cooler Lines - Orange-Anodized Aluminum Construction - Quick line removal - Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set - Fits 2009 Escape with 6F Trans - Fits Ford Edge Contact AST for pricing. Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943 This Tool is also available in the following kits: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Page 1870 8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter Removal 1. Remove the camshaft phaser and sprocket. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket. 2. NOTE: RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) system oil filter shown, LH similar. Remove and discard the VCT system oil filter from the camshaft. Installation 1. NOTE: RH VCT system oil filter shown, LH similar. Install the new VCT system oil filter in the camshaft. 2. Install the camshaft phaser and sprocket. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Install the 2 oil pan-to-transaxle bolts. Tighten to................................................................................. .......................................................................................................................40 Nm (30 lb-ft) Tighten the oil pan-to-engine bolts in the sequence shown to........................................................................................................................25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Tighten the 4 M6 oil pan baffle nuts in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to................................................... .......................................................................................................................................5 Nm (44 lb-in). Stage 2: Tighten an additional.................................................................................................... .............................................................................45 degrees. Then install and tighten the 4 M8 oil pan baffle nuts in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to......................... ............................................................................................................................................................. 15 Nm (133 lb-in). Stage 2: Tighten an additional................................................................................ .................................................................................................45 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Oil Pump Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1879 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1880 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Oil Pan Removal NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. 3. Drain the engine oil and install the drain plug. - Tighten to 26 Nm (19 lb-ft). 4. Remove and discard the oil filter. 5. Remove the access cover. 6. Remove the 2 oil pan-to-transaxle bolts. 7. Remove the 15 bolts and the oil pan. - Remove and discard the oil pan gasket. Installation 1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of the oil pan gasket. - Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface prep and install a new oil pan gasket. 2. NOTE: The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of sealant application. Apply a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter dot of silicone sealant to the areas indicated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1881 3. Position the oil pan and loosely install the bolts. 4. Install the 2 oil pan-to-transaxle bolts. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Tighten the oil pan-to-engine bolts in the sequence shown to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. Install the access cover. 7. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing. Install a new oil filter. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees. 8. Install the exhaust Y-pipe. 9. Fill the engine with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1882 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Oil Pump Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1883 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1884 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Baffle Oil Pan Baffle Removal and Installation NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the oil pump screen and pickup tube. For additional information, refer to Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View See: Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube See: Oil Pick Up/Strainer/Service and Repair/Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube. 3. Remove the 8 nuts and the oil pan baffle in the following sequence. 1. To install, tighten the 4 M6 oil pan baffle nuts in 2 stages. - Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten an additional 45 degrees. 2. Then install and tighten the 4 M8 oil pan baffle nuts in 2 stages. - Stage 1: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten an additional 45 degrees. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1888 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1889 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing. Remove the engine oil filter. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees. 3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the EOP switch. - To install, tighten to 14 Nm (124 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Oil Pump Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1894 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1895 Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles NOTE: Automatic transmission shown, manual transmission similar. 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1896 Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Removal NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the oil pan. For additional information, refer to Engine Lubrication Components Exploded View See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View and Oil Pan See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Oil Pan. 3. Remove the bolts the oil pump screen and pickup tube. - Remove and discard the O-ring seal. Installation 1. Install a new O-ring seal on the oil pump screen and pickup tube. - Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 2. Install the oil pump screen and pickup tube. 1. Position the oil pump screen and pickup tube. 2. Install the bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Install the oil pan. For additional information, refer to Oil Pan See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Oil Pan. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1897 Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Oil Pump Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1898 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil pressure (Minimum at 1,500 rpm with engine warmed up after 10 minutes of idling).............................................................................172 kPa (25 psi) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1903 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Oil Pressure Test 1. Disconnect and remove the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch from the engine. 2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port. 3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached. 4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading. 5. The oil pressure should be within specifications; for additional information, refer to the specification chart in the appropriate engine system. 6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources: - Insufficient oil - Oil leakage - Worn or damaged oil pump - Oil pump screen cover and tube - Excessive main bearing clearance - Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance - Chain tensioner leak Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Intake Manifold Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Manifold Position the lower intake manifold and install the 8 bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown to............. .....................................................................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Position the upper intake manifold and install the 7 bolts. Tighten the bolts in 2 stages in the sequence shown. Stage 1: Tighten to.................................................................................................. ......................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Stage 2: Tighten an additio nal......................................................................................................................................................... ........................45 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Intake Manifold > Page 1911 Intake Manifold: Specifications Throttle Body To install, tighten to.............................................................................................................................. .........................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Upper Intake Manifold Upper Intake Manifold Upper Intake Manifold (View 1 of 2) Upper Intake Manifold (View 2 of 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1914 Removal 1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe and the ACL. 2. Remove the EGR tube fitting from the EGR valve. 3. Disconnect the electronic throttle control electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the EGR regulator electrical connector and detach the wiring retainer. 6. Disconnect the EVAP tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling and the brake booster vacuum tube from the upper intake manifold. 7. Detach the engine control wiring harness retainer from the upper intake manifold. 8. Disconnect the PCV tube from the upper intake manifold. 9. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) electrical connector and detach the wiring retainer. 10. Remove the 2 upper intake manifold support bracket bolts from the upper intake manifold. 11. Remove the 7 bolts and the upper intake manifold. - Remove and discard the gaskets. Installation 1. NOTICE: If the engine is repaired or replaced because of upper engine failure, typically including valve or piston damage, check the intake manifold for metal debris. If metal debris is found, install a new intake manifold. Failure to follow these instructions can result in engine damage. NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install new gaskets. Position the upper intake manifold and install the 7 bolts. - Tighten the bolts in 2 stages in the sequence shown. Stage 1: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten an additional 45 degrees. 2. Install the 2 upper intake manifold support bracket bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Connect the MAP electrical connector and attach the wiring retainer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1915 4. Connect the PCV tube to the upper intake manifold. 5. Attach the engine control wiring harness retainer to the upper intake manifold. 6. Connect the EVAP tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling and the brake booster vacuum tube to the upper intake manifold. 7. Connect the EGR regulator electrical connector and attach the wiring retainer. 8. Connect the EVAP canister purge valve electrical connector. 9. Connect the electronic throttle control electrical connector. 10. Install the EGR tube fitting to the EGR valve. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 11. Install the ACL outlet pipe and the ACL. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1916 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Lower Intake Manifold Lower Intake Manifold Removal WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the fuel rail. 4. Remove the 8 lower intake manifold bolts and the lower intake manifold. - Remove and discard the gaskets. Installation 1. NOTICE: If the engine is repaired or replaced because of upper engine failure, typically including valve or piston damage, check the intake manifold for metal debris. If metal debris is found, install a new intake manifold. Failure to follow these instructions can result in engine damage. NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install new gaskets. Position the lower intake manifold and install the 8 bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1917 - Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Install the fuel rail. 3. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Seal Crankshaft Rear Seal Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the flexplate. For additional information, refer to Flexplate See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair. 3. Using the Slide Hammer and the Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the crankshaft rear oil seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface prep. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal > Page 1923 NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the seal lip and seal bore before installing the seal. Using the Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal Installer Bolts and the Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal Installer, install the crankshaft rear oil seal. 2. Install the flexplate. For additional information, refer to Flexplate See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal > Page 1924 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Exploded View - Flexplate and Rear Seal Lower End Components - Exploded View Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal Flexplate and Rear Seal 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Front Seal Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Front Seal Crankshaft Front Seal Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Crankshaft Pulley. 3. Using the Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface prep. Apply clean engine oil to the seal lip and seal bore before installing the seal. 2. Using the Front Cover Oil Seal Installer and the Crankshaft Vibration Damper Installer, install a new crankshaft front seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Front Seal > Page 1929 3. Install the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Crankshaft Pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Front Seal > Page 1930 Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Exploded View - Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal Lower End Components - Exploded View Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal Flexplate and Rear Seal 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal Removal 1. Remove the camshaft roller followers. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Roller Follower See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Roller Follower. 2. NOTE: If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss of air pressure will allow the valve(s) to fall into the cylinder. A rubber band, tape or string wrapped around the end of the valve stem will prevent this from happening. Pressurize the cylinder using compressed air. 3. Using the Valve Spring Compressor, remove the key, retainer and the valve spring. 4. NOTE: Camshaft removed for clarity. Remove the valve seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve guide with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal > Page 1935 Using the Valve Stem Oil Seal Installer, install the valve seal. 2. Using the Valve Spring Compressor, install the valve spring, retainer and key. 3. Install the camshaft roller followers. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Roller Follower See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Roller Follower. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal > Page 1936 Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - Exploded View LH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring LH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshafts Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal > Page 1937 Coolant Pump Belt and Pulley RH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal > Page 1938 RH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshaft Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal > Page 1939 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1944 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1945 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing. Remove the engine oil filter. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees. 3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the EOP switch. - To install, tighten to 14 Nm (124 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Tighten the 3 LH camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts to..............................................................................................................................18 Nm (159 lb-in) Tighten the 3 RH camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts to.............................................................................................................................18 Nm (159 lb-in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Diagrams Timing Chain: Diagrams NOTICE: Failure to verify correct timing drive component alignment will result in severe engine damage. Install the crankshaft sprocket with the timing mark facing out. The timing mark on the LH and RH timing chains will be aligned to this mark during assembly. If timing marks in the timing chains are not evident, use a permanent-type marker to mark the crankshaft and camshaft timing marks on the LH and RH timing chains. 1. Mark any link to use as the crankshaft timing mark. 2. Starting with the crankshaft timing mark, count 29 links and mark the link. 3. Continue counting to link 42 and mark the link. Position the LH timing chain and guide and install the bolts. - Align the marks on the timing chain with the marks on the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets. Install the crankshaft pulley bolt and rotate the crankshaft clockwise 120 degrees until the crankshaft keyway is in the 3 o'clock position. Verify that the RH camshafts are correctly positioned. Install the RH timing chain and chain guide and install the bolts. - Align the marks on the timing chain with the marks on the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1956 Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise 120 degrees to TDC. NOTICE: Failure to verify correct timing drive component alignment will result in severe engine damage. Verify the timing with the following steps. 1. There should be 12 chain links between the camshaft timing marks. 2. There should be 27 chain links between the camshaft and the crankshaft timing marks. 3. There should be 30 chain links between the camshaft and the crankshaft timing marks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Tighten to.............................................................................................................................................. .........................................................25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1960 Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Timing Drive Components Removal NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine failure. NOTICE: Failure to verify correct timing drive component alignment will result in severe engine damage. 1. Remove the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 3. NOTE: This pulse wheel is used in several different engines. Install the pulse wheel with the keyway in the slot stamped "30RFF" (orange in color). Remove the ignition pulse wheel. 4. Install the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer. 5. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to position the crankshaft keyway in the 11 o'clock position and position the camshafts in the correct position. This will position the No. 1 cylinder at Top Dead Center (TDC). Verify that the camshafts are correctly located. If not, rotate the crankshaft one additional turn and recheck. 6. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise 120 degrees to the 3 o'clock position to position the RH camshafts in the neutral position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1961 7. Verify that the RH camshafts are in the neutral position. 8. Remove the RH timing chain tensioner arm. 1. Remove the 2 bolts. 2. Remove the tensioner. 3. Remove the tensioner arm. 9. Remove the 2 bolts and the RH timing chain guide. - Remove the RH timing chain from the engine. 10. Rotate the crankcase clockwise 600 degrees (one and two-third turns) to position the crankcase keyway in the 11 o'clock position. This will position the LH camshafts in the neutral position. 11. Verify the LH camshafts are in the neutral position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1962 12. Remove the LH timing chain and tensioner arm. 1. Remove the 2 bolts. 2. Remove the tensioner. 3. Remove the tensioner arm. 13. Remove the 2 bolts and the LH timing chain guide. - Remove the LH timing chain from the engine. 14. Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt and the crankshaft sprocket. Installation 1. NOTICE: Failure to verify correct timing drive component alignment will result in severe engine damage. Install the crankshaft sprocket with the timing mark facing out. The timing mark on the LH and RH timing chains will be aligned to this mark during assembly. 2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Position the chain tensioner in a soft-jawed vise. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1963 3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Hold the chain tensioner ratchet lock mechanism away from the ratchet stem with a small pick. 4. NOTICE: During tensioner compression, do not release the ratchet stem until the tensioner piston is fully bottomed in its bore or damage to the ratchet stem will result. Slowly compress the timing chain tensioner. 5. Retain the tensioner piston with a 1.5 mm (0.06 in) diameter wire or paper clip. 6. If timing marks in the timing chains are not evident, use a permanent-type marker to mark the crankshaft and camshaft timing marks on the LH and RH timing chains. 1. Mark any link to use as the crankshaft timing mark. 2. Starting with the crankshaft timing mark, count 29 links and mark the link. 3. Continue counting to link 42 and mark the link. 7. Position the LH timing chain and guide and install the bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Align the marks on the timing chain with the marks on the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1964 8. Install the LH timing chain tensioner arm and the LH timing chain tensioner. 1. Install the tensioner arm. 2. Position the tensioner. 3. Install the bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 9. Install the crankshaft pulley bolt and rotate the crankshaft clockwise 120 degrees until the crankshaft keyway is in the 3 o'clock position. 10. Verify that the RH camshafts are correctly positioned. 11. Install the RH timing chain and chain guide and install the bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Align the marks on the timing chain with the marks on the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets. 12. Install the RH timing chain tensioner and tensioner arm. 1. Install the tensioner arm. 2. Position the tensioner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1965 3. Install the bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 13. Remove the LH and RH timing chain tensioner piston retaining wires. 14. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise 120 degrees to TDC. 15. NOTICE: Failure to verify correct timing drive component alignment will result in severe engine damage. Verify the timing with the following steps. 1. There should be 12 chain links between the camshaft timing marks. 2. There should be 27 chain links between the camshaft and the crankshaft timing marks. 3. There should be 30 chain links between the camshaft and the crankshaft timing marks. 16. Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer. 17. NOTE: This pulse wheel is used in several different engines. Install the pulse wheel with the keyway in the slot stamped "30RFF" only (orange in color). Install the ignition pulse wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1966 18. Install the LH and RH spark plugs. 19. Install the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Position the front cover and install the bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown.............. ....................................................................................................................................................to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1970 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Engine Front Cover Engine Front Cover (View 1 of 3) Engine Front Cover (View 2 of 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1971 Engine Front Cover (View 3 of 3) Removal NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the fuel system pressure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1972 3. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 4. Remove the crankshaft front seal. For additional information, refer to Lower End Components Exploded View See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Lower End Components - Exploded View and Crankshaft Front Seal See: Seals and Gaskets/Front Crankshaft Seal/Service and Repair/Crankshaft Front Seal. 5. Remove the generator bolt and the 2 nuts. 6. Remove the stud and position the generator away from the engine. 7. Remove the 3 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner. 8. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the engine front cover stud bolt. 9. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the 2 Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connectors and detach the wiring harness retainer from the engine front cover stud bolt. 11. Remove the LH and RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoids. 12. Remove the engine support insulator. For additional information, refer to Engine Support Insulators See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Engine Mount/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 13. Remove the 2 oil pan-to-front cover bolts. 14. Remove the 14 bolts, 2 stud bolts and the engine front cover. - Remove and discard the gaskets. Installation 1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths. NOTICE: Do not damage the oil pan gasket while cleaning the sealant from the lower cylinder block-to-oil pan joint. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of sealant. - Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface prep and install new gaskets. 2. NOTE: The engine front cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of applying sealant. Apply a 6 mm (0.23 in) diameter dot of silicone gasket and sealer to the cylinder block, lower cylinder block, cylinder head and oil pan mating surfaces. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1973 3. Position the engine front cover and install the bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Install the 2 oil pan-to-front cover bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the engine oil. - Install the plug and tighten to 26 Nm (19 lb-ft). 6. Install the engine support insulator. For additional information, refer to Engine Support Insulators See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Engine Mount/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 7. Install the LH and RH VCT oil control solenoids. 8. Connect the 2 CMP sensor electrical connectors and attach the wiring harness retainer to the engine front cover stud bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1974 9. Connect the CKP electrical connector. 10. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the engine front cover stud bolt. 11. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the 3 bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 12. Position the generator and install the stud. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 13. Install the generator bolt and 2 nuts. - Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 14. Install the crankshaft front seal. For additional information, refer to Lower End Components Exploded View See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Lower End Components - Exploded View and Crankshaft Front Seal See: Seals and Gaskets/Front Crankshaft Seal/Service and Repair/Crankshaft Front Seal. 15. Fill the engine with clean engine oil. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set TSB 10-19-1 10/11/10 3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/1/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List and production fix date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010. a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for normal diagnostics. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2. 2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs. Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 1984 101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs. Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set TSB 10-19-1 10/11/10 3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/1/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List and production fix date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010. a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for normal diagnostics. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2. 2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs. Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 1990 101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs. Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 1993 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 1996 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1997 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Overview The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT systems. - Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have four operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the Testing and Inspection section. For additional information, refer to the Engine System - General Information. Verification of incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine System - General Information. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP, throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1998 achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. VCT System Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Variable Valve Timing Filter: Service and Repair Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter Removal 1. Remove the camshaft phaser and sprocket. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket. 2. NOTE: RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) system oil filter shown, LH similar. Remove and discard the VCT system oil filter from the camshaft. Installation 1. NOTE: RH VCT system oil filter shown, LH similar. Install the new VCT system oil filter in the camshaft. 2. Install the camshaft phaser and sprocket. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH or RH valve cover. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)............................................................................................................... .........................................................379 kPa (55 psi) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2009 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Pressure Test WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L engines do not have a Schrader valve. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Vehicles with 2.5L engine 3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine 5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2010 6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve. Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine 7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube. All vehicles 9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system pressure. Install the FP fuse. 10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool. Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional information, refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Measured/PID Values Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................ 689.5 RPM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose TSB 11-3-5 03/15/11 3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner housing. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-12. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose TSB 11-3-5 03/15/11 3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner housing. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-12. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Intake Air System Components - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Firing Order.......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 2039 Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification Engine Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Spark plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.15-1.25 mm (0.045-0.048 in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 2044 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications Spark plugs........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................15 Nm (133 lb-in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2045 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ ....................................................................CGSF-22F Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2046 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. - Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. - Install a new spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. - Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. - Correct the oil leak concern. - Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. - Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2047 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. - Install new spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2050 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2051 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs Spark Plugs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug. 2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 3. Inspect the spark plugs. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the gap as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2052 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2053 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2054 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition RH Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2055 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2059 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Using a new gasket, install the coolant pump and the 3 bolts. Tighten to............................................ ........................................................................................................................................................15 Nm (133 lb-in). Install the 5 coolant pump housing bolts. Tighten to............................................................................ ..........................................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Coolant Pump - 3.0L (4V) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the coolant pump belt. 6. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump. - Remove and discard the gasket. Installation 1. Using a new gasket, install the coolant pump and the 3 bolts. - Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 2. Install the coolant pump belt. 3. Connect the lower radiator hose to the thermostat housing. 4. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 5. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump > Page 2065 Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Housing Coolant Pump Housing - 3.0L (4V) Coolant Hoses Coolant Pump Housing Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump > Page 2066 Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on the hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing. 5. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 6. Disconnect both heater hoses from the coolant pump housing. 7. Remove the 3 bolts, 2 nuts and the coolant pump housing. - Remove and discard the O-ring seals and gasket. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals and gasket. 9. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump > Page 2067 System/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. Remove the LH lower engine splash shield. 4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose. 5. Release the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose. 6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly. 9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other detergents. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2072 - Fill the engine cooling system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity Coolant ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................. 9.5 Quarts ( 9.0 Liters ) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2077 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. VC-7-B Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................ ................................................ WSS-M97B51-A1 NOTE: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Coolant Inlet Pipe - 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on the hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. 3. Remove the Throttle Body (TB). 4. Remove the 2 coolant inlet pipe housing bolts. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the coolant inlet pipe from the coolant inlet pipe hose. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 6. Remove and inspect the O-ring seal, install new seal if necessary. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine coolant. 8. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Degas Bottle Removal and Installation 1. WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap when the engine is operating or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. Release the pressure in the cooling system by slowly turning the pressure relief cap one half turn counterclockwise. When the pressure is released, remove the pressure relief cap. 2. Using hose clamp pliers, clamp the degas bottle-to-radiator hose. 3. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the coolant from the degas bottle. 4. Disconnect the radiator-to-degas bottle hose from the degas bottle. 5. Remove the 2 degas bottle nuts. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 6. Lift the degas bottle up and disconnect the degas bottle-to-radiator hose. - Remove the degas bottle. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Fill the degas bottle. Refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair for the recommended coolant mixture and fill level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 > Page 2089 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 > Page 2090 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2093 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2094 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2095 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2096 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2097 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2098 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2099 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2100 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2101 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2102 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2103 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2104 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2105 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2106 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2107 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2108 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2109 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2110 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2111 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2112 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2113 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fan Control The PCM monitors certain parameters (such as engine coolant temperature, vehicle speed, A/C on/off status, A/C pressure) to determine engine cooling fan needs. For variable speed electric fan(s): The PCM controls the fan speed and operation using a duty cycle output on the fan control variable (FCV) circuit. The fan controller (located at or integral to the engine cooling fan assembly) receives the FCV command and operates the cooling fan at the speed requested (by varying the power applied to the fan motor). FCV Duty Cycle Output From PCM (Negative Duty Cycle) For relay controlled fans: The PCM controls the fan operation through the fan control (FC), (single speed fan applications), low fan control (LFC), medium fan control (MFC), and high fan control (HFC) outputs. Some applications will have the xFC circuit wired to 2 separate relays. For 3-speed fans, although the PCM output circuits are called low, medium, and high fan control cooling fan speed is controlled by a combination of these outputs. Refer to the following table. 2.0L Focus (with A/C): PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds 2.5L Escape: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2114 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2.5L vehicles only 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2115 All vehicles 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the 2 front impact severity sensors. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts. Loosen the nut, remove the 2 bolts and position aside the hood latch. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Remove the 2 wiring harness retainers from the radiator support. 9. Remove the center support bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2.5L vehicles only 10. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector. 11. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose from the radiator and position it aside. All vehicles 12. Disconnect the 2 cooling fan electrical connectors and wire harness retainers. 13. Remove the 2 cooling fan bolts and the cooling fan motor and shroud. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 2.5L vehicles only 15. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 2120 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 2121 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2124 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2125 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2126 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2127 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2128 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan clutch. For additional information on the cooling fan clutch, refer to the Cooling Fan Clutch. Cooling Fan Clutch with Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) Cooling Fan Clutch with FSS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation Fan Clutch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Cooling Fan Clutch The cooling fan clutch is an electrically actuated viscous clutch that consists of three main elements: - a working chamber - a reservoir chamber - a cooling fan clutch actuator valve and a fan speed sensor (FSS) The cooling fan clutch actuator valve controls the fluid flow from the reservoir into the working chamber. Once viscous fluid is in the working chamber, shearing of the fluid results in fan rotation. The cooling fan clutch actuator valve is activated with a pulse width modulated (PWM) output signal from the PCM. By opening and closing the fluid port valve, the PCM can control the cooling fan clutch speed. The cooling fan clutch speed is measured by a Hall-effect sensor and is monitored by the PCM during closed loop operation. The PCM optimizes fan speed based on engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), transmission fluid temperature (TFT), intake air temperature (IAT), or air conditioning requirements. When an increased demand for fan speed is requested for vehicle cooling, the PCM monitors the fan speed through the Hall-effect sensor. If a fan speed increase is required, the PCM outputs the PWM signal to the fluid port, providing the required fan speed increase. Cooling Fan Clutch with Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) Cooling Fan Clutch with Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2135 Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005 Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan. 2009 Suggested user price: $41.20 Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2140 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2144 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2145 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. Typical CHT Sensor Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2146 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced. 1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair Fan Shroud: Service and Repair Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2.5L vehicles only 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2150 All vehicles 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the 2 front impact severity sensors. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts. Loosen the nut, remove the 2 bolts and position aside the hood latch. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Remove the 2 wiring harness retainers from the radiator support. 9. Remove the center support bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2.5L vehicles only 10. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector. 11. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose from the radiator and position it aside. All vehicles 12. Disconnect the 2 cooling fan electrical connectors and wire harness retainers. 13. Remove the 2 cooling fan bolts and the cooling fan motor and shroud. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 2.5L vehicles only 15. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core 1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the Plugged Heater Core component test before the heater core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as follows: Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core. 2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the heater hose connection and damage the heater core. Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 2155 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Plugged Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core - Plugged 1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the heater. 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and outlet hoses to see if they are hot. 4. If the outlet only is not hot: - the heater core may have an air pocket. - the heater core may be plugged. 5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 2156 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Pressure Test Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test. 1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing. Drain the coolant from the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps. 5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the vehicle. 9. Carry out the Bench Test. See: Heater Core - Bench Test Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 2157 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Bench Test Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2158 Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core Removal and Installation NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. NOTE: Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle. 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the dash panel seal. 3. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the heater core. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator: Service and Repair Radiator - 3.0L (4V) Radiator Hoses Radiator Removal and Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2162 1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. 3. Remove the cooling fan motor and shroud. For additional information, refer to Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud See: Radiator Cooling Fan/Radiator Cooling Fan Motor/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect the radiator-to-degas bottle hose and upper radiator hose from the radiator. 5. Disconnect the degas bottle-to-radiator hose from the radiator. 6. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 7. Remove the 2 A/C condenser-to-radiator bolts and position aside the A/C condenser from the radiator. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 8. Remove the radiator. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 10. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 2168 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 2169 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2172 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2173 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2174 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2175 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2176 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan clutch. For additional information on the cooling fan clutch, refer to the Cooling Fan Clutch. Cooling Fan Clutch with Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) Cooling Fan Clutch with FSS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2185 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2189 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2190 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. Typical CHT Sensor Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2191 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced. 1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat Opening Temperature Thermostat fully open (2.5L)................................................................................................................. ............................................................106°C (223°F) Thermostat fully open (3.0L 4V)....................... ...............................................................................................................................................98.9°C (210°F) Thermostat starts to open (2.5L).......................................................................................................... ................................................................90°C (194°F) Thermostat starts to open (3.0L 4V)............... .................................................................................................................................84°c-88°C (183°F-190°F) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2195 Thermostat: Testing and Inspection Engine Cooling Component Tests Thermostat A new thermostat should be installed only after the following tests and checks have been carried out: - Pinpoint Test A, B or C - Thermostat Visual Inspection Thermostat Visual Inspection 1. Remove the thermostat. 2. Examine the thermostat for signs of damage including: - Valve not fully seated (light visible through the valve) - Foreign material lodged in the main valve - Bent or broken frame or flange - Bent or broken spring - Bent or broken valve or valve stem - Wax leaking from wax reservoir or a bulge in the reservoir - Any other damage or distortion 3. NOTE: If no damage is found during the inspection, do not attempt to open the thermostat using hot water or other heat sources. This method is not an accurate means to test the function of the thermostat and may damage the thermostat. If damage is found during the inspection, remove any foreign material or broken pieces and install a new thermostat. 4. If no damage is found during the inspection, continue troubleshooting the system concern. Go to the Symptom Chart for further instructions. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2196 Thermostat: Service and Repair Thermostat - 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 4. NOTE: To install, lubricate the thermostat housing O-ring seal with clean engine coolant. Remove the 2 bolts, thermostat housing cover, O-ring seal and thermostat. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Clean and inspect the O-ring seal. Install a new seal if necessary. 6. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Using a new gasket, install the coolant pump and the 3 bolts. Tighten to............................................ ........................................................................................................................................................15 Nm (133 lb-in). Install the 5 coolant pump housing bolts. Tighten to............................................................................ ..........................................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Coolant Pump - 3.0L (4V) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. 3. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the coolant pump belt. 6. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump. - Remove and discard the gasket. Installation 1. Using a new gasket, install the coolant pump and the 3 bolts. - Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 2. Install the coolant pump belt. 3. Connect the lower radiator hose to the thermostat housing. 4. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 5. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump > Page 2202 Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Housing Coolant Pump Housing - 3.0L (4V) Coolant Hoses Coolant Pump Housing Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump > Page 2203 Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on the hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. 3. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing. 5. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 6. Disconnect both heater hoses from the coolant pump housing. 7. Remove the 3 bolts, 2 nuts and the coolant pump housing. - Remove and discard the O-ring seals and gasket. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals and gasket. 9. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalyst and Exhaust Systems Overview The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air pollutants of CO, NOx, and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled. The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the powertrain control module (PCM). For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. For most vehicles, only two HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the ones after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some partial zero emission vehicles (PZEVs) use three HO2Ss. The stream 1 sensor (HO2S11) located before the catalyst is used for primary fuel control, the stream 2 sensor (HO2S12) is used to monitor the light-off catalyst, and the stream 3 sensor (HO2S13) located after the catalyst is used for long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (fore aft oxygen sensor control). V-Engines V-Engines In-Line Engines In-Line Engines Catalytic Converter A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they are used up as much as possible. Light Off Catalyst As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C (475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalytic converter (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the exhaust manifold it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion efficiency for that Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2208 catalyst. Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Conversion Efficiency A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency. TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart Exhaust System The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and NOx in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into the muffler. Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe. On some PZEV, there is a total of three HO2Ss in the exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream 2), and the third (stream 3) is mounted after the light-off catalyst. Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 H2OS Configuration Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 3 H2OS Configuration Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2209 Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 3 HO2S Configuration Underbody Catalyst The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to two light off catalysts, forming a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System for the exhaust system exploded view. Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter The TWC contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry. Exhaust Manifold Runners The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Exhaust Pipes Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2Ss provide the PCM with information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. For additional information on the HO2S, refer to Engine Control Components See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control Components. Muffler Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold Catalytic Converter - 3.0L LH Manifold Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 6 retainers and the passenger side splash shield. 3. Remove the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S). 4. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 5. Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connector. 6. Remove the 3 bolts and position the A/C compressor aside. 7. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH catalytic converter heat shield. 8. Remove exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L See: Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Y-Pipe. 9. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold nuts. 10. Remove the LH catalytic converter manifold from the vehicle. - Discard the gasket. 11. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold studs. 12. Clean and inspect the LH catalytic converter manifold. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2212 Installation 1. Install the 6 new LH catalytic converter manifold studs. - Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 2. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the exhaust Y-pipe will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. Using a new gasket, install the LH catalytic converter and the 6 nuts. Tighten in 2 stages in the sequence shown. - Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. Install the exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L See: Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Y-Pipe. 4. Install the LH catalytic converter heat shield and the 3 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Position the A/C compressor and install the 3 bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. Connect the A/C compressor electrical connector. 7. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and install the accessory drive belt. 8. Install the LH HO2S. 9. Install the passenger side splash shield and the 6 retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2213 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2214 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - RH Catalytic Converter - 3.0L RH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L See: Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Y-Pipe. 2. Disconnect the RH Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 3. Remove and discard the 3 RH catalytic converter nuts and remove the converter. - Discard the RH catalytic converter gasket. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new gasket and nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2215 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View Exhaust System - Exploded View 2.5L 3.0L (View 1 of 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2216 3.0L (View 2 of 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2217 2.5L Hybrid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2218 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2219 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Underbody Catalytic Converter - Underbody Removal NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. NOTE: The production catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a one-piece construction. The service catalytic converter and muffler is a 2-piece construction. NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed. All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2.5L vehicles 2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. All vehicles 3. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur to the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange studs. NOTE: When loosening the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side. Remove and discard the two 10-mm exhaust catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts. 4. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur to the resonator flange studs. NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side. Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts. 5. NOTICE: Remove the gaskets by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the gasket on the pipe. Do not pry under the gasket or damage to the flange may occur. Detach the 3 exhaust hangers and remove the catalytic converter and muffler assembly. - Remove and discard the gaskets. 2.5L vehicles 6. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2220 3.0L vehicles 7. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration. 2.5L Hybrid vehicles 8. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration. Installation NOTICE: The exhaust hanger insulators are constructed of a special material. Use only the correct specification exhaust hanger insulator or damage to the exhaust system may occur. NOTE: Check the exhaust hanger insulators for damage and fatigue. Install new exhaust hanger insulators as required. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. 1. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time. Install the service clamp onto the catalytic converter section. 2. Install the catalytic converter section and service clamp onto the muffler section. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2221 3. Inspect the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe and resonator flange studs for damage. - If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s). NOTE: If replacement of the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange stud(s) is required, perform Steps 4 and 5. 4. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 10-mm stud out of the flange. 5. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe flange. Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 10-mm stud fully into the flange. - Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange. NOTE: If replacement of the resonator flange stud(s) is required, perform Steps 6 and 7. 6. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 8-mm stud out of the flange. 7. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in the resonator flange. Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 8-mm stud fully into the flange. - Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange. 8. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time. Attach the catalytic converter and muffler assembly to the 3 exhaust hangers. 9. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2222 NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary. Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket by hand. 10. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages: - Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 11. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary. Install a new converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe gasket by hand. 12. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 13. Tighten the 4 service clamp nuts to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-11-5 > Jun > 10 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A Or P013C Set Exhaust Crossover Pipe: Customer Interest Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A Or P013C Set TSB 10-11-5 3.0L - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P013A AND/OR P013C - POSSIBLE EXHAUST LEAK FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-3-1 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminated with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P013A - 02 sensor slow response, rich to lean - bank 1/sensor 2 and/or P013C - 02 sensor slow response, rich to lean - bank 2/sensor 2. This may be due to an exhaust leak. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE DTC P013A/P013C INDICATING A LACK OF SWITCH ARE TYPICALLY THE RESULT OF EITHER AN EXHAUST LEAK, EXHAUST MODIFICATION, OR CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR (CMS) FAILURE WHICH WILL CAUSE CMS VOLTAGE READINGS TO BE OUT OF RANGE. EXHAUST LEAK INSPECTION SHOULD BE CONDUCTED PRIOR TO CMS SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS. 1. Inspect and test the Y-pipe area for exhaust leaks. a. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks indicating a leak at the bank 1 flange area, bank 2 ball and flare joint and/or CMS threads. b. Misting a soapy water spray solution on the welds, joints and threads while the exhaust is restricted at the tailpipe will increase the ability to identify and confirm leaks. Small foam bubbles or very slow growing large bubbles are normal, represent leak rates within specification and will not illuminate the MIL. 2. Is a leak present? a. No - this procedure does not apply, proceed with normal WSM diagnostics. b. Yes - leak present. (1) If Y-pipe is misaligned or under-torqued, follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 309-00 to service. (2) If Y-pipe is found to be defective, replace Y-pipe assembly. The CMS may be difficult to remove; apply penetrating oil and slowly twist sensor back and forth to assist in removal. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101105A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner 3.0L: Replace The Y-Pipe Assembly, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In This Article (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-11-5 > Jun > 10 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A Or P013C Set > Page 2231 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5E256 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C Exhaust Crossover Pipe: Customer Interest Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C TSB 08-20-3 10/13/08 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P013C AND/OR P013A - BUILT PRIOR TO 8/18/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built prior to 8/18/2008 may exhibit DTC P013C and/or P013A. The DTCs may be caused by an exhaust leak at bank 2 Y-pipe ball and flare joint. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE DTCS P013A / P013C INDICATING A LACK OF SWITCH ARE TYPICALLY A RESULT OF EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST MODIFICATIONS. EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST MODIFICATIONS WILL CAUSE CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR (CMS) OUT OF RANGE VOLTAGE READINGS. THE CMS SENSOR IS THE LEAST LIKELY CAUSE. 1. Inspect bank 2 (front of engine) Y-pipe ball and flare joint for exhaust leaks by restricting exhaust flow at the tailpipe. Also look for carbon soot and moisture witness marks indicating a leak at the bank 2 ball and flare joint. 2. If a leak is found replace the Y-pipe assembly. 3. Disconnect the left hand (LH) Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 4. Remove and discard the two (2) 10 mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and gasket. 5. Remove and discard the four (4) exhaust Y-pipe nuts, gasket and remove the Y-pipe. 6. Install service Y-pipe assembly, and bank 1 flat flange gasket, tighten four (4) exhaust flange nuts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) starting with flat flange on bank 1 and then ball and flare joint on bank 2. 7. Install catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe gasket and spring nuts, tighten to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m). 8. Recheck for exhaust leaks. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.1 Hrs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C > Page 2236 Engine: Replace The Y-Pipe Assembly, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In This Article. (Do Not Use With 12650D 5246A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5E256 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-11-5 > Jun > 10 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A Or P013C Set Exhaust Crossover Pipe: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A Or P013C Set TSB 10-11-5 3.0L - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P013A AND/OR P013C - POSSIBLE EXHAUST LEAK FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-3-1 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminated with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P013A - 02 sensor slow response, rich to lean - bank 1/sensor 2 and/or P013C - 02 sensor slow response, rich to lean - bank 2/sensor 2. This may be due to an exhaust leak. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE DTC P013A/P013C INDICATING A LACK OF SWITCH ARE TYPICALLY THE RESULT OF EITHER AN EXHAUST LEAK, EXHAUST MODIFICATION, OR CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR (CMS) FAILURE WHICH WILL CAUSE CMS VOLTAGE READINGS TO BE OUT OF RANGE. EXHAUST LEAK INSPECTION SHOULD BE CONDUCTED PRIOR TO CMS SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS. 1. Inspect and test the Y-pipe area for exhaust leaks. a. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks indicating a leak at the bank 1 flange area, bank 2 ball and flare joint and/or CMS threads. b. Misting a soapy water spray solution on the welds, joints and threads while the exhaust is restricted at the tailpipe will increase the ability to identify and confirm leaks. Small foam bubbles or very slow growing large bubbles are normal, represent leak rates within specification and will not illuminate the MIL. 2. Is a leak present? a. No - this procedure does not apply, proceed with normal WSM diagnostics. b. Yes - leak present. (1) If Y-pipe is misaligned or under-torqued, follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 309-00 to service. (2) If Y-pipe is found to be defective, replace Y-pipe assembly. The CMS may be difficult to remove; apply penetrating oil and slowly twist sensor back and forth to assist in removal. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101105A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner 3.0L: Replace The Y-Pipe Assembly, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In This Article (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-11-5 > Jun > 10 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A Or P013C Set > Page 2242 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5E256 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C Exhaust Crossover Pipe: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C TSB 08-20-3 10/13/08 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P013C AND/OR P013A - BUILT PRIOR TO 8/18/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built prior to 8/18/2008 may exhibit DTC P013C and/or P013A. The DTCs may be caused by an exhaust leak at bank 2 Y-pipe ball and flare joint. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE DTCS P013A / P013C INDICATING A LACK OF SWITCH ARE TYPICALLY A RESULT OF EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST MODIFICATIONS. EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST MODIFICATIONS WILL CAUSE CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR (CMS) OUT OF RANGE VOLTAGE READINGS. THE CMS SENSOR IS THE LEAST LIKELY CAUSE. 1. Inspect bank 2 (front of engine) Y-pipe ball and flare joint for exhaust leaks by restricting exhaust flow at the tailpipe. Also look for carbon soot and moisture witness marks indicating a leak at the bank 2 ball and flare joint. 2. If a leak is found replace the Y-pipe assembly. 3. Disconnect the left hand (LH) Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 4. Remove and discard the two (2) 10 mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and gasket. 5. Remove and discard the four (4) exhaust Y-pipe nuts, gasket and remove the Y-pipe. 6. Install service Y-pipe assembly, and bank 1 flat flange gasket, tighten four (4) exhaust flange nuts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) starting with flat flange on bank 1 and then ball and flare joint on bank 2. 7. Install catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe gasket and spring nuts, tighten to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m). 8. Recheck for exhaust leaks. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.1 Hrs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C > Page 2247 Engine: Replace The Y-Pipe Assembly, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In This Article. (Do Not Use With 12650D 5246A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5E256 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Exhaust Crossover Pipe: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Exhaust Crossover Pipe: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 2253 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Exhaust Crossover Pipe: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 2259 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Install 6 new RH exhaust manifold studs. Tighten to............................................................................ ........................................................................................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in). Install a new gasket and the RH exhaust manifold and new nuts. Tighten the nuts in 2 stages in the sequence shown. Stage 1: Tighten to.................................................................................................. ....................................................................................20 Nm (177 lb-in). Stage 2: Tighten to............. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...........20 Nm (177 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Exhaust Manifold: Procedures Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection 1. Clean the exhaust manifold using a suitable solvent. Use a plastic scraping tool to clean the gasket sealing surfaces. 2. NOTE: New exhaust manifold gaskets, studs, nuts and/or bolts must be installed when an exhaust manifold is serviced. NOTE: Use a Straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) per running foot of length, such as Snap-On(R) GA438A or equivalent. For example, if the Straightedge is 61 cm (24 in) long, the machined edge must be flat within 0.010 mm (0.0004 in) from end to end. Using the Straightedge and a Feeler Gauge Set, check the exhaust manifold sealing surface for warpage. If the warpage is greater than 0.76 mm (0.0299 in), install a new exhaust manifold. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2265 Exhaust Manifold: Removal and Replacement Exhaust Manifold - RH Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 3.0L RH catalytic converter. 3. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 4. Remove the 3 exhaust manifold heat shield bolts and the heat shield. 5. Remove the EGR tube fitting nut from the exhaust manifold. 6. Remove and discard the 6 exhaust manifold nuts. 7. Remove the exhaust manifold and discard the exhaust manifold gasket. 8. Remove and discard the 6 exhaust manifold studs. 9. Clean and inspect the exhaust manifold. Installation 1. Install the 6 new exhaust manifold studs. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 2. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the converter bracket bolts will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2266 Install a new exhaust manifold gasket, the exhaust manifold and 6 new nuts. - Tighten the nuts in 2 stages in the sequence shown. Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 3. Install the EGR tube fitting nut on the exhaust manifold. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield and the 3 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Connect the HO2S electrical connector. 6. Install the 3.0L RH catalytic converter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C Exhaust Pipe: Customer Interest Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C TSB 08-20-3 10/13/08 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P013C AND/OR P013A - BUILT PRIOR TO 8/18/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built prior to 8/18/2008 may exhibit DTC P013C and/or P013A. The DTCs may be caused by an exhaust leak at bank 2 Y-pipe ball and flare joint. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE DTCS P013A / P013C INDICATING A LACK OF SWITCH ARE TYPICALLY A RESULT OF EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST MODIFICATIONS. EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST MODIFICATIONS WILL CAUSE CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR (CMS) OUT OF RANGE VOLTAGE READINGS. THE CMS SENSOR IS THE LEAST LIKELY CAUSE. 1. Inspect bank 2 (front of engine) Y-pipe ball and flare joint for exhaust leaks by restricting exhaust flow at the tailpipe. Also look for carbon soot and moisture witness marks indicating a leak at the bank 2 ball and flare joint. 2. If a leak is found replace the Y-pipe assembly. 3. Disconnect the left hand (LH) Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 4. Remove and discard the two (2) 10 mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and gasket. 5. Remove and discard the four (4) exhaust Y-pipe nuts, gasket and remove the Y-pipe. 6. Install service Y-pipe assembly, and bank 1 flat flange gasket, tighten four (4) exhaust flange nuts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) starting with flat flange on bank 1 and then ball and flare joint on bank 2. 7. Install catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe gasket and spring nuts, tighten to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m). 8. Recheck for exhaust leaks. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.1 Hrs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C > Page 2275 Engine: Replace The Y-Pipe Assembly, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In This Article. (Do Not Use With 12650D 5246A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5E256 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C Exhaust Pipe: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C TSB 08-20-3 10/13/08 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P013C AND/OR P013A - BUILT PRIOR TO 8/18/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built prior to 8/18/2008 may exhibit DTC P013C and/or P013A. The DTCs may be caused by an exhaust leak at bank 2 Y-pipe ball and flare joint. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE DTCS P013A / P013C INDICATING A LACK OF SWITCH ARE TYPICALLY A RESULT OF EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST MODIFICATIONS. EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST MODIFICATIONS WILL CAUSE CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR (CMS) OUT OF RANGE VOLTAGE READINGS. THE CMS SENSOR IS THE LEAST LIKELY CAUSE. 1. Inspect bank 2 (front of engine) Y-pipe ball and flare joint for exhaust leaks by restricting exhaust flow at the tailpipe. Also look for carbon soot and moisture witness marks indicating a leak at the bank 2 ball and flare joint. 2. If a leak is found replace the Y-pipe assembly. 3. Disconnect the left hand (LH) Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 4. Remove and discard the two (2) 10 mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and gasket. 5. Remove and discard the four (4) exhaust Y-pipe nuts, gasket and remove the Y-pipe. 6. Install service Y-pipe assembly, and bank 1 flat flange gasket, tighten four (4) exhaust flange nuts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) starting with flat flange on bank 1 and then ball and flare joint on bank 2. 7. Install catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe gasket and spring nuts, tighten to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m). 8. Recheck for exhaust leaks. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.1 Hrs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C > Page 2281 Engine: Replace The Y-Pipe Assembly, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In This Article. (Do Not Use With 12650D 5246A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5E256 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Exhaust Pipe: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Y-Pipe Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Y-Pipe Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the LH Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur to the exhaust Y-pipe flange studs. NOTE: When loosening the converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side. Remove and discard the two 10-mm exhaust catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts. 4. NOTICE: Remove the exhaust Y-pipe gasket by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the gasket off the pipe. Do not pry under the gasket or damage to the flange may occur. Remove and discard the 4 exhaust Y-pipe nuts and remove the Y-pipe. - Discard the gaskets. Installation 1. Inspect the exhaust Y-pipe flange studs for damage. - If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s). 2. If replacing the Y-pipe flange stud(s), use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 10-mm stud(s) out of the flange. 3. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust Y-pipe flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in the exhaust Y-pipe flange. If replacing the exhaust Y-pipe flange stud(s), use a C-clamp and a deep well socket to push the 10-mm stud fully into the flange. - Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Y-Pipe > Page 2294 4. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary. Install a new converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe gasket. 5. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages: - Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. Install a new gasket, the exhaust Y-pipe and 4 new nuts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Y-Pipe > Page 2295 Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View Exhaust System - Exploded View 2.5L 3.0L (View 1 of 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Y-Pipe > Page 2296 3.0L (View 2 of 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Y-Pipe > Page 2297 2.5L Hybrid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Y-Pipe > Page 2298 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View Muffler: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View Exhaust System - Exploded View 2.5L 3.0L (View 1 of 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2303 3.0L (View 2 of 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2304 2.5L Hybrid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2305 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2306 Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler Muffler Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The production catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a one piece construction. The service catalytic converter and muffler is a 2-piece construction. NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed. The muffler and catalytic converter are serviced together. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter - Underbody See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair/Catalytic Converter Underbody. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Resonator: Service and Repair Resonator Removal NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur to the resonator flange studs. NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side. Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator spring nuts. 3. NOTICE: Remove the resonator-to-muffler gasket by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the gasket off the pipe. Do not pry under the gasket or damage to the flange may occur. Detach the 2 resonator exhaust hangers and remove the resonator. - Discard the gasket. Installation 1. Inspect the resonator flange studs for damage. - If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s). 2. If replacing the resonator flange stud(s), use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 8-mm stud(s) out of the flange. 3. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in the resonator flange. If replacing the resonator flange stud(s), use a C-clamp and a deep well socket to push the 8-mm stud fully into the flange. - Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2310 4. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary. Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket. 5. Install the resonator and attach the 2 resonator exhaust hangers. 6. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages: - Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation Torque-Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Overview The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions. Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of torque-based ETC are: - eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: - The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). - There are two designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. - An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. - The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. - The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. - There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also two throttle position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle. Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components See: Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control Components. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2317 allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken. ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management: a - ETC illuminates or displays a message on the message center immediately; MIL illuminates after 2 driving cycles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2318 ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management: Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation: a - Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. APP and TP Sensor Inputs Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2319 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check: Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the PCM. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional DTC information. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check: a - Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the PCM, TP inconsistent with requested throttle plate position. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional DTC information. Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output Electronic TAC Operation Check: a - Note: For all DTCs, in addition to the MIL, the powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) is on for the concern that caused the FMEM action. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 5 seconds to register a concern. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts TSB 09-19-5 10/05/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E (SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is: a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14. b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps. 2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs. Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 2336 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 12A650 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts TSB 09-19-5 10/05/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E (SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is: a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14. b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps. 2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs. Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 2354 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 12A650 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode Entertainment System Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode TSB 09-11-9 06/15/09 NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on. ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19C116 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2369 Engine Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2370 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2371 Engine Control Module: Diagrams Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2372 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2373 Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2374 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2375 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2376 Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2377 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2378 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Control Module: Procedures Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block is displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Neutral Profile Correction In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is reset. Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been completed. To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any misfire DTCs. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2381 At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2382 Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS). Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM. 5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged. Installation 1. Install the PCM cowl seal. 2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2383 4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt. 5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset 7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2387 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2388 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Control Module Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur. Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2396 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2400 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2401 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2407 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2408 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 2-Track APP Sensor Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2412 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2413 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals. Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2414 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2415 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2420 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2423 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2424 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2425 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2432 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2436 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2437 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2438 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2439 4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2443 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2444 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. Typical CHT Sensor Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2445 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced. 1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Level Input (FLI) The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2451 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2452 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2453 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2454 7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2455 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sender Fuel Level Sender Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Pump/Service and Repair/Fuel Pump Module. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the locking tabs and remove the fuel level sender from the FP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2456 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2460 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2461 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2465 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2466 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are two types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use two IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type MAF Sensor Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type MAF sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2471 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2474 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2475 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2476 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Removal Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS) 1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the KS. Engine block-mounted KS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2477 3. Remove the lower intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector. 5. Remove the bolt and the KS. Installation Engine block-mounted KS 1. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 2. Connect the KS electrical connector. 3. Install the lower intake manifold. Cylinder head-mounted KS 4. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Connect the KS electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2481 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2482 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2483 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the MAP sensor. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). - When installing the sensor, if the bolt fails to hold specified torque, relocate the sensor and retain, using the auxiliary bolt hole in the upper intake manifold. 3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2491 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2492 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2493 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2496 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2497 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2498 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Engine Control Components Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2501 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Engine Control Components Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner, the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio. The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a signal that comes directly from the sensor. The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal HO2S does not need access to outside air. Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM. Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum accuracy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2504 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and Installation LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the LH HO2S. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench Adapter Formulas in the Appendix . - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). RH HO2S 5. Disconnect the RH HO2S electrical connector. 6. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2505 Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the RH HO2S. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench Adapter Formulas in the Appendix . - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). All HO2S 7. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2506 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor Catalyst Monitor Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench Adapter Formulas in the Appendix . - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 2511 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 2515 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 2521 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Engine Control Components Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6F35 Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2525 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2526 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2527 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2528 locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 8. Position the main control cover in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2529 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2530 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. 3.0L Engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2531 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Engine Control Components Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 2536 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Engine Control Components Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling. Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 2541 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2546 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2547 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 2-Track APP Sensor Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2551 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2552 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals. Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2553 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2554 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2558 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2562 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2566 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2567 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel cone held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the cone breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch. Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2568 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch 1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 2574 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Engine Control Components Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2580 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2583 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2584 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2585 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2589 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2590 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2591 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2592 4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 2602 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 2608 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set TSB 09-15-1 08/10/09 TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light, a slight brake drag condition may be observed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement. NOTE DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH CAN OCCUR. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2619 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be replaced. 1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2624 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2627 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2628 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2629 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Removal Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS) 1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the KS. Engine block-mounted KS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2630 3. Remove the lower intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector. 5. Remove the bolt and the KS. Installation Engine block-mounted KS 1. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 2. Connect the KS electrical connector. 3. Install the lower intake manifold. Cylinder head-mounted KS 4. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Connect the KS electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)............................................................................................................... .........................................................379 kPa (55 psi) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2635 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Pressure Test WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L engines do not have a Schrader valve. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Vehicles with 2.5L engine 3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine 5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2636 6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve. Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine 7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube. All vehicles 9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system pressure. Install the FP fuse. 10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool. Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional information, refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Measured/PID Values Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................ 689.5 RPM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose TSB 11-3-5 03/15/11 3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner housing. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-12. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose TSB 11-3-5 03/15/11 3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner housing. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-12. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises TSB 09-5-8 03/23/09 ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009 and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF THE POWERTRAIN. 1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h). 2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting noise. 3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 2659 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 2665 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Intake Air System Components - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Firing Order.......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 2677 Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification Engine Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Spark plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.15-1.25 mm (0.045-0.048 in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 2682 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications Spark plugs........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................15 Nm (133 lb-in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2683 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ ....................................................................CGSF-22F Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2684 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. - Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. - Install a new spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. - Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. - Correct the oil leak concern. - Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. - Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2685 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. - Install new spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2688 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2689 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs Spark Plugs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug. 2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 3. Inspect the spark plugs. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the gap as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2690 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2691 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2692 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition RH Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2693 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2697 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2702 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2703 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 2-Track APP Sensor Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2707 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2708 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals. Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2709 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2710 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2714 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2715 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are two types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use two IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type MAF Sensor Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type MAF sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Locations > Page 2719 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 2722 Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2727 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2730 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2731 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2732 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2739 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2743 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2744 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2745 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2746 4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 2750 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2754 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2755 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) The electronic TAC is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). There are 2 designs for the TAC, parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. Typical In-line TAC Design Typical In-line TAC Design Typical Parallel TAC Design Typical Parallel TAC Design Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation Torque-Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Overview The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions. Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of torque-based ETC are: - eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: - The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). - There are two designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. - An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. - The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. - The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. - There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also two throttle position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle. Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components See: Description and Operation/Engine Control Components. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2759 allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken. ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management: a - ETC illuminates or displays a message on the message center immediately; MIL illuminates after 2 driving cycles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2760 ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management: Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation: a - Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. APP and TP Sensor Inputs Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2761 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check: Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the PCM. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional DTC information. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check: a - Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the PCM, TP inconsistent with requested throttle plate position. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional DTC information. Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output Electronic TAC Operation Check: a - Note: For all DTCs, in addition to the MIL, the powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) is on for the concern that caused the FMEM action. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 5 seconds to register a concern. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts TSB 09-19-5 10/05/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E (SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is: a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14. b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps. 2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs. Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 2778 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 12A650 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts TSB 09-19-5 10/05/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E (SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is: a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14. b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps. 2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs. Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 2796 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 12A650 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2801 Engine Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2802 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2803 Engine Control Module: Diagrams Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2804 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2805 Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2806 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2807 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2808 Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2809 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2810 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Control Module: Procedures Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block is displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Neutral Profile Correction In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is reset. Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been completed. To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any misfire DTCs. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2813 At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2814 Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS). Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM. 5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged. Installation 1. Install the PCM cowl seal. 2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2815 4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt. 5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset 7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2819 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2820 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. Typical CHT Sensor Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2821 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced. 1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Level Input (FLI) The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2827 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2828 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2829 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2830 7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2831 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sender Fuel Level Sender Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Pump/Service and Repair/Fuel Pump Module. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the locking tabs and remove the fuel level sender from the FP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2832 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2836 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2837 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Note: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned, also some IAC valves are normally open and others are normally closed. Some IAC valves require engine vacuum to operate. The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: - no touch start - cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up - idle (corrects for engine load) - stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) - over-temperature idle boost Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2845 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2846 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2847 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2848 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2849 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2850 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2851 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2852 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2853 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2854 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2855 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2856 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2857 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2858 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2859 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2860 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2861 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2862 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2863 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 14-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2864 14-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2865 14-3 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2866 Information Bus: Description and Operation Communications Network Vehicle communication utilizes both ISO 9141 and Controller Area Network (CAN) communications. ISO 9141 is used for diagnostic use only while CAN allows many modules to communicate with each other on a common network. CAN in-vehicle networking is a method for transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus. Without serial networking, intermodule communication requires dedicated, point to point wiring resulting in bulky, expensive, complex, and difficult to install wiring harnesses. Applying a serial data network reduces the number of wires, combining the signals on a single network. Information is sent to the individual control modules that control each function. The vehicle has 3 module communication networks: - ISO 9141 - Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) - High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) All 3 networks are connected to the Data Link Connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing of these systems easier by allowing one scan tool to be able to diagnose and control any module on the 3 networks from one connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel between the steering column and the Audio Control Module (ACM). Network Topology Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2867 ISO 9141 Network Operation The ISO 9141 communications network is a single wire network, used for diagnostic purposes only. The ISO 9141 communications network is used for the following module: - Parking Aid Module (PAM) (if equipped) Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Operation The MS-CAN communicates using bussed messages. The MS-CAN has an unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, this network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network. The MS-CAN is a medium speed communication network used for the following modules: - Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped) - Audio Control Module (ACM) - Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) (if equipped) - Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) - HVAC module - Instrument Cluster (IC) - Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module (if equipped) - Smart Junction Box (SJB) High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Operation The HS-CAN communicates using bussed messages. The HS-CAN uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, this network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network. The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network used for the following modules: - 4X4 control module (if equipped) - ABS module - APIM (if equipped) - Instrument Cluster (IC) - Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) - PCM - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) - Restraints Control Module (RCM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2868 Network Termination The CAN uses a network termination circuit to improve communication reliability. The network termination of the CAN bus takes place inside the termination modules by termination resistors. Termination modules are located at either end of the bus network. As network messages are broadcast, in the form of voltage signals, the network voltage signals are stabilized by the termination resistors. Each termination module has a 120 ohm resistor across the positive and negative bus connection in the termination module. With 2 termination modules on each network, and the 120 ohm resistors located in a parallel circuit configuration, the total network impedance, or total resistance, is 60 ohms. Network termination improves bus message reliability by: - Stabilizing bus voltage - Eliminating electrical interference Gateway Module The Instrument Cluster (IC) is the gateway module, translating HS-CAN to MS-CAN and vice versa. This information allows a message to be distributed throughout both networks. The IC is the only module on this vehicle that has this ability. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Communications Network Principles Of Operation Communications Network Principles of Operation Vehicle communication utilizes both International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 and Controller Area Network (CAN) communications. ISO 9141 is used for diagnostic use only, and CAN is a method for transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus. The vehicle is equipped with 3 module communication networks: - ISO 9141 - Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) - High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) ISO 9141 Communications Network The ISO 9141 communications network is a single wire network. The ISO communications network does not permit intermodule communication and is only used for the Parking Aid Module (PAM). When the scan tool communicates with the parking aid module, the scan tool must request all information, the module cannot initiate communications. The ISO network operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 10 Kbps for bus messages and is designed for scan tool to module diagnostic use only. The following fault chart describes the specific ISO 9141 network failures and their resulting symptom: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2871 ISO 9141 Network Communication Fault Chart Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) The MS-CAN uses an unshielded twisted pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The data (+) and the data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or rested network traffic. As bus messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a bus message is sent. Multiple bus messages can be sent over the CAN circuits allowing multiple modules to communicate with each other. The MS-CAN is used for the Instrument Cluster (IC), the Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM), the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM), HVAC module, the Audio Control Module (ACM), the APIM, the Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module and the Smart Junction Box (SJB) communications, and is designed for general information transfer. The MS-CAN will not communicate while certain faults are present, but will operate with diminished performance with other faults present. The MS-CAN bus may remain operational when 1 of the 2 termination resistors are not present. The MS-CAN operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 125 Kbps for bus messages and is designed for general information transfer. The network will remain operational, but at a degraded level when certain circuit faults are present. The following fault chart describes the specific MS-CAN failures and their resulting symptom: MS-CAN Communication Fault Chart High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) The HS-CAN uses an unshielded twisted pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The data (+) and the data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or rested network traffic. As bus messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a bus message is sent. Multiple bus messages can be sent over the CAN circuits allowing multiple modules to communicate with each other. The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network used for the Instrument Cluster (IC), the PCM, the ABS module, the APIM, the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM), Restraints Control Module (RCM), the Battery Control Module (BCM), the Transmission Control Module (TCM), the Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) and the 4X4 control module communications, and designed for real time information transfer and control. The HS-CAN will not communicate while certain faults are present, but will operate with diminished performance with other faults present. The HS-CAN bus may remain operational when 1 of the 2 termination resistors are not present. The HS-CAN operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 500 Kbps and is designed for real time information transfer and control. The network will remain operational, but at a degraded level when certain circuit faults are present. The following fault chart describes the specific HS-CAN failures and their resulting symptom: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2872 HS-CAN Communication Fault Chart The following chart describes the specific CAN messages broadcast by each module, and the module(s) that receive the message: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2873 CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2874 CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2875 CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2876 CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2877 CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2878 CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2879 CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2880 CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2881 CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2882 CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 6) Inspection And Verification Communications Network Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. - If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2883 Visual Inspection Chart 3. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). - NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Go To Pinpoint Test V, to diagnose No Power To The Scan Tool. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test V: No Power To The Scan Tool 4. Establish a scan tool session. - NOTE: The scan tool will first attempt to communicate with the PCM, after establishing communication with the PCM, the scan tool will then attempt to communicate with all other modules on the vehicle. If an IDS session cannot be established wit the vehicle, (IDS may state "No communication can be established with the PCM"): Choose "NO" when the scan tool prompts whether or not to retry communication. - Enter either a PCM part number, tear tag or calibration number to identify the vehicle and start a session. 5. Carry out the network test. - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs and proceed to Step 6. - If the network test fails, GO to Symptom Chart to diagnose the failed communication network. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - If a module fails to communication during the network test, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 6. Retrieve and review the DTCs. - If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. Follow the non-network DTC diagnostics (B-codes, C-codes, P-codes) prior to the network DTC diagnostics (U-codes). For all other DTCs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2884 Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Communications Network See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart - If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Module Configuration Principles Of Operation Module Configuration Principles of Operation Configurable modules accommodate a variety of vehicle options, eliminating the need for many unique modules for one vehicle line. These modules must be configured when replaced as part of a repair procedure. Configurable modules should not be exchanged between vehicles since the settings are unique to each vehicle. Failure to configure a new module may result in incorrect operation and/or DTCs setting. The following are the 3 different methods of configuration: - Programmable Module Installation (PMI) - Module reprogramming ("flashing") - Programmable parameters Some modules do not support all 3 methods. Definition of Terms The following are definitions of configuration terms: Programmable Module Installation (PMI) PMI is a scan tool process which configures settings in a new module. Data used for the PMI process is automatically downloaded from the original module and stored when a scan tool session is started. If this data cannot be retrieved from the module being replaced, the scan tool may prompt for As-Built data entry or display a list of parameter values that need to be manually selected. Some modules are reprogrammed during PMI when a strategy/calibration update is available. To carry out PMI, refer to Programmable Module Installation (PMI) See: Service and Repair. NOTE: It is important that the scan tool identifies the vehicle and obtains configuration data prior to removing any modules. The new module must be able to communicate with the scan tool in order to carry out PMI. See: Programming and Relearning Module Reprogramming Module reprogramming (also referred to as "flashing") is a scan tool process which updates the strategy/calibration in a module. Reprogramming a module with the same level of software will not improve module operation or repair a hardware failure. Module reprogramming is automatically carried out during PMI when a later strategy/calibration is available. NOTE: Module reprogramming should be limited to circumstances where a published TSB procedure recommends doing so. NOTE: A module cannot communicate with other modules on the communication network while being reprogrammed. Clear any network communication DTCs which may have been set in other modules during the reprogramming process. Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) programming is a process that updates the APIM Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) and Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) software. The VIP programming updates the calibration files in the portion of the APIM which interfaces with the Controller Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2885 Area Network (CAN). The CIP programming updates calibration files in the portion of the APIM that interfaces with mobile phones and other customer devices. APIM programming uses the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) to read and program the VIP software through the Data Link Connector (DLC). A web-based On-Line Automotive Service Information System (OASIS) application is used to read and program the CIP software via a Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable between the scan tool and vehicle USB port. Both the VCM and OASIS application must be running on the scan tool during APIM programming. To carry out APIM programming, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming See: Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming. Programmable Parameters Programmable parameters are customer preference items that may be modified by the dealer via scan tool or in some cases modified by the customer following a procedure listed in the vehicle Owner's Literature. While many configuration options may exist for a module, only a few of these options are programmable parameters. Adaptive Learning and Calibration Some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out if replaced as part of a repair procedure. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. Transmission Identification Block Some PCMs contain a memory area called a transmission identification block. The PCM transmission identification block stores solenoid body flow data. If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Vehicle Identification (VID) Block Some PCMs contain a memory area called a Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The PCM VID block commonly stores powertrain configuration items such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), tire size, axle ratio, and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with speed control. Module Address A unique module address is assigned to each module on the network for identification. As-Built Data As-Built data is a VIN-specific module configuration record. During vehicle build, the configuration from all modules is downloaded and stored in the As-Built database. As-Built data will not reflect customer preference items that have been changed from the default state. These items will need to be changed using programmable parameters after the module is configured. NOTE: It is not necessary to obtain As-Built data unless directed to do so by the scan tool. This data may be accessed from the technician service publication website. The following chart lists As-Built data addresses and describes specific module configuration information: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2886 Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2887 Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2888 Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Hybrid (Part 1) Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Hybrid (Part 2) Inspection And Verification Module Configuration Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2889 Inspection and Verification This provides step-by-step module configuration procedures. Carry out the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedures when another diagnostic/repair information directs to carry out configuration or when DTCs from the below list are present: See: Programming and Relearning Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2890 Information Bus: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Communications Network Communications Network DTC Charts NOTE: Network DTCs (U-codes) are often a result of intermittent concerns such as faulty wiring or low battery voltage occurrences. Additionally, vehicle service procedures such as module reprogramming will often set network DTCs. Replacing a module to resolve a network DTC is unlikely to resolve the concern. To prevent repeat network DTC concerns, inspect all network wiring, especially connectors. Test the vehicle battery, refer to Battery. NOTE: Some modules on this vehicle utilize a 5-character DTC followed by a 2-character failure-type code. The failure-type code provides information about specific fault conditions such as opens, or shorts to ground. Continuous memory DTCs have an additional 2-character DTC status code suffix to assist in determining DTC history. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2891 U0001-U0114 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2892 U0114:00-U0151:87 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2893 U0151:88-U0162:00 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2894 U0163-U0255 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2895 U0255:00-U0423:00 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2896 U261A-U3000:88 Module Configuration Module Configuration Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2897 B2477-B2900 / P0602-P1639 / U201A:51-U0300:51 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2898 U2050-U3002:62 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2899 Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Communications Network Symptom Chart Symptom Chart (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2900 Symptom Chart (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2901 Information Bus: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 23 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic Engine Controls - 2.5L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 24 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic Engine Controls - 3.0L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The PCM communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the PCM. Voltage for the PCM is provided by circuit CBB28 (GY/VT) or SBB05 (GY/RD). Circuit GD122 (BK) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - ABS module - Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) - 4X4 control module (if equipped) - IC - PCM - RCM - PSCM - OCSM - TCM (Hybrid only) - BCM (Hybrid only) PINPOINT TEST A: THE PCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- A1 VERIFY WHETHER OTHER HS-CAN MODULES PASS THE NETWORK TEST - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test. - In the left hand pane of the IDS network test display screen, verify whether any HS-CAN modules passed the network test. - Is the text "pass" or a DTC listed next to any of the following modules (if equipped): 4x4 control module, ABS module, Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), Battery Control Module (BCM), Instrument Cluster (IC), Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM), Power Steering Control Module (PSCM), Restraints Control Module (RCM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) or PCM? Yes If "pass" or a DTC was listed next to the PCM, a network fault is not currently present. Go To Pinpoint Test R to diagnose an intermittent HS-CAN fault condition. See: Pinpoint Test R: Intermittent No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittently If "pass" or a DTC was listed next to one or more modules other than the PCM, GO to A2. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2902 No No modules are currently communicating on the HS-CAN. Go To Pinpoint Test s to diagnose no HS-CAN communication. See: Pinpoint Test S: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding ------------------------------------------------- A2 VERIFY COMPUTERS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS INFORMATION PINPOINT TEST QA HAS BEEN CARRIED OUT - Verify that pinpoint test QA has been carried out. - Has pinpoint test QA been carried out? Yes GO to A3. No REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information, Pinpoint Tests, pinpoint test QA to diagnose no communication with the PCM. ------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to A5. No GO to A4. ------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PCM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-59, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-58, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2903 - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to A5. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- A5 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION - Disconnect all the PCM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new PCM. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 42 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation - Escape and Mariner The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the ABS module. Voltage for the ABS module is provided by circuits CBP34 (VT/BN), SBB09 (RD) and SBB18 (YE/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD120 (BK/GN). Hybrid The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the ABS module. Voltage for the ABS module is provided by circuits CBP34 (VT/BN), CBK03 (GY), SBB09 (RD) and SBB18 (YE/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD113 (BK/YE) and GD120 (BK/GN) . Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2904 This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - ABS module PINPOINT TEST B: THE ABS MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK THE ABS MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: ABS Module C155. - Ignition ON. - Measure voltage between the ABS module, harness side and ground as follows: Escape And Mariner - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to B2. No Escape and Mariner, VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 18 (20A) and fuse 9 (50A) and the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 34 (5A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. Hybrid, VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuses 27 (20A), 9 (50A) and 18 (20A) and the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 34 (5A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE ABS MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Measure the resistance between the ABS module, harness side and ground as follows: Escape And Mariner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2905 Hybrid - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to B3. No REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ABS MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-12, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-13, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to B4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK FOR CORRECT ABS MODULE OPERATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2906 - Disconnect the ABS module connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the ABS module connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new ABS module. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The 4X4 Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test C: The 4X4 Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 34 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Four Wheel Drive Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The 4X4 control module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the 4X4 control module. Voltage for the 4X4 control module is provided by circuits CBP35 (YE/GY) and SBP11 (BU/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD182 (BK/GY). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - 4X4 control module PINPOINT TEST C: THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the 4X4 control module C3184-4, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and ground; and between the 4X4 control module C3184-5, circuit SBP11 (BU/RD), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2907 - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to C2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 11 (10A) and 35 (10A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-15, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to C3. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-3, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-11, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2908 - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to C4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE OPERATION - Disconnect the 4X4 control module connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the 4X4 control module connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test D: The Instrument Cluster (IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test D: The Instrument Cluster (IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 60 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Instrument Cluster for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Instrument Cluster (IC) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN connection to the IC and circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) connection to the IC. Voltage for the IC is provided by circuits CBP29 (WH/VT), and SBP26 (YE/RD). Circuits GD112 (BK/GN) and GD114 (BK/BU) provide ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2909 - IC PINPOINT TEST D: THE IC DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- D1 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Disconnect the scan tool cable from the Data Link Connector (DLC). - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms? Yes GO to D2. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to D4. ------------------------------------------------- D2 CHECK THE IC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: IC C220. - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-9, circuit GD112 (BK/GN) harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to D3. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- D3 CHECK THE IC VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the IC, harness side and ground as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2910 - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to D4. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 26 (10A), 29 (5A) or 43 (10A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- D4 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-15, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to D5. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- D5 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE DLC AND THE IC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-2, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2911 - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-1, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to D6. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- D6 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION - Disconnect the IC connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new IC. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 46 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Supplemental Restraint Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2912 Normal Operation The Restraints Control Module (RCM) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN connection to the RCM. Voltage for the RCM is provided by circuits CBP31 (BN/OG) and the RCM is case grounded. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - RCM PINPOINT TEST E: THE RCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection and verification before proceeding with the Pinpoint Test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Communications Network/Inspection And Verification ------------------------------------------------- E1 CHECK THE RCM CONNECTION - Ignition OFF. - Depower the SRS. Refer to Air Bag Systems. - Disconnect: RCM C2041a. - Disconnect: RCM C2041b. - Are RCM C2041a and C2041b pins OK? Yes GO to E2. No REPAIR the RCM connector pins as necessary. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Air Bag Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- E2 CHECK THE RCM CASE GROUND FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the metal RCM case and a good chassis ground. Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to E3. No REPAIR the case ground connection. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Air Bag Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- E3 CHECK THE RCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Repower the SRS. Refer to Air Bag Systems. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the RCM C2041a-13, circuit CBP31 (BN/OG), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2913 - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to E4. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 31 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Air Bag Systems. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- E4 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE RCM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between the RCM C2041b-10, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the RCM C2041b-9, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to E5. No REPAIR the circuit in question. REPOWER the SRS. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- E5 CHECK FOR CORRECT RCM OPERATION - Disconnect all the RCM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2914 - pushed-out pins - Connect all the RCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new RCM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 46 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Supplemental Restraint Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN connection to the OCSM. Voltage for the OCSM is provided by circuit CBP46 (WH/BU) and circuit GD183 (BK/WH) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - OCSM PINPOINT TEST F: THE OCSM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- F1 CHECK THE OCSM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: OCSM C3285. - Ignition OFF. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the OCSM C3285-1, circuit CBP46 (WH/BU), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2915 - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to F2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 46 (7.5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- F2 CHECK THE OCSM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-14, circuit GD183 (BK/WH), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to F3. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- F3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE OCSM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-18, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2916 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2917 Information Bus: Programming and Relearning Programmable Module Installation (PMI) PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The Original Module Is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The Original Module Is Not Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2918 Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) NOTE: If a new Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure. 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool. 4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port. 5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). 6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet. 7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current APIM Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels. 8. NOTE: Do not disconnect the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) or USB cables during APIM programming. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select the "Program APIM" button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if prompted. - When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically. 9. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays "Programming has been completed successfully". 10. Test the audio system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2919 Information Bus: Service and Repair PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The Original Module Is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The Original Module Is Not Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2924 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2927 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2928 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2929 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Removal Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS) 1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the KS. Engine block-mounted KS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2930 3. Remove the lower intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector. 5. Remove the bolt and the KS. Installation Engine block-mounted KS 1. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 2. Connect the KS electrical connector. 3. Install the lower intake manifold. Cylinder head-mounted KS 4. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Connect the KS electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2934 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2935 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. - The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol. - The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately four seconds. - The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: - an emission-related concern and DTC exists. - the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL controlled through the communication link). - the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS). - The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or three consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern. - For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/No Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) Present Symptom Chart Index. - If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist. - If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low. - The MIL flashes after a period of time with the ignition in the RUN position (engine not running) if DTC P1000 is set. CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON, or ISO Standard Engine Symbol Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2942 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2943 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2944 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the MAP sensor. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). - When installing the sensor, if the bolt fails to hold specified torque, relocate the sensor and retain, using the auxiliary bolt hole in the upper intake manifold. 3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2952 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2953 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2954 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2957 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2958 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2959 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Engine Control Components Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2962 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Engine Control Components Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner, the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio. The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a signal that comes directly from the sensor. The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal HO2S does not need access to outside air. Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM. Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum accuracy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2965 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and Installation LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the LH HO2S. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench Adapter Formulas in the Appendix . - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). RH HO2S 5. Disconnect the RH HO2S electrical connector. 6. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2966 Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the RH HO2S. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench Adapter Formulas in the Appendix . - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). All HO2S 7. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2967 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor Catalyst Monitor Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench Adapter Formulas in the Appendix . - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 2972 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 2976 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation Torque-Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Overview The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions. Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of torque-based ETC are: - eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: - The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). - There are two designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. - An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. - The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. - The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. - There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also two throttle position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle. Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components See: Description and Operation/Engine Control Components. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2981 allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken. ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management: a - ETC illuminates or displays a message on the message center immediately; MIL illuminates after 2 driving cycles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2982 ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management: Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation: a - Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. APP and TP Sensor Inputs Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2983 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check: Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the PCM. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional DTC information. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check: a - Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the PCM, TP inconsistent with requested throttle plate position. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional DTC information. Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output Electronic TAC Operation Check: a - Note: For all DTCs, in addition to the MIL, the powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) is on for the concern that caused the FMEM action. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 5 seconds to register a concern. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts TSB 09-19-5 10/05/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E (SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is: a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14. b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps. 2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs. Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 3000 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 12A650 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts TSB 09-19-5 10/05/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E (SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is: a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14. b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps. 2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs. Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 3018 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 12A650 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3023 Engine Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3024 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3025 Engine Control Module: Diagrams Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3026 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3027 Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3028 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3029 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3030 Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3031 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3032 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Control Module: Procedures Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block is displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Neutral Profile Correction In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is reset. Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been completed. To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any misfire DTCs. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3035 At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3036 Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS). Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM. 5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged. Installation 1. Install the PCM cowl seal. 2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3037 4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt. 5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset 7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3041 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3042 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3047 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3048 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 2-Track APP Sensor Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3052 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3053 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals. Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3054 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3055 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3060 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3063 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3064 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3065 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3072 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3076 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3077 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3078 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3079 4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3083 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3084 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. Typical CHT Sensor Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3085 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced. 1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Level Input (FLI) The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3091 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3092 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3093 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3094 7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3095 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sender Fuel Level Sender Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Pump/Service and Repair/Fuel Pump Module. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the locking tabs and remove the fuel level sender from the FP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3096 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3100 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3101 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3105 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3106 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are two types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use two IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type MAF Sensor Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type MAF sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3111 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3114 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3115 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3116 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Removal Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS) 1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the KS. Engine block-mounted KS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3117 3. Remove the lower intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector. 5. Remove the bolt and the KS. Installation Engine block-mounted KS 1. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 2. Connect the KS electrical connector. 3. Install the lower intake manifold. Cylinder head-mounted KS 4. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Connect the KS electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3121 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3122 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3123 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the MAP sensor. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). - When installing the sensor, if the bolt fails to hold specified torque, relocate the sensor and retain, using the auxiliary bolt hole in the upper intake manifold. 3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Typical Thread Type Sensor Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3131 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3132 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3133 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3136 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3137 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3138 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Engine Control Components Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3141 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Engine Control Components Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner, the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio. The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a signal that comes directly from the sensor. The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal HO2S does not need access to outside air. Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM. Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum accuracy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 3144 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and Installation LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the LH HO2S. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench Adapter Formulas in the Appendix . - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). RH HO2S 5. Disconnect the RH HO2S electrical connector. 6. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 3145 Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the RH HO2S. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench Adapter Formulas in the Appendix . - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). All HO2S 7. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 3146 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor Catalyst Monitor Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench Adapter Formulas in the Appendix . - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 3151 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3155 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 3161 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Engine Control Components Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6F35 Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3165 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3166 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3167 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3168 locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 8. Position the main control cover in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3169 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3170 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. 3.0L Engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3171 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Engine Control Components Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3176 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Engine Control Components Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling. Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 3182 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Engine Control Components Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6F35 Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3186 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3187 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3188 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3189 locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 8. Position the main control cover in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3190 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3191 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. 3.0L Engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3192 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set TSB 10-19-1 10/11/10 3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/1/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List and production fix date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010. a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for normal diagnostics. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2. 2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs. Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 3201 101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs. Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set TSB 10-19-1 10/11/10 3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/1/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List and production fix date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010. a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for normal diagnostics. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2. 2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs. Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 3207 101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs. Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 3213 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 3214 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 3220 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 3221 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 3224 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 3227 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3228 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Overview The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT systems. - Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have four operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the Testing and Inspection section. For additional information, refer to the Engine System - General Information. Verification of incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine System - General Information. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP, throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3229 achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. VCT System Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH or RH valve cover. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Engine Control Components Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3237 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Engine Control Components Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling. Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Diverter Solenoid: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Bypass Solenoid The secondary AIR bypass solenoid is used by the PCM to control vacuum to the secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve. The secondary AIR bypass solenoid is a normally closed solenoid. The secondary AIR bypass solenoid also has a filtered vent feature to permit vacuum release. Secondary AIR Bypass Solenoid Secondary AIR Bypass Solenoid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Diverter Valve: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Secondary AIR Diverter Valve The secondary AIR diverter valve is used with the secondary AIR pump to provide on/off control of air to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter. When the secondary AIR pump is on and vacuum is supplied to the AIR diverter valve, air passes the integral check valve disk. When the secondary AIR pump is off, and vacuum is removed from the AIR diverter valve, the integral check valve disk is held on the seat and stops air from being drawn into the exhaust system and prevents the back flow of the exhaust into the secondary AIR system. Secondary AIR Diverter Valve Secondary AIR Diverter Valve Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Injection Pump: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Secondary AIR Pump The secondary AIR pump provides pressurized air to the secondary AIR system. The secondary AIR pump functions independently of RPM and is controlled by the PCM. The secondary AIR pump is only used for short periods of time. Delivery of air is dependent on the amount of system backpressure and system voltage. The secondary AIR pump draws dry filtered air from the intake air system downstream of the mass air flow/intake air temperature sensor. For additional information on the secondary AIR injection system, refer to Secondary Air Injection (AIR) System See: Description and Operation. Secondary Air Pump Secondary Air Pump Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalyst and Exhaust Systems Overview The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air pollutants of CO, NOx, and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled. The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the powertrain control module (PCM). For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. For most vehicles, only two HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the ones after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some partial zero emission vehicles (PZEVs) use three HO2Ss. The stream 1 sensor (HO2S11) located before the catalyst is used for primary fuel control, the stream 2 sensor (HO2S12) is used to monitor the light-off catalyst, and the stream 3 sensor (HO2S13) located after the catalyst is used for long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (fore aft oxygen sensor control). V-Engines V-Engines In-Line Engines In-Line Engines Catalytic Converter A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they are used up as much as possible. Light Off Catalyst As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C (475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalytic converter (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the exhaust manifold it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion efficiency for that Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3252 catalyst. Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Conversion Efficiency A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency. TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart Exhaust System The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and NOx in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into the muffler. Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe. On some PZEV, there is a total of three HO2Ss in the exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream 2), and the third (stream 3) is mounted after the light-off catalyst. Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 H2OS Configuration Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 3 H2OS Configuration Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3253 Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 3 HO2S Configuration Underbody Catalyst The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to two light off catalysts, forming a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System for the exhaust system exploded view. Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter The TWC contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry. Exhaust Manifold Runners The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Exhaust Pipes Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2Ss provide the PCM with information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. For additional information on the HO2S, refer to Engine Control Components See: Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control Components. Muffler Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold Catalytic Converter - 3.0L LH Manifold Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 6 retainers and the passenger side splash shield. 3. Remove the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S). 4. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 5. Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connector. 6. Remove the 3 bolts and position the A/C compressor aside. 7. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH catalytic converter heat shield. 8. Remove exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Y-Pipe. 9. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold nuts. 10. Remove the LH catalytic converter manifold from the vehicle. - Discard the gasket. 11. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold studs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3256 12. Clean and inspect the LH catalytic converter manifold. Installation 1. Install the 6 new LH catalytic converter manifold studs. - Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 2. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the exhaust Y-pipe will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. Using a new gasket, install the LH catalytic converter and the 6 nuts. Tighten in 2 stages in the sequence shown. - Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. Install the exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Y-Pipe. 4. Install the LH catalytic converter heat shield and the 3 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Position the A/C compressor and install the 3 bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. Connect the A/C compressor electrical connector. 7. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and install the accessory drive belt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3257 8. Install the LH HO2S. 9. Install the passenger side splash shield and the 6 retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3258 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - RH Catalytic Converter - 3.0L RH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Y-Pipe. 2. Disconnect the RH Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 3. Remove and discard the 3 RH catalytic converter nuts and remove the converter. - Discard the RH catalytic converter gasket. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new gasket and nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3259 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View Exhaust System - Exploded View 2.5L 3.0L (View 1 of 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3260 3.0L (View 2 of 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3261 2.5L Hybrid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3262 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3263 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Underbody Catalytic Converter - Underbody Removal NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. NOTE: The production catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a one-piece construction. The service catalytic converter and muffler is a 2-piece construction. NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed. All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2.5L vehicles 2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. All vehicles 3. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur to the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange studs. NOTE: When loosening the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side. Remove and discard the two 10-mm exhaust catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts. 4. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur to the resonator flange studs. NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side. Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts. 5. NOTICE: Remove the gaskets by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the gasket on the pipe. Do not pry under the gasket or damage to the flange may occur. Detach the 3 exhaust hangers and remove the catalytic converter and muffler assembly. - Remove and discard the gaskets. 2.5L vehicles 6. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3264 3.0L vehicles 7. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration. 2.5L Hybrid vehicles 8. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration. Installation NOTICE: The exhaust hanger insulators are constructed of a special material. Use only the correct specification exhaust hanger insulator or damage to the exhaust system may occur. NOTE: Check the exhaust hanger insulators for damage and fatigue. Install new exhaust hanger insulators as required. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. 1. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time. Install the service clamp onto the catalytic converter section. 2. Install the catalytic converter section and service clamp onto the muffler section. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3265 3. Inspect the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe and resonator flange studs for damage. - If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s). NOTE: If replacement of the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange stud(s) is required, perform Steps 4 and 5. 4. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 10-mm stud out of the flange. 5. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe flange. Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 10-mm stud fully into the flange. - Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange. NOTE: If replacement of the resonator flange stud(s) is required, perform Steps 6 and 7. 6. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 8-mm stud out of the flange. 7. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in the resonator flange. Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 8-mm stud fully into the flange. - Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange. 8. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time. Attach the catalytic converter and muffler assembly to the 3 exhaust hangers. 9. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3266 NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary. Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket by hand. 10. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages: - Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 11. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary. Install a new converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe gasket by hand. 12. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 13. Tighten the 4 service clamp nuts to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's Canister Purge Control Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's TSB 11-3-22 03/16/11 DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13. 2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in the evaporative emission canister? a. No - Proceed to Step 3. b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to step 3. 3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr. Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3276 110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs. Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C915 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's Canister Purge Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's TSB 11-3-22 03/16/11 DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13. 2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in the evaporative emission canister? a. No - Proceed to Step 3. b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to step 3. 3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr. Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3282 110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs. Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C915 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3283 Canister Purge Control Valve: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3284 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3285 Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve The EVAP canister purge valve is part of the enhanced EVAP system that is controlled by the PCM. This valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the EVAP canister to the intake manifold during various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister purge valve is a normally closed valve. The EVAP canister purge valve controls the flow of vapors by way of a solenoid, eliminating the need for an electronic vacuum regulator and vacuum diaphragm. For E-Series, Escape/Mariner, Expedition, F-Series, and Navigator, the PCM outputs a duty cycle between 0% and 100% to control the EVAP canister purge valve. For all others, the PCM outputs a variable current between 0 mA and 1,000 mA to control the EVAP canister purge valve. Typical EVAP Canister Purge Valve Typical EVAP Canister Purge Valve (Part 1) Typical EVAP Canister Purge Valve (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3286 Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve 2.5L Engine 3.0L Engine Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3287 Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the EVAP canister purge valve. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Customer Interest Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's TSB 11-3-22 03/16/11 DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13. 2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in the evaporative emission canister? a. No - Proceed to Step 3. b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to step 3. 3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr. Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3296 110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs. Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C915 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's Evaporative Emission Control Canister: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's TSB 11-3-22 03/16/11 DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13. 2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in the evaporative emission canister? a. No - Proceed to Step 3. b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to step 3. 3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr. Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3302 110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs. Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C915 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3303 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Canister Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the fresh air tube from the EVAP canister. 5. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-EVAP canister fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling. 6. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge tube-to-fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, 2 bolts and the EVAP canister assembly. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3304 - Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Vapor Tube Assembly Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Position a suitable lifting device under the fuel tank. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3308 4. Remove the LH fuel tank strap bolt and position the strap aside. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 5. Partially lower the LH side of the fuel tank enough to access the fuel vapor tube assembly. 6. Disconnect the Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank quick connect coupling. 8. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling. 9. Remove the fuel vapor tube assembly. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation Leak Detection Solenoid: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid During the evaporative emissions (EVAP) leak check monitor, the CV solenoid seals the EVAP canister from the atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the target vacuum in the fuel tank during the EVAP leak check monitor. Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3315 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3316 Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Remove the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister assembly. For additional information, refer to Evaporative Emission Canister See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3317 Evaporative Emission Control Canister/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent solenoid electrical connector, release the pin-type retainer and remove the EVAP canister wire harness. 3. Remove the 3 EVAP canister tray bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. 5. Disconnect the EVAP canister fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. 6. Remove the EVAP canister from the tray. 7. Depress the locking tab outward, rotate the EVAP canister vent solenoid clockwise and remove it from the EVAP canister. - Apply clean engine oil to the EVAP canister vent solenoid O-ring seal prior to installation. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Vacuum Regulator Solenoid The EGR vacuum regulator solenoid is an electromagnetic device used to regulate the vacuum supply to the EGR valve. The solenoid contains a coil which magnetically controls the position of a disc to regulate the vacuum. As the duty cycle to the coil increases, the vacuum signal passed through the solenoid to the EGR valve also increases. Vacuum not directed to the EGR valve is vented through the solenoid vent to atmosphere. Note that at 0% duty cycle (no electrical signal applied), the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid allows some vacuum to pass, but not enough to open the EGR valve. EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Duty Cycle Graph EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Data Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation EGR Tube: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Orifice Tube Assembly The orifice tube assembly is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the intake manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also contains the metering orifice and two pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates a measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure differential across the orifice is picked up by the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor which provides feedback to the PCM. EGR Orifice Tube Assembly EGR Orifice Tube Assembly Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3325 EGR Tube: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold to Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Tube Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the exhaust manifold-to-EGR valve tube fitting from the EGR valve. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 2. Disconnect the exhaust manifold-to-EGR valve tube fitting from the RH exhaust manifold. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 3. Remove the exhaust manifold-to-EGR valve tube. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3329 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve EGR Valve: Description and Operation Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve Engine Control Components Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve Depending on the application, the EEGR valve is a water cooled or an air cooled motor/valve assembly. The motor is commanded to move in 52 discrete steps as it acts directly on the EEGR valve. The position of the valve determines the rate of EGR. The built-in spring works to close the valve (against the motor opening force). EEGR Motor/Valve Assembly EEGR Motor/Valve Assembly Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve > Page 3332 EGR Valve: Description and Operation Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Module (ESM) Engine Control Components Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Module (ESM) The ESM is an integrated differential pressure feedback EGR system that functions in the same manner as a conventional differential pressure feedback EGR system. The various system components have been integrated into a single component called the ESM. The flange of the valve portion of the ESM bolts directly to the intake manifold with a metal gasket that forms the metering orifice. This arrangement increases system reliability, response time, and system precision. By relocating the EGR orifice from the exhaust to the intake side of the EGR valve, the downstream pressure signal measures manifold absolute pressure (MAP). This MAP signal is used for EGR correction and inferred barometric pressure (BARO) at ignition on. The system provides the PCM with a differential pressure feedback EGR signal, identical to a traditional differential pressure feedback EGR system. ESM ESM (Part 1) ESM (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve > Page 3333 EGR Valve: Description and Operation Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Engine Control Components Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve The EGR valve in the differential pressure feedback EGR system is a conventional, vacuum-actuated valve. The valve increases or decreases the flow of EGR. As vacuum applied to the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the spring force, the valve begins to open. As the vacuum signal weakens, at 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring force closes the valve. The EGR valve is fully open at about 15 kPa (4.5 in-Hg). Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing repair specifications on flow rate is impractical. The on board diagnostic (OBD) system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not measured directly as part of the diagnostic procedures. Typical EGR Valve Typical EGR Valve (Part 1) Typical EGR Valve (Part 2) EGR Flow Rate Graph Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Components - Exploded View EGR Valve: Service and Repair Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Components - Exploded View Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Components - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Components - Exploded View > Page 3336 EGR Valve: Service and Repair Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the exhaust manifold-to-EGR valve tube fitting from the EGR valve. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the EGR valve. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve gasket. NOTE: If there is no residual gasket material present, metal surface prep can be used to clean and prepare the surfaces NOTE: Do not reuse the EGR valve gasket. Remove and discard the EGR valve gasket. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3340 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3345 Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the PCV valve electrical connector. 2. Release the clamp and disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the PCV valve. 3. NOTICE: A new positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve must be installed if removed from the valve cover. Damage will occur to the locking mechanism on the PCV valve. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. NOTE: When installing, make sure the PCV valve electrical connector is pointing in the correct position to allow the wiring harness to be connected. Incorrect installation would require removal and replacement of the valve. Rotate the PCV valve counterclockwise and remove it from the valve cover. Discard the PCV valve. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new PCV valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3350 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)............................................................................................................... .........................................................379 kPa (55 psi) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3355 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Pressure Test WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L engines do not have a Schrader valve. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Vehicles with 2.5L engine 3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine 5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3356 6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve. Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine 7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube. All vehicles 9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system pressure. Install the FP fuse. 10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool. Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional information, refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Measured/PID Values Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................ 689.5 RPM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal 2.5L and 3.0L Vehicles 2.5L Hybrid Vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3366 Removal and Installation All vehicles NOTE: The accelerator pedal and sensor assembly on the 2.5L and 3.0L are similar in appearance to the 2.5L Hybrid but are not interchangeable. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2.5L and 3.0L vehicles 2. Remove the 3 self-tapping screws and the accelerator pedal and sensor assembly. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 2.5L Hybrid vehicles 3. Remove the 3 bolts and the accelerator pedal and sensor assembly. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). All vehicles 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3370 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3371 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 2-Track APP Sensor Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose TSB 11-3-5 03/15/11 3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner housing. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-12. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose TSB 11-3-5 03/15/11 3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner housing. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-12. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Intake Air System Components - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3392 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3393 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals. Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3394 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3395 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Check Fuel Cap Indicator The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines there is a concern in the EVAP system due to the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe not being sealed correctly. This is detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank after a fueling event. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3407 Fuel Injector Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3408 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Spring Lock Couplings Spring Lock Couplings Disconnect WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector. NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube spring lock coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the safety clip from the spring lock coupling. 4. Insert the Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool onto the fuel tube and into the spring lock coupling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3413 5. Separate the spring lock coupling from the fuel tube. Connect 1. Clean and inspect the fuel tube and spring lock coupling. - Lubricate the end of the fuel tube with clean engine oil. 2. Install the spring lock coupling onto the fuel tube until fully seated. 3. Pull on the spring lock coupling to make sure it is correctly locked onto the fuel tube. 4. Install the safety clip onto the spring lock coupling. 5. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3414 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Coupling Quick Connect Coupling Disconnect - Type I WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector. NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes. NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components which may cause fuel leaks. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube. - Press the quick connect coupling release button and separate the quick connect coupling from the tube. Connect - Type I 1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals. NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To make sure that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3415 Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. Disconnect - Type II WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector. NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes. NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components which may cause fuel leaks. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Rotate the lock tab on the quick connect coupling. 3. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the fitting. - Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate from the fitting. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3416 Connect - Type II 1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals. Rotate the lock tab and install the quick connect coupling onto the fitting. 2. NOTE: Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the tube. To make sure that the fuel tube is fully seated, pull on the tube. Release the lock tab into the latched position. 3. Connect the battery ground cable. Disconnect - Type III WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector. NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes. NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components which may cause fuel leaks. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3417 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. NOTE: Carefully release the lock tab to avoid breakage. Release the quick connect coupling primary lock tab. 4. Rotate the primary lock tab to the fully unlocked position and squeeze the secondary lock tabs to release the locking mechanism. 5. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube. - Push the locking mechanism outward and separate the quick connect coupling from the tube. Connect - Type III 1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals. NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing it into the quick connect coupling. To make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated. 2. NOTE: Make sure the retainer clip clicks into place when installing. Depress the retainer clip until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3418 3. NOTE: To make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the quick connect coupling. Rotate the primary locking tab to the closed position. 4. Connect the battery ground cable. Disconnect - Type IV WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector. NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes. NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components which may cause fuel leaks. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Squeeze the quick connect coupling retainer clip tabs to release the locking mechanism. 4. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube. - Push the locking mechanism outward to release the quick connect coupling. - Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate it from the tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3419 Connect - Type IV 1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals. NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To make sure that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube. Connect the quick connect coupling to the tube. 1. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated. 2. Depress the locking tab until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3423 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)............................................................................................................... .........................................................379 kPa (55 psi) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3428 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Pressure Test WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L engines do not have a Schrader valve. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Vehicles with 2.5L engine 3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine 5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3429 6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve. Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine 7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube. All vehicles 9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system pressure. Install the FP fuse. 10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool. Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional information, refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Control Module Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur. Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3436 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail Fuel Rail Removal WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Clean all fuel residue from the engine compartment. If not removed, fuel residue may ignite when the engine is returned to operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the upper intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 5. Release the 4 wire harness pin-type retainers from the fuel rail. 6. Release the engine wire harness and the fuel charging wire harness pin-type retainers from the fuel rail. 7. Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors. 8. Remove the 4 fuel rail bolts. 9. Remove the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly. 10. Remove the 6 clips and the fuel injectors. - Remove and discard the 12 fuel injector O-ring seals. Installation 1. NOTICE: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. Use of ordinary O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak. Do not reuse the O-ring seals. NOTE: The upper and lower fuel injector O-ring seals are similar in appearance, but are not interchangeable. NOTE: Install new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine oil. Install the 6 fuel injectors and clips on the fuel rail. 2. Position the fuel rail and install the bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Connect the engine wire harness and the fuel charging wire harness pin-type retainers to the fuel rail. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 3441 4. Connect the 4 wire harness pin-type retainers to the fuel rail. 5. Connect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 6. Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors. 7. Install the upper intake manifold. 8. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 3442 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail and Fuel Injector - Exploded View Fuel Rail and Fuel Injector - Exploded View Fuel Rail NOTE: Early build shown, late build similar. Fuel Injector NOTE: Early build shown, late build similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 3443 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3448 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3449 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3450 Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Lines Fuel Lines Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. All vehicles 1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the fuel system pressure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3451 3. Disconnect the battery ground cable. Hybrid vehicles 4. Remove the front and rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet lines. All vehicles 5. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tubes after releasing the fuel system pressure. Upon disconnecting or removing any fuel tubes, carefully drain any residual fuel into a suitable container. Disconnect the fuel supply jumper tube-to-fuel supply tube quick connect coupling. 6. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-vapor tube quick connect coupling. 7. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 8. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. 9. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge tube-to-vapor tube quick connect coupling (part of 9E857). 10. Release the 7 fuel tube bundle retainer clips and remove the fuel supply and vapor tubes. 11. Disconnect the fresh air tube from the EVAP canister. 12. Release the 4 pin-type retainer clips and remove the fresh air tube. 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3457 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3458 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3459 Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. 5. Remove the 2 fuel tank filler pipe flange screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 6. Remove the LR wheel and tire. 7. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tank filler pipe. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Release the clamp and remove the fuel tank filler pipe hose from the fuel tank. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 9. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe assembly. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module Engine Control Components Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 3464 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir Engine Control Components Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3467 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3468 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3469 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3470 7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3474 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module Fuel Tank Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module Engine Control Components Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 3477 Fuel Tank Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir Engine Control Components Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3481 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Note: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned, also some IAC valves are normally open and others are normally closed. Some IAC valves require engine vacuum to operate. The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: - no touch start - cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up - idle (corrects for engine load) - stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) - over-temperature idle boost Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3488 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3489 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel cone held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the cone breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch. Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3490 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch 1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Intake Air System Components - Exploded View Intake Air System Components - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View > Page 3495 Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube quick connect coupling from the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2. Release the ACL outlet pipe retainer from the ACL housing. 3. Loosen the 2 clamps and remove the ACL outlet pipe. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 4. NOTE: The ACL outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering the engine. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3499 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3500 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Control Module Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur. Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3508 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3512 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3513 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3518 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3519 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 2-Track APP Sensor Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3523 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3524 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals. Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3525 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3526 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3530 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3534 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3538 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3539 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel cone held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the cone breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch. Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3540 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch 1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 3546 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Engine Control Components Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Throttle Body: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 Throttle Body: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 TSB 09-23-5 11/30/09 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P2135 - BUILT BETWEEN 6/22/2009-10/15/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion, Milan, Fusion Hybrid, and Milan Hybrid vehicles, built on or between 6/22/2009 - 10/15/2009, may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or wrench light with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P2135. DTCs P2111 and/or P0122 may also be present. Drivability symptoms may include intermittent rough idle, idle speed below specification and/or reduced power. This concern may be attributed to Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) hardware. If the vehicle only exhibits DTCs P2111 or P0122 follow normal Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test (PPT) diagnostics. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check for DTCs and confirm vehicle build date. Is DTC P2135 present and vehicle built on or between 6/22/2009-10/15/2009? a. Yes - proceed to Step 2. b. No - Procedure does not apply. Refer to PC/ED PPT DV for appropriate diagnostic routines. 2. Replace the ETB per the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092305A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations) 092305A 2010 Fusion, Fusion 0.6 Hr. Hybrid, Milan, Milan Hybrid 2.5L Engine: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Throttle Body: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 3555 Other Operations) 092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr. Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9E926 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Body: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 Throttle Body: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 TSB 09-23-5 11/30/09 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P2135 - BUILT BETWEEN 6/22/2009-10/15/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion, Milan, Fusion Hybrid, and Milan Hybrid vehicles, built on or between 6/22/2009 - 10/15/2009, may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or wrench light with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P2135. DTCs P2111 and/or P0122 may also be present. Drivability symptoms may include intermittent rough idle, idle speed below specification and/or reduced power. This concern may be attributed to Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) hardware. If the vehicle only exhibits DTCs P2111 or P0122 follow normal Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test (PPT) diagnostics. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check for DTCs and confirm vehicle build date. Is DTC P2135 present and vehicle built on or between 6/22/2009-10/15/2009? a. Yes - proceed to Step 2. b. No - Procedure does not apply. Refer to PC/ED PPT DV for appropriate diagnostic routines. 2. Replace the ETB per the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092305A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations) 092305A 2010 Fusion, Fusion 0.6 Hr. Hybrid, Milan, Milan Hybrid 2.5L Engine: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Body: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 3561 Other Operations) 092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr. Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9E926 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3562 Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2. Disconnect the electronic throttle control electrical connector. 3. Remove the 4 bolts and the Throttle Body (TB). - Discard the TB gasket. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new TB gasket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 3568 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Engine Control Components Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Induction Control Actuator: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV) WARNING Substantial opening and closing torque is applied by this system. To prevent injury, be careful to keep fingers away from lever mechanisms when actuated. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. The IMTV is a motorized actuated unit mounted directly to the intake manifold. The IMTV actuator controls a shutter device attached to the actuator shaft. There is no monitor input to the PCM with this system to indicate shutter position. The motorized IMTV unit is not energized below a calibrated RPM. The shutter is in the closed position to prevent airflow blend from occurring in the intake manifold. The motorized unit is energized above a calibrated RPM. The motorized unit is commanded on by the PCM initially at a 100 percent duty cycle to move the shutter to the open position, and then falling to approximately 50 percent to continue to hold the shutter open. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Firing Order.......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 3578 Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification Engine Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3583 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3586 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3587 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3588 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3592 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3593 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3594 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3595 4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3600 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3601 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3602 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3603 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3604 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3605 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3606 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coil on Plug (COP) Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil on Plug (COP) Engine Control Components Coil On Plug (COP) The COP ignition operates similar to a standard coil pack ignition except each plug has one coil per plug. The COP has 3 different modes of operation: engine crank, engine running, and CMP failure mode effects management (FMEM). For additional information, refer to Ignition Systems See: Description and Operation/Ignition Systems. Typical Coil On Plug (COP) Typical Coil On Plug (COP) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coil on Plug (COP) > Page 3609 Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil Pack Engine Control Components Coil Pack The PCM provides a grounding switch for the coil primary circuit. When the switch is closed, voltage is applied to the coil primary circuit. This creates a magnetic field around the primary coil. The PCM opens the switch, causing the magnetic field to collapse, inducing the high voltage in the secondary coil windings and firing the spark plug. The spark plugs are paired so that as one spark plug fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil is fired the order is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing order. Coil packs come in 4-tower, 6-tower horizontal and 6-tower series 5 models. Two adjacent coil towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair. For 6-tower coil pack (6 cylinder) applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2 and 6, and 3 and 4. For 4-tower coil pack (4 cylinder) applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 4 and 2 and 3. When the coil is fired by the PCM, spark is delivered through the matched pair towers to their respective spark plugs. The spark plugs are fired simultaneously and are paired so that as one fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil is fired, the situation is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing order. Typical Four-Tower Coil Pack Typical Four-Tower Coil Pack Typical Six-Tower Coil Pack Typical Six-Tower Coil Pack Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3612 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3613 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil-On-Plug Ignition Coil-On-Plug Removal and Installation LH side 1. Remove the air cleaner. RH side 2. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH ignition coils only. Remove the upper intake manifold. Both sides 3. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 4. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the bolts and the ignition coils. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before attaching to the spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3614 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3615 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3616 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition RH Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3617 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3622 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3625 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3626 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3627 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Removal Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS) 1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the KS. Engine block-mounted KS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3628 3. Remove the lower intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector. 5. Remove the bolt and the KS. Installation Engine block-mounted KS 1. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 2. Connect the KS electrical connector. 3. Install the lower intake manifold. Cylinder head-mounted KS 4. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Connect the KS electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3634 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3637 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3638 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3639 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3643 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3644 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3645 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3646 4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 3656 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 3662 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3663 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be replaced. 1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3668 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3671 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3672 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3673 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS) Removal Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS) 1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the KS. Engine block-mounted KS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3674 3. Remove the lower intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector. 5. Remove the bolt and the KS. Installation Engine block-mounted KS 1. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 2. Connect the KS electrical connector. 3. Install the lower intake manifold. Cylinder head-mounted KS 4. Install the KS and the bolt. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Connect the KS electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Spark plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.15-1.25 mm (0.045-0.048 in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 3679 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications Spark plugs........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................15 Nm (133 lb-in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3680 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ ....................................................................CGSF-22F Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3681 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. - Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. - Install a new spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. - Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. - Correct the oil leak concern. - Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. - Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3682 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. - Install new spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3685 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3686 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs Spark Plugs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug. 2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 3. Inspect the spark plugs. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the gap as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3687 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3688 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3689 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition RH Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition LH Engine Ignition RH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3690 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3697 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3700 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3701 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3702 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3703 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3704 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3705 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3706 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3707 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3708 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3709 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3710 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3711 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3712 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3713 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3714 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3715 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3716 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3717 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3718 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3719 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3720 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3724 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3727 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3728 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3729 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3730 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3731 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3732 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3733 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3734 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3735 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3736 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3737 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3738 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3739 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3740 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3741 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3742 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3743 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3744 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3745 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3746 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3747 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3751 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3754 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3755 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3756 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3757 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3758 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3759 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3760 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3761 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3762 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3763 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3764 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3765 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3766 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3767 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3768 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3769 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3770 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3771 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3772 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3773 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3774 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Column Shift) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Floor Shift) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6F35 Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3791 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3792 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3793 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3794 locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 8. Position the main control cover in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3795 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3796 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. 3.0L Engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3797 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 TSB 09-8-6 05/04/09 6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706, P0707, P1702 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before 10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707, P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR. 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9. 2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS connector from the solenoid body lead frame. 3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor wires during the installation of the main control. 4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr. 2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 3806 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 3812 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 TSB 09-8-6 05/04/09 6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706, P0707, P1702 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before 10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707, P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR. 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9. 2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS connector from the solenoid body lead frame. 3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor wires during the installation of the main control. 4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr. 2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 3817 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 3823 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3824 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3825 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor 6F35 Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3828 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor 6F35 Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3829 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3830 11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3831 Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly Of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3832 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3833 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3834 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability Technical Service Bulletin # 10B15 Date: 100419 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3847 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on April 19, 2010. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by April 19, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by May 31, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3848 If the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that complete transmission overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a Cost Cap Analysis using the Cost Cap Tool found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter. This refund offer expires October 31, 2010. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the date of the Owner Notification Letter. There is no expiration date for emergency repair refunds. Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with low regulated fluid pressure to transmission clutches (burnt or slipping) and/or replacement of the transmission valve body. RENTAL VEHICLES In most cases, a rental vehicle will not be required. If a customer's vehicle requires a transmission repair and it is necessary to order parts, Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee next day delivery. Prior approval for additional rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 10B15 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ For rental vehicle claiming, follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through April 30, 2011. There is no mileage limit for this program. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3849 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Note: Less than 2% of the affected vehicles are expected to require parts. To manage part availability, dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center parts order line (except for transmission fluid and silicone sealant). Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for any of the parts in the chart below please be prepared to provide Dealer P&A; Code, VIN, and Mileage. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3850 In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission solenoid regulator valve bore may wear. The function of a solenoid regulator is to provide regulated pressure to shift solenoids. Wear in the solenoid regulator bore causes low clutch pressure and results in transmission slips/harsh shifts. Continued driving with this condition may cause premature wear on the clutches. This may eventually lead to a loss of 4th through 6th gears and ultimately loss of transmission function. This service action will reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration. This calibration will reposition the solenoid regulator valve to eliminate bore wear. A flowchart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. SERVICE PROCEDURE MODULE REPROGRAMMING NOTE: Reprogramming concerns! errors may be caused by the following: ^ Data Link Connector (DLC) or Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) becoming disconnected. ^ Allowing the IDS to enter any type of sleep mode. ^ Using a wireless IDS to VCM connection. ^ Low voltage on the IDS laptop. ^ Low voltage in the vehicle battery (use of a battery charger is recommended). If you encounter reprogramming concerns, DO NOT DELETE the session. If the original session has accidentally been deleted, recover the original session from the IDS "TRASH CAN" (located in the lower right corner of the previous session screen) and continue to reprogram. 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Verify that the IDS is updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3851 3. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 4. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 5. Select Module Reprogramming and then select PCM. Touch the tick. 6. NOTE: If the IDS states there are no updates available, either the IDS has not been updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher, or the PCM has already been reprogrammed. A screen will appear stating a later PCM calibration is available. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the PCM to the latest calibration. 7. After the PCM has been reprogrammed, inspect the vehicle's odometer for mileage: ^ If the mileage is LESS THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), remove the IDS. This service procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary. ^ If the mileage is MORE THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), leave the IDS connected to the vehicle and proceed to Step 8. TRANSMISSION LOAD TEST WARNING: Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake to reduce the risk of vehicle movement during this procedure Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 8. NOTE: In order to perform a valid Transmission Load Test, Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) must be between 185-200° F (85-93° C). Using the IDS, make sure the Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) is at an operating temperature of 185-200° F (85-93° C). If the TFT is BELOW 185-200° F (85-93° C), perform the following: ^ With the vehicle's brakes applied, start the engine. ^ Place the gear selector in D, bring the engine up to 1500 rpm and hold for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in R and bring the engine up to 1500 rpm for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute. ^ Repeat this procedure until the vehicle's TFT is 185-200° F (85-93° C). 9. Perform the Transmission Load Test: NOTE: Conduct this test after the PCM has been reprogrammed. Make sure that the engine coolant and transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature and fluid levels are correct. 1. Block all wheels, set the parking brake, and firmly apply the service brakes. 2. Turn off Traction Control if equipped 3. Set the IDS to record engine rpm and TSS_SRC rpm. 4. Place the gear selector in D. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3852 5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold the pedal just long enough to let the engine get to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and observe the TSS_SRC rpm (it should be at ZERO when engine speed has reached maximum rpm). While performing this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5 seconds. See Figure 2. After the test, place the gear selector in N and run the engine at 1,000 rpm for 15 seconds to cool the torque converter. 10. If the TSS_SRC rpm was ZERO during the Transmission Load Test, then this service procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary. If the TSS_SRC rpm was MORE than ZERO (transmission slipping) during the Transmission Load Test, then proceed to Attachment IV for transmission repair. Table of Contents TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE Pan and Tool Requirements Transaxle Removal Transaxle Disassembly Main Control Valve Body Replacement Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4, 5, 6) Disassembly and Assembly Filter Removal and Replacement Transaxle Assembly Transaxle Installation and Post Test Part and Tool Requirements TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE This transmission repair procedure involves installing a new transmission valve body and clutch packs in the Overdrive/Direct (O/D) and forward clutch assemblies. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3853 PART AND TOOL REQUIREMENTS NOTE: Special tools that are needed for this portion of the service procedure are as follows: ^ Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 or equivalent ^ Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566 ^ Torque Converter Handle # 307-091 ^ Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Drive Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 ^ Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2 ^ Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002 or equivalent ^ Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 ^ Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 ^ Suitable Depth Gauge Transaxle Removal 1. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle For additional information refer to the appropriate WSM Section 307. Transaxle Disassembly If the technician determines that the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that a complete overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a cost cap analysis using the cost cap tool found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website. If the cost cap tool states "Repair", contact the Special Service Support Center (SSSC) with the repair estimate (parts and labor at warranty prices) Be prepared to provide the dealership's P/A code and have the repair order, which contains the VIN and mileage of the vehicle. If the cost cap tool states "Replace" continue with the Transmission Prior Approval request, make sure to select FSA on the main menu. 1. Install the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 onto the transaxle. 2. Using the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture. 3. Remove the Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566. 4. Install the Torque Converter Handle # 307-091. 5. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using Torque Converter Handle #307-091,remove the torque converter from the transaxle. 6. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3854 Remove the 13 bolts and the main control cover. See Figure 1. 7. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connectors. See Figure 2. 8. Remove and discard the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. See Figure 3. 9. NOTE: Record the location of the short and long main control Torx(R) bolts for reassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3855 Remove the nut and the 22 Torx(R) bolts and remove the main control assembly. See Figure 4. 10. Remove and discard the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 11. Remove and discard the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seals. See Figure 5. 1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal. 2. Low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3856 12. Remove the internal cooler bypass spring, sleeve and valve. See Figure 6. 13. Remove the bolt and the 055 sensor. See Figure 7. 14. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolt for assembly. Remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts. 15. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. 16. Remove the loose torque converter housing from the transaxle case Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3857 17. Remove the No 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 8. 18. Remove the differential. See Figure 9. 19. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. 20. Remove the No. 13 thrust washer. See Figure 10. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3858 21. Remove the No 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 11. 22. Simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain. 23. Remove the No 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 12. 24. Remove the No 10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 13. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3859 25. Remove the 2 bolts and the lube funnel hold down bracket. See Figure 14. 26. Remove the transmission fluid baffle. See Figure 15. 27. Remove the park pawl pin and spring. See Figure 16. 28. Remove the park pawl. 29. NOTE: The forward (1 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring is beveled. The beveled side of the snap ring goes up (flat side down). NOTE: The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap faces the front of the transmission. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3860 Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. See Figure 17. 30. Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate, clutch pack, and wave spring. 31. Remove the front sun gear and shell assembly See Figure 18. 32. Remove the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 19. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3861 33. Remove the No 7 and No 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 20. 1. No 7 thrust bearing 2. No. 8 thrust bearing 34. Remove the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 21. 35. Remove the center planetary sun gear. 36. Remove the No 5 and No 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 22. 1. No. 5 thrust bearing 2. No. 6 thrust bearing 37. Remove the center support assembly. See Figure 23. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3862 38. Remove the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly See Figure 24. 39. Remove the low/reverse wave spring, clutch pack and pressure plate. See Figure 25. 40. Remove the low One-Way Clutch (OWC). See Figure 26. 41. NOTE: The intermediate (2, 6) clutch is removed with the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly. Remove the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly and remove the intermediate (2, 6) clutch from the assembly. See Figure 27. 42. Remove the pressure plate and the wave spring. 43. Remove the No 3 thrust bearing. See Figure 28. 44. Remove the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. 45. NOTE: If the No. 1 thrust bearing is stuck to the overdrive/direct clutch assembly remove the No. 1 thrust bearing from the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3863 Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing. See Figure 29. 46. Remove and discard the 5 clutch feed seals. See Figure 30. Main Control Valve Body Replacement Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3864 1. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the main control valve body from the solenoid body. See Figure 31. 2. Remove and discard the separator plate from the solenoid body. Install the new separator plate from the new main control valve body. 3. Position the new main control valve body on the solenoid body assembly and install the 2 bolts. See Figure 32. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4,5,6) Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the Overdrive (O/D) (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3865 2. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub, No 2 thrust bearing See Figure 33. 3. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. See Figure 33. 4. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate and discard the clutch pack. See Figure 33. 5. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor 30758412 on the balance piston. 6. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and remove the snap ring. See Figure 34. 7. Remove the Overdrive Clutch Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307584/2. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3866 8. Remove and discard the balance piston See Figure 35. 9. Remove the O/D (4, 5 6) piston return spring. See Figure 36. 10. Install the No.1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 37. 11. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3867 12. Apply compressed air to the O/D (4 5, 6) clutch piston port and remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston. See Figure 38. 13. Remove the O/D/direct clutch assembly from the transaxle case. 14. Remove and discard the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal from the O/D/direct clutch assembly. See Figure 39. 15. Remove and discard the 2 seals from the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3868 16. Install 2 new seals on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston and lubricate the seals with petroleum jelly. See Figure 40. 17. Install a new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal and lubricate the seal with petroleum jelly. See Figure 41. 18. Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston in place. 19. Using the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston, and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911,install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston into the O/D/direct clutch assembly by hand. See Figure 42. 20. NOTE: Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring with the holes facing upward Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3869 21. Lubricate the seals on the new balance piston and position the balance piston in place. See Figure 43. 22. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 30758412 on the balance piston. 23. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and install the snap ring. See Figure 44. 24. Remove the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307589/1 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3870 25. Install the No 2 thrust bearing. See Figure 45. 26. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. See Figure 46. 27. Soak the new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 47. 28. Install the new O/D (4. 5, 6) clutch pack. 29. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. 30. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3871 31. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case, install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator and position the plunger on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the Dial Indicator. The clearance should be between 0.950 mm (0.037 in) and 1.778 mm (0.07 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack for correct installation. See Figure 48. 32. Remove Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002, O/D/direct clutch assembly and the No. 1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. Filter Removal and Replacement 1. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil baffle from the torque converter housing. See Figure 49. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3872 2. NOTE: Record the location of the 6mm bolt for assembly Remove the 9 bolts and the pump and filter assembly. See Figure 50. 3. Remove filter from the pump. making note of the orientation of the fluid filter to the fluid pump. See Figure 51. 4. Remove the magnet from the filter. 5. Install the magnet on the filter. 6. Install the filter. A. Position the filter on the pump. B. Rotate the filter counterclockwise 90 degrees. 7. Install the pump and filter assembly in the torque converter housing and install the pump bolts. See Figure 52. A. Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3873 B. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. Install the transmission fluid baffle and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Transaxle Assembly 1. Clean the silicone from the transaxle case-to-torque converter housing sealing surface and the main control cover sealing surface. 2. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up or damage to the transaxle can occur Install the No. 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up. See Figure 53. 3. Install the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. 4. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down or damage to the transaxle can occur Install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down. See Figure 54. 5. Install the direct/intermediate clutch hub and rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3874 6. Install the intermediate (2, 6) wave spring assembly. See Figure 55. 7. Soak the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly in clean transmission fluid See Figure 56. 8. Install the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly, temporarily reversing the top friction and steel plates for the clutch stack-up measurement. 9. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3875 10. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the top of the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack at 3 different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement A. See Figure 57. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3876 11. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the transaxle case step above the intermediate (2, 6) clutch Record this as measurement B. See Figure 58. 12. Subtract measurement B from measurement A. The clearance should be between 0.240 mm (0009 in) and 260 mm (0.102 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the intermediate (2,6) clutch pack for correct installation. If the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack is correctly installed, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack. 13. NOTE: When the intermediate (2, 6) clutch is correctly installed, a friction plate is on top. Remove the top intermediate (2, 6) clutch friction and steel plate and correctly install the plates back in the transaxle case. 14. Install the One-Way Clutch (OWC) assembly. 15. Install the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly. 16. NOTE: The position of the low/reverse pressure plate is important. When installing the center support, the long support legs must fit through the low/reverse pressure plate and rest on the OWC. Position the low/reverse pressure plate so that the center support legs fit through the pressure plate and rest on the OWC and install the low/reverse pressure plate. See Figure 59. 17. Soak the original low/reverse clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 60. 18. Align the low/reverse clutch pack with the pressure plate and install it in the transaxle case, temporarily reversing the wave spring and top steel plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3877 19. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the side of the center support with the long support legs. See Figure 61. 20. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the contact surface of the low/reverse clutch piston Record this as measurement A. See Figure 62. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3878 21. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the leg surface of the center support Record this as measurement B. See Figure 63. 22. Subtract measurement B from measurement A and record as measurement C. 23. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case. 24. Using a suitable depth micrometer measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the top of the OWC Record this as measurement D. See Figure 64. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3879 25. Using a suitable depth gauge measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307300 to the top of the low/reverse clutch at 3 different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement E. See Figure 65. 26. Subtract measurement E from measurement D and record as measurement F. 27. Subtract measurement F from measurement C to get the low/reverse clutch clearance. The clearance should be between 0.406 mm (0.015 in) and 2.000 mm (0.078 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the low/reverse clutch pack for correct installation. If the low/reverse clutch pack is still out of range, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the low/reverse clutch pack. 28. NOTE: When the low/reverse clutch is correctly installed, the wave spring is on top. Remove the top low/reverse clutch steel plate and wave spring and correctly install the plates back in the transaxle case. 29. NOTE: Make sure the center support is installed with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes facing the front of the transaxle case. Improper alignment will cause transmission failure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3880 Install the center support with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes aligned with the feed holes in the transaxle case. See Figure 66. 1. Long center support legs face down. 2. Feed holes face the front of the transaxle case. 30. Install the No. 5 and No. 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 67. 1. No. 5 thrust bearing 2. No. 6 thrust bearing 31. Install the center planetary sun gear. See Figure 68. 32. Install the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 68. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3881 33. Install the No. 7 and No. 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 69. 1. No. 7 thrust bearing 2. No. 8 thrust bearing 34. Install the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 70. 35. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch wave spring See Figure 70 36. Soak the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 71. 37. Install the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack. 38. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate. NOTICE: Be sure to install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side facing down or the snap ring can come loose causing damage to the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3882 Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side down with the gap facing the front of the transaxle. See Figure 72. 1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. 2. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap. 40. Using a suitable tool, seat the snap ring in the snap ring groove. See Figure 73. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3883 41. Install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator on the transaxle case and position the plunger on the top forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch friction plate. See Figure 74. 42. Install new low/reverse and forward (1, 2, 3, 4) transaxle case-to-center support seals in the transaxle case. See Figure 75. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3884 43. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the dial indicator. The clearance should be between 0.076 mm (0.002 in) and 1.840 mm (0.072 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack for correct installation and the transaxle for correct assembly. See Figure 76. 44. Install the front planetary sun gear and shell assembly. 45. Install the No.10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 77. 46. Install the park pawl. 47. Install the park pawl pin and spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3885 48. Install the 5 new clutch feed seals. See Figure 78. 49. Position the transmission fluid baffle in place. 50. Install the lube funnel and position the alignment pin in the alignment hole. 51. Position the lube funnel hold-down bracket in place and install the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 52. Install the No. 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 79. 53. Simultaneously install the drive and driven sprocket and chain assembly Lightly tap on the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. 54. Install the No. 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 80. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3886 55. Install the No.13 thrust washer. See Figure 81. 56. Install the differential planetary sun gear. 57. Install the differential assembly. 58. Install the No. 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 82. 59. Install the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 on the input shaft. 60. Clean the torque converter housing sealing surface. 61. NOTE: Be sure the sealing surfaces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free of oil before applying silicone. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA-29 or equivalent) to the sealing surface of the transaxle case. 62. NOTE: Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as recorded during disassembly. Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 transaxle case-to-torque converter housing bolts. See Figure 83. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3887 1. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft) 2. Stud bolt location 63. Remove the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector 307-635. 64. Install the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 65. Assemble the internal cooler bypass valve in the sleeve and install the assembly in the case. See Figure 84. 1. Bypass valve. 2. Bypass valve sleeve 66. Install the internal cooler bypass valve spring. See Figure 85. 67. Install the new main control-to-transaxle separator plate and align it on the stud and the guide pin. 68. NOTE: Be sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3888 Position the main control assembly in place and align the manual valve on the TR sensor. Install the nut hand-tight. See Figure 86. 69. Install the short main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 87. 70. Install the long main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 88. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3889 71. Tighten the 22 main control Torx(R) bolts and the nut in a crisscross pattern. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 72. NOTE: Be sure the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal is installed with the holes facing up. Install the new solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. 73. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 74. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 75. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA 29 or equivalent) to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 76. Position the main control cover in place. 77. NOTE: Install the main control cover stud bolts in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the 13 main control cover bolts. See Figure 89. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 1. Bolt location 2. Stud bolt location 78. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using the Torque Converter Handle 307-091 install the torque converter. 79. Remove the Torque Converter Handle 3O7-091. 80. Install the Torque Converter Retainer 307-566. 81. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture. 82. Remove the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625. Transaxle Installation and Post Test 1. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to the appropriate WSM, Section 307. 2. Perform post test drive to verify transmission is operating correctly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3890 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3891 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability Technical Service Bulletin # 10B15 Date: 100419 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3918 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on April 19, 2010. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by April 19, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by May 31, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3919 If the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that complete transmission overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a Cost Cap Analysis using the Cost Cap Tool found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter. This refund offer expires October 31, 2010. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the date of the Owner Notification Letter. There is no expiration date for emergency repair refunds. Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with low regulated fluid pressure to transmission clutches (burnt or slipping) and/or replacement of the transmission valve body. RENTAL VEHICLES In most cases, a rental vehicle will not be required. If a customer's vehicle requires a transmission repair and it is necessary to order parts, Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee next day delivery. Prior approval for additional rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 10B15 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ For rental vehicle claiming, follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through April 30, 2011. There is no mileage limit for this program. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3920 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Note: Less than 2% of the affected vehicles are expected to require parts. To manage part availability, dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center parts order line (except for transmission fluid and silicone sealant). Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for any of the parts in the chart below please be prepared to provide Dealer P&A; Code, VIN, and Mileage. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3921 In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission solenoid regulator valve bore may wear. The function of a solenoid regulator is to provide regulated pressure to shift solenoids. Wear in the solenoid regulator bore causes low clutch pressure and results in transmission slips/harsh shifts. Continued driving with this condition may cause premature wear on the clutches. This may eventually lead to a loss of 4th through 6th gears and ultimately loss of transmission function. This service action will reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration. This calibration will reposition the solenoid regulator valve to eliminate bore wear. A flowchart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. SERVICE PROCEDURE MODULE REPROGRAMMING NOTE: Reprogramming concerns! errors may be caused by the following: ^ Data Link Connector (DLC) or Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) becoming disconnected. ^ Allowing the IDS to enter any type of sleep mode. ^ Using a wireless IDS to VCM connection. ^ Low voltage on the IDS laptop. ^ Low voltage in the vehicle battery (use of a battery charger is recommended). If you encounter reprogramming concerns, DO NOT DELETE the session. If the original session has accidentally been deleted, recover the original session from the IDS "TRASH CAN" (located in the lower right corner of the previous session screen) and continue to reprogram. 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Verify that the IDS is updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3922 3. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 4. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 5. Select Module Reprogramming and then select PCM. Touch the tick. 6. NOTE: If the IDS states there are no updates available, either the IDS has not been updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher, or the PCM has already been reprogrammed. A screen will appear stating a later PCM calibration is available. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the PCM to the latest calibration. 7. After the PCM has been reprogrammed, inspect the vehicle's odometer for mileage: ^ If the mileage is LESS THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), remove the IDS. This service procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary. ^ If the mileage is MORE THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), leave the IDS connected to the vehicle and proceed to Step 8. TRANSMISSION LOAD TEST WARNING: Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake to reduce the risk of vehicle movement during this procedure Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 8. NOTE: In order to perform a valid Transmission Load Test, Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) must be between 185-200° F (85-93° C). Using the IDS, make sure the Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) is at an operating temperature of 185-200° F (85-93° C). If the TFT is BELOW 185-200° F (85-93° C), perform the following: ^ With the vehicle's brakes applied, start the engine. ^ Place the gear selector in D, bring the engine up to 1500 rpm and hold for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in R and bring the engine up to 1500 rpm for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute. ^ Repeat this procedure until the vehicle's TFT is 185-200° F (85-93° C). 9. Perform the Transmission Load Test: NOTE: Conduct this test after the PCM has been reprogrammed. Make sure that the engine coolant and transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature and fluid levels are correct. 1. Block all wheels, set the parking brake, and firmly apply the service brakes. 2. Turn off Traction Control if equipped 3. Set the IDS to record engine rpm and TSS_SRC rpm. 4. Place the gear selector in D. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3923 5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold the pedal just long enough to let the engine get to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and observe the TSS_SRC rpm (it should be at ZERO when engine speed has reached maximum rpm). While performing this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5 seconds. See Figure 2. After the test, place the gear selector in N and run the engine at 1,000 rpm for 15 seconds to cool the torque converter. 10. If the TSS_SRC rpm was ZERO during the Transmission Load Test, then this service procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary. If the TSS_SRC rpm was MORE than ZERO (transmission slipping) during the Transmission Load Test, then proceed to Attachment IV for transmission repair. Table of Contents TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE Pan and Tool Requirements Transaxle Removal Transaxle Disassembly Main Control Valve Body Replacement Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4, 5, 6) Disassembly and Assembly Filter Removal and Replacement Transaxle Assembly Transaxle Installation and Post Test Part and Tool Requirements TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE This transmission repair procedure involves installing a new transmission valve body and clutch packs in the Overdrive/Direct (O/D) and forward clutch assemblies. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3924 PART AND TOOL REQUIREMENTS NOTE: Special tools that are needed for this portion of the service procedure are as follows: ^ Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 or equivalent ^ Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566 ^ Torque Converter Handle # 307-091 ^ Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Drive Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 ^ Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2 ^ Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002 or equivalent ^ Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 ^ Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 ^ Suitable Depth Gauge Transaxle Removal 1. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle For additional information refer to the appropriate WSM Section 307. Transaxle Disassembly If the technician determines that the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that a complete overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a cost cap analysis using the cost cap tool found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website. If the cost cap tool states "Repair", contact the Special Service Support Center (SSSC) with the repair estimate (parts and labor at warranty prices) Be prepared to provide the dealership's P/A code and have the repair order, which contains the VIN and mileage of the vehicle. If the cost cap tool states "Replace" continue with the Transmission Prior Approval request, make sure to select FSA on the main menu. 1. Install the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 onto the transaxle. 2. Using the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture. 3. Remove the Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566. 4. Install the Torque Converter Handle # 307-091. 5. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using Torque Converter Handle #307-091,remove the torque converter from the transaxle. 6. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3925 Remove the 13 bolts and the main control cover. See Figure 1. 7. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connectors. See Figure 2. 8. Remove and discard the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. See Figure 3. 9. NOTE: Record the location of the short and long main control Torx(R) bolts for reassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3926 Remove the nut and the 22 Torx(R) bolts and remove the main control assembly. See Figure 4. 10. Remove and discard the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 11. Remove and discard the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seals. See Figure 5. 1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal. 2. Low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3927 12. Remove the internal cooler bypass spring, sleeve and valve. See Figure 6. 13. Remove the bolt and the 055 sensor. See Figure 7. 14. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolt for assembly. Remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts. 15. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. 16. Remove the loose torque converter housing from the transaxle case Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3928 17. Remove the No 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 8. 18. Remove the differential. See Figure 9. 19. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. 20. Remove the No. 13 thrust washer. See Figure 10. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3929 21. Remove the No 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 11. 22. Simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain. 23. Remove the No 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 12. 24. Remove the No 10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 13. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3930 25. Remove the 2 bolts and the lube funnel hold down bracket. See Figure 14. 26. Remove the transmission fluid baffle. See Figure 15. 27. Remove the park pawl pin and spring. See Figure 16. 28. Remove the park pawl. 29. NOTE: The forward (1 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring is beveled. The beveled side of the snap ring goes up (flat side down). NOTE: The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap faces the front of the transmission. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3931 Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. See Figure 17. 30. Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate, clutch pack, and wave spring. 31. Remove the front sun gear and shell assembly See Figure 18. 32. Remove the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 19. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3932 33. Remove the No 7 and No 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 20. 1. No 7 thrust bearing 2. No. 8 thrust bearing 34. Remove the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 21. 35. Remove the center planetary sun gear. 36. Remove the No 5 and No 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 22. 1. No. 5 thrust bearing 2. No. 6 thrust bearing 37. Remove the center support assembly. See Figure 23. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3933 38. Remove the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly See Figure 24. 39. Remove the low/reverse wave spring, clutch pack and pressure plate. See Figure 25. 40. Remove the low One-Way Clutch (OWC). See Figure 26. 41. NOTE: The intermediate (2, 6) clutch is removed with the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly. Remove the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly and remove the intermediate (2, 6) clutch from the assembly. See Figure 27. 42. Remove the pressure plate and the wave spring. 43. Remove the No 3 thrust bearing. See Figure 28. 44. Remove the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. 45. NOTE: If the No. 1 thrust bearing is stuck to the overdrive/direct clutch assembly remove the No. 1 thrust bearing from the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3934 Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing. See Figure 29. 46. Remove and discard the 5 clutch feed seals. See Figure 30. Main Control Valve Body Replacement Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3935 1. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the main control valve body from the solenoid body. See Figure 31. 2. Remove and discard the separator plate from the solenoid body. Install the new separator plate from the new main control valve body. 3. Position the new main control valve body on the solenoid body assembly and install the 2 bolts. See Figure 32. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4,5,6) Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the Overdrive (O/D) (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3936 2. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub, No 2 thrust bearing See Figure 33. 3. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. See Figure 33. 4. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate and discard the clutch pack. See Figure 33. 5. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor 30758412 on the balance piston. 6. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and remove the snap ring. See Figure 34. 7. Remove the Overdrive Clutch Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307584/2. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3937 8. Remove and discard the balance piston See Figure 35. 9. Remove the O/D (4, 5 6) piston return spring. See Figure 36. 10. Install the No.1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 37. 11. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3938 12. Apply compressed air to the O/D (4 5, 6) clutch piston port and remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston. See Figure 38. 13. Remove the O/D/direct clutch assembly from the transaxle case. 14. Remove and discard the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal from the O/D/direct clutch assembly. See Figure 39. 15. Remove and discard the 2 seals from the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3939 16. Install 2 new seals on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston and lubricate the seals with petroleum jelly. See Figure 40. 17. Install a new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal and lubricate the seal with petroleum jelly. See Figure 41. 18. Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston in place. 19. Using the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston, and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911,install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston into the O/D/direct clutch assembly by hand. See Figure 42. 20. NOTE: Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring with the holes facing upward Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3940 21. Lubricate the seals on the new balance piston and position the balance piston in place. See Figure 43. 22. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 30758412 on the balance piston. 23. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and install the snap ring. See Figure 44. 24. Remove the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307589/1 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3941 25. Install the No 2 thrust bearing. See Figure 45. 26. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. See Figure 46. 27. Soak the new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 47. 28. Install the new O/D (4. 5, 6) clutch pack. 29. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. 30. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3942 31. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case, install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator and position the plunger on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the Dial Indicator. The clearance should be between 0.950 mm (0.037 in) and 1.778 mm (0.07 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack for correct installation. See Figure 48. 32. Remove Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002, O/D/direct clutch assembly and the No. 1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. Filter Removal and Replacement 1. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil baffle from the torque converter housing. See Figure 49. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3943 2. NOTE: Record the location of the 6mm bolt for assembly Remove the 9 bolts and the pump and filter assembly. See Figure 50. 3. Remove filter from the pump. making note of the orientation of the fluid filter to the fluid pump. See Figure 51. 4. Remove the magnet from the filter. 5. Install the magnet on the filter. 6. Install the filter. A. Position the filter on the pump. B. Rotate the filter counterclockwise 90 degrees. 7. Install the pump and filter assembly in the torque converter housing and install the pump bolts. See Figure 52. A. Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3944 B. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. Install the transmission fluid baffle and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Transaxle Assembly 1. Clean the silicone from the transaxle case-to-torque converter housing sealing surface and the main control cover sealing surface. 2. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up or damage to the transaxle can occur Install the No. 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up. See Figure 53. 3. Install the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. 4. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down or damage to the transaxle can occur Install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down. See Figure 54. 5. Install the direct/intermediate clutch hub and rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3945 6. Install the intermediate (2, 6) wave spring assembly. See Figure 55. 7. Soak the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly in clean transmission fluid See Figure 56. 8. Install the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly, temporarily reversing the top friction and steel plates for the clutch stack-up measurement. 9. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3946 10. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the top of the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack at 3 different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement A. See Figure 57. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3947 11. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the transaxle case step above the intermediate (2, 6) clutch Record this as measurement B. See Figure 58. 12. Subtract measurement B from measurement A. The clearance should be between 0.240 mm (0009 in) and 260 mm (0.102 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the intermediate (2,6) clutch pack for correct installation. If the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack is correctly installed, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack. 13. NOTE: When the intermediate (2, 6) clutch is correctly installed, a friction plate is on top. Remove the top intermediate (2, 6) clutch friction and steel plate and correctly install the plates back in the transaxle case. 14. Install the One-Way Clutch (OWC) assembly. 15. Install the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly. 16. NOTE: The position of the low/reverse pressure plate is important. When installing the center support, the long support legs must fit through the low/reverse pressure plate and rest on the OWC. Position the low/reverse pressure plate so that the center support legs fit through the pressure plate and rest on the OWC and install the low/reverse pressure plate. See Figure 59. 17. Soak the original low/reverse clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 60. 18. Align the low/reverse clutch pack with the pressure plate and install it in the transaxle case, temporarily reversing the wave spring and top steel plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3948 19. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the side of the center support with the long support legs. See Figure 61. 20. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the contact surface of the low/reverse clutch piston Record this as measurement A. See Figure 62. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3949 21. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the leg surface of the center support Record this as measurement B. See Figure 63. 22. Subtract measurement B from measurement A and record as measurement C. 23. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case. 24. Using a suitable depth micrometer measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the top of the OWC Record this as measurement D. See Figure 64. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3950 25. Using a suitable depth gauge measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307300 to the top of the low/reverse clutch at 3 different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement E. See Figure 65. 26. Subtract measurement E from measurement D and record as measurement F. 27. Subtract measurement F from measurement C to get the low/reverse clutch clearance. The clearance should be between 0.406 mm (0.015 in) and 2.000 mm (0.078 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the low/reverse clutch pack for correct installation. If the low/reverse clutch pack is still out of range, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the low/reverse clutch pack. 28. NOTE: When the low/reverse clutch is correctly installed, the wave spring is on top. Remove the top low/reverse clutch steel plate and wave spring and correctly install the plates back in the transaxle case. 29. NOTE: Make sure the center support is installed with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes facing the front of the transaxle case. Improper alignment will cause transmission failure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3951 Install the center support with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes aligned with the feed holes in the transaxle case. See Figure 66. 1. Long center support legs face down. 2. Feed holes face the front of the transaxle case. 30. Install the No. 5 and No. 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 67. 1. No. 5 thrust bearing 2. No. 6 thrust bearing 31. Install the center planetary sun gear. See Figure 68. 32. Install the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 68. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3952 33. Install the No. 7 and No. 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 69. 1. No. 7 thrust bearing 2. No. 8 thrust bearing 34. Install the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 70. 35. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch wave spring See Figure 70 36. Soak the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 71. 37. Install the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack. 38. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate. NOTICE: Be sure to install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side facing down or the snap ring can come loose causing damage to the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3953 Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side down with the gap facing the front of the transaxle. See Figure 72. 1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. 2. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap. 40. Using a suitable tool, seat the snap ring in the snap ring groove. See Figure 73. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3954 41. Install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator on the transaxle case and position the plunger on the top forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch friction plate. See Figure 74. 42. Install new low/reverse and forward (1, 2, 3, 4) transaxle case-to-center support seals in the transaxle case. See Figure 75. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3955 43. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the dial indicator. The clearance should be between 0.076 mm (0.002 in) and 1.840 mm (0.072 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack for correct installation and the transaxle for correct assembly. See Figure 76. 44. Install the front planetary sun gear and shell assembly. 45. Install the No.10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 77. 46. Install the park pawl. 47. Install the park pawl pin and spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3956 48. Install the 5 new clutch feed seals. See Figure 78. 49. Position the transmission fluid baffle in place. 50. Install the lube funnel and position the alignment pin in the alignment hole. 51. Position the lube funnel hold-down bracket in place and install the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 52. Install the No. 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 79. 53. Simultaneously install the drive and driven sprocket and chain assembly Lightly tap on the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. 54. Install the No. 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 80. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3957 55. Install the No.13 thrust washer. See Figure 81. 56. Install the differential planetary sun gear. 57. Install the differential assembly. 58. Install the No. 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 82. 59. Install the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 on the input shaft. 60. Clean the torque converter housing sealing surface. 61. NOTE: Be sure the sealing surfaces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free of oil before applying silicone. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA-29 or equivalent) to the sealing surface of the transaxle case. 62. NOTE: Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as recorded during disassembly. Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 transaxle case-to-torque converter housing bolts. See Figure 83. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3958 1. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft) 2. Stud bolt location 63. Remove the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector 307-635. 64. Install the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 65. Assemble the internal cooler bypass valve in the sleeve and install the assembly in the case. See Figure 84. 1. Bypass valve. 2. Bypass valve sleeve 66. Install the internal cooler bypass valve spring. See Figure 85. 67. Install the new main control-to-transaxle separator plate and align it on the stud and the guide pin. 68. NOTE: Be sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3959 Position the main control assembly in place and align the manual valve on the TR sensor. Install the nut hand-tight. See Figure 86. 69. Install the short main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 87. 70. Install the long main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 88. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3960 71. Tighten the 22 main control Torx(R) bolts and the nut in a crisscross pattern. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 72. NOTE: Be sure the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal is installed with the holes facing up. Install the new solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. 73. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 74. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 75. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA 29 or equivalent) to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 76. Position the main control cover in place. 77. NOTE: Install the main control cover stud bolts in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the 13 main control cover bolts. See Figure 89. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 1. Bolt location 2. Stud bolt location 78. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using the Torque Converter Handle 307-091 install the torque converter. 79. Remove the Torque Converter Handle 3O7-091. 80. Install the Torque Converter Retainer 307-566. 81. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture. 82. Remove the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625. Transaxle Installation and Post Test 1. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to the appropriate WSM, Section 307. 2. Perform post test drive to verify transmission is operating correctly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3961 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3962 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls Sync Software Programming TSB 08-21-2 10/27/08 SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING SERVICE TIPS FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2009 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator 2009 Mark LT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE The Sync Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) may require updates to add system enhancements, improve system reliability or address consumer issues. The installation or availability of these updates may be made available in two different methods: ^ Downloadable consumer Service Pack updates available through www.SYNCmyride.com website. ^ APIM Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS). The tool and installation requirements vary between these two methods. This information is being provided to supplement current publications, clarify the requirements needed to reprogram or update the APIM module and provide some additional diagnostic/operational system information. ACTION Refer to the Service Tips for details. SERVICE TIPS Downloadable Consumer Service Pack Updates (Available At www.SyncMyRide.com) These Service Pack Updates are for the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) side of the APIM module only and are customized for each vehicle based on the last reported APIM software level state. The software download process will bundle the appropriate service packs that are required to achieve the desired state. This is why consumers are asked to report back to the website once they have completed the install. NOTE IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO REUSE A DOWNLOADED SERVICE PACK ACROSS MULTIPLE VEHICLES. EACH DOWNLOAD IS PACKAGED ACCORDINGLY TO THE CURRENT STATE OF THE VEHICLE THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS INTENDED FOR. NOTE CONSUMERS DO NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO REMOVE SERVICE PACK UPDATES ONCE THEY ARE INSTALLED. Steps For Consumer's To Update Sync With The Latest Enhancements 1. Prepare universal serial bus (USB) storage drive by: a. Log into their Sync account and select applications and updates to download. b. Locates a portable USB storage drive that they can take to their vehicle. NOTE FOR OWNERS OF MULTIPLE SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLES, IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED TO USE A SEPARATE USB DRIVE FOR EACH SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3971 Dedicating a USB drive to each vehicle's Sync system helps keep each vehicle's download and installation history current and accurate. In addition, as new Sync features and functionalities become available, consumers may decide to install different features on different vehicles. Dedicated USB drives will help maintain the unique applications for each vehicle. 2. Download files by: a. Plug the USB drive into the computer's USB port. b. Select the USB port being used on the computer. c. Confirm choice of USB storage drive. Then click Next. d. After clicking Next, the files will automatically begin downloading. NOTE DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE UNTIL THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. THE SCREEN WILL CONFIRM THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. e. Safely remove the USB storage drive from the computer's USB port by clicking on the Windows personal computer (PC) Safely Remove Hardware icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to the clock. 3. Install files by: a. Insert USB storage drive into the vehicle's Sync USB port. b. Turn on both, the vehicle and radio. NOTE IT IS RECOMMENDED TO HAVE THE VEHICLE RUNNING (WITH PROPER EXHAUST VENTILATION) AND NOT IN THE ACCESSORY MODE. THIS IS TO ENSURE THE VEHICLE'S BATTERY SUPPLY VOLTAGE REMAINS STABLE DURING THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS. c. Select User Device. d. Select Settings. e. Select Install. Display will change to Begin Installation? f. Select Yes. Installing file - will display on the screen. NOTE DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE WHILE THE INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS. g. Upon completion of downloading of files, Installation Complete will display on the Sync screen. h. The Sync voice will say, Installation complete. Sync may also say, The system will now reboot. Please wait a few moments before using the system. Installation Complete will remain on the Sync display until you exit the installation mode. i. Select the Menu radio button to exit installation mode. j. Remove the USB storage drive. k. Consumer takes their USB storage drive back to their computer to report the successful install. (This feature allows for tracking and determining if the consumers vehicle has a newer version available for downloading or not.) NOTE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DETAILS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. REGISTERED SYNC OWNERS WILL SEE VEHICLE SPECIFIC DETAILS AND DIRECTIONS BASED ON THEIR VEHICLE'S OPTION CONTENT. APIM Programming Using IDS This method programs both, the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) (through the data link connector) and CIP (through the USB port), portions of the APIM module. NOTE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3972 SOFTWARE PACKAGES OBTAINED THROUGH THE PROFESSIONAL TECHNICIAN SOCIETY (PTS) WEBSITE CONTAINS BOTH, VIP AND CIP FILES, THESE DO NOT NEED TO BE INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE LIKE THE CONSUMER DOWNLOAD SERVICE PACK UPDATES, BUT THE ENTIRE PACKAGE MUST BE INSTALLED DURING REPROGRAMMING FOR PROPER OPERATION. THESE SOFTWARE PACKAGES ARE MUCH LARGER IN SIZE AND CONTAIN ALL THE PREVIOUS LEVELS OF ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES AS WELL AS ANY ADDITIONAL ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES FOR BOTH THE VIP AND CIP PROCESSORS LOCATED IN THE APIM MODULE. NOTE YOU WILL NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO RESTORE THE PREVIOUS LEVEL OF SYNC OPERATING SOFTWARE ONCE THE APIM MODULE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY UPDATED TO THE NEXT HIGHER LEVEL. NOTE If a new APIM is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure. For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00. It is recommended to install a battery charger to the vehicles battery and set at the low charge setting and insure the PC being used for reprogramming is fully charged or plugged into a power source prior to starting the reprogramming process. 1. Turn the ignition key to the On position. 2. Turn the audio control module (ACM) on. 3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 4. Connect one end of the USB male-A to male-A cable Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 (1-800-Rotunda option 6) or equivalent to the scan tool. Compatible cables. (Figures 1) Non-compatible cables. (Figure 2) 5. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port. 6. From the technician service publication website, run OASIS using Quick Start or by manually entering the vehicle identification number (VIN). 7. From the OASIS tab, select the Sync/APIM bullet. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3973 8. Select the Read APIM button to verify the current APIM VIP and CIP software levels. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VEHICLE COMMUNICATION MODULE (VCM) OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. 9. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select the Program APIM button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if prompted. a. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to program the VIP. b. When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically. 10. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays Programming has been completed successfully. 11. Test the audio system for correct operation. PC requirements for successful reprogramming an APIM module. Ford And LIM Logon Issues - Including Proper Browser Settings The following list will have you check various computer settings to insure your PC is set to the proper configuration for reprogramming an APIM module. NOTE CHANGES TO PC SETTINGS MAY REQUIRE ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS. 1. Do not use a customized browser like AOL, it will not work. Please use Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.5 5P2, 6.0, or higher. 2. Log into website. 3. Navigate to PTS (Professional Technician Society) under the Technical Tools on the Parts and Service tab. 4. Check IE settings by completing the following: a. Preliminary Checks. NOTE THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO WINDOWS XP MACHINES WITH 5P2 AND IE 6.0 AND ABOVE. (1) Open IE, select Tools at the top of the screen and select Security. (2) Click on the Internet Zone, and find Navigate Sub-frames across different domains and enable this function. (3) Then click OK, system may ask you if you want to accept these function please select Yes. (4) Check the Windows Firewall to make sure it is turned off by: (a) Selecting the Start button. (b) Select Control Panel. (c) Select Windows Firewall (if you do not see the icon, make sure you are using Classic View) and set to off. (5) Check Windows Pop-up Blocker to make sure it is turned off. (a) Open IE. (b) Select Tools at the top of the screen. (c) Select Pop-up Blocker and turn it off. (6) Remove any add-on toolbars such as Google or Yahoo toolbars, as these have additional built in pop-up blockers. (7) Verify that any third party anti-virus, anti-spyware, firewall, or internet security software is temporarily disabled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3974 b. Browser Settings - Open IE and select Internet Options under the Tools heading. (1) Select the General tab (2) Select Delete Files and check the Delete all offline content and select OK (3) Select Delete Cookies and click OK (4) Select Clear History and select Yes. (5) Click on the Security tab. (6) Click on the Trusted Sites icon. (7) Click on Sites. (8) In the box below add this website to the zone type in - website. (9) Ensure that required server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone is not checked. (10) Click the Add button. (11) Click the Close button. (12) Re-select the Security tab and select Custom Level. (13) Under Reset Custom Settings, pull down and Reset to: Low, select Reset, select Yes and then OK. NOTE IF RUNNING OASIS ON IE 7.0, RESET TO: MEDIUM-LOW. ALSO, UNDER SETTINGS, SCROLL TO NAVIGATE SUB-FRAMES ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS, SET TO ENABLED AND CLICK OK. (14) Select the Privacy tab, and move the slider to Low. (15) Click on the Advanced, check the box Override automatic cookie handling and check the box to Always allow session cookies' and click OK. (16) Select the Advanced tab and scroll down to HTP 1.1 settings; make sure both options under this section are checked. (17) Scroll down to Security section and make sure the following are checked: (a) Empty Temporary Internet folder when browser is closed. (b) Use SSL 2.0. (c) Use SSL 3.0. (d) Use TLS 1.0. (e) Select Apply and then click on OK. 5. Close all browsers and reboot the computer to have the browser settings take affect properly. The browser settings have now been setup correctly as per Ford Browser settings recommendations. Additional PC Security Settings (May Or May Not Be Required - Depends On Operating System) Changes to PC Security Settings may require Administrator access. 1. Check for Information Bar near top of IE page stating - This website wants to run the following add-ons. 2. Click on Information Bar and select Run ActiveX Controls or Temporarily Allow Pop-ups depending on your operating system. 3. Click on Retry button to refresh information. (May not be required on some operating systems) PC and Server Troubleshooting (Optional) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3975 ^ If you wish to test another browser for web-based training only, download the free version of Opera at www.Opera.com. ^ For web-based training sound problems, make sure your firewall allows downloading sound file types such as MP3. ^ If you have installed special search and add-on programs such as Gator or Bonzi please remove them. ^ If you have a router, make sure that port 443 is open for Secure Socket Layer (SSL), and ports 80 and 8080 are open for HTTP. ^ Internet access uses a caching or proxy server. Make sure the caching/proxy servers are set to automatically detect settings. Contact your local network administrator and/or your Internet service provider and have them turn off the caching on any and all caching proxy servers for the following: ^ Uniform Resource Locator (URL): www.proservicetech.com or ford website Additional Sync Related Service Tips 1. Performing a Master Reset of the APIM module or removing and restoring the Keep Alive Power circuit fuse (refer to the appropriate wiring manual) for 3-minutes, prior to reprogramming will restore the factory APIM defaults. This can reduce the possibilities of corrupt files, that may have been transferred into the APIM modules memory, from interfering with the reprogramming of the CIP portion of the APIM module. 2. Non-factory installed items that can cause background noise, wind noise or obstruct the voice path to the Sync system's microphone, will reduce the reliability or accuracy of the consumer's voice commands or speech being recognized properly. Some examples may include but are not limited to: ^ Objects hanging from the rear view mirror that may make noise or obstruct the system microphone located on the mirror. ^ Bug shields. ^ Roof mounted accessories. ^ Damaged window moldings. ^ Non-factory installed overhead consoles or sun-visor storage compartments that obstruct the voice path to the systems microphone. (It is recommended when diagnosing voice recognition or phone call sound quality issues to eliminate these types of items before replacing any system components) 3. Remote Starts may prevent the Automatic Discovery Process, of previously paired phones, from connecting with the consumer's phone as it may be outside of the device's Bluetooth reception range. Once the vehicle is started remotely, the Sync system automatically begins to search for previously paired phones; eventually this process will time out if the customers phone does not enter the vehicle prior to the expiration of this internal timer, resulting in the vehicle Sync not automatically recognize the phone and pair with it. If this occurs, once the customer enters the vehicle, the consumer will be required to manually connect the phone through the Sync menus if they would like to use the hands free phone features. NOTE THE CONSUMER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PAIR THE PHONE AGAIN. 4. When Reprogramming APIM modules, it is strongly recommended to use a hard wired internet connection if possible, due to the APIM program file sizes. If a wired internet connection is not available, it is recommended to access the PTS website and download the latest Sync software files from the Tech Central tab prior to reprogramming. This will reduce the overall reprogramming time when you are connected to the vehicle. If error messages appear during the reprogramming process that indicate errors with the VIP or CIP file/image, comparing the saved file/image by checking the file size, between your PC/IDS with the available file/image size indicated in the PTS description can help determine if the file may be corrupt or damaged. If this has occurred or is suspected, re-download the file/image and select Yes when asked Do you want to replace it? 5. Always diagnose and repair any DTC's for the Audio system or any module communication related faults prior to APIM reprogramming. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls Sync Software Programming TSB 08-21-2 10/27/08 SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING SERVICE TIPS FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2009 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator 2009 Mark LT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE The Sync Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) may require updates to add system enhancements, improve system reliability or address consumer issues. The installation or availability of these updates may be made available in two different methods: ^ Downloadable consumer Service Pack updates available through www.SYNCmyride.com website. ^ APIM Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS). The tool and installation requirements vary between these two methods. This information is being provided to supplement current publications, clarify the requirements needed to reprogram or update the APIM module and provide some additional diagnostic/operational system information. ACTION Refer to the Service Tips for details. SERVICE TIPS Downloadable Consumer Service Pack Updates (Available At www.SyncMyRide.com) These Service Pack Updates are for the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) side of the APIM module only and are customized for each vehicle based on the last reported APIM software level state. The software download process will bundle the appropriate service packs that are required to achieve the desired state. This is why consumers are asked to report back to the website once they have completed the install. NOTE IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO REUSE A DOWNLOADED SERVICE PACK ACROSS MULTIPLE VEHICLES. EACH DOWNLOAD IS PACKAGED ACCORDINGLY TO THE CURRENT STATE OF THE VEHICLE THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS INTENDED FOR. NOTE CONSUMERS DO NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO REMOVE SERVICE PACK UPDATES ONCE THEY ARE INSTALLED. Steps For Consumer's To Update Sync With The Latest Enhancements 1. Prepare universal serial bus (USB) storage drive by: a. Log into their Sync account and select applications and updates to download. b. Locates a portable USB storage drive that they can take to their vehicle. NOTE FOR OWNERS OF MULTIPLE SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLES, IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED TO USE A SEPARATE USB DRIVE FOR EACH SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3993 Dedicating a USB drive to each vehicle's Sync system helps keep each vehicle's download and installation history current and accurate. In addition, as new Sync features and functionalities become available, consumers may decide to install different features on different vehicles. Dedicated USB drives will help maintain the unique applications for each vehicle. 2. Download files by: a. Plug the USB drive into the computer's USB port. b. Select the USB port being used on the computer. c. Confirm choice of USB storage drive. Then click Next. d. After clicking Next, the files will automatically begin downloading. NOTE DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE UNTIL THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. THE SCREEN WILL CONFIRM THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. e. Safely remove the USB storage drive from the computer's USB port by clicking on the Windows personal computer (PC) Safely Remove Hardware icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to the clock. 3. Install files by: a. Insert USB storage drive into the vehicle's Sync USB port. b. Turn on both, the vehicle and radio. NOTE IT IS RECOMMENDED TO HAVE THE VEHICLE RUNNING (WITH PROPER EXHAUST VENTILATION) AND NOT IN THE ACCESSORY MODE. THIS IS TO ENSURE THE VEHICLE'S BATTERY SUPPLY VOLTAGE REMAINS STABLE DURING THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS. c. Select User Device. d. Select Settings. e. Select Install. Display will change to Begin Installation? f. Select Yes. Installing file - will display on the screen. NOTE DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE WHILE THE INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS. g. Upon completion of downloading of files, Installation Complete will display on the Sync screen. h. The Sync voice will say, Installation complete. Sync may also say, The system will now reboot. Please wait a few moments before using the system. Installation Complete will remain on the Sync display until you exit the installation mode. i. Select the Menu radio button to exit installation mode. j. Remove the USB storage drive. k. Consumer takes their USB storage drive back to their computer to report the successful install. (This feature allows for tracking and determining if the consumers vehicle has a newer version available for downloading or not.) NOTE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DETAILS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. REGISTERED SYNC OWNERS WILL SEE VEHICLE SPECIFIC DETAILS AND DIRECTIONS BASED ON THEIR VEHICLE'S OPTION CONTENT. APIM Programming Using IDS This method programs both, the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) (through the data link connector) and CIP (through the USB port), portions of the APIM module. NOTE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3994 SOFTWARE PACKAGES OBTAINED THROUGH THE PROFESSIONAL TECHNICIAN SOCIETY (PTS) WEBSITE CONTAINS BOTH, VIP AND CIP FILES, THESE DO NOT NEED TO BE INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE LIKE THE CONSUMER DOWNLOAD SERVICE PACK UPDATES, BUT THE ENTIRE PACKAGE MUST BE INSTALLED DURING REPROGRAMMING FOR PROPER OPERATION. THESE SOFTWARE PACKAGES ARE MUCH LARGER IN SIZE AND CONTAIN ALL THE PREVIOUS LEVELS OF ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES AS WELL AS ANY ADDITIONAL ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES FOR BOTH THE VIP AND CIP PROCESSORS LOCATED IN THE APIM MODULE. NOTE YOU WILL NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO RESTORE THE PREVIOUS LEVEL OF SYNC OPERATING SOFTWARE ONCE THE APIM MODULE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY UPDATED TO THE NEXT HIGHER LEVEL. NOTE If a new APIM is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure. For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00. It is recommended to install a battery charger to the vehicles battery and set at the low charge setting and insure the PC being used for reprogramming is fully charged or plugged into a power source prior to starting the reprogramming process. 1. Turn the ignition key to the On position. 2. Turn the audio control module (ACM) on. 3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 4. Connect one end of the USB male-A to male-A cable Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 (1-800-Rotunda option 6) or equivalent to the scan tool. Compatible cables. (Figures 1) Non-compatible cables. (Figure 2) 5. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port. 6. From the technician service publication website, run OASIS using Quick Start or by manually entering the vehicle identification number (VIN). 7. From the OASIS tab, select the Sync/APIM bullet. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3995 8. Select the Read APIM button to verify the current APIM VIP and CIP software levels. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VEHICLE COMMUNICATION MODULE (VCM) OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. 9. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select the Program APIM button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if prompted. a. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to program the VIP. b. When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically. 10. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays Programming has been completed successfully. 11. Test the audio system for correct operation. PC requirements for successful reprogramming an APIM module. Ford And LIM Logon Issues - Including Proper Browser Settings The following list will have you check various computer settings to insure your PC is set to the proper configuration for reprogramming an APIM module. NOTE CHANGES TO PC SETTINGS MAY REQUIRE ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS. 1. Do not use a customized browser like AOL, it will not work. Please use Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.5 5P2, 6.0, or higher. 2. Log into website. 3. Navigate to PTS (Professional Technician Society) under the Technical Tools on the Parts and Service tab. 4. Check IE settings by completing the following: a. Preliminary Checks. NOTE THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO WINDOWS XP MACHINES WITH 5P2 AND IE 6.0 AND ABOVE. (1) Open IE, select Tools at the top of the screen and select Security. (2) Click on the Internet Zone, and find Navigate Sub-frames across different domains and enable this function. (3) Then click OK, system may ask you if you want to accept these function please select Yes. (4) Check the Windows Firewall to make sure it is turned off by: (a) Selecting the Start button. (b) Select Control Panel. (c) Select Windows Firewall (if you do not see the icon, make sure you are using Classic View) and set to off. (5) Check Windows Pop-up Blocker to make sure it is turned off. (a) Open IE. (b) Select Tools at the top of the screen. (c) Select Pop-up Blocker and turn it off. (6) Remove any add-on toolbars such as Google or Yahoo toolbars, as these have additional built in pop-up blockers. (7) Verify that any third party anti-virus, anti-spyware, firewall, or internet security software is temporarily disabled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3996 b. Browser Settings - Open IE and select Internet Options under the Tools heading. (1) Select the General tab (2) Select Delete Files and check the Delete all offline content and select OK (3) Select Delete Cookies and click OK (4) Select Clear History and select Yes. (5) Click on the Security tab. (6) Click on the Trusted Sites icon. (7) Click on Sites. (8) In the box below add this website to the zone type in - website. (9) Ensure that required server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone is not checked. (10) Click the Add button. (11) Click the Close button. (12) Re-select the Security tab and select Custom Level. (13) Under Reset Custom Settings, pull down and Reset to: Low, select Reset, select Yes and then OK. NOTE IF RUNNING OASIS ON IE 7.0, RESET TO: MEDIUM-LOW. ALSO, UNDER SETTINGS, SCROLL TO NAVIGATE SUB-FRAMES ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS, SET TO ENABLED AND CLICK OK. (14) Select the Privacy tab, and move the slider to Low. (15) Click on the Advanced, check the box Override automatic cookie handling and check the box to Always allow session cookies' and click OK. (16) Select the Advanced tab and scroll down to HTP 1.1 settings; make sure both options under this section are checked. (17) Scroll down to Security section and make sure the following are checked: (a) Empty Temporary Internet folder when browser is closed. (b) Use SSL 2.0. (c) Use SSL 3.0. (d) Use TLS 1.0. (e) Select Apply and then click on OK. 5. Close all browsers and reboot the computer to have the browser settings take affect properly. The browser settings have now been setup correctly as per Ford Browser settings recommendations. Additional PC Security Settings (May Or May Not Be Required - Depends On Operating System) Changes to PC Security Settings may require Administrator access. 1. Check for Information Bar near top of IE page stating - This website wants to run the following add-ons. 2. Click on Information Bar and select Run ActiveX Controls or Temporarily Allow Pop-ups depending on your operating system. 3. Click on Retry button to refresh information. (May not be required on some operating systems) PC and Server Troubleshooting (Optional) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3997 ^ If you wish to test another browser for web-based training only, download the free version of Opera at www.Opera.com. ^ For web-based training sound problems, make sure your firewall allows downloading sound file types such as MP3. ^ If you have installed special search and add-on programs such as Gator or Bonzi please remove them. ^ If you have a router, make sure that port 443 is open for Secure Socket Layer (SSL), and ports 80 and 8080 are open for HTTP. ^ Internet access uses a caching or proxy server. Make sure the caching/proxy servers are set to automatically detect settings. Contact your local network administrator and/or your Internet service provider and have them turn off the caching on any and all caching proxy servers for the following: ^ Uniform Resource Locator (URL): www.proservicetech.com or ford website Additional Sync Related Service Tips 1. Performing a Master Reset of the APIM module or removing and restoring the Keep Alive Power circuit fuse (refer to the appropriate wiring manual) for 3-minutes, prior to reprogramming will restore the factory APIM defaults. This can reduce the possibilities of corrupt files, that may have been transferred into the APIM modules memory, from interfering with the reprogramming of the CIP portion of the APIM module. 2. Non-factory installed items that can cause background noise, wind noise or obstruct the voice path to the Sync system's microphone, will reduce the reliability or accuracy of the consumer's voice commands or speech being recognized properly. Some examples may include but are not limited to: ^ Objects hanging from the rear view mirror that may make noise or obstruct the system microphone located on the mirror. ^ Bug shields. ^ Roof mounted accessories. ^ Damaged window moldings. ^ Non-factory installed overhead consoles or sun-visor storage compartments that obstruct the voice path to the systems microphone. (It is recommended when diagnosing voice recognition or phone call sound quality issues to eliminate these types of items before replacing any system components) 3. Remote Starts may prevent the Automatic Discovery Process, of previously paired phones, from connecting with the consumer's phone as it may be outside of the device's Bluetooth reception range. Once the vehicle is started remotely, the Sync system automatically begins to search for previously paired phones; eventually this process will time out if the customers phone does not enter the vehicle prior to the expiration of this internal timer, resulting in the vehicle Sync not automatically recognize the phone and pair with it. If this occurs, once the customer enters the vehicle, the consumer will be required to manually connect the phone through the Sync menus if they would like to use the hands free phone features. NOTE THE CONSUMER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PAIR THE PHONE AGAIN. 4. When Reprogramming APIM modules, it is strongly recommended to use a hard wired internet connection if possible, due to the APIM program file sizes. If a wired internet connection is not available, it is recommended to access the PTS website and download the latest Sync software files from the Tech Central tab prior to reprogramming. This will reduce the overall reprogramming time when you are connected to the vehicle. If error messages appear during the reprogramming process that indicate errors with the VIP or CIP file/image, comparing the saved file/image by checking the file size, between your PC/IDS with the available file/image size indicated in the PTS description can help determine if the file may be corrupt or damaged. If this has occurred or is suspected, re-download the file/image and select Yes when asked Do you want to replace it? 5. Always diagnose and repair any DTC's for the Audio system or any module communication related faults prior to APIM reprogramming. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability Technical Service Bulletin # 10B15 Date: 100419 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4003 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on April 19, 2010. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by April 19, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by May 31, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4004 If the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that complete transmission overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a Cost Cap Analysis using the Cost Cap Tool found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter. This refund offer expires October 31, 2010. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the date of the Owner Notification Letter. There is no expiration date for emergency repair refunds. Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with low regulated fluid pressure to transmission clutches (burnt or slipping) and/or replacement of the transmission valve body. RENTAL VEHICLES In most cases, a rental vehicle will not be required. If a customer's vehicle requires a transmission repair and it is necessary to order parts, Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee next day delivery. Prior approval for additional rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 10B15 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ For rental vehicle claiming, follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through April 30, 2011. There is no mileage limit for this program. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Note: Less than 2% of the affected vehicles are expected to require parts. To manage part availability, dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center parts order line (except for transmission fluid and silicone sealant). Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for any of the parts in the chart below please be prepared to provide Dealer P&A; Code, VIN, and Mileage. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4006 In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission solenoid regulator valve bore may wear. The function of a solenoid regulator is to provide regulated pressure to shift solenoids. Wear in the solenoid regulator bore causes low clutch pressure and results in transmission slips/harsh shifts. Continued driving with this condition may cause premature wear on the clutches. This may eventually lead to a loss of 4th through 6th gears and ultimately loss of transmission function. This service action will reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration. This calibration will reposition the solenoid regulator valve to eliminate bore wear. A flowchart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. SERVICE PROCEDURE MODULE REPROGRAMMING NOTE: Reprogramming concerns! errors may be caused by the following: ^ Data Link Connector (DLC) or Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) becoming disconnected. ^ Allowing the IDS to enter any type of sleep mode. ^ Using a wireless IDS to VCM connection. ^ Low voltage on the IDS laptop. ^ Low voltage in the vehicle battery (use of a battery charger is recommended). If you encounter reprogramming concerns, DO NOT DELETE the session. If the original session has accidentally been deleted, recover the original session from the IDS "TRASH CAN" (located in the lower right corner of the previous session screen) and continue to reprogram. 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Verify that the IDS is updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4007 3. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 4. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 5. Select Module Reprogramming and then select PCM. Touch the tick. 6. NOTE: If the IDS states there are no updates available, either the IDS has not been updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher, or the PCM has already been reprogrammed. A screen will appear stating a later PCM calibration is available. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the PCM to the latest calibration. 7. After the PCM has been reprogrammed, inspect the vehicle's odometer for mileage: ^ If the mileage is LESS THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), remove the IDS. This service procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary. ^ If the mileage is MORE THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), leave the IDS connected to the vehicle and proceed to Step 8. TRANSMISSION LOAD TEST WARNING: Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake to reduce the risk of vehicle movement during this procedure Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 8. NOTE: In order to perform a valid Transmission Load Test, Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) must be between 185-200° F (85-93° C). Using the IDS, make sure the Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) is at an operating temperature of 185-200° F (85-93° C). If the TFT is BELOW 185-200° F (85-93° C), perform the following: ^ With the vehicle's brakes applied, start the engine. ^ Place the gear selector in D, bring the engine up to 1500 rpm and hold for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in R and bring the engine up to 1500 rpm for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute. ^ Repeat this procedure until the vehicle's TFT is 185-200° F (85-93° C). 9. Perform the Transmission Load Test: NOTE: Conduct this test after the PCM has been reprogrammed. Make sure that the engine coolant and transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature and fluid levels are correct. 1. Block all wheels, set the parking brake, and firmly apply the service brakes. 2. Turn off Traction Control if equipped 3. Set the IDS to record engine rpm and TSS_SRC rpm. 4. Place the gear selector in D. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4008 5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold the pedal just long enough to let the engine get to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and observe the TSS_SRC rpm (it should be at ZERO when engine speed has reached maximum rpm). While performing this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5 seconds. See Figure 2. After the test, place the gear selector in N and run the engine at 1,000 rpm for 15 seconds to cool the torque converter. 10. If the TSS_SRC rpm was ZERO during the Transmission Load Test, then this service procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary. If the TSS_SRC rpm was MORE than ZERO (transmission slipping) during the Transmission Load Test, then proceed to Attachment IV for transmission repair. Table of Contents TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE Pan and Tool Requirements Transaxle Removal Transaxle Disassembly Main Control Valve Body Replacement Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4, 5, 6) Disassembly and Assembly Filter Removal and Replacement Transaxle Assembly Transaxle Installation and Post Test Part and Tool Requirements TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE This transmission repair procedure involves installing a new transmission valve body and clutch packs in the Overdrive/Direct (O/D) and forward clutch assemblies. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4009 PART AND TOOL REQUIREMENTS NOTE: Special tools that are needed for this portion of the service procedure are as follows: ^ Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 or equivalent ^ Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566 ^ Torque Converter Handle # 307-091 ^ Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Drive Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 ^ Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2 ^ Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002 or equivalent ^ Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 ^ Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 ^ Suitable Depth Gauge Transaxle Removal 1. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle For additional information refer to the appropriate WSM Section 307. Transaxle Disassembly If the technician determines that the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that a complete overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a cost cap analysis using the cost cap tool found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website. If the cost cap tool states "Repair", contact the Special Service Support Center (SSSC) with the repair estimate (parts and labor at warranty prices) Be prepared to provide the dealership's P/A code and have the repair order, which contains the VIN and mileage of the vehicle. If the cost cap tool states "Replace" continue with the Transmission Prior Approval request, make sure to select FSA on the main menu. 1. Install the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 onto the transaxle. 2. Using the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture. 3. Remove the Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566. 4. Install the Torque Converter Handle # 307-091. 5. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using Torque Converter Handle #307-091,remove the torque converter from the transaxle. 6. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4010 Remove the 13 bolts and the main control cover. See Figure 1. 7. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connectors. See Figure 2. 8. Remove and discard the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. See Figure 3. 9. NOTE: Record the location of the short and long main control Torx(R) bolts for reassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4011 Remove the nut and the 22 Torx(R) bolts and remove the main control assembly. See Figure 4. 10. Remove and discard the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 11. Remove and discard the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seals. See Figure 5. 1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal. 2. Low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4012 12. Remove the internal cooler bypass spring, sleeve and valve. See Figure 6. 13. Remove the bolt and the 055 sensor. See Figure 7. 14. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolt for assembly. Remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts. 15. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. 16. Remove the loose torque converter housing from the transaxle case Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4013 17. Remove the No 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 8. 18. Remove the differential. See Figure 9. 19. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. 20. Remove the No. 13 thrust washer. See Figure 10. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4014 21. Remove the No 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 11. 22. Simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain. 23. Remove the No 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 12. 24. Remove the No 10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 13. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4015 25. Remove the 2 bolts and the lube funnel hold down bracket. See Figure 14. 26. Remove the transmission fluid baffle. See Figure 15. 27. Remove the park pawl pin and spring. See Figure 16. 28. Remove the park pawl. 29. NOTE: The forward (1 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring is beveled. The beveled side of the snap ring goes up (flat side down). NOTE: The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap faces the front of the transmission. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4016 Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. See Figure 17. 30. Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate, clutch pack, and wave spring. 31. Remove the front sun gear and shell assembly See Figure 18. 32. Remove the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 19. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4017 33. Remove the No 7 and No 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 20. 1. No 7 thrust bearing 2. No. 8 thrust bearing 34. Remove the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 21. 35. Remove the center planetary sun gear. 36. Remove the No 5 and No 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 22. 1. No. 5 thrust bearing 2. No. 6 thrust bearing 37. Remove the center support assembly. See Figure 23. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4018 38. Remove the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly See Figure 24. 39. Remove the low/reverse wave spring, clutch pack and pressure plate. See Figure 25. 40. Remove the low One-Way Clutch (OWC). See Figure 26. 41. NOTE: The intermediate (2, 6) clutch is removed with the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly. Remove the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly and remove the intermediate (2, 6) clutch from the assembly. See Figure 27. 42. Remove the pressure plate and the wave spring. 43. Remove the No 3 thrust bearing. See Figure 28. 44. Remove the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. 45. NOTE: If the No. 1 thrust bearing is stuck to the overdrive/direct clutch assembly remove the No. 1 thrust bearing from the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4019 Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing. See Figure 29. 46. Remove and discard the 5 clutch feed seals. See Figure 30. Main Control Valve Body Replacement Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4020 1. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the main control valve body from the solenoid body. See Figure 31. 2. Remove and discard the separator plate from the solenoid body. Install the new separator plate from the new main control valve body. 3. Position the new main control valve body on the solenoid body assembly and install the 2 bolts. See Figure 32. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4,5,6) Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the Overdrive (O/D) (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4021 2. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub, No 2 thrust bearing See Figure 33. 3. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. See Figure 33. 4. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate and discard the clutch pack. See Figure 33. 5. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor 30758412 on the balance piston. 6. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and remove the snap ring. See Figure 34. 7. Remove the Overdrive Clutch Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307584/2. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4022 8. Remove and discard the balance piston See Figure 35. 9. Remove the O/D (4, 5 6) piston return spring. See Figure 36. 10. Install the No.1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 37. 11. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4023 12. Apply compressed air to the O/D (4 5, 6) clutch piston port and remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston. See Figure 38. 13. Remove the O/D/direct clutch assembly from the transaxle case. 14. Remove and discard the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal from the O/D/direct clutch assembly. See Figure 39. 15. Remove and discard the 2 seals from the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4024 16. Install 2 new seals on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston and lubricate the seals with petroleum jelly. See Figure 40. 17. Install a new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal and lubricate the seal with petroleum jelly. See Figure 41. 18. Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston in place. 19. Using the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston, and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911,install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston into the O/D/direct clutch assembly by hand. See Figure 42. 20. NOTE: Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring with the holes facing upward Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4025 21. Lubricate the seals on the new balance piston and position the balance piston in place. See Figure 43. 22. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 30758412 on the balance piston. 23. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and install the snap ring. See Figure 44. 24. Remove the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307589/1 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4026 25. Install the No 2 thrust bearing. See Figure 45. 26. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. See Figure 46. 27. Soak the new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 47. 28. Install the new O/D (4. 5, 6) clutch pack. 29. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. 30. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4027 31. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case, install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator and position the plunger on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the Dial Indicator. The clearance should be between 0.950 mm (0.037 in) and 1.778 mm (0.07 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack for correct installation. See Figure 48. 32. Remove Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002, O/D/direct clutch assembly and the No. 1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. Filter Removal and Replacement 1. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil baffle from the torque converter housing. See Figure 49. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4028 2. NOTE: Record the location of the 6mm bolt for assembly Remove the 9 bolts and the pump and filter assembly. See Figure 50. 3. Remove filter from the pump. making note of the orientation of the fluid filter to the fluid pump. See Figure 51. 4. Remove the magnet from the filter. 5. Install the magnet on the filter. 6. Install the filter. A. Position the filter on the pump. B. Rotate the filter counterclockwise 90 degrees. 7. Install the pump and filter assembly in the torque converter housing and install the pump bolts. See Figure 52. A. Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4029 B. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. Install the transmission fluid baffle and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Transaxle Assembly 1. Clean the silicone from the transaxle case-to-torque converter housing sealing surface and the main control cover sealing surface. 2. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up or damage to the transaxle can occur Install the No. 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up. See Figure 53. 3. Install the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. 4. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down or damage to the transaxle can occur Install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down. See Figure 54. 5. Install the direct/intermediate clutch hub and rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4030 6. Install the intermediate (2, 6) wave spring assembly. See Figure 55. 7. Soak the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly in clean transmission fluid See Figure 56. 8. Install the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly, temporarily reversing the top friction and steel plates for the clutch stack-up measurement. 9. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4031 10. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the top of the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack at 3 different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement A. See Figure 57. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4032 11. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the transaxle case step above the intermediate (2, 6) clutch Record this as measurement B. See Figure 58. 12. Subtract measurement B from measurement A. The clearance should be between 0.240 mm (0009 in) and 260 mm (0.102 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the intermediate (2,6) clutch pack for correct installation. If the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack is correctly installed, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack. 13. NOTE: When the intermediate (2, 6) clutch is correctly installed, a friction plate is on top. Remove the top intermediate (2, 6) clutch friction and steel plate and correctly install the plates back in the transaxle case. 14. Install the One-Way Clutch (OWC) assembly. 15. Install the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly. 16. NOTE: The position of the low/reverse pressure plate is important. When installing the center support, the long support legs must fit through the low/reverse pressure plate and rest on the OWC. Position the low/reverse pressure plate so that the center support legs fit through the pressure plate and rest on the OWC and install the low/reverse pressure plate. See Figure 59. 17. Soak the original low/reverse clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 60. 18. Align the low/reverse clutch pack with the pressure plate and install it in the transaxle case, temporarily reversing the wave spring and top steel plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4033 19. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the side of the center support with the long support legs. See Figure 61. 20. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the contact surface of the low/reverse clutch piston Record this as measurement A. See Figure 62. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4034 21. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the leg surface of the center support Record this as measurement B. See Figure 63. 22. Subtract measurement B from measurement A and record as measurement C. 23. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case. 24. Using a suitable depth micrometer measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the top of the OWC Record this as measurement D. See Figure 64. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4035 25. Using a suitable depth gauge measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307300 to the top of the low/reverse clutch at 3 different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement E. See Figure 65. 26. Subtract measurement E from measurement D and record as measurement F. 27. Subtract measurement F from measurement C to get the low/reverse clutch clearance. The clearance should be between 0.406 mm (0.015 in) and 2.000 mm (0.078 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the low/reverse clutch pack for correct installation. If the low/reverse clutch pack is still out of range, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the low/reverse clutch pack. 28. NOTE: When the low/reverse clutch is correctly installed, the wave spring is on top. Remove the top low/reverse clutch steel plate and wave spring and correctly install the plates back in the transaxle case. 29. NOTE: Make sure the center support is installed with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes facing the front of the transaxle case. Improper alignment will cause transmission failure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4036 Install the center support with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes aligned with the feed holes in the transaxle case. See Figure 66. 1. Long center support legs face down. 2. Feed holes face the front of the transaxle case. 30. Install the No. 5 and No. 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 67. 1. No. 5 thrust bearing 2. No. 6 thrust bearing 31. Install the center planetary sun gear. See Figure 68. 32. Install the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 68. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4037 33. Install the No. 7 and No. 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 69. 1. No. 7 thrust bearing 2. No. 8 thrust bearing 34. Install the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 70. 35. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch wave spring See Figure 70 36. Soak the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 71. 37. Install the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack. 38. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate. NOTICE: Be sure to install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side facing down or the snap ring can come loose causing damage to the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4038 Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side down with the gap facing the front of the transaxle. See Figure 72. 1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. 2. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap. 40. Using a suitable tool, seat the snap ring in the snap ring groove. See Figure 73. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4039 41. Install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator on the transaxle case and position the plunger on the top forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch friction plate. See Figure 74. 42. Install new low/reverse and forward (1, 2, 3, 4) transaxle case-to-center support seals in the transaxle case. See Figure 75. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4040 43. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the dial indicator. The clearance should be between 0.076 mm (0.002 in) and 1.840 mm (0.072 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack for correct installation and the transaxle for correct assembly. See Figure 76. 44. Install the front planetary sun gear and shell assembly. 45. Install the No.10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 77. 46. Install the park pawl. 47. Install the park pawl pin and spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4041 48. Install the 5 new clutch feed seals. See Figure 78. 49. Position the transmission fluid baffle in place. 50. Install the lube funnel and position the alignment pin in the alignment hole. 51. Position the lube funnel hold-down bracket in place and install the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 52. Install the No. 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 79. 53. Simultaneously install the drive and driven sprocket and chain assembly Lightly tap on the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. 54. Install the No. 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 80. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4042 55. Install the No.13 thrust washer. See Figure 81. 56. Install the differential planetary sun gear. 57. Install the differential assembly. 58. Install the No. 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 82. 59. Install the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 on the input shaft. 60. Clean the torque converter housing sealing surface. 61. NOTE: Be sure the sealing surfaces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free of oil before applying silicone. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA-29 or equivalent) to the sealing surface of the transaxle case. 62. NOTE: Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as recorded during disassembly. Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 transaxle case-to-torque converter housing bolts. See Figure 83. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4043 1. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft) 2. Stud bolt location 63. Remove the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector 307-635. 64. Install the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 65. Assemble the internal cooler bypass valve in the sleeve and install the assembly in the case. See Figure 84. 1. Bypass valve. 2. Bypass valve sleeve 66. Install the internal cooler bypass valve spring. See Figure 85. 67. Install the new main control-to-transaxle separator plate and align it on the stud and the guide pin. 68. NOTE: Be sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4044 Position the main control assembly in place and align the manual valve on the TR sensor. Install the nut hand-tight. See Figure 86. 69. Install the short main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 87. 70. Install the long main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 88. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4045 71. Tighten the 22 main control Torx(R) bolts and the nut in a crisscross pattern. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 72. NOTE: Be sure the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal is installed with the holes facing up. Install the new solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. 73. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 74. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 75. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA 29 or equivalent) to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 76. Position the main control cover in place. 77. NOTE: Install the main control cover stud bolts in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the 13 main control cover bolts. See Figure 89. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 1. Bolt location 2. Stud bolt location 78. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using the Torque Converter Handle 307-091 install the torque converter. 79. Remove the Torque Converter Handle 3O7-091. 80. Install the Torque Converter Retainer 307-566. 81. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture. 82. Remove the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625. Transaxle Installation and Post Test 1. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to the appropriate WSM, Section 307. 2. Perform post test drive to verify transmission is operating correctly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4046 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4047 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 4052 Dedicating a USB drive to each vehicle's Sync system helps keep each vehicle's download and installation history current and accurate. In addition, as new Sync features and functionalities become available, consumers may decide to install different features on different vehicles. Dedicated USB drives will help maintain the unique applications for each vehicle. 2. Download files by: a. Plug the USB drive into the computer's USB port. b. Select the USB port being used on the computer. c. Confirm choice of USB storage drive. Then click Next. d. After clicking Next, the files will automatically begin downloading. NOTE DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE UNTIL THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. THE SCREEN WILL CONFIRM THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. e. Safely remove the USB storage drive from the computer's USB port by clicking on the Windows personal computer (PC) Safely Remove Hardware icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to the clock. 3. Install files by: a. Insert USB storage drive into the vehicle's Sync USB port. b. Turn on both, the vehicle and radio. NOTE IT IS RECOMMENDED TO HAVE THE VEHICLE RUNNING (WITH PROPER EXHAUST VENTILATION) AND NOT IN THE ACCESSORY MODE. THIS IS TO ENSURE THE VEHICLE'S BATTERY SUPPLY VOLTAGE REMAINS STABLE DURING THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS. c. Select User Device. d. Select Settings. e. Select Install. Display will change to Begin Installation? f. Select Yes. Installing file - will display on the screen. NOTE DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE WHILE THE INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS. g. Upon completion of downloading of files, Installation Complete will display on the Sync screen. h. The Sync voice will say, Installation complete. Sync may also say, The system will now reboot. Please wait a few moments before using the system. Installation Complete will remain on the Sync display until you exit the installation mode. i. Select the Menu radio button to exit installation mode. j. Remove the USB storage drive. k. Consumer takes their USB storage drive back to their computer to report the successful install. (This feature allows for tracking and determining if the consumers vehicle has a newer version available for downloading or not.) NOTE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DETAILS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. REGISTERED SYNC OWNERS WILL SEE VEHICLE SPECIFIC DETAILS AND DIRECTIONS BASED ON THEIR VEHICLE'S OPTION CONTENT. APIM Programming Using IDS This method programs both, the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) (through the data link connector) and CIP (through the USB port), portions of the APIM module. NOTE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 4053 SOFTWARE PACKAGES OBTAINED THROUGH THE PROFESSIONAL TECHNICIAN SOCIETY (PTS) WEBSITE CONTAINS BOTH, VIP AND CIP FILES, THESE DO NOT NEED TO BE INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE LIKE THE CONSUMER DOWNLOAD SERVICE PACK UPDATES, BUT THE ENTIRE PACKAGE MUST BE INSTALLED DURING REPROGRAMMING FOR PROPER OPERATION. THESE SOFTWARE PACKAGES ARE MUCH LARGER IN SIZE AND CONTAIN ALL THE PREVIOUS LEVELS OF ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES AS WELL AS ANY ADDITIONAL ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES FOR BOTH THE VIP AND CIP PROCESSORS LOCATED IN THE APIM MODULE. NOTE YOU WILL NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO RESTORE THE PREVIOUS LEVEL OF SYNC OPERATING SOFTWARE ONCE THE APIM MODULE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY UPDATED TO THE NEXT HIGHER LEVEL. NOTE If a new APIM is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure. For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00. It is recommended to install a battery charger to the vehicles battery and set at the low charge setting and insure the PC being used for reprogramming is fully charged or plugged into a power source prior to starting the reprogramming process. 1. Turn the ignition key to the On position. 2. Turn the audio control module (ACM) on. 3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 4. Connect one end of the USB male-A to male-A cable Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 (1-800-Rotunda option 6) or equivalent to the scan tool. Compatible cables. (Figures 1) Non-compatible cables. (Figure 2) 5. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port. 6. From the technician service publication website, run OASIS using Quick Start or by manually entering the vehicle identification number (VIN). 7. From the OASIS tab, select the Sync/APIM bullet. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 4054 8. Select the Read APIM button to verify the current APIM VIP and CIP software levels. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VEHICLE COMMUNICATION MODULE (VCM) OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. 9. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select the Program APIM button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if prompted. a. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to program the VIP. b. When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically. 10. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays Programming has been completed successfully. 11. Test the audio system for correct operation. PC requirements for successful reprogramming an APIM module. Ford And LIM Logon Issues - Including Proper Browser Settings The following list will have you check various computer settings to insure your PC is set to the proper configuration for reprogramming an APIM module. NOTE CHANGES TO PC SETTINGS MAY REQUIRE ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS. 1. Do not use a customized browser like AOL, it will not work. Please use Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.5 5P2, 6.0, or higher. 2. Log into website. 3. Navigate to PTS (Professional Technician Society) under the Technical Tools on the Parts and Service tab. 4. Check IE settings by completing the following: a. Preliminary Checks. NOTE THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO WINDOWS XP MACHINES WITH 5P2 AND IE 6.0 AND ABOVE. (1) Open IE, select Tools at the top of the screen and select Security. (2) Click on the Internet Zone, and find Navigate Sub-frames across different domains and enable this function. (3) Then click OK, system may ask you if you want to accept these function please select Yes. (4) Check the Windows Firewall to make sure it is turned off by: (a) Selecting the Start button. (b) Select Control Panel. (c) Select Windows Firewall (if you do not see the icon, make sure you are using Classic View) and set to off. (5) Check Windows Pop-up Blocker to make sure it is turned off. (a) Open IE. (b) Select Tools at the top of the screen. (c) Select Pop-up Blocker and turn it off. (6) Remove any add-on toolbars such as Google or Yahoo toolbars, as these have additional built in pop-up blockers. (7) Verify that any third party anti-virus, anti-spyware, firewall, or internet security software is temporarily disabled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 4055 b. Browser Settings - Open IE and select Internet Options under the Tools heading. (1) Select the General tab (2) Select Delete Files and check the Delete all offline content and select OK (3) Select Delete Cookies and click OK (4) Select Clear History and select Yes. (5) Click on the Security tab. (6) Click on the Trusted Sites icon. (7) Click on Sites. (8) In the box below add this website to the zone type in - website. (9) Ensure that required server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone is not checked. (10) Click the Add button. (11) Click the Close button. (12) Re-select the Security tab and select Custom Level. (13) Under Reset Custom Settings, pull down and Reset to: Low, select Reset, select Yes and then OK. NOTE IF RUNNING OASIS ON IE 7.0, RESET TO: MEDIUM-LOW. ALSO, UNDER SETTINGS, SCROLL TO NAVIGATE SUB-FRAMES ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS, SET TO ENABLED AND CLICK OK. (14) Select the Privacy tab, and move the slider to Low. (15) Click on the Advanced, check the box Override automatic cookie handling and check the box to Always allow session cookies' and click OK. (16) Select the Advanced tab and scroll down to HTP 1.1 settings; make sure both options under this section are checked. (17) Scroll down to Security section and make sure the following are checked: (a) Empty Temporary Internet folder when browser is closed. (b) Use SSL 2.0. (c) Use SSL 3.0. (d) Use TLS 1.0. (e) Select Apply and then click on OK. 5. Close all browsers and reboot the computer to have the browser settings take affect properly. The browser settings have now been setup correctly as per Ford Browser settings recommendations. Additional PC Security Settings (May Or May Not Be Required - Depends On Operating System) Changes to PC Security Settings may require Administrator access. 1. Check for Information Bar near top of IE page stating - This website wants to run the following add-ons. 2. Click on Information Bar and select Run ActiveX Controls or Temporarily Allow Pop-ups depending on your operating system. 3. Click on Retry button to refresh information. (May not be required on some operating systems) PC and Server Troubleshooting (Optional) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 4056 ^ If you wish to test another browser for web-based training only, download the free version of Opera at www.Opera.com. ^ For web-based training sound problems, make sure your firewall allows downloading sound file types such as MP3. ^ If you have installed special search and add-on programs such as Gator or Bonzi please remove them. ^ If you have a router, make sure that port 443 is open for Secure Socket Layer (SSL), and ports 80 and 8080 are open for HTTP. ^ Internet access uses a caching or proxy server. Make sure the caching/proxy servers are set to automatically detect settings. Contact your local network administrator and/or your Internet service provider and have them turn off the caching on any and all caching proxy servers for the following: ^ Uniform Resource Locator (URL): www.proservicetech.com or ford website Additional Sync Related Service Tips 1. Performing a Master Reset of the APIM module or removing and restoring the Keep Alive Power circuit fuse (refer to the appropriate wiring manual) for 3-minutes, prior to reprogramming will restore the factory APIM defaults. This can reduce the possibilities of corrupt files, that may have been transferred into the APIM modules memory, from interfering with the reprogramming of the CIP portion of the APIM module. 2. Non-factory installed items that can cause background noise, wind noise or obstruct the voice path to the Sync system's microphone, will reduce the reliability or accuracy of the consumer's voice commands or speech being recognized properly. Some examples may include but are not limited to: ^ Objects hanging from the rear view mirror that may make noise or obstruct the system microphone located on the mirror. ^ Bug shields. ^ Roof mounted accessories. ^ Damaged window moldings. ^ Non-factory installed overhead consoles or sun-visor storage compartments that obstruct the voice path to the systems microphone. (It is recommended when diagnosing voice recognition or phone call sound quality issues to eliminate these types of items before replacing any system components) 3. Remote Starts may prevent the Automatic Discovery Process, of previously paired phones, from connecting with the consumer's phone as it may be outside of the device's Bluetooth reception range. Once the vehicle is started remotely, the Sync system automatically begins to search for previously paired phones; eventually this process will time out if the customers phone does not enter the vehicle prior to the expiration of this internal timer, resulting in the vehicle Sync not automatically recognize the phone and pair with it. If this occurs, once the customer enters the vehicle, the consumer will be required to manually connect the phone through the Sync menus if they would like to use the hands free phone features. NOTE THE CONSUMER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PAIR THE PHONE AGAIN. 4. When Reprogramming APIM modules, it is strongly recommended to use a hard wired internet connection if possible, due to the APIM program file sizes. If a wired internet connection is not available, it is recommended to access the PTS website and download the latest Sync software files from the Tech Central tab prior to reprogramming. This will reduce the overall reprogramming time when you are connected to the vehicle. If error messages appear during the reprogramming process that indicate errors with the VIP or CIP file/image, comparing the saved file/image by checking the file size, between your PC/IDS with the available file/image size indicated in the PTS description can help determine if the file may be corrupt or damaged. If this has occurred or is suspected, re-download the file/image and select Yes when asked Do you want to replace it? 5. Always diagnose and repair any DTC's for the Audio system or any module communication related faults prior to APIM reprogramming. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4063 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4066 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4067 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4068 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4069 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4070 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4071 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4072 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4073 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4074 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4075 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4076 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4077 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4078 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4079 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4080 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4081 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4082 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4083 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4084 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4085 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4086 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4090 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4093 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4094 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4095 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4096 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4097 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4098 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4099 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4100 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4101 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4102 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4103 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4104 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4105 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4106 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4107 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4108 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4109 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4110 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4111 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4112 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4113 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4117 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4120 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4121 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4122 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4123 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4124 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4125 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4126 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4127 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4128 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4129 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4130 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4131 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4132 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4133 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4134 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4135 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4136 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4137 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4138 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4139 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4140 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4146 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4149 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4150 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4151 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4152 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4153 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4154 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4155 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4156 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4157 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4158 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4159 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4160 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4161 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4162 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4163 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4164 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4165 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4166 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4167 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4168 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4169 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4173 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4176 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4177 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4178 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4179 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4180 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4181 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4182 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4183 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4184 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4185 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4186 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4187 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4188 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4189 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4190 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4191 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4192 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4193 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4194 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4195 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4196 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4200 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4203 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4204 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4205 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4206 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4207 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4208 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4209 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4210 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4211 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4212 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4213 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4214 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4215 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4216 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4217 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4218 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4219 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4220 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4221 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4222 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4223 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Differential: > 10-10-1 > Jun > 10 > A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube Differential: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube TSB 10-10-1 06/07/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - NEW DIPSTICK AND FILLER TUBE KIT IS AVAILABLE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/29/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-11-4 to update the Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 6F35 automatic transmission and built on or before 10/29/2008 may exhibit a loss of transmission fluid from the dipstick tube area. This may be due to transmission being over-filled. A new transmission dipstick and filler tube kit is now available with added minimum and maximum fluid level lines to easily determine proper fluid level and with a revised vent system on the filler tube. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the vehicle was built on or before 10/29/2008 and the dipstick does not have minimum and maximum lines indicated, then replace dipstick and filler tube with latest level parts. Both the dipstick and filler tube must be installed and are sold as a kit. Follow the instruction included in the kit. (Figure 1) 2. Check transmission fluid per Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 and adjust fluid level. NOTE TRANSMISSION FLUID WILL EXPAND WHEN WARM AND SHOULD NOT BE ADDED TO A COLD TRANSMISSION. CORRECT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Differential: > 10-10-1 > Jun > 10 > A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube > Page 4235 FLUID LEVEL WILL READ IN THE CROSS HATCH AREA OF THE DIPSTICK AT NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF 185-200 ° F (85-93 °C). Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101001A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.7 Hr. 6F35 Transmission: Replace The Transmission Dipstick With Filler-Tube Kit Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7A020 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Differential: > 10-10-1 > Jun > 10 > A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube TSB 10-10-1 06/07/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - NEW DIPSTICK AND FILLER TUBE KIT IS AVAILABLE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/29/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-11-4 to update the Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 6F35 automatic transmission and built on or before 10/29/2008 may exhibit a loss of transmission fluid from the dipstick tube area. This may be due to transmission being over-filled. A new transmission dipstick and filler tube kit is now available with added minimum and maximum fluid level lines to easily determine proper fluid level and with a revised vent system on the filler tube. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the vehicle was built on or before 10/29/2008 and the dipstick does not have minimum and maximum lines indicated, then replace dipstick and filler tube with latest level parts. Both the dipstick and filler tube must be installed and are sold as a kit. Follow the instruction included in the kit. (Figure 1) 2. Check transmission fluid per Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 and adjust fluid level. NOTE TRANSMISSION FLUID WILL EXPAND WHEN WARM AND SHOULD NOT BE ADDED TO A COLD TRANSMISSION. CORRECT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Differential: > 10-10-1 > Jun > 10 > A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube > Page 4241 FLUID LEVEL WILL READ IN THE CROSS HATCH AREA OF THE DIPSTICK AT NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF 185-200 ° F (85-93 °C). Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101001A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.7 Hr. 6F35 Transmission: Replace The Transmission Dipstick With Filler-Tube Kit Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7A020 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-10-1 > Jun > 10 > A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube TSB 10-10-1 06/07/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - NEW DIPSTICK AND FILLER TUBE KIT IS AVAILABLE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/29/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-11-4 to update the Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 6F35 automatic transmission and built on or before 10/29/2008 may exhibit a loss of transmission fluid from the dipstick tube area. This may be due to transmission being over-filled. A new transmission dipstick and filler tube kit is now available with added minimum and maximum fluid level lines to easily determine proper fluid level and with a revised vent system on the filler tube. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the vehicle was built on or before 10/29/2008 and the dipstick does not have minimum and maximum lines indicated, then replace dipstick and filler tube with latest level parts. Both the dipstick and filler tube must be installed and are sold as a kit. Follow the instruction included in the kit. (Figure 1) 2. Check transmission fluid per Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 and adjust fluid level. NOTE TRANSMISSION FLUID WILL EXPAND WHEN WARM AND SHOULD NOT BE ADDED TO A COLD TRANSMISSION. CORRECT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-10-1 > Jun > 10 > A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube > Page 4250 FLUID LEVEL WILL READ IN THE CROSS HATCH AREA OF THE DIPSTICK AT NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF 185-200 ° F (85-93 °C). Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101001A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.7 Hr. 6F35 Transmission: Replace The Transmission Dipstick With Filler-Tube Kit Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7A020 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-10-1 > Jun > 10 > A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube TSB 10-10-1 06/07/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - NEW DIPSTICK AND FILLER TUBE KIT IS AVAILABLE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/29/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-11-4 to update the Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 6F35 automatic transmission and built on or before 10/29/2008 may exhibit a loss of transmission fluid from the dipstick tube area. This may be due to transmission being over-filled. A new transmission dipstick and filler tube kit is now available with added minimum and maximum fluid level lines to easily determine proper fluid level and with a revised vent system on the filler tube. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the vehicle was built on or before 10/29/2008 and the dipstick does not have minimum and maximum lines indicated, then replace dipstick and filler tube with latest level parts. Both the dipstick and filler tube must be installed and are sold as a kit. Follow the instruction included in the kit. (Figure 1) 2. Check transmission fluid per Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 and adjust fluid level. NOTE TRANSMISSION FLUID WILL EXPAND WHEN WARM AND SHOULD NOT BE ADDED TO A COLD TRANSMISSION. CORRECT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-10-1 > Jun > 10 > A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube > Page 4256 FLUID LEVEL WILL READ IN THE CROSS HATCH AREA OF THE DIPSTICK AT NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF 185-200 ° F (85-93 °C). Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101001A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.7 Hr. 6F35 Transmission: Replace The Transmission Dipstick With Filler-Tube Kit Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7A020 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines TSB 09-20-13 10/19/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground. Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines. 1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93 °C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1) 2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h). 3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time. 4. Start and run the engine for: a. 5 minutes before towing each day b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less. c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 4261 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel TSB 09-5-5 03/23/09 LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT 10/21/2008-10/31/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from 10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage. 2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics. 3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs. Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 4267 Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Correct Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3K186 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 4273 Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Correct Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3K186 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop Drive Chain: Customer Interest A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop TSB 10-20-1 10/25/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HOOT TYPE NOISE AT LOW SPEED - ON LIGHT ACCELERATION FROM A STOP BEFORE THE FIRST SHIFT - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 1/25/2010 FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-25-3 to add a production build date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission and built on or before 1/25/2010 may exhibit a single hoot noise on light acceleration from a stop just before the 1-2 shift. This noise will not occur any other time and will not occur under heavy acceleration. On four wheel drive (4WD) vehicles, the noise may be heard at the rear axle due to noise transfer through the rear differential unit (RDU). This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect transmission function and/or 4WD function or durability. A revised transaxle chain has been released to reduce this noise. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE A SLIGHT NOISE WHILE ACCELERATING FROM A STOP MAY BE A NORMAL CHARACTERISTIC. Drive Chain Replacement: 1. Drain fluid and remove the transaxle, following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. 2. Install the holding fixture 307-625. 3. Using the holding fixture 307-625, install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture. 4. Remove the torque converter retainer 307-566. 5. Install the torque converter handle 307-091. 6. The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using torque converter handle 307-091, remove the torque converter from the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4282 7. Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly and remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts. (Figure 1) 8. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 2) 9. Remove the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4283 10. Remove the No.15 differential thrust bearing. (Figure 4) 11. Remove the differential. (Figure 5) 12. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. (Figure 6) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4284 13. Remove the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 7) 14. Remove the No.11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. (Figure 8) 15. Lift the driven sprocket up first then simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain. (Figure 9) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4285 16. Remove the drive chain from the drive and driven sprockets. (Figure 10) 17. Install the new drive chain on the drive and driven sprockets. 18. Install the No.10 thrust bearing. (Figure 11) 19. Install the No.12 thrust bearing. (Figure 12) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4286 20. Simultaneously install the drive/driven sprocket and chain assembly by first seating the drive sprocket then seat the driven sprocket, Lightly tap on the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. (Figure 13) 21. Install the No.11 thrust bearing. (Figure 14) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4287 22. Install the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 15) 23. Install the final drive sun gear. (Figure 16) 24. Install the differential assembly. (Figure 17) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4288 25. Install the No.15 thrust bearing. (Figure 18) 26. Install the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635 on the input shaft. (Figure 19) 27. Clean the silicone off torque converter housing and transmission case sealing sur[ace. 28. Be sure the sealing sur[aces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free of oil before applying Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant. Apply Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant to the sealing surface of the transaxle case. (Figure 20) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4289 29. Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 bolts. Tighten to 18 lb-ft (24 N.m). (Figure 21) 30. Remove the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635. 31. Using the torque converter handle 307-091, install the torque converter. 32. Remove the torque converter handle 307-091. 33. Install the torque converter retainer 307-566. 34. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture. 35. Remove the holding fixture 307-625. 36. Install transaxle and refill transaxle fluid following WSM, Section 307-01. 37. To correctly set and check the transmission fluid level monitor the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) Parameter Identification (PID) using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)/ Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) scan tool. Correct fluid level will read in the cross hatch area of the dipstick at normal operating temperature 185-200 °F (85-93 °C). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.4 Hrs. Mariner 4X2 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.7 Hrs. Mariner 4X2 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.0 Hrs. Mariner 4X4 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.5 Hrs. Mariner 4X4 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4290 Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7G249 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop Drive Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop TSB 10-20-1 10/25/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HOOT TYPE NOISE AT LOW SPEED - ON LIGHT ACCELERATION FROM A STOP BEFORE THE FIRST SHIFT - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 1/25/2010 FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-25-3 to add a production build date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission and built on or before 1/25/2010 may exhibit a single hoot noise on light acceleration from a stop just before the 1-2 shift. This noise will not occur any other time and will not occur under heavy acceleration. On four wheel drive (4WD) vehicles, the noise may be heard at the rear axle due to noise transfer through the rear differential unit (RDU). This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect transmission function and/or 4WD function or durability. A revised transaxle chain has been released to reduce this noise. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE A SLIGHT NOISE WHILE ACCELERATING FROM A STOP MAY BE A NORMAL CHARACTERISTIC. Drive Chain Replacement: 1. Drain fluid and remove the transaxle, following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. 2. Install the holding fixture 307-625. 3. Using the holding fixture 307-625, install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture. 4. Remove the torque converter retainer 307-566. 5. Install the torque converter handle 307-091. 6. The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using torque converter handle 307-091, remove the torque converter from the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4296 7. Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly and remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts. (Figure 1) 8. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 2) 9. Remove the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4297 10. Remove the No.15 differential thrust bearing. (Figure 4) 11. Remove the differential. (Figure 5) 12. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. (Figure 6) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4298 13. Remove the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 7) 14. Remove the No.11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. (Figure 8) 15. Lift the driven sprocket up first then simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain. (Figure 9) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4299 16. Remove the drive chain from the drive and driven sprockets. (Figure 10) 17. Install the new drive chain on the drive and driven sprockets. 18. Install the No.10 thrust bearing. (Figure 11) 19. Install the No.12 thrust bearing. (Figure 12) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4300 20. Simultaneously install the drive/driven sprocket and chain assembly by first seating the drive sprocket then seat the driven sprocket, Lightly tap on the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. (Figure 13) 21. Install the No.11 thrust bearing. (Figure 14) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4301 22. Install the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 15) 23. Install the final drive sun gear. (Figure 16) 24. Install the differential assembly. (Figure 17) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4302 25. Install the No.15 thrust bearing. (Figure 18) 26. Install the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635 on the input shaft. (Figure 19) 27. Clean the silicone off torque converter housing and transmission case sealing sur[ace. 28. Be sure the sealing sur[aces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free of oil before applying Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant. Apply Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant to the sealing surface of the transaxle case. (Figure 20) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4303 29. Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 bolts. Tighten to 18 lb-ft (24 N.m). (Figure 21) 30. Remove the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635. 31. Using the torque converter handle 307-091, install the torque converter. 32. Remove the torque converter handle 307-091. 33. Install the torque converter retainer 307-566. 34. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture. 35. Remove the holding fixture 307-625. 36. Install transaxle and refill transaxle fluid following WSM, Section 307-01. 37. To correctly set and check the transmission fluid level monitor the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) Parameter Identification (PID) using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)/ Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) scan tool. Correct fluid level will read in the cross hatch area of the dipstick at normal operating temperature 185-200 °F (85-93 °C). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.4 Hrs. Mariner 4X2 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.7 Hrs. Mariner 4X2 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.0 Hrs. Mariner 4X4 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.5 Hrs. Mariner 4X4 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4304 Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7G249 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines TSB 09-20-13 10/19/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground. Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines. 1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93 °C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1) 2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h). 3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time. 4. Start and run the engine for: a. 5 minutes before towing each day b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less. c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 4309 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Fluid Capacity....................................................................................................................................... ............................................................8.5L (9 quarts) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4312 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - Motorcraft Mercon LV Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Number - XT-10-QLV Ford Specification - MERCON LV Note: The use of any transmission fluid other than what is recommended for this transaxle will cause transaxle damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing will be carried out using the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included with the machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present before proceeding. 1. Check and top off fluid level of the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent tank with transmission fluid. 2. Allow the fluid in the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent 15-30 minutes to heat up to 60°C (140°F) before using. 3. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler lines. 4. NOTE: The TOP transaxle cooler tube on the transaxle is the pressure line. Attach the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent red line to the transmission fluid cooler pressure line quick disconnect fitting. 5. Attach the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent blue line to the transmission fluid cooler return line quick disconnect fitting. 6. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the cooler lines and cooler prior to starting the flushing procedure. 7. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the cooler in a normal flow direction for an additional 10-15 minutes. 8. Clean the transaxle mounted fluid cooler tubes by hand. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 4315 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill NOTE: In order to completely clean the torque converter, this procedure needs to be carried out 3 times. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present, the transaxle will need to be overhauled. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 3. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid. 5. Start the engine and let it run for 3 minutes. Move the range selector lever into each gear position. Repeat Steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 two more times. After the transmission fluid has been changed a total of 3 times, check the transmission fluid level for a final time, making sure that the transmission fluid is at the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. Tighten to..................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4319 Fluid Pan: Service and Repair 6F35 Main Control Cover 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4320 5. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 6. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 7. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4321 Installation 1. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 2. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 3. Position the main control cover in place. 4. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4322 5. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 7. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers. 8. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4323 9. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4331 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4334 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4335 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4336 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4337 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4338 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4339 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4340 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4341 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4342 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4343 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4344 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4345 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4346 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4347 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4348 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4349 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4350 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4351 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4352 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4353 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4354 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4363 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4364 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4370 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4371 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose TSB 11-3-5 03/15/11 3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner housing. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-12. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4377 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108 A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4378 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4379 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108 A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4380 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4381 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4382 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engines 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4385 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L Engine 8. Drain the cooling system. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4386 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4387 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. 22. Using a suitable tool, remove the manual control lever shaft seal. Installation All vehicles 1. Using the Manual Lever Seal Installer, install a new manual control lever shaft seal. 2. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4388 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. 3. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 4. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the main control cover grommet. 7. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4389 8. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 9. Position the main control cover in place. 10. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4390 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 14. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 15. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4391 3.0L engine 16. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 17. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 18. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3.0L engine 19. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 3.0L engine 21. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 22. Fill and bleed the cooling system. All vehicles 23. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4392 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal - RH Halfshaft Seal - RH, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the intermediate shaft. 3. Using a suitable awl, poke a small hole in the halfshaft seal. 4. Using a suitable dent puller, remove the halfshaft seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4393 Installation 1. Install a new halfshaft seal on the Seal Installer and Handle. 2. Using the Seal Installer and Handle, install the RH halfshaft seal. 3. Install the intermediate shaft. 4. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4394 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal - LH Halfshaft Seal - LH Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the front LH halfshaft. 3. Using a suitable awl, poke a small hole in the halfshaft seal. 4. Using a suitable dent puller, remove the halfshaft seal. Installation 1. Install a new halfshaft seal on the Seal Installer and Handle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4395 2. Using the Seal Installer and Handle, install the LH halfshaft seal. 3. Install the front LH halfshaft. 4. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Column Shift) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Floor Shift) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6F35 Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4406 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4407 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4408 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4409 locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 8. Position the main control cover in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4410 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4411 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. 3.0L Engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4412 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 TSB 09-8-6 05/04/09 6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706, P0707, P1702 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before 10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707, P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR. 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9. 2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS connector from the solenoid body lead frame. 3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor wires during the installation of the main control. 4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr. 2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 4421 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4427 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 TSB 09-8-6 05/04/09 6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706, P0707, P1702 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before 10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707, P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR. 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9. 2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS connector from the solenoid body lead frame. 3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor wires during the installation of the main control. 4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr. 2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 4432 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4438 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4439 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4440 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor 6F35 Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4443 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor 6F35 Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4444 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4445 11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4446 Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly Of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4447 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4448 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4449 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4454 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4455 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4456 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4457 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4458 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4459 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4460 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4461 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4462 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4463 Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4464 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4465 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4466 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4467 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4468 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4469 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4470 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4471 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4472 Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 37-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4473 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4474 Shift Interlock: Service and Repair Brake Shift Interlock Override NOTE: If it is necessary to use the override procedure to move the selector lever out of the PARK position, it is possible that a fuse has blown and the brake lights are not operational. Before driving the vehicle, verify that the brake lights are working. This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the selector lever from being moved out of PARK when the ignition is in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed. If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position when the ignition is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed: 1. Apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key. 2. NOTE: Relief located at the front of the access panel. Remove the access panel. 3. Using an suitable tool, depress the Brake Shift Interlock Actuator (BSIA) override mechanism on the selector lever, apply the brake, depress the button on the selector lever and move the selector lever into NEUTRAL. 4. Start the vehicle. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4478 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4481 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4482 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4483 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4484 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4485 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4486 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4487 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4488 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4489 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4490 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4491 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4492 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4493 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4494 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4495 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4496 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4497 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4498 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4499 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4500 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4501 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4505 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Selector Lever Removal All vehicles 1. Place the selector lever in the D position. 2. Gently pry up to remove the upper selector lever trim ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4506 3. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray. 4. Remove the top finish panel. 5. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly. 1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever. 2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket. 6. Disconnect the wiring harness retainers from the selector lever. 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the selector lever. 1. Disconnect the selector lever electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4507 2. Remove the vehicle harness connector from the selector lever. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles 8. Pull the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) module straight back and remove it from the back of the selector lever. All vehicles 9. Remove the 2 screws from the center console. 10. Remove the 4 bolts and remove the selector lever assembly. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4508 All vehicles 1. Install the selector lever assembly and the 4 bolts. - Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 2. Install the 2 center console screws. AWD vehicles 3. Install the AWD module on to the back of the selector lever. All vehicles 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the selector lever. 1. Install the vehicle harness connector on the selector lever. 2. Connect the selector lever electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4509 5. Connect the wiring harness retainers to the selector lever. 6. Install the selector lever cable on the selector lever assembly. 1. Install the selector lever cable on the bracket. 2. Connect the selector lever cable end. 7. Install the top finish panel. 8. Install the center console compartment tray. 9. Install the upper selector lever trim ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4510 10. Adjust the selector lever cable. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever Cable Adjustment See: Adjustments. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Selector Lever Cable Adjustment 1. Place the selector lever in the D position. 2. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 3. Place the manual control lever in the D position. 1. Rotate the manual control lever counterclockwise to the PARK position. 2. Rotate the manual control lever clockwise 3 detents to the D position. 4. Release the selector lever cable adjuster lock. 1. Pull out on the adjuster lock tabs. 2. Slide the lock over to unlock the selector lever cable. 5. Align the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever ball stud and install it with the adjuster unlocked. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4515 6. Slide the adjuster tab in place to lock the selector lever cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4516 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Selector Lever Cable Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Place the selector level in the D position. 3. Gently pry up to remove the upper selector lever trim ring. 4. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4517 5. Remove the top finish panel. 6. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly. 1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever. 2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket. 7. Remove the 2 grommet nuts for the selector lever cable. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. Remove the selector lever cable retainer from the transmission fluid filler tube. 9. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4518 10. Release the 2 tabs and remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever cable bracket. 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the selector lever cable after installation. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever Cable Adjustment See: Adjustments. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 10-7-4 > Apr > 10 > A/T MIL ON/DTC's P0741/P1744 Torque Converter: Customer Interest A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0741/P1744 TSB 10-7-4 04/26/10 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0741 AND/OR P1744-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/23/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-21-1 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built on or before 8/23/2008 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0741 and/or P1744. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A to replace the torque converter and disassemble the transmission. Clean and reseal the transmission to remove all contamination. NOTE TRANSAXLE FLUID COOLER BACKFLUSHING AND CLEANING PROCEDURES IN WSM, SECTION 307-01A MUST BE FOLLOWED. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 9.2 Hrs. 4X2: Check DTCs, Replace Torque Convertor Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 9.8 Hrs. 4X4: Check DTCs, Replace Torque Convertor Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 10-7-4 > Apr > 10 > A/T MIL ON/DTC's P0741/P1744 > Page 4527 (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 9.6 Hrs. 4X2: Check DTCs Replace Torque Convertor Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 10.3 4X4: Check DTCs, Hrs. Replace Torque Convertor, Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7902 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 09-10-3 > Jun > 09 > A/T - Torque Converter Knocking Noises Torque Converter: Customer Interest A/T - Torque Converter Knocking Noises TSB 09-10-3 06/01/09 6F35 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TORQUE CONVERTER KNOCK - BUILT BEFORE 8/29/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission and built before 8/29/2008 may exhibit a continuous knocking noise heard with the engine running and vehicle stationary or moving slow. The noise is heard in drive and/or reverse, and is not typically heard in neutral and/or park. This noise may be due to the torque converter assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS A 3.0L V6, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION, AND THE NOISE IS HEARD IN ALL 4 POSITIONS (P,R,N,D), THEN THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY. 1. Verify vehicle was built before 8/29/2008 and the noise is continuous knocking noise, heard from rear of engine and/or front of transmission, with engine running and vehicle stationary or moving slow. a. Is the noise present in (D) and/or (R) but not in (N) and/or (P)? If yes, then go to Step 2. b. Is the noise is heard in all four positions (P,R,N,D)? If yes, then stop. This procedure does not apply and refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-00. 2. Use chassis ears to listen for noise at the bottom of the transmission near the torque converter access hole. If noise is present, then replace the torque converter per WSM, Section 307-O1A Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 4.6 Hrs. 4X2: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 5.2 Hrs. 4X4: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 09-10-3 > Jun > 09 > A/T - Torque Converter Knocking Noises > Page 4532 Operations) 091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 5.0 Hrs. 4X2: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 5.7 Hrs. 4X4: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7902 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 10-7-4 > Apr > 10 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0741/P1744 Torque Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0741/P1744 TSB 10-7-4 04/26/10 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0741 AND/OR P1744-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/23/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-21-1 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built on or before 8/23/2008 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0741 and/or P1744. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A to replace the torque converter and disassemble the transmission. Clean and reseal the transmission to remove all contamination. NOTE TRANSAXLE FLUID COOLER BACKFLUSHING AND CLEANING PROCEDURES IN WSM, SECTION 307-01A MUST BE FOLLOWED. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 9.2 Hrs. 4X2: Check DTCs, Replace Torque Convertor Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 9.8 Hrs. 4X4: Check DTCs, Replace Torque Convertor Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 10-7-4 > Apr > 10 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0741/P1744 > Page 4538 (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 9.6 Hrs. 4X2: Check DTCs Replace Torque Convertor Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 10.3 4X4: Check DTCs, Hrs. Replace Torque Convertor, Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7902 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 09-10-3 > Jun > 09 > A/T - Torque Converter Knocking Noises Torque Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Torque Converter Knocking Noises TSB 09-10-3 06/01/09 6F35 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TORQUE CONVERTER KNOCK - BUILT BEFORE 8/29/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission and built before 8/29/2008 may exhibit a continuous knocking noise heard with the engine running and vehicle stationary or moving slow. The noise is heard in drive and/or reverse, and is not typically heard in neutral and/or park. This noise may be due to the torque converter assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS A 3.0L V6, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION, AND THE NOISE IS HEARD IN ALL 4 POSITIONS (P,R,N,D), THEN THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY. 1. Verify vehicle was built before 8/29/2008 and the noise is continuous knocking noise, heard from rear of engine and/or front of transmission, with engine running and vehicle stationary or moving slow. a. Is the noise present in (D) and/or (R) but not in (N) and/or (P)? If yes, then go to Step 2. b. Is the noise is heard in all four positions (P,R,N,D)? If yes, then stop. This procedure does not apply and refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-00. 2. Use chassis ears to listen for noise at the bottom of the transmission near the torque converter access hole. If noise is present, then replace the torque converter per WSM, Section 307-O1A Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 4.6 Hrs. 4X2: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 5.2 Hrs. 4X4: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 09-10-3 > Jun > 09 > A/T - Torque Converter Knocking Noises > Page 4543 Operations) 091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 5.0 Hrs. 4X2: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 5.7 Hrs. 4X4: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7902 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4544 Torque Converter: Description and Operation 6F35 Torque Converter The torque converter transmits and multiplies torque. The torque converter is a 4-element device: - Impeller and cover assembly - Turbine - Reactor - Clutch and damper assembly Rotation of the torque converter housing and impeller set the transmission fluid in motion by driving the impeller blades and pump. The turbine is driven by the transmission fluid from the impeller and transmits power to the input shaft. The reactor redirects transmission fluid flow returned from the turbine to the impeller so that it rotates in the same direction as the impeller. This action assists in torque multiplication. The reactor has a One-Way Clutch (OWC) to hold it stationary during torque multiplication and allows it to rotate at higher vehicle speeds. Torque Converter Operation The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) connects the torque converter housing to the damper when the TCC is applied. During TCC release, the direction that the transmission fluid flows through the torque converter allows the TCC to release. During TCC apply, the transmission fluid flows in the opposite direction to apply the TCC. The PCM controls TCC operation using the TCC solenoid in the solenoid body. TCC solenoid operation provides the modulation of hydraulic pressure to change the position of the TCC control valve and TCC regulator apply valve which changes the pressure and transmission fluid direction in the torque converter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4545 The TCC can be applied in 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gears. Torque Converter Internal Component Exploded View Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Diagnosis 6F35 Torque Converter Diagnosis Prior to torque converter installation, all diagnostic procedures must be followed. This is to prevent the unnecessary installation of new or remanufactured torque converters. Only after a complete diagnostic evaluation can the decision be made to install a new or remanufactured torque converter. Begin with the normal diagnostic procedures as follows: 1. Preliminary inspection 2. Know and understand the customer concern 3. Verify the concern - carry out the Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test. See: Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test 4. Carry out diagnostic procedures: - Run on-board diagnostics. Refer to Diagnostics See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostics. Repair all non-transmission related DTCs first. - Repair all transmission DTCs. - Rerun On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) to verify repair. - Carry out Line Pressure Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special Testing Procedures/Line Pressure Test See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special Testing Procedures/Special Testing Procedures - Carry out Stall Speed Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special Testing Procedures/Stall Speed Test See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special Testing Procedures/Special Testing Procedures - Carry out diagnostic routines. Refer to Diagnosis By Symptom. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Routines See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom - Use the index to locate the appropriate routine that best describes the symptom(s). The routine will list all possible components that may cause or contribute to the symptom. Check each component listed, diagnose and repair as required, before installing a new torque converter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 4548 Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test 6F35 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test This test verifies that the TCC control system and the torque converter are operating correctly. 1. Carry out Self Test, refer to the tester manual. Check for DTCs. 2. Connect a tachometer to the engine. 3. Bring the engine to normal operating temperature by driving the vehicle at highway speeds for approximately 15 minutes in (D) position. 4. If the vehicle stalls in (D) at idle with vehicle at a stop, move the selector lever to manual L position. If the vehicle stalls, see torque converter operation concerns, refer to Diagnosis By Symptom See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom. Repair as required. If the vehicle does not stall in (D), refer to Diagnosis By Symptom See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 4549 Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Contamination Inspection 6F35 Torque Converter Contamination Inspection 1. A new or remanufactured torque converter must be installed if one or more of the following statements is true: - A torque converter malfunction has been determined based on complete diagnostic procedures. - The torque converter stud or studs, impeller hub or bushing are damaged. - The torque converter exhibits external discoloration (due to overheating). - There is evidence of transmission assembly or fluid contamination due to the following transmission or converter failure modes. Major metallic failure - Multiple clutch plates or band failures - Sufficient component wear which results in metallic contamination - Water or antifreeze contamination 2. If none of the above conditions are present, continue with the following fluid inspection. 3. Pour a small amount of transmission fluid from the torque converter onto an absorbent white tissue or through a paper filter. 4. Examine the fluid for contaminants, color and smell. The fluid must be free of contaminants, red in color and not have a burnt smell. 5. NOTICE: Do not use water-based cleaners or mineral spirits to clean or flush the torque converter or transmission damage will occur. If the fluid passed inspection: - drain the remaining fluid from the torque converter. - using only the recommended transmission fluid, add 1.9L (2 qt) of clean fluid into the converter and agitate by hand. - thoroughly drain the fluid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4553 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4556 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4557 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4558 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4559 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4560 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4561 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4562 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4563 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4564 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4565 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4566 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4567 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4568 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4569 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4570 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4571 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4572 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4573 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4574 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4575 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4576 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Transmission Cooler: Mechanical Specifications 6F35 Automatic Transmission - General Specifications 6F35 Automatic Transmission - Material 6F35 Automatic Transmission - Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 4581 Transmission Cooler: Capacity Specifications Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 4582 Transmission Cooler: Fluid Type Specifications Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4583 Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation Transaxle Cooling The transmission fluid cooling system consists of the following: - Oil-To-Air (OTA) transmission fluid combo cooler - Transmission fluid cooler tube assembly - Transmission fluid cooler outlet tube - Transmission fluid cooler return tube These vehicles are equipped with an external transmission fluid cooler. The transmission fluid cooler is part of the A/C condenser and cannot be serviced separately. The cooler is mounted in front of the engine radiator. The cooling system also consists of a thermal bypass valve which is mounted on the transaxle main control cover. When the transmission fluid is below normal operating temperature, transmission fluid travels from the transaxle to the thermal bypass valve and back to the transaxle. When the transmission fluid is at or above normal operating temperature, the thermal bypass valve opens allowing transmission fluid to travel from the transaxle through the cooler and back to the transaxle. The transmission fluid cooler transfers heat from the transmission fluid to the outside air. Transaxle Cooling Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Transmission Cooler: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Transaxle Cooling Inspection And Verification Transaxle Cooling Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition. 2. If the inspection reveals obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, repair as necessary. 3. Install new components if a transmission fluid leak is found in any of the transaxle cooling components. 4. If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s). GO to Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling or GO to Symptom Chart NVH. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom Chart - NVH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4586 Transmission Cooler: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling Transaxle Cooling Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling Symptom Chart - NVH Transaxle Cooling Symptom Chart - NVH Symptom Chart - NVH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4587 Transmission Cooler: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Transaxle Cooling - 6F35 Automatic Transmission Transaxle Cooling Check Transmission Fluid Level and Condition (All Vehicles) NOTICE: The vehicle should not be driven if the transmission fluid level indicator shows the transmission fluid below the minimum transmission fluid level mark or internal failure could result. If the vehicle has been operated for an extended period of time, at highway speeds, in city traffic, in hot weather or while pulling a trailer, the transmission fluid may need to cool down to obtain an accurate reading. The transmission fluid level reading on the transmission fluid level indicator will differ depending on operating and ambient temperatures. The correct reading should be within the normal operating temperature range. Transmission Fluid Level Check NOTE: The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 85°C-93°C (185°F-200°F) on a level surface. Normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 32 km (20 mi) of driving and can be checked using the scan tool. Under normal circumstances the transmission fluid level should be checked during normal maintenance. If the transaxle starts to slip, shifts slowly or shows signs of transmission fluid leaking, the transmission fluid level should be checked. 1. With the transaxle in PARK, the engine at idle, foot pressed on the brake, move the selector lever through each gear and allow engagement of each gear. Place the selector lever in the PARK position. 2. Wipe the transmission fluid level indicator cap and remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 3. Wipe the transmission fluid level indicator with a clean cloth. 4. Install the transmission fluid level indicator back in the transmission fluid filler tube until it is fully seated, then remove the indicator. The transmission fluid level should be within the crosshatch. High Transmission Fluid Level A transmission fluid level that is too high may cause the transmission fluid to become aerated due to the churning action of the rotating internal parts. This will cause erratic control pressure, foaming, loss of transmission fluid from the vent tube and possible transaxle malfunction and/or damage. Low Transmission Fluid Level A low transmission fluid level could result in poor transaxle engagement, slipping, malfunction and/or damage. This could also indicate a leak in one of Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4588 the transaxle seals or gaskets. Adding Transmission Fluid NOTICE: Automatic transmission fluids are not interchangeable. The use of any fluid other than what is recommended for this transaxle will cause transaxle damage. If transmission fluid needs to be added, add transmission fluid in 0.25L (1/2 pt) increments through the transmission fluid level indicator tube with the selector lever in PARK and the engine idling. Do not overfill the transmission fluid. For transmission fluid type, refer to the material chart. Transmission Fluid Condition Check 1. Check the transmission fluid level. 2. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be a dark red color, not brown or black or have a burnt odor. 3. Hold the transmission fluid level indicator over a white facial tissue and allow the transmission fluid to drip onto the facial tissue and examine the stain. 4. If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection. 5. If transmission fluid contamination or transaxle failure is confirmed by the sediment in the bottom of the transmission fluid pan, repair the transaxle and clean the transmission fluid cooler tubes and the transmission fluid cooler. 6. If the transaxle is to be overhauled or if installing a new transaxle, the transmission fluid cooler must be backflushed. 6F35 Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Cooler Transaxle Cooling Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4589 When internal wear or damage has occurred in the transaxle, metal particles, clutch plate material or band material may have been carried into the torque converter and transaxle fluid cooler. These contaminants are a major cause of recurring transaxle troubles and must be removed from the system before the transaxle is put back into use. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning. Transmission Fluid Cooler Flow Test NOTE: The selector lever linkage, selector lever cable adjustment, transmission fluid level and line pressure must be within specification before carrying out this test. Refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle for selector lever linkage and selector lever cable adjustment and refer to Special Testing Procedures See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special Testing Procedures/Special Testing Procedures for line pressure test. The transmission fluid must be above 82°C (180°F) for the cooler by-pass to open to carry out this test. See: Adjustments 1. Using a scan tool, run the engine to establish the correct transmission fluid temperature of 82°C (180°F). 2. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator from the transmission fluid filler tube. 3. Place funnel in the transmission fluid filler tube. 4. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the transmission fluid cooler return tube (rear fitting) from the fitting on the transaxle case. 6. Connect one end of a hose to the cooler return tube and route other end of the hose up to a point where it can be inserted into the funnel at the transmission fluid filler tube. 7. Start the engine and run it at idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL position. 8. When transmission fluid flowing from hose is in a steady stream, a liberal amount of transmission fluid should be observed. "Liberal" is described as about 1L (1 qt) delivered in 30 seconds. If a liberal flow is observed, the test is complete. 9. If the flow is not liberal, stop the engine. Disconnect the hose from the cooler return tube and connect it to the converter outlet tube fitting (front fitting) on the transaxle case. 10. Repeat Steps 7 and 8. If flow is now approximately 1L (1 qt) in 30 seconds, refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning. If the flow is still not approximately 1L (1 qt) in 30 seconds, repair the pump and/or the torque converter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Transmission Cooler: Procedures 6F35 Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing will be carried out using the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included with the machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present before proceeding. 1. Check and top off fluid level of the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent tank with transmission fluid. 2. Allow the fluid in the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent 15-30 minutes to heat up to 60°C (140°F) before using. 3. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler lines. 4. NOTE: The TOP transaxle cooler tube on the transaxle is the pressure line. Attach the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent red line to the transmission fluid cooler pressure line quick disconnect fitting. 5. Attach the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent blue line to the transmission fluid cooler return line quick disconnect fitting. 6. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the cooler lines and cooler prior to starting the flushing procedure. 7. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the cooler in a normal flow direction for an additional 10-15 minutes. 8. Clean the transaxle mounted fluid cooler tubes by hand. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4592 Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement 6F35 Automatic Transmission - Transmission Fluid Cooler Transmission Fluid Cooler 1. NOTE: The transmission fluid cooler is part of the A/C condenser assembly and cannot be serviced separately. If installation of a new transmission fluid cooler is required, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. 6F35 Automatic Transmission - Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4593 Removal NOTICE: Automatic transmission fluids are not interchangeable transmission fluids. The use of any fluid other than what is recommended for this transaxle will cause transaxle damage. 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Remove the left side splash shield. 3. Release the transmission fluid cooler tube retaining clip and remove the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the clip. 4. Compress the constant tension clamps and remove the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the transmission fluid cooler. 5. Remove the secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler tubes at the transmission. 6. Using the Transmission Cooler Line Disconnect Tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the transaxle and remove the transmission fluid cooler tubes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4594 Installation 1. If installing new transmission fluid cooler tubes, remove the secondary latches and the retainer from the old transmission fluid cooler tubes and install them on the new transmission fluid cooler tubes. 2. Position the transmission fluid cooler tubes in place. Install the transmission fluid cooler tubes in the transaxle by inserting the tube into the fitting until a click is heard/felt. Pull back to confirm connection is secure and install the secondary latches. 3. Compress the constant tension clamps and install the transmission fluid cooler tubes on the transmission fluid cooler. 4. Install the transmission fluid cooler tubes in the retaining clip and close the retaining clip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4595 5. Install the left side splash shield. 6. Install the front bumper cover. 7. Check the transmission fluid level and add transmission fluid as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Column Shift) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Floor Shift) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Exploded View Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4606 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly. 1. Remove the ACL assembly bracket bolt. 2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the ACL outlet pipe. 4. Detach the wiring harness fastener from the ACL assembly. 5. Disconnect the engine breather from the ACL assembly. 6. Loosen the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the Throttle Body (TB) and remove the ACL and ACL outlet pipe assembly. 2. Install the Engine Support Bar, Support Leg and Adapters. 3. Install the Engine Lifting Chains. 4. Remove the LH support insulator. 1. Remove the LH support insulator through bolt. - To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 2. Remove the LH support insulator nuts. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4607 3. Remove the LH support insulator bolts. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Remove the LH support insulator. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4608 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the 4 bolts and the rear cross brace. 4. Remove the lower front insulator through bolt and the 2 cross brace bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4609 5. Remove the cross brace nut and remove the brace. 6. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower front insulator and remove the lower front insulator. Installation 1. Install a new lower front insulator onto the cross brace and install the lower front insulator cross brace bolts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Position the cross brace in place and install the nut. - Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 3. Install the 2 bolts for the cross brace. - Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 4. Install the lower front support insulator through bolt for the mount. - Tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 5. Install the rear cross brace and the 4 bolts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4610 6. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4611 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear, 3.0L DOHC Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the lower support insulator. 1. Remove the lower support insulator through bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Remove the lower support insulator bolt and 2 nuts. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 3. Remove the lower support insulator. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6F35 Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4615 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4616 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4617 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4618 locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 8. Position the main control cover in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4619 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4620 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. 3.0L Engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4621 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 TSB 09-8-6 05/04/09 6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706, P0707, P1702 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before 10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707, P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR. 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9. 2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS connector from the solenoid body lead frame. 3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor wires during the installation of the main control. 4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr. 2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 4630 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4636 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 TSB 09-8-6 05/04/09 6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706, P0707, P1702 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before 10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707, P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR. 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9. 2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS connector from the solenoid body lead frame. 3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor wires during the installation of the main control. 4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr. 2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 4641 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4647 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4648 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4649 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor 6F35 Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4652 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor 6F35 Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4653 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4654 11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4655 Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly Of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4656 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4657 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4658 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body Valve Body: Service and Repair 6F35 Main Control Valve Body 6F35 Main Control Valve Body Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4663 3. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 4. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 5. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 6. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 7. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4664 8. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 9. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 10. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 11. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4665 12. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 13. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 14. Remove the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 15. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body assembly from the main control valve body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4666 Installation 1. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly Of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the solenoid body assembly onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4667 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4668 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4669 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4670 16. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 17. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4671 Valve Body: Service and Repair 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4672 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4673 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4674 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: 6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4675 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4676 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4677 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4678 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4679 Valve Body: Service and Repair 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4680 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4681 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4682 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4683 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4684 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4685 Valve Body: Service and Repair 6F35 Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4686 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4687 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4688 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4689 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4690 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4691 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4692 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Disc: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) Clutch Disc: Customer Interest M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) TSB 09-18-4 MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2009 Escape ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs. clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7B546 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Disc: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) Clutch Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) TSB 09-18-4 MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2009 Escape ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs. clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7B546 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Clutch Disc: Procedures Clutch Disc Check 1. Check the clutch disc lining surface for hardening or the presence of oil. 2. Check for a worn clutch disc lining. Measure the minimum allowable depth to the rivet heads with a slide caliper. 3. Check for loose clutch disc lining rivets. 4. Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. 5. Check for wear or rust on the splines. If necessary, clean them with an emery cloth. 6. Check the clutch disc for cracking, scoring, discoloration or other surface marks. Install a new clutch disc if necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4709 Clutch Disc: Removal and Replacement Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Removal 1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Using the Flywheel Holding Tool, lock the flywheel to the engine. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4710 3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest. 4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the bolts are removed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage. Remove the 6 bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc. 5. Use a suitable cleaning solution to remove any oil film from the clutch pressure plate friction surface. 6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges. 7. NOTICE: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior to clutch disc installation. NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present. Inspect the clutch disc for: oil or grease saturation. - worn or loose facings. - warpage or loose rivets at the hub. - wear or rust on the splines. 8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear. Installation 1. Using the Clutch Aligner, position the clutch disc on the flywheel. 2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the 6 clutch pressure plate bolts. - Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in the sequence shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4711 3. Install the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications HYDRAULIC CLUTCH FLUID Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. PM-1-C Ford Specification .................................................................................................................................................. WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Clutch Controls - Exploded View Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Controls - Exploded View Clutch Controls - Exploded View 1. For further information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Clutch Controls - Exploded View > Page 4720 Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder Clutch Master Cylinder Removal and Installation WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional Information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder hose from the brake master cylinder. - Plug the brake master cylinder. - Plug the clutch master cylinder hose. 2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 3. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder push rod. 4. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting. - Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube. 5. Remove the clutch master cylinder. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the air from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Slave Cylinder Removal and Installation WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional Information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic fluid tube adapter. 3. Remove the 3 clutch slave cylinder bolts and the clutch slave cylinder. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the air from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair Clutch Hydraulic Fluid Tubes Removal and Installation WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional Information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Remove the engine air cleaner. 2. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch master cylinder. - Plug the clutch master cylinder. - Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube. 3. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic fluid tube adapter. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Remove the clutch hydraulic fluid tube. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the air from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair Clutch Pedal Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the master cylinder push rod. 2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 3. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly nut. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 4. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4734 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4735 Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4736 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 4739 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Release Bearing: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) Clutch Release Bearing: Customer Interest M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) TSB 09-18-4 MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2009 Escape ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs. clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7B546 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Release Bearing: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) Clutch Release Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) TSB 09-18-4 MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2009 Escape ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs. clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7B546 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Pressure Plate: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) Pressure Plate: Customer Interest M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) TSB 09-18-4 MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2009 Escape ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs. clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7B546 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Plate: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) Pressure Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) TSB 09-18-4 MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2009 Escape ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs. clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7B546 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4766 Pressure Plate: Specifications Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the 6 clutch pressure plate bolts. Tighten to.............................................................................................................................................. ....................29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in the sequence shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Pressure Plate: Procedures Clutch Pressure Plate Check 1. Check the clutch pressure plate surface for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Minor scratches or discoloration should be removed with a fine emery cloth. 2. Measure the flatness of the clutch pressure plate surface with a straightedge and a feeler gauge. 3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring and bent or broken segments. 4. Measure the wear of the diaphragm spring fingers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4769 Pressure Plate: Removal and Replacement Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Removal 1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Using the Flywheel Holding Tool, lock the flywheel to the engine. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4770 3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest. 4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the bolts are removed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage. Remove the 6 bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc. 5. Use a suitable cleaning solution to remove any oil film from the clutch pressure plate friction surface. 6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges. 7. NOTICE: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior to clutch disc installation. NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present. Inspect the clutch disc for: oil or grease saturation. - worn or loose facings. - warpage or loose rivets at the hub. - wear or rust on the splines. 8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear. Installation 1. Using the Clutch Aligner, position the clutch disc on the flywheel. 2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the 6 clutch pressure plate bolts. - Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in the sequence shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4771 3. Install the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - LH Differential Seals - LH Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 3. Remove the retainers and remove the LH splash shield. 4. Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid. 5. Remove the LH halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4777 6. Using the Slide Hammer and Input Shaft Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the LH differential seal. Installation 1. Using the Drive Pinion Oil Seal Installer, install the LH differential seal. 2. Install the LH halfshaft. 3. Clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install the drain plug. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle. 5. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the bottom of the fill plug hole. 6. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug removing transmission fluid that may have spilled on the transaxle case. Install the fill plug. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: The check and fill plug is located on the left side of the transaxle near the front. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4778 NOTE: The transmission fluid is checked and filled by removing the fill plug and adding transmission fluid to the bottom of the fill plug hole. Start the engine and check for correct forward and reverse operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4779 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - RH Differential Seals - RH Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 3. Remove the retainers and remove the LH splash shield. 4. Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid. 5. Remove the RH halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4780 6. Using the Slide Hammer and RH Halfshaft Fluid Seal Remover, remove and discard the RH differential seal. Installation 1. Using the Output Shaft Oil Seal (4X2) Installer, install the RH differential seal. 2. Install the RH halfshaft. 3. Clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install the drain plug. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle. 5. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the bottom of the fill plug hole. 6. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug removing transmission fluid that may have spilled on the transaxle case. Install the fill plug. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: The check and fill plug is located on the left side of the transaxle near the front. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4781 NOTE: The transmission fluid is checked and filled by removing the fill plug and adding transmission fluid to the bottom of the fill plug hole. Start the engine and check for correct forward and reverse operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4786 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4787 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4788 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4789 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4790 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4791 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4792 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4793 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4794 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4795 Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4796 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4797 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4798 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4799 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4800 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4801 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4802 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4803 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4804 Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 37-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4805 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower Removal and Installation Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 3. Remove the splash shield retainers and remove the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower > Page 4813 4. Remove the bolts and the lateral support crossmember. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 5. Remove the lower insulator through bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 6. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 7. Remove and discard the engine support crossmember nut. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts. - To install, tighten the new engine support crossmember nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). - To install, tighten the 2 engine support crossmember bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 8. Remove the engine support crossmember. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower > Page 4814 9. Remove the rear roll restrictor through bolt and remove the rear roll restrictor from the bracket. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower > Page 4815 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Rear Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Rear Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Rear Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the rear insulator through bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 3. Remove the rear insulator nuts and bolt. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower > Page 4816 4. Remove the rear insulator studs. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Remove the rear insulator. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower > Page 4817 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower > Page 4818 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly. 2. Install the Engine Support Bar, Support Leg Adapter, Engine Support Bar Adapter and Lifting Hook Adapter. 3. Remove the upper insulator bracket bolts and the bracket. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Remove the upper insulator. 1. Remove the upper insulator nuts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 2. Remove the upper insulator through bolt. - To install, tighten the bolt to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal Axle Shaft Assembly: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4828 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4829 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal Axle Shaft Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4835 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4836 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Material Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Material Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Material > Page 4839 Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Front Drive Halfshafts Front Drive Halfshafts The halfshafts and intermediate shaft consists of the following components: - Inner CV joints - Outer CV joints - A support bearing on the intermediate shaft The shafts are serviced as assemblies only. The front drive halfshafts are splined to drive the front wheel hubs. The LH halfshaft uses a circlip to retain the inner CV joint stub shaft in the differential side gear. The RH halfshaft is connected to an intermediate shaft with a circlip. The intermediate shaft is also driven by a differential side gear. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4842 Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Halfshaft Joint Halfshaft Joint The front drive halfshaft CV joints consist of the following components: - Inner CV joints - Outer CV joints - CV joint boot clamps - Convoluted CV joint boots - Tripod joint housings - Ball and cage housings - Retainer circlips - Special CV high temperature grease The halfshaft joint allows for smooth rotation of the interconnecting shaft and the outboard housing. It also adjusts for length requirements as the vehicle goes through jounce and rebound. The halfshaft joints are not repairable and are serviced as assemblies only. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Halfshaft Halfshaft NOTE: RH halfshaft shown, LH similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft > Page 4845 Removal All halfshafts 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the wheel and tire. 3. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside. 5. Remove the lower ball joint bolt and nut. - Discard the nut and bolt. 6. NOTE: Do not allow the ball joint stud to contact the CV joint boot. Separate the lower arm from the front wheel knuckle. 7. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub. Left halfshaft 8. Using the Halfshaft Remover and Slide Hammer, remove the LH halfshaft from the differential. Right halfshaft 9. Using a brass drift to strike the RH halfshaft in the indicated area, separate and remove the halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft > Page 4846 Installation Left halfshaft 1. NOTE: When seated correctly, the halfshaft bearing retainer circlip can be felt as it snaps into the differential side gear groove. Position the LH halfshaft so the splines line up with the differential side gear splines. Push the halfshaft into the differential side gear. Right halfshaft 2. Align the RH halfshaft with the splines of the intermediate shaft and push the halfshaft in until the circlip locks the shafts together. - Apply a thin coat of the specified grease to the splines of the intermediate shaft. All halfshafts 3. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the halfshaft into the front wheel hub. 4. Position the lower arm into the front wheel knuckle. 5. Install the new lower ball joint bolt and nut. - Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 6. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor and bolt. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install new front wheel hub nut. - Tighten to 300 Nm (222 lb-ft). 8. Install the front tires and wheels. 9. Check and fill the transaxle fluid as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft > Page 4847 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Intermediate Shaft Intermediate Shaft Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: If removing the intermediate shaft in order to repair a separate component, it should only be removed as an assembly with the RH front drive halfshaft. Remove the RH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Halfshaft See: Halfshaft. 2. Remove the 2 intermediate shaft bearing retainer nuts. - To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 3. Remove the intermediate shaft. 4. NOTICE: On All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles, the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) seal must be replaced everytime the intermediate shaft is removed. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Apply a thin coat of the specified grease to the splines of the intermediate shaft. 5. Check and fill the transaxle fluid as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4856 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4857 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4863 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4864 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4865 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108 A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4866 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4867 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108 A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4868 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4869 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4870 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4875 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. 2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise. 2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4876 5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4877 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Bearing - Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4878 Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor ring. 4. Remove the brake drum. 5. Using the Front Hub Remover and Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent tools, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4879 6. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using a suitable press and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, press the inner bearing race from the wheel knuckle. 7. Remove and discard the wheel bearing snap ring. 8. Using the Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent and the Axle Bearing Remover, remove the bearing from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Using the Half Shaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. Install the wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the brake drum. 6. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the new wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4880 - Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to..................................................................................... ..............................................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft). Front Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to..................................................................................... ..............................................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Position the flexplate and install the 8 bolts. Tighten to........................................................................ ...............................................................................................................................80 Nm (59 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4888 Flex Plate: Diagrams Lower End Components - Exploded View Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal Flexplate and Rear Seal 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4889 Flex Plate: Testing and Inspection Flexplate Inspection 1. Inspect the flexplate for: 1. any cracks. 2. worn ring gear teeth. 3. chipped or cracked ring gear teeth. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4890 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Flexplate Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the transaxle. 3. Remove the bolts and the flexplate. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Flywheel Runout Check Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Runout Check Flywheel Runout Check NOTICE: Do not clean the dual mass flywheel with any kind of fluid. Use a dry cloth only or damage to the dual mass flywheel may occur. NOTICE: Do not clean the gap between the primary and secondary mass. Only clean the bolt connection surface and the clutch surface or damage to the flywheel may occur. 1. Check the transaxle fluid level and fill to the correct level as necessary. 2. With the engine operating at idle and the transaxle in NEUTRAL, listen and check for unacceptable noise. Determine if any unacceptable noise is reduced when the clutch pedal is depressed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Flywheel Runout Check > Page 4895 Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Inspection Flywheel Inspection NOTICE: Do not clean the dual mass flywheel with any kind of fluid, use a dry cloth only or damage to the dual mass flywheel may occur. NOTICE: Do not clean the gap between the primary and secondary mass. Only clean the bolt connection surface and the clutch surface or damage to the flywheel may occur. 1. Check the transaxle fluid level and fill to the correct level as necessary. 2. With the engine operating at idle and the transaxle in NEUTRAL, listen and check for unacceptable noise. Determine if any unacceptable noise is reduced when the clutch pedal is depressed. 3. If unacceptable noise is identified, remove the transaxle. 4. Inspect the clutch slave cylinder for leaks. If a leak is identified, install a new clutch slave cylinder. 5. Inspect the sliding surfaces of the clutch release hub and bearing. Any scoring or burr should be removed with a fine grade of emery paper. 6. Inspect the transaxle input shaft for spline wear, scoring or burrs. Any scoring or burr should be removed with a fine grade of emery paper. If spline wear is identified, install a new transaxle. 7. NOTE: The clutch disc should be discarded due to possible hub spline wear or friction material wear. Remove the clutch disc and pressure plate. - Discard the clutch disc. 8. Inspect the clutch pressure plate and diaphragm spring segments and discard as necessary. - Inspect the clutch pressure plate for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Any minor scoring or discoloration should be removed with a fine grade of emery cloth. - Inspect the clutch diaphragm spring segments for damage, uneven height, scoring, cracks or discoloration. Any minor scoring or discoloration should be removed with a fine grade of emery cloth. 9. NOTE: The flywheel cannot be machined. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel surface for scoring, cracks, discoloration or damage. If any of these conditions exist, install a new flywheel. 10. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise and counterclockwise until the dual mass flywheel friction control plate is centered between the secondary mass notches. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Flywheel Runout Check > Page 4896 11. Inspect the dual mass flywheel friction control plate for damage or melting and install a new dual mass flywheel if necessary. 12. NOTE: The dual mass flywheel rotational freeplay inspection cannot be carried out if the friction control plate is off center or damaged. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel rotational freeplay using the following Steps 13 through 17. 13. Check that the dual mass flywheel friction control plate is centered between the secondary mass notches. 14. Place a reference mark on the secondary mass of the dual mass flywheel. 15. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass clockwise to the end of the freeplay. Place a reference mark on the primary mass of the dual mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass. 16. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise to the end of the freeplay. Place a second reference mark on the primary mass of the dual mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass. 17. Measure the rotational freeplay XX between the 2 reference marks on the primary mass of the dual mass flywheel. If the rotational freeplay exceeds 19 mm (0.750 in), install a new dual mass flywheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Flywheel Runout Check > Page 4897 18. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel internal spring operation using the following Steps 19 through 21. 19. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool. 20. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise. The secondary mass should begin to engage the internal spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass should continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the secondary mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel. 21. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise. The secondary mass should begin to engage the internal spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass should continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the secondary mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel. 22. Inspect the dual mass flywheel when removed from the engine and placed on a bench, using the following Steps 23 and 24. 23. NOTE: Blocks must be placed under the dual mass flywheel to make sure it is level and stable. Remove the dual mass flywheel and place it on a firm and level surface. - Discard the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts and remove the Flywheel Holding Tool. 24. NOTE: Axial movement of the secondary mass flywheel is normal and the dual mass flywheel should not be discarded based on this movement. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Flywheel Runout Check > Page 4898 Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, inspect the dual mass flywheel hub bush for wear and install new as necessary. - Place a dial indicator gauge at a point on the outer upper surface of the secondary mass. - Using light hand pressure, press downward at the opposite point on the outer upper surface of the secondary mass and note the deflection on the dial indicator gauge. - Repeat this measurement at 120 degree intervals around the dual mass flywheel and note any deflection. If the deflection exceeds 1.5 mm (0.060 in) at any point, install a new dual mass flywheel. 25. Inspect the rear face of the engine block. 1. Make sure that the 2 engine dowel pins are correctly installed and are not damaged, install new dowel pins as necessary. 2. Inspect the upper and lower engine block rear face plates for damage or warping and install new plates as necessary. 3. Inspect the crankshaft flange for residual thread locking compound or rust, and clean as necessary. 26. Inspect the transaxle mounting face. - Make sure that the 2 dowel pin holes are not elongated or damaged. 27. Inspect the dual mass flywheel crankshaft mounting flange for residual thread locking compound or rust and clean as necessary. 28. NOTE: Install new dual mass flywheel retaining bolts. Loosely install the dual mass flywheel. 29. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool. 30. Tighten the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts in the sequence shown to 112 Nm (83 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Flywheel Runout Check > Page 4899 31. NOTE: A new clutch disc should be installed due to possible hub spline wear or friction material wear. Install the clutch disc and pressure plate. 32. Install the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid - M/T: Specifications Manual Transmission Fluid Type Ford Part Name ................................................................................................................................... ............................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil Ford Part Number ............................................ ..................................................................................................................................................... XT-4-QGL Ford Specification .............................................................................................................. ...................................................... WSS-M2C206-A1 and GL-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4909 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Transaxle Draining and Filling 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid. 3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug. Install the drain plug. - Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 4. Remove the fill level inspection plug. 5. Remove the transaxle fill plug. 6. Fill the transmission with gear oil until level with the fill level inspection plug hole. 7. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill plug. Install the transaxle fill plug. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4910 - Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 8. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug. Install the fill level inspection plug. - Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal Removal and Installation NOTICE: New halfshaft oil seals should be installed any time the halfshafts are removed. Failure to install new halfshafts seals may result in transmission oil leak(s). NOTE: RH intermediate shaft oil seal shown, LH halfshaft oil seal similar. 1. Remove the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft. 2. Using the Slide Hammer with the Bearing Cup Remover, remove the RH intermediate shaft oil seal or the LH halfshaft oil seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 4914 Installation 1. Using the Output Shaft Seal Installer, install the halfshaft oil seal. 2. NOTICE: Make sure to use the seal protector when installing the RH intermediate shaft and the LH halfshaft. Failure to use the seal protector may result in transmission oil leaks. Install the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Gearshift Lever Removal 1. Remove the gearshift lever knob and boot assembly. 2. Remove the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the 2 gearshift cable clips. 4. Carefully disconnect the gearshift cables from the gearshift lever. 5. Remove the 4 gearshift lever nuts. 6. Remove the gearshift lever. Installation 1. Position the gearshift lever. 2. Connect the gearshift cables to the gearshift lever. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4923 3. NOTE: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully seated. Install the 2 gearshift cable clips. 4. Install the 4 gearshift lever nuts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Adjust the gearshift cables. 6. Install the floor console finish panel. 7. Install the gearshift lever knob and boot assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4924 Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Boot Gearshift Lever Boot Removal and Installation NOTE: The gearshift lever boot and gearshift lever knob is one assembly. 1. Separate the gearshift lever boot from the floor console. 2. NOTE: The gearshift lever boot has been removed for clarity. Cut the gearshift lever knob crimp ring. 3. Remove the gearshift lever knob and gearshift lever boot assembly. 4. NOTICE: A fully seated knob will conceal the knurled section on the gearshift lever. Failure to fully seat the gearshift knob may cause gearshift lever boot damage. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Crimp the ring to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Gearshift Cable Adjustment 1. Separate the shift boot from the floor console finish panel. Rotate the gearshift knob counterclockwise and remove the knob and boot as an assembly. 2. Carefully pry the floor console finish panel from the floor console. 3. Disengage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it away from the shifter ball stud. 4. NOTE: If the primary shift cable lock is difficult to slide out, disconnect the shift cable from the ball stud, push the primary lock from the rear, and reattach the shift cable to the ball stud. Disengage the primary shift cable lock by sliding it out away from the shift cable. 5. With the shifter and the transmission in NEUTRAL, engage the primary shift cable lock. 6. Engage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it over the primary shift cable lock. 7. Install the floor console finish panel. 8. Install the gearshift knob and the gearshift lever boot. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4929 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Gearshift Cables Removal 1. NOTE: Carefully disconnect the spring clip from the cable end. It can become unfastened from the cable. Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle gearshift control assembly. - Pull the spring clip out of the groove, lift upward and rotate the clip 90 degrees. 2. NOTE: Carefully pry the gearshift cables from the transaxle bracket. Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle bracket. 3. Remove the floor console. 4. Remove the Restraints Control Module (RCM). For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4930 5. Disconnect the Smart Junction Box (SJB) electrical connector and the 2 harness electrical connectors. 6. Disconnect the gearshift cables from the gearshift lever assembly. 7. Remove the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts. 8. Remove the gearshift cables. - Pull the gearshift cables into the vehicle. Using an assistant, carefully lift the LH floor duct, pull the cables under the duct and remove from the vehicle. Installation 1. NOTE: When inserting the gearshift cables through the dash panel, make sure the arrow on the grommet is pointing down. Insert the gearshift cables through the dash panel. 2. Connect the selector cable. 3. Connect the shift cable. 4. Install the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4931 5. NOTE: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully seated. Install the 2 gearshift cable clips. 6. Connect the gearshift cables to the transaxle gearshift control assembly. 7. Connect the SJB electrical connector and the 2 harness electrical connectors. 8. Adjust the gearshift cables. 9. Install the floor console. 10. Install the RCM. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Manual Transmission Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the air cleaner. 3. Using the Engine Support Bar, support the engine. 4. Remove the 4 LH transaxle support insulator bolts. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. Remove the through bolt and the LH transaxle support insulator. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4936 - To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 6. Remove the 3 nuts and the LH transaxle support insulator bracket. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Transaxle Front Support Insulator Transaxle Front Support Insulator Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Using the Engine Support Bar, support the engine. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4937 3. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember. 1. Remove the 2 transaxle front support insulator bolts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 2. Remove the splash shield screw. 3. Remove the 2 front-to-aft crossmember bolts and the nut. - To install, tighten bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). - To install, tighten nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 4. Remove the crossmember. 4. Remove the through bolt and the transaxle front support insulator. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 5. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle front support insulator bracket. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4938 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Rear Support Insulator Transaxle Rear Support Insulator Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator bolt. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 3. Remove the 2 transaxle rear support insulator nuts. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 4. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator through-bolt and washer. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 5. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator. 6. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle rear support insulator bracket. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Column Shift) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Floor Shift) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6F35 Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4953 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4954 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4955 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4956 locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 8. Position the main control cover in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4957 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4958 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. 3.0L Engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4959 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 TSB 09-8-6 05/04/09 6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706, P0707, P1702 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before 10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707, P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR. 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9. 2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS connector from the solenoid body lead frame. 3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor wires during the installation of the main control. 4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr. 2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 4968 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4974 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 TSB 09-8-6 05/04/09 6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706, P0707, P1702 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before 10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707, P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR. 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9. 2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS connector from the solenoid body lead frame. 3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor wires during the installation of the main control. 4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr. 2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 4979 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4985 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4986 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4987 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor 6F35 Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4990 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor 6F35 Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4991 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4992 11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4993 Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly Of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4994 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4995 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4996 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5007 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5010 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5011 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5012 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5013 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5014 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5015 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5016 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5017 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5018 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5019 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5020 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5021 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5022 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5023 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5024 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5025 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5026 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5027 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5028 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5029 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5030 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5034 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5037 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5038 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5039 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5040 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5041 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5042 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5043 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5044 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5045 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5046 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5047 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5048 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5049 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5050 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5051 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5052 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5053 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5054 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5055 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5056 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5057 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 6F35 Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH = Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5061 Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5064 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5065 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5066 3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5067 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5068 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5069 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids 6F35 Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5070 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5071 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5072 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5073 4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. 5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins. 8. Install the 5 leadframe screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5074 9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 11. Install the main control cover grommet. 12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5075 14. Position the main control cover in place. 15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5076 18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5077 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5078 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5079 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5080 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5081 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5082 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5083 Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5084 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Column Shift) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Floor Shift) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6F35 Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5101 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5102 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5103 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5104 locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 8. Position the main control cover in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5105 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5106 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. 3.0L Engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5107 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 TSB 09-8-6 05/04/09 6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706, P0707, P1702 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before 10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707, P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR. 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9. 2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS connector from the solenoid body lead frame. 3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor wires during the installation of the main control. 4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr. 2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 5116 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 5122 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 TSB 09-8-6 05/04/09 6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706, P0707, P1702 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before 10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707, P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR. 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9. 2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS connector from the solenoid body lead frame. 3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor wires during the installation of the main control. 4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr. 2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 5127 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) 090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs. Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 5133 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5134 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5135 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor 6F35 Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5138 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor 6F35 Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan studbolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5139 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5140 11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5141 Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly Of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5142 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5143 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5144 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic Connector - ABS > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic Connector - ABS > Component Information > Locations > Page 5157 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration TSB 09-20-3 10/19/09 ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12 MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H) FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h). ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C219 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration TSB 09-20-3 10/19/09 ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12 MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H) FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h). ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C219 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5171 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5172 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5173 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5174 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicles shown, hybrid vehicles similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly. All vehicles 1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. Non-hybrid vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5175 2. Remove the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). All vehicles 5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Configure the ABS module. 8. Calibrate the ABS module. - For non-hybrid vehicles, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence following the scan tool directions. - For hybrid vehicles, carry out the Multi-Calibration routine following the scan tool directions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: When installing a new ABS module/Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) assembly, it must be configured (either by download/upload or uploading the as-built data method). All vehicles 1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) and the ACL outlet pipe. 2. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the HCU. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Vehicles with 3.0L engine 3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the master cylinder and remove the brake tubes. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). All vehicles 4. NOTE: The brake tubes must be installed in the same location as removed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5179 Disconnect the front brake tube fittings from the HCU. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the rear brake tube fittings from the jumper tubes. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 6. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover. 7. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and remove the HCU. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5183 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5184 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Stability/Traction Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel. 2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel TSB 09-5-5 03/23/09 LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT 10/21/2008-10/31/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from 10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage. 2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics. 3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs. Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 5193 Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Correct Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3K186 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel TSB 09-5-5 03/23/09 LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT 10/21/2008-10/31/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from 10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage. 2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics. 3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs. Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 5199 Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Correct Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3K186 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 5202 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 5203 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 5204 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5207 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5208 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5209 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. - When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5212 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer. 5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the front wheel speed sensor. 9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5213 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. - When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. 3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5214 - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor. 8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5215 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Removal 1. Remove the front halfshaft. 2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5216 1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the previous illustration. 2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5217 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Removal and Installation Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut. - To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). 3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles 5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired separately. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding Master Cylinder Component Bleeding Master Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system. Hybrid vehicles 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air bubbles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5222 5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. - Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Non-hybrid vehicles 6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir. 7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air bubbles. 9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. All vehicles 10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake System Bleeding. Brake Caliper Component Bleeding Brake Caliper WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5223 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Wheel Cylinder Component Bleeding Wheel Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5224 - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5225 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to pressure bleed this system. 1. Clean all the dirt from around the brake fluid reservoir cap and remove the cap. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5226 4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw. 7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw. Pressure Bleeding WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any components upstream of the HCU are installed new. NOTE: Pressure bleed the brake system at 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi). NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to pressure bleed this system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5227 1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. - Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system. 5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose. 6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw. - Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to Specifications. 7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. 8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm. - If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any remaining air from the system. Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5228 plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. All vehicles 1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. 2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Service Bleed instructions. 3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. Hybrid vehicles 4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Pedal Assy: Description and Operation Hydraulic Brake Actuation The hydraulic brake actuation system consists of the following components: - Brake master cylinder - Brake pedal and bracket assembly - Brake tubes and hoses The hydraulic brake system is diagonally split with the LH front and RH rear brakes on one circuit and the RH front and LH rear brakes on the other circuit. Hydraulic Brake Actuation The brake pedal is connected to the power brake booster, which is connected to the brake master cylinder. When the brake pedal is pressed, brake fluid is pushed from the master cylinder through the double-walled steel tubes and flexible hoses to the front brake calipers and rear wheel cylinders. The brake fluid enters the brake calipers and wheel cylinders, forcing brake pads and shoes outward against the brake disc/drum friction surfaces, slowing or stopping rotation. When the brake pedal is released, brake fluid pressure is relieved, returning the front and rear brake components to the unapplied position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5232 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal and Bracket Removal and Installation 1. NOTICE: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp switch and speed control deactivator switch. These switches must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Switch plungers must be compressed for the switch to rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the switch. Remove the stoplamp switch. 2. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis locking pin is a one-time use only part. Any time the booster push rod clevis locking pin is removed, a new booster push rod clevis locking pin should be used. NOTE: Remove the clevis locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the opposite end. Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis locking pin. 3. Disconnect the accelerator pedal electrical connector. 4. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper bolt. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 5. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper and lower nuts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5233 6. Remove the 4 brake booster nuts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 7. Remove the brake pedal and bracket assembly. - Position the brake booster forward to allow the brake pedal and bracket assembly to clear the brake booster studs. 8. NOTICE: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp switch or the speed control deactivator switch. These switches must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing these switches with the brake pedal in any other position will result in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switches. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Calipers Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Calipers Brake System Inspection Brake Calipers 1. Inspect the brake calipers for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding. - If the brake caliper is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new brake caliper. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Calipers > Page 5239 Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper Guide Pins Brake System Inspection Brake Caliper Guide Pins 1. The guide pins should slide with a reasonable amount of hand force. If the brake pads show taper wear or the guide pins are difficult to move, carry out the following steps. Disassemble the brake caliper guide pins and inspect the guide pins and guide pin bores for wear, damage and corrosion. If bore is worn or damaged, replace the damaged component. - Use a wire brush, rolled-up sandpaper or emery cloth to remove all corrosion and foreign material from the caliper guide pin bores. Clean any remaining foreign material from the bores with brake parts cleaner and compressed air. - Assemble the caliper guide pins using new caliper seals, boots and guide pins. Use an ample amount of the specified grease to lubricate the bores and guide pins. - Inspect the brake pads. For additional information, refer to Brake System Inspection. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Caliper: Procedures Component Bleeding Brake Caliper WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5242 Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement Brake Caliper Brake Caliper Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may damage the high-voltage components. NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTICE: If the anchor housing spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake caliper or damage to the spring can occur. NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive force or damage to the spring can occur. NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the upper brake caliper cavity. For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from the lower brake caliper cavity. 3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper. 4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the lower brake caliper cavity. For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5243 - Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from the upper brake caliper cavity. 5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper. 6. NOTE: The brake caliper and brake flexible hose are removed as an assembly. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose. 7. Remove and discard the retainer clip from the brake flexible hose. 8. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper aside. - Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 9. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper. 10. Remove the brake flexible hose from the brake caliper. Installation 1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate. 2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps. - Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first. Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure: 1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity. 2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake caliper cavity). 4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate. 5. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate. 6. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities. 7. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown, or damage to component may occur. Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5244 8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted. Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 9. Position the brake flexible and install a new retainer clip. 10. Attach the brake tube fitting to the brake flexible hose. - Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 11. Bleed the brake caliper. 12. Install the wheel and tire. Disc Brake System - Exploded View Disc Brake System - Exploded View Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5245 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and pressurizing the brake system. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuses 9 (50A) and 18 (50A). 3. Remove the wheel and tire. 4. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. - Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 5. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts. - To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 6. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pad: Specifications Brake pad minimum thickness.............................................................................................................. ........................................................3.0 mm (0.118 in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5249 Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection Brake Pads NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads when the brake discs are machined. 1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake pad friction material. For additional information, refer to Specifications. - Minor surface cracks do not require pad replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake pads. - If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake pads. - If the friction material shows taper wear that is not within specifications, install new brake pads and verify the caliper guide pins are functioning correctly. For additional information, refer to Brake Caliper Guide Pins inspection. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection/Brake Caliper Guide Pins Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View Brake Pad: Service and Repair Disc Brake System - Exploded View Disc Brake System - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 5252 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads Brake Pads Removal WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may damage the high-voltage components. NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads. 1. If necessary, using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder reservoir until it is half filled. 2. Remove the wheel and tire. 3. NOTICE: If the brake pad anti-rattle spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake caliper or damage to the spring can occur. NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive force or damage to the spring can occur. NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the upper brake caliper cavity. For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from the lower brake caliper cavity. 4. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 5253 5. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the lower brake caliper cavity. For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. - Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from the upper brake caliper cavity. 6. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper. 7. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper aside. - Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 8. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper. 9. Inspect the brake pads for wear and contamination, install new pads as necessary. 10. NOTICE: Protect the piston and boots when pushing the caliper piston into the caliper piston bores or damage to the piston or boots may occur. If installing new brake pads, using a C-clamp and worn brake pad, compress the brake caliper piston into the brake caliper. 11. Inspect the brake disc and resurface or install new as necessary. Installation 1. Using specified brake parts cleaner, clean, dry and inspect the brake caliper anchor plate. Apply a light coat of specified lubricant to the 4 brake pad contact points on the anchor plate. 2. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate. 3. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps. - Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: The 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first. Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 5254 1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity. 2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake caliper cavity). 5. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate. 6. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate. 7. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities. 8. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown or damage to component may occur. Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring. 9. Install the wheel and tire. 10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. - Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Brake Disc minimum thickness............................................................................................................. ........................................................24 mm (0.944 in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5258 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection Brake Discs NOTICE: Using an impact tool without a torque socket will lead to unevenly tightened wheel nuts. This causes brake disc on-vehicle lateral runout and brake roughness. NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake discs to address noise issues. 1. Inspect the brake discs and measure the brake disc thickness in a minimum of 4 places around the circumference of the brake disc. Record the measurements, refer to Specifications. If the brake disc is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake disc. - If any measurement is below the minimum thickness specification, install a new brake disc. - If the diagnosis has revealed vibration in the steering wheel, seat or pedal while braking that varies with vehicle speed, machine the brake disc. Heavily scored brake discs, similar to that caused by pads worn down to the backing plate, should also be machined. In order to machine, discs must be above the minimum thickness specification. For additional information, refer to Specifications and Brake Disc Machining See: Service and Repair/Procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures Brake Disc Machining NOTE: Do not use a bench lathe to machine the brake discs. Use an on-vehicle brake lathe only. Read the entire operating manual and/or view the video shipped with the lathe before installing, operating or repairing the lathe. NOTE: An on-vehicle brake lathe with an automatic runout adjustment feature is preferred. However, if the lathe is not self adjusting, the lathe oscillation must be adjusted using a dial indicator. The total indicated runout target is 0.000 mm (0.000 in). The maximum indicated runout should be no more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in). If the runout adjustment (automatic or manual) is carried out correctly prior to machining, then the final brake disc runout will be within specification, and a runout measurement is not necessary after machining. NOTE: Do not machine new brake discs. NOTE: Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required because correct adjustment of the on-vehicle brake lathe will make sure that these dimensions are within specifications. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose may occur. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube from the brake caliper. Remove the bolts and position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside, as required. - Support the brake caliper using mechanic's wire. 3. Install the hub adapter using: - four wheel nuts on a 4-stud wheel hub. - five wheel nuts on a 5-stud wheel hub. - six wheel nuts on a 6-stud wheel hub. - four wheel nuts on a 7- or 8-stud wheel hub. - five wheel nuts on a 10-stud wheel hub. 4. Install the cutting lathe. 5. If the lathe is not self adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator. The total indicated runout target is 0.000 mm (0.000 in). The maximum indicated runout should be no more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in). 6. Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits and install the chip deflector/silencer. 7. NOTE: The depth of the cut should be between 0.10 and 0.40 mm (0.004 and 0.015 in). Lighter cuts will cause the bit to heat up and wear faster. Heavier cuts will cause poor brake disc surface finish. Machine the brake disc. 8. Remove the lathe and the silencer. 9. Remove the wheel nuts and hub adapter. 10. Remove the metal shavings. 11. NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads if friction material is within specifications. For additional information, refer to Specifications. Position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly. - Install the bolts. - For fastener torque specifications, refer to Disc Brake System. See: Specifications 12. Install the wheel and tire. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5261 Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement Disc Brake System - Exploded View Disc Brake System - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Brake Disc Brake Disc Removal and Installation 1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. For additional information, refer to Brake Caliper Anchor Plate See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Caliper Anchor Plate. 2. Remove the brake disc. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair Backing Plate: Service and Repair Brake Backing Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Wheel Cylinder See: Wheel Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 3. Compress the parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the parking brake cable assembly through the backing plate. 4. Remove the rear wheel hub. 5. Remove the 4 backing plate bolts and the backing plate. - To install, tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications Brake Drum: Specifications Brake drum maximum diameter........................................................................................................... ..................................................256.3 mm (10.090 in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5269 Brake Drum: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection Brake Drums NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake drums to address noise issues. 1. Inspect the brake drums and measure the brake drum diameter. Record the measurements, refer to Specifications. - If the brake drum is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake drum. - If the diameter measurement is more than the maximum specification, install a new brake drum. - Heavily scored brake drums, similar to that caused by shoes worn down to the backing plate, should be machined. In order to machine, drums must be below the maximum diameter specification. - For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe / Adjustments. See: Brake Shoe/Adjustments Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5270 Brake Drum: Service and Repair Brake Drum Removal 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTICE: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can result. NOTE: If the brake drum is seized to the wheel hub pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum between the wheel studs. If the brake drum binds on the brake shoes, retract the brake shoes. 1. Move the brake shoe adjuster actuator lever away from the adjuster. 2. Rotate the brake shoe adjuster screw upward to retract the brake shoes. 3. Remove the brake drum. Installation 1. Using the Brake Drum Gauge, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum. - Install a new brake drum if the inside diameter exceeds the specification stamped on the outside face of the brake drum. 2. Adjust the rear brakes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See: Brake Shoe/Adjustments. 3. Position the brake drum on the vehicle. 4. Install the wheel and tire. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications Brake Shoe: Specifications Brake shoe minimum thickness............................................................................................................ ........................................................1.0 mm (0.039 in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5274 Brake Shoe: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection Brake Shoes 1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake shoe friction material. For additional information, refer to Specifications. - Minor surface cracks do not require shoe replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake shoes. - If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake shoes. - Verify that the mounting hardware is installed correctly and operating correctly. Install new hardware as necessary. - Verify that the backing plate contact points are free of corrosion that may cause binding. Clean or install new as necessary. - Verify correct brake shoe adjustment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5275 Brake Shoe: Adjustments Brake Shoe Adjustment 1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair. 2. Using the Brake Adjustment Gauge, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum. 3. Position the Brake Adjustment Gauge on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly. 4. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5276 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Brake Shoes Removal and Installation WARNING: Always install new brake shoes or pads at both ends of an axle to reduce the possibility of brakes pulling vehicle to one side. Failure to follow this instruction may result in uneven braking and serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed, resurface the brake drums to remove glazing and to provide an equal friction surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing also corrects out-of-round and bell conditions. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 2 brake shoe retaining springs and the 2 pins. 3. Remove the upper return spring. 4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly. 5. Remove the lower return spring. 6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly. 7. Remove the leading brake shoe. - Using specified brake parts cleaner, clean and dry the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate. - Apply a thin coat of the specified silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate. 8. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake drum. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See: Adjustments. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection Wheel Cylinders 1. Inspect the wheel cylinders for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding. - If the wheel cylinder is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new wheel cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Wheel Cylinder: Procedures Wheel Cylinder Lubrication Wheel Cylinder Lubrication 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Remove the upper and lower return springs. NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to piston seals. 3. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 4. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 5. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 6. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 7. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3 times to distribute the lubricant and verify smooth movement. 8. Install the upper and lower return springs. 9. Install the brake drum. - Adjust the rear brake shoes. Wheel Cylinder Component Bleeding Wheel Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5282 free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5283 Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Wheel Cylinder Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoes See: Brake Shoe/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the wheel cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5284 Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul Wheel Cylinder Disassembly WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5285 has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Removal is not necessary to disassemble, inspect, hone or overhaul the rear wheel cylinder. 1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the upper return spring. 3. Remove the lower return spring. 4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly. 5. Remove the retaining springs, the pins and the leading brake shoe. 6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly. - Clean and dry the brake backing plate. 7. Remove the bleeder screw cap. 8. Remove the bleeder screw. 9. Remove the 2 dust boots. 10. Remove the 2 pistons. 11. Remove the 2 piston seals. 12. Remove the spring. 13. Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be installed. Assembly 1. Install the spring. 2. Using clean brake fluid, lubricate and install the 2 piston seals. 3. Install the 2 pistons. 4. Install the 2 dust boots. 5. Install the bleeder screw. 6. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate. 7. Install the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly. 8. Install the leading brake shoe, the pins and the retaining springs. 9. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake drum. Install the self-adjuster and spring assembly. NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to piston seals. 10. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 11. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5286 - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 12. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 13. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 14. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3 times to distribute the lubricant and make sure of smooth movement. 15. Install the lower return spring. 16. Install the upper return spring. 17. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair. - Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See: Brake Shoe/Adjustments. 18. Bleed the wheel cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding Master Cylinder Component Bleeding Master Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system. Hybrid vehicles 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air bubbles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5292 5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. - Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Non-hybrid vehicles 6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir. 7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air bubbles. 9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. All vehicles 10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake System Bleeding. Brake Caliper Component Bleeding Brake Caliper WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5293 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Wheel Cylinder Component Bleeding Wheel Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5294 - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5295 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to pressure bleed this system. 1. Clean all the dirt from around the brake fluid reservoir cap and remove the cap. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5296 4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw. 7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw. Pressure Bleeding WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any components upstream of the HCU are installed new. NOTE: Pressure bleed the brake system at 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi). NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to pressure bleed this system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5297 1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. - Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system. 5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose. 6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw. - Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to Specifications. 7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. 8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm. - If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any remaining air from the system. Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5298 plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. All vehicles 1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. 2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Service Bleed instructions. 3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. Hybrid vehicles 4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Calipers Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Calipers Brake System Inspection Brake Calipers 1. Inspect the brake calipers for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding. - If the brake caliper is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new brake caliper. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Calipers > Page 5303 Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper Guide Pins Brake System Inspection Brake Caliper Guide Pins 1. The guide pins should slide with a reasonable amount of hand force. If the brake pads show taper wear or the guide pins are difficult to move, carry out the following steps. Disassemble the brake caliper guide pins and inspect the guide pins and guide pin bores for wear, damage and corrosion. If bore is worn or damaged, replace the damaged component. - Use a wire brush, rolled-up sandpaper or emery cloth to remove all corrosion and foreign material from the caliper guide pin bores. Clean any remaining foreign material from the bores with brake parts cleaner and compressed air. - Assemble the caliper guide pins using new caliper seals, boots and guide pins. Use an ample amount of the specified grease to lubricate the bores and guide pins. - Inspect the brake pads. For additional information, refer to Brake System Inspection. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Caliper: Procedures Component Bleeding Brake Caliper WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5306 Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement Brake Caliper Brake Caliper Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may damage the high-voltage components. NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTICE: If the anchor housing spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake caliper or damage to the spring can occur. NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive force or damage to the spring can occur. NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the upper brake caliper cavity. For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from the lower brake caliper cavity. 3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper. 4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the lower brake caliper cavity. For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5307 - Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from the upper brake caliper cavity. 5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper. 6. NOTE: The brake caliper and brake flexible hose are removed as an assembly. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose. 7. Remove and discard the retainer clip from the brake flexible hose. 8. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper aside. - Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 9. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper. 10. Remove the brake flexible hose from the brake caliper. Installation 1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate. 2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps. - Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first. Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure: 1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity. 2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake caliper cavity). 4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate. 5. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate. 6. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities. 7. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown, or damage to component may occur. Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5308 8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted. Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 9. Position the brake flexible and install a new retainer clip. 10. Attach the brake tube fitting to the brake flexible hose. - Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 11. Bleed the brake caliper. 12. Install the wheel and tire. Disc Brake System - Exploded View Disc Brake System - Exploded View Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5309 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and pressurizing the brake system. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuses 9 (50A) and 18 (50A). 3. Remove the wheel and tire. 4. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. - Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 5. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts. - To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 6. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE FLUID Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. PM-1-C Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................................. WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5316 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes NOTICE: Never use copper tubing. It is subject to fatigue, cracking and corrosion, which may result in brake tube failure. NOTE: Double-wall steel tubing is used throughout the brake hydraulic system. All brake tube fittings must be correctly double flared to provide strong, leakproof connections. When bending tubing to fit the underbody or rear axle contours, be careful not to kink or crack the tube. 1. Inspect brake tubes for corrosion, cracks, leaks or any other signs of damage. - If a section of the brake tube is damaged, the entire section must be installed with a new tube of the same type, size, shape and length. - When installing the hydraulic brake tubing, hoses or connectors, tighten all connections to specifications. After installation, bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System Bleeding. 2. Inspect the brake flexible hoses for cracks, leaks and swelling during brake application or any other signs of damage. - Install a new brake flexible hose if the hose shows signs of softening, cracking or other damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Flexible Hose Brake Flexible Hose Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Disconnect the brake flexible hose fitting from the wheel cylinder. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 4. Remove the flexible hose clip and the brake hose. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the wheel cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 5322 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake Disc Brake System - Exploded View Disc Brake System - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Brake Flexible Hose Brake Flexible Hose Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 5323 WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove and discard the brake flexible hose retaining clip. 3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 4. Detach the brake flexible hose from the strut bracket. 5. Disconnect the brake flexible hose from the caliper. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new retaining clip. - Bleed the brake caliper. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: When installing a new ABS module/Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) assembly, it must be configured (either by download/upload or uploading the as-built data method). All vehicles 1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) and the ACL outlet pipe. 2. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the HCU. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Vehicles with 3.0L engine 3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the master cylinder and remove the brake tubes. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). All vehicles 4. NOTE: The brake tubes must be installed in the same location as removed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5327 Disconnect the front brake tube fittings from the HCU. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the rear brake tube fittings from the jumper tubes. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 6. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover. 7. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and remove the HCU. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition Component Tests Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Plug the outlet ports of the master cylinder. 3. NOTE: Make sure the outlet port plugs do not show signs of leakage. Lightly apply the brakes and hold for 10 seconds. Release the brakes and then reapply with heavy force. If brake pedal height cannot be maintained, the brake master cylinder has an internal leak and a new brake master cylinder must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5332 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port Component Tests Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Apply and release the brakes. 3. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag. - If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at multiple wheels, continue to Step 4. - If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized brake caliper, brake wheel cylinder or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as necessary. 4. Check the brake stoplamp switch and the brake pedal free play to verify that the brake pedal is not partially applied. 5. Loosen the brake master cylinder nuts and position the brake master cylinder away from the brake booster. 6. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag. - If the brake drag is no longer present, install a new brake booster. - If the brake drag is still present, install a new master cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5333 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection Brake Pads Brake System Inspection Brake Pads NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads when the brake discs are machined. 1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake pad friction material. For additional information, refer to Specifications. - Minor surface cracks do not require pad replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake pads. - If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake pads. - If the friction material shows taper wear that is not within specifications, install new brake pads and verify the caliper guide pins are functioning correctly. For additional information, refer to Brake Caliper Guide Pins inspection. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection/Brake Caliper Guide Pins Brake Shoes Brake System Inspection Brake Shoes 1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake shoe friction material. For additional information, refer to Specifications. - Minor surface cracks do not require shoe replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake shoes. - If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake shoes. - Verify that the mounting hardware is installed correctly and operating correctly. Install new hardware as necessary. - Verify that the backing plate contact points are free of corrosion that may cause binding. Clean or install new as necessary. - Verify correct brake shoe adjustment. Brake Discs Brake System Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5334 Brake Discs NOTICE: Using an impact tool without a torque socket will lead to unevenly tightened wheel nuts. This causes brake disc on-vehicle lateral runout and brake roughness. NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake discs to address noise issues. 1. Inspect the brake discs and measure the brake disc thickness in a minimum of 4 places around the circumference of the brake disc. Record the measurements, refer to Specifications. If the brake disc is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake disc. - If any measurement is below the minimum thickness specification, install a new brake disc. - If the diagnosis has revealed vibration in the steering wheel, seat or pedal while braking that varies with vehicle speed, machine the brake disc. Heavily scored brake discs, similar to that caused by pads worn down to the backing plate, should also be machined. In order to machine, discs must be above the minimum thickness specification. For additional information, refer to Specifications and Brake Disc Machining See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Procedures. Brake Drums Brake System Inspection Brake Drums NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake drums to address noise issues. 1. Inspect the brake drums and measure the brake drum diameter. Record the measurements, refer to Specifications. - If the brake drum is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake drum. - If the diameter measurement is more than the maximum specification, install a new brake drum. - Heavily scored brake drums, similar to that caused by shoes worn down to the backing plate, should be machined. In order to machine, drums must be below the maximum diameter specification. - For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe / Adjustments. See: Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Adjustments Wheel Cylinders Brake System Inspection Wheel Cylinders Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5335 1. Inspect the wheel cylinders for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding. - If the wheel cylinder is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new wheel cylinder. Brake Calipers Brake System Inspection Brake Calipers 1. Inspect the brake calipers for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding. - If the brake caliper is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new brake caliper. Brake Caliper Guide Pins Brake System Inspection Brake Caliper Guide Pins 1. The guide pins should slide with a reasonable amount of hand force. If the brake pads show taper wear or the guide pins are difficult to move, carry out the following steps. Disassemble the brake caliper guide pins and inspect the guide pins and guide pin bores for wear, damage and corrosion. If bore is worn or damaged, replace the damaged component. - Use a wire brush, rolled-up sandpaper or emery cloth to remove all corrosion and foreign material from the caliper guide pin bores. Clean any remaining foreign material from the bores with brake parts cleaner and compressed air. - Assemble the caliper guide pins using new caliper seals, boots and guide pins. Use an ample amount of the specified grease to lubricate the bores and guide pins. - Inspect the brake pads. For additional information, refer to Brake System Inspection. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes Brake System Inspection Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes NOTICE: Never use copper tubing. It is subject to fatigue, cracking and corrosion, which may result in brake tube failure. NOTE: Double-wall steel tubing is used throughout the brake hydraulic system. All brake tube fittings must be correctly double flared to provide strong, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5336 leakproof connections. When bending tubing to fit the underbody or rear axle contours, be careful not to kink or crack the tube. 1. Inspect brake tubes for corrosion, cracks, leaks or any other signs of damage. - If a section of the brake tube is damaged, the entire section must be installed with a new tube of the same type, size, shape and length. - When installing the hydraulic brake tubing, hoses or connectors, tighten all connections to specifications. After installation, bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System Bleeding. 2. Inspect the brake flexible hoses for cracks, leaks and swelling during brake application or any other signs of damage. - Install a new brake flexible hose if the hose shows signs of softening, cracking or other damage. Brake Master Cylinder Brake System Inspection Brake Master Cylinder NOTE: During normal operation of the brake master cylinder, the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir will fall during brake application and rise during release. The net fluid level (such as after brake application and release) will remain unchanged. Fluid level will decrease with pad wear. NOTE: A trace of brake fluid will exist on the booster shell below the master cylinder mounting flange. This results from the normal lubricating action of the master cylinder bore and seal. 1. Inspect the brake master cylinder for fluid leaks. - Install a new master cylinder or brake fluid reservoir if signs of excessive leaking are present. - To check for correct brake master cylinder operation, refer to Component Tests See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Brake Booster Brake System Inspection Brake Booster (Non-Hybrid Vehicles) 1. Inspect the brake booster for excessive corrosion or damage. Inspect the vacuum hoses for leaks and kinks. - Install a new brake booster if signs of excessive corrosion or damage is found. - Repair or replace vacuum hoses as necessary. - To check for correct brake booster operation, refer to Component Tests See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5337 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster Component Tests Brake Booster (Non-Hybrid Vehicles) 1. Disconnect the check valve from the brake booster and connect a suitable vacuum/pressure tester to the booster side of the check valve. 2. Apply the parking brake, start the engine and place the transmission in NEUTRAL. - Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature. 3. NOTE: Subtract approximately 4.0193 kPa (1 in-Hg) from the specified reading for every 304.8 m (1,000 ft) of elevation above sea level. Verify that vacuum is available at the check valve with engine running at normal idle speed. - The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg). - If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the check valve and continue with Step 5. - If specified vacuum is not available, continue with Step 4. 4. Disconnect the check valve from the vacuum hose and verify that the specified vacuum is available at the hose with the engine at idle speed and the transmission in NEUTRAL. If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, install a new check valve and continue with Step 5. - If specified vacuum is not available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve and refer to Engine to diagnose the no/low vacuum condition. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Testing and Inspection 5. Apply the brake pedal several times to exhaust all vacuum from the system. 6. Apply the brake pedal and hold it in the applied position. Start the engine and verify that the brake pedal moves downward after the engine starts. - If the brake pedal moves, the brake booster is operating correctly. - If the brake pedal does not move, install a new brake booster. 7. Operate the engine a minimum of 20 seconds at idle. Stop the engine and let the vehicle stand for 10 minutes, then apply the brake pedal. The brake pedal feel should be the same as that noted with the engine operating. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power assist), install a new brake booster check valve and retest. - If condition still exists, install a new brake booster. - If the brake pedal feels the same as noted with the engine operating, the check valve is functioning properly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Master Cylinder: Procedures Component Bleeding Master Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system. Hybrid vehicles 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air bubbles. 5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. - Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5340 Non-hybrid vehicles 6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir. 7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air bubbles. 9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. All vehicles 10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System Bleeding. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5341 Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Brake Master Cylinder Brake Master Cylinder Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector. 2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. If equipped with a manual transmission, release the clamp and disconnect the clutch hose from the brake fluid reservoir. - Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose. 4. Disconnect the 2 brake tube fittings and plug the brake tubes and the brake master cylinder ports. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Remove and discard the 2 brake master cylinder nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5342 - To install, tighten new nuts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. Remove the brake master cylinder assembly. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the master cylinder. - If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder. Brake Fluid Reservoir Brake Fluid Reservoir Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector. 2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. If equipped with a manual transmission, release the clamp and disconnect the clutch hose from the brake fluid reservoir. - Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose. 4. Remove the reservoir. - Release the retaining clips on the underside of the reservoir. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5343 - Pull the reservoir upwards. 5. Remove and discard the 2 seals. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new seals. Lubricate the seals with clean, specified brake fluid. - Bleed the brake system. - If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection Wheel Cylinders 1. Inspect the wheel cylinders for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding. - If the wheel cylinder is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new wheel cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Wheel Cylinder: Procedures Wheel Cylinder Lubrication Wheel Cylinder Lubrication 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Remove the upper and lower return springs. NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to piston seals. 3. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 4. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 5. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 6. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 7. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3 times to distribute the lubricant and verify smooth movement. 8. Install the upper and lower return springs. 9. Install the brake drum. - Adjust the rear brake shoes. Wheel Cylinder Component Bleeding Wheel Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5349 free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5350 Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Wheel Cylinder Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoes See: Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the wheel cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5351 Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul Wheel Cylinder Disassembly WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5352 has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Removal is not necessary to disassemble, inspect, hone or overhaul the rear wheel cylinder. 1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Drum Brake System/Brake Drum/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the upper return spring. 3. Remove the lower return spring. 4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly. 5. Remove the retaining springs, the pins and the leading brake shoe. 6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly. - Clean and dry the brake backing plate. 7. Remove the bleeder screw cap. 8. Remove the bleeder screw. 9. Remove the 2 dust boots. 10. Remove the 2 pistons. 11. Remove the 2 piston seals. 12. Remove the spring. 13. Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be installed. Assembly 1. Install the spring. 2. Using clean brake fluid, lubricate and install the 2 piston seals. 3. Install the 2 pistons. 4. Install the 2 dust boots. 5. Install the bleeder screw. 6. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate. 7. Install the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly. 8. Install the leading brake shoe, the pins and the retaining springs. 9. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake drum. Install the self-adjuster and spring assembly. NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to piston seals. 10. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 11. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5353 - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 12. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 13. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 14. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3 times to distribute the lubricant and make sure of smooth movement. 15. Install the lower return spring. 16. Install the upper return spring. 17. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Drum Brake System/Brake Drum/Service and Repair. - Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See: Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Adjustments. 18. Bleed the wheel cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Parking Brake Cable: Procedures Parking Brake Cable Tension Release 1. With the help of an assistant, release the parking brake cable tension by pulling down on the front cable at the cable union, until the parking brake control drum track rotates to its stop and a 4 mm (0.15 in) x 100 mm (3.93 in) retainer pin can be inserted. 2. NOTE: Before removing the brake control retaining pin, make sure all cable connections are secure and the cable tension is reloaded slowly. To reload the tension on the parking brake cable, follow the release procedure in reverse. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5359 Parking Brake Cable: Removal and Replacement Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH NOTE: Rear disc shown, rear drum similar. Removal and Installation 1. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Cable Tension Release See: Procedures. 2. Remove the rear brake shoes. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by compressing the cable conduit locking tabs. 4. Detach the cable-to-fuel tank strap pin type retainer. 5. Remove the 2 parking brake cable bracket bolts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through the brake backing plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5360 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH Removal and Installation 1. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Cable Tension Release See: Procedures. 2. Remove the rear brake shoes. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by compressing the cable conduit locking tabs. 4. Compress the retaining clip and detach the parking brake cable from the exhaust support bracket. 5. Remove the parking brake cable bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through the brake backing plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5361 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Parking Brake Cable - Front Parking Brake Cable - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the parking brake control. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Control See: Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the floor console. 4. Remove the driver side front seat. 5. Remove the 3 front parking brake cable bracket bolts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the RR parking brake cable connector by releasing the locking tab. 7. Disconnect the front parking brake cable conduit from the LR parking brake cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5362 8. Release the front parking brake cable pass-through grommet from the vehicle underbody. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Parking Brake Control Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front driver side door scuff plate and kick panel. 2. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Cable Tension Release See: Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Procedures. 3. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector and detach the harness pin-type retainer from the parking brake control cover. 5. Remove the 2 parking brake control bolts. - To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 6. Remove the 2 parking brake control nuts. - To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 7. Remove the parking brake control. - Disconnect the front parking brake cable. 8. NOTE: Make sure that the cable is in the groove on the control wheel prior to final tightening of fasteners. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5366 To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Brake Pedal: > 09-6-7 > Apr > 09 > Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully Release Parking Brake Pedal: Customer Interest Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully Release TSB 09-6-7 04/06/09 PARKING BRAKE PEDAL WILL NOT FULLY RETURN WHEN RELEASED - INDICATOR STAYS ON FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, built on 10/1/2008 through and including 1/26/2009, may exhibit a parking brake indicator on the dash, due to the parking brake pedal not returning to the fully released position. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify parking brake indicator is illuminated in the dash. 2. Pull the pedal up to the fully released position by hand. 3. If the indicator does not go out, this procedure does not apply. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-00. 4. If the indicator does go out, replace the parking brake control assembly following WSM, Section 206-05. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090607A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.9 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Parking Brake Control Assembly (Do Not Use With 2780A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2780 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Pedal: > 09-6-7 > Apr > 09 > Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully Release Parking Brake Pedal: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully Release TSB 09-6-7 04/06/09 PARKING BRAKE PEDAL WILL NOT FULLY RETURN WHEN RELEASED - INDICATOR STAYS ON FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, built on 10/1/2008 through and including 1/26/2009, may exhibit a parking brake indicator on the dash, due to the parking brake pedal not returning to the fully released position. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify parking brake indicator is illuminated in the dash. 2. Pull the pedal up to the fully released position by hand. 3. If the indicator does not go out, this procedure does not apply. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-00. 4. If the indicator does go out, replace the parking brake control assembly following WSM, Section 206-05. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090607A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.9 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Parking Brake Control Assembly (Do Not Use With 2780A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2780 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5383 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5384 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. - To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5389 Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Brake Booster The power brake actuation system consists of the following components: - Brake booster - Brake booster check valve - Brake booster travel sensor (hybrid vehicles) - Brake booster vacuum sensor (hybrid vehicles) - Brake booster vacuum supply hose - Vacuum pump (hybrid vehicles) Conventional brake booster The brake booster uses engine vacuum from the intake manifold to create a partial vacuum inside the vacuum booster on both sides of the diaphragm. When the brake pedal is pressed, the booster rod opens a valve, allowing air to enter the booster on one side of the diaphragm while sealing off the opposite side. This increases pressure on that side of the diaphragm so that it helps push the rod, which in turn pushes the piston in the master cylinder. As the brake pedal is released, the valve seals off the outside air supply while opening the vacuum valve. This restores vacuum to both sides of the diaphragm, allowing everything to return to its original position. Active brake booster (hybrid vehicles) The active brake booster uses vacuum supplied by an engine mounted electronic vacuum pump and is similar to a conventional vacuum assist brake booster with the addition of a brake booster (vacuum) solenoid, a brake booster travel sensor and a vacuum sensor. If it is necessary to apply the vehicles friction brakes, the ABS module will send a signal to the brake booster solenoid that is proportional to the amount of brake torque requested. The booster solenoid will open to allow vacuum to draw the booster diaphragm and pushrod towards the master cylinder piston, building hydraulic pressure. The brake booster vacuum sensor is used by the ABS module to monitor vacuum maintained inside the brake booster. The brake booster travel sensor is used to monitor the performance of the brake booster. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Booster Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster Component Tests Brake Booster (Non-Hybrid Vehicles) 1. Disconnect the check valve from the brake booster and connect a suitable vacuum/pressure tester to the booster side of the check valve. 2. Apply the parking brake, start the engine and place the transmission in NEUTRAL. - Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature. 3. NOTE: Subtract approximately 4.0193 kPa (1 in-Hg) from the specified reading for every 304.8 m (1,000 ft) of elevation above sea level. Verify that vacuum is available at the check valve with engine running at normal idle speed. - The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg). - If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the check valve and continue with Step 5. - If specified vacuum is not available, continue with Step 4. 4. Disconnect the check valve from the vacuum hose and verify that the specified vacuum is available at the hose with the engine at idle speed and the transmission in NEUTRAL. If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, install a new check valve and continue with Step 5. - If specified vacuum is not available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve and refer to Engine to diagnose the no/low vacuum condition. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Testing and Inspection 5. Apply the brake pedal several times to exhaust all vacuum from the system. 6. Apply the brake pedal and hold it in the applied position. Start the engine and verify that the brake pedal moves downward after the engine starts. - If the brake pedal moves, the brake booster is operating correctly. - If the brake pedal does not move, install a new brake booster. 7. Operate the engine a minimum of 20 seconds at idle. Stop the engine and let the vehicle stand for 10 minutes, then apply the brake pedal. The brake pedal feel should be the same as that noted with the engine operating. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power assist), install a new brake booster check valve and retest. - If condition still exists, install a new brake booster. - If the brake pedal feels the same as noted with the engine operating, the check valve is functioning properly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Booster > Page 5392 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection - Brake Booster Brake System Inspection Brake Booster (Non-Hybrid Vehicles) 1. Inspect the brake booster for excessive corrosion or damage. Inspect the vacuum hoses for leaks and kinks. - Install a new brake booster if signs of excessive corrosion or damage is found. - Repair or replace vacuum hoses as necessary. - To check for correct brake booster operation, refer to Component Tests See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5393 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster NOTE: Hybrid vehicle shown, gas vehicle similar. Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. NOTICE: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp switch. This switch must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. The switch plunger must be compressed for the switch to rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the switch. Remove the stoplamp switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5394 2. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis-locking pin is a one-time use only part. Anytime the booster push rod clevis-locking pin is removed, a new booster push rod clevis-locking pin should be used. NOTE: Remove the clevis-locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the opposite end. Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis-locking pin. 3. Remove and discard the 4 brake booster nuts. - To install, tighten new nuts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 4. Disconnect the vacuum hose/check valve assembly from the brake booster. Hybrid vehicles 5. Disconnect the vacuum pressure sensor, booster solenoid and the booster travel sensor electrical connectors. All vehicles 6. Remove and discard the 2 master cylinder nuts. - To install, tighten new nuts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube fittings. Carefully position the brake master cylinder assembly forward and remove the brake booster. 8. NOTICE: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp switch. This switch must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing this switch with the brake pedal in any other position will result in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switch. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Hybrid vehicles 9. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Pump: Service and Repair Brake Vacuum Pump Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS) coolant pump bolts and position the pump and ground strap aside. - To install, tighten bolts to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the vacuum pump electrical connector and detach the harness retainer from the vacuum pump bracket. 3. Remove the vacuum pump bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Remove the 2 vacuum pump bracket bolts. - To install, tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Position the vacuum pump to detach the vacuum hose and remove the vacuum pump. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration TSB 09-20-3 10/19/09 ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12 MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H) FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h). ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C219 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration TSB 09-20-3 10/19/09 ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12 MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H) FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h). ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C219 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5412 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5413 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5414 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5415 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicles shown, hybrid vehicles similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly. All vehicles 1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. Non-hybrid vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5416 2. Remove the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). All vehicles 5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Configure the ABS module. 8. Calibrate the ABS module. - For non-hybrid vehicles, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence following the scan tool directions. - For hybrid vehicles, carry out the Multi-Calibration routine following the scan tool directions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5424 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5428 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5429 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. - To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5433 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5434 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Stability/Traction Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel. 2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel TSB 09-5-5 03/23/09 LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT 10/21/2008-10/31/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from 10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage. 2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics. 3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs. Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 5443 Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Correct Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3K186 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel TSB 09-5-5 03/23/09 LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT 10/21/2008-10/31/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from 10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage. 2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics. 3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs. Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 5449 Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Correct Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3K186 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 5452 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 5453 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 5454 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5457 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5458 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5459 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. - When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5462 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer. 5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the front wheel speed sensor. 9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5463 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. - When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. 3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5464 - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor. 8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5465 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Removal 1. Remove the front halfshaft. 2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5466 1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the previous illustration. 2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5467 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Removal and Installation Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut. - To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). 3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles 5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired separately. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5474 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5475 Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5476 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 5479 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5489 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5495 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises TSB 09-5-8 03/23/09 ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009 and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF THE POWERTRAIN. 1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h). 2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting noise. 3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 5501 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 5507 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5508 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be replaced. 1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5513 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5514 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Battery Cable: Service and Repair Battery Cables - 3.0L Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery Disconnect See: Service and Repair/Battery Disconnect. 2. Remove the starter solenoid terminal cover. 3. Remove the starter motor positive cable nut. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5519 4. Remove the starter solenoid wire nut. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. Position the starter motor terminals aside. 6. Remove the battery ground cable-to-transaxle bolt. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 7. Position the battery ground cable aside. 8. Disconnect the retaining clip from the battery cables to the transmission fluid level indicator tube. 9. Open the Battery Junction Box (BJB) cover and remove the BJB terminal nut. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 10. Position the BJB terminal aside. 11. Disconnect the BJB electrical connector. 12. Remove the body ground terminal bolt from the left fenderwell. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Remove the generator B+ terminal nut. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 14. Release the battery cable locators and remove the battery cables from the vehicle. 15. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Alternator: Electrical Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5525 Alternator: Mechanical Specifications General Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5526 Alternator: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5527 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5528 Alternator: Description and Operation Charging System The charging system is a negative ground system consisting of: - a generator. - an internal voltage regulator. - a charging system warning indicator. - a battery. - circuitry and cables. - a PCM. The generator is driven by the accessory drive belt. When the engine is started, the generator begins to generate AC which is internally converted to DC. The DC is controlled by the voltage regulator (located on the rear of the generator) and supplied to the battery. The PCM controls the voltage regulation set point, working with the generator internal voltage regulator over 2 control and communication circuits. The generator and voltage regulator: - supply current to the electrical system. - charge the battery. - adjust the generator field current to increase or decrease the generator output. - have a PCM-controlled warning lamp. - output is controlled by the PCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5529 Alternator: Service and Repair Generator - 3.0L Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTICE: Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the generator housing and internal diode cooling fins. A short circuit may result and burn out the diodes. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage. Disconnect the battery. 3. Remove the 5 RH lower splash shield bolts and the 1 pin-type retainer. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. Remove the RH lower splash shield. 5. Rotate the front end accessory drive tensioner counterclockwise and position the accessory drive belt aside. 6. Disconnect the generator electrical connector. 7. Position the generator B+ protective cover aside and remove the generator B+ terminal nut. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5530 8. Remove the 3 A/C compressor bolts. Use a tie-strap and position the A/C compressor aside. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 9. Loosen the 2 generator nuts. - To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 10. Remove the 2 lower generator studs. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 11. Remove the upper generator bolt and the generator. - To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5536 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5537 Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5538 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 5541 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Lock: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5550 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5556 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts TSB 09-19-5 10/05/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E (SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is: a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14. b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps. 2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs. Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 5570 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 12A650 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 5588 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 12A650 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5602 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5608 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5609 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be replaced. 1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment Key: Testing and Inspection Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory. NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box (SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the vehicle. NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before the vehicle starts. NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key. NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC. 1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. From the scan tool menu select: IGNITION KEY CODE ERASE. Follow all Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) screen instructions until the key erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the process. 4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be removed at this time). 5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are programmed into the IC, then the RKE data transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into the SJB, the RKE functions does not operate. NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds. Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place). 6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place). 8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT should function. 9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5614 Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5615 Key: Testing and Inspection Key Programming Switch State Control Key Programming Switch State Control NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle driver. NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID. NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLED, the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This switch is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. 1. Insert a programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key (or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLED, when viewing the IC SPAREKEY PID. From the scan tool menu select: CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE - spare key programming procedure is accessible. - CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING DISABLE - spare key programming procedure is not accessible. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5616 Key: Testing and Inspection Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys NOTE: This procedure works only if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment. NOTE: The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID. The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the appropriate pinpoint tests. NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before the vehicle will starts. NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions. Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key. NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends. NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key. NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC. NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function, but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative. 1. Insert a programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. 3. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the first key. 4. Within 10 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 5. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. 6. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the second key. 7. Within 20 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed ignition key (new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key). 8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the vehicle. Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5617 9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5618 Key: Testing and Inspection Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode Enabling Unlimited Key Mode NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for their vehicle. NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT keys are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC) will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly. NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock cylinder. NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder security key code and programming this key code into all of the vehicle keys so they contain the same key code. NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed). 1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F. 2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be turned off before viewing the stored code. At this time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below. Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should not be the same key code. 3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF. 8. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 9. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder. 10. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 11. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. Disabling Unlimited Key Mode Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5619 NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the vehicle. 1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF. 5. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 6. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder. 7. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 8. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into the IC using the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5620 Key: Testing and Inspection Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory. NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box (SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the vehicle. NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before the vehicle starts. NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key. NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC. 1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. From the scan tool menu select: IGNITION KEY CODE ERASE. Follow all Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) screen instructions until the key erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the process. 4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be removed at this time). 5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are programmed into the IC, then the RKE data transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into the SJB, the RKE functions does not operate. NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds. Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place). 6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place). 8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT should function. 9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC), refer to Key Programming Using Two Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5621 Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. Key Programming Switch State Control Key Programming Switch State Control NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle driver. NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID. NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLED, the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This switch is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. 1. Insert a programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key (or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLED, when viewing the IC SPAREKEY PID. From the scan tool menu select: CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE - spare key programming procedure is accessible. - CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING DISABLE - spare key programming procedure is not accessible. Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys NOTE: This procedure works only if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment. NOTE: The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID. The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the appropriate pinpoint tests. NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before the vehicle will starts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5622 NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions. Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key. NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends. NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key. NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC. NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function, but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative. 1. Insert a programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. 3. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the first key. 4. Within 10 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 5. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. 6. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the second key. 7. Within 20 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed ignition key (new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key). 8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the vehicle. Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions. 9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7. Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode Enabling Unlimited Key Mode NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for their vehicle. NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT keys Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5623 are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC) will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly. NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock cylinder. NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder security key code and programming this key code into all of the vehicle keys so they contain the same key code. NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed). 1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F. 2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be turned off before viewing the stored code. At this time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below. Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should not be the same key code. 3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF. 8. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 9. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder. 10. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 11. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. Disabling Unlimited Key Mode NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the vehicle. 1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF. 5. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 6. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder. 7. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 8. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into the IC using the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5624 If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs to have an additional key programmed into the vehicle without erasing stored key codes, but does not have 2 programmed keys available. This procedure is also useful when attempting to determine if an ignition key is defective, as a new key can be installed without erasing keys or without having 2 programmed keys available. NOTE: Before programming, the new key must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock cylinder. NOTE: If 8 keys are already programmed, this procedure does not allow any more ignition keys to be programmed. The number of keys that are programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) can be determined by viewing the N_KEYCODE PID. 1. Turn the new key to be programmed from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. NOTE: Make sure the selection made is "Program additional ignition key". If the "Ignition Key Code Erase" selection is made, all of the keys will be erased from the system. From the scan tool menu select: "Program additional ignition key". 4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool. 5. Start the vehicle with the new PATS key. The vehicle will now start with the new PATS key and also with the original PATS keys. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions (if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed). Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset NOTE: When using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS), the Instrument Cluster (IC) and the PCM parameters are reset at the same time. NOTE: Once security access has been granted, multiple security access commands should be executed (if necessary) prior to exiting the command menu. This avoids an additional security access procedure and the associated 10 minute time delay. 1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5625 ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. From the scan tool, select: Parameter Reset and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 4. NOTE: If the IC was replaced, follow Steps 4-9. If the IC and the PCM were replaced, follow Steps 4-9. If only the PCM was replaced, cycle the key off, then back on, to complete the procedure. NOTE: If steps 4-9 are followed, 2 keys must be present. From the scan tool, select: Ignition Key Code Erase and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 5. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool. 6. NOTE: Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) data transfer to take place, while standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds. Turn the key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (if it is an IKT key). 7. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove it from the ignition lock cylinder. 8. Insert the second key and turn it to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (if it is an IKT key). 9. Both keys will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions of the vehicle (if they are IKT keys). 10. NOTE: The RKE data transfer will take place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are programmed into the IC, the RKE data will transfer from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into the SJB, the RKE functions will not operate. If more keys are required to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications Starter Motor: Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 5630 Starter Motor: Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5631 Starter Motor: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5632 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5633 Starter Motor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5634 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Starter Motor - 3.0L Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the starter motor solenoid wire nut. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Remove the starter motor solenoid battery cable nut and position aside the cables. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Remove the ground wire nut and position aside the ground wire. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 5. Remove the 2 stud bolts and the starter motor. - To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5638 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5639 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications Auxiliary Power Outlet: Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 5645 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 5648 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5649 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation High-Voltage Converter/Inverter DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point The DC/AC inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC current with a rating of less than 150 watts. DC/DC Converter The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the vehicle low voltage battery systems. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Auxiliary Power Outlet: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Principles Of Operation High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Principles of Operation DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point The DC/AC inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC current with a rating of less than 150 watts. The 110 volts AC created by the inverter will measure differently than a conventional AC outlet (utility-generated) with some multi-meters. The power point will automatically shut off if the load exceeds 150 watts. This prevents damage to the inverter or load. The inverter supplies 110 volts AC power only when the key is in the ON/START position. This reduces the draw on the 12-volt system when the vehicle is not running. The DC/AC inverter outlet (AC power point) is equipped with a green LED that indicates the system integrity. The green LED illuminates continuously when the key is in the ON/START position and the system is operating normally. The green LED flashes constantly if the key is in the ON/START position and a fault is detected. Short circuits, overloads or overheating of the inverter will cause the green LED to flash and the power to be cut off to the outlet. If the LED is flashing, the problem must be corrected (short circuit or excessive load). If the inverter is overheated, it must be allowed time to cool off (without the load connected). Refer to Owner's Literature for a list of appropriate electrical loads/devices that can be used. DC/DC Converter The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power, while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the vehicle low voltage battery systems. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter. Inspection And Verification High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Inspection and Verification WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5652 WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 5. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the Self Test Diagnostics for the PCM. 6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to this concern, go to the DTC Chart. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5653 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions High-Voltage Converter/Inverter P1A0C Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5654 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Symptom Chart Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5655 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power At The AC Power Point High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power at the AC Power Point Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 cycle 110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). NOTE: The electrical device that is powered by the AC power point must not exceed 150 watts. NOTE: If the green LED is flashing, the AC power point may be overloaded, overheated or shorted. Unplug the electrical device from the AC power point and cycle the key. Refer to the Owner's Literature to determine if the electrical device is appropriate for the AC power point. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuses - Circuits - DC/AC inverter - AC power point PINPOINT TEST A: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO POWER AT THE AC POWER POINT NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK CIRCUITS SBP04 (GN/RD) AND CBP35 (YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293a. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-1, circuit SBP04 (GN/RD), harness side and ground. - Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and ground - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to A2. No CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 1 (30A) and 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5656 A2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293a-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to A3. No REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK CIRCUITS HYA01 (OG/GN) AND HYA02 (OG/WH) FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292. - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293b. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-1, circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side and AC power point C2292-1 circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side; - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-5, circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side and AC power point C2292-3 circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to A4. No REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-1, component side and AC power point C2292-2. - Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-3, component side and AC power point C2292-1. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5657 - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation. No INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED Indicator Is Never On High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED Indicator is Never On Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 cycle 110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). If a fault in the system is detected, the LED flashes when the key is in the ON position. The LED continuously illuminates if the system is operating correctly when the key is in the ON position. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuses - Circuits - DC/AC inverter - AC power point PINPOINT TEST B: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE AC POWER POINT LED INDICATOR IS NEVER ON NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP35 (YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293a. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and ground - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5658 GO to B2. No CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293a-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to B3. No REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK CIRCUITS LYA03 (YE/VT) AND RYA03 (BU/BN) FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293b. - Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-9, circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side and AC power point C2292-6 circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side; and between DC/AC inverter C2293b-8, circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side and AC power point C2292-5 circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to B4. No REPAIR the circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT LED - Test the diode between AC power point C2292-5, component side and AC power point C2292-6, component side in both directions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5659 - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms in one direction and between 10-20 ohms in the opposite direction? Yes INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation. No INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the vehicle low voltage battery system. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - PCM - 12-volt battery - Battery cables - DC/DC converter PINPOINT TEST C: THE DC/DC CONVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY ------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE PCM FOR DTCs WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test/Retrieve and Record On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5660 - Are any PCM DTCs present? Yes For DTC P1A0C only, GO to C2. For all other DTCs, REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information. No GO to C2. ------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF THE 12-VOLT BATTERY - Ignition OFF. - Carry out the Battery - Condition Test to determine if the battery can hold a charge and is OK for use. Refer to Battery. See: Battery/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests - Did the battery pass the condition test? Yes GO to C3. No INSTALL a new 12-volt battery. ------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS - Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing in Battery. See: Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Battery/Testing and Inspection - Are any circuits causing excessive current drains? Yes REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to C4. ------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE 12-VOLT BATTERY - Start the engine. - NOTE: The vehicle will start when the ignition switch is turned to the START position, but after a short period of time (approximately 2 minutes) the engine may shut down with the ignition switch still in the ON position. The DC/DC converter will output a normal charging rate with the engine running or not, but the engine MUST have run at least once. The state of charge of the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) will have a direct affect on the length of engine running time. - With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), monitor the voltage at the 12-volt battery. - Is the voltage between 13.2-16.0 volts? Yes The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to C5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5661 ------------------------------------------------- C5 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE - With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter positive C1457c, post side and 12-volt battery positive C1100a, post side. - Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt? Yes GO to C6. No REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE - With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter negative C1457b, post side and DC/DC converter ground G105, ground bolt side. - Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt? Yes GO to C7. No REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- C7 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER OPERATION - Disconnect all of the DC/DC converter connectors. - Check for: corrosion. - pushed-out pins. - Connect all of the DC/DC converter connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter . TEST the system for normal operation. No Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5662 The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair High Voltage Converter/Inverter Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. 2. Remove the console trim insert. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the AC power point. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5665 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. 2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the DC/AC inverter. 4. Remove the 2 DC/AC inverter nuts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Remove the DC/AC inverter bolt. - To install, tighten 11 Nm (97 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5666 6. Remove the DC/AC inverter. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5667 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Point Power Point Removal NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location. 1. Open the power point cover. 2. Install the Power Point Socket Remover in one of the power point socket slots. 3. Position the Power Point Socket Remover so that it engages in the adjacent slot. 4. Using the Power Point Socket Remover, pull the power point socket out of the retainer. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector. Installation 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5671 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 5676 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 5677 Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 5678 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 5681 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 5682 Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 5683 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5688 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5689 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5690 Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5691 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5692 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5695 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5696 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5697 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5698 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5699 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5700 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5701 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5702 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5703 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5704 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5705 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5706 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5707 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5708 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5709 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5710 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5711 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5712 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5713 Fuse Block: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5714 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5715 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5716 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5717 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5718 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5719 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5720 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5721 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5722 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5726 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5731 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5732 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5733 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5734 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5735 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5736 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5737 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5738 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5739 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5740 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5741 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5742 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5743 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5744 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5745 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5746 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5747 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5748 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5749 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5750 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5751 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5752 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5753 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5754 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5755 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5756 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5757 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5758 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5759 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5760 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5761 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5762 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5763 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5764 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Smart Junction Box (SJB) Removal NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box (SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB. NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows: - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5768 Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. 2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 4. Remove the floor console finish panel. 5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB. Installation 1. Install the SJB. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB cover. 4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6 seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key. NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the SJB. 5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful, this step will clear DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. 7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position. This will make sure that all displays are visible under all lighting conditions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5772 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5777 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Smart Junction Box (SJB) Removal NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box (SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB. NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows: - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5781 Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. 2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 4. Remove the floor console finish panel. 5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB. Installation 1. Install the SJB. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB cover. 4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6 seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key. NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the SJB. 5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful, this step will clear DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. 7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position. This will make sure that all displays are visible under all lighting conditions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5785 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5790 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5791 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5792 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5793 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5794 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5797 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5798 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5799 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5800 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5801 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5802 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5803 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5804 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5805 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5808 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5809 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5810 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5815 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5816 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5817 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5818 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5819 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5822 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5823 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5824 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5825 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5826 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5827 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5828 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5829 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5830 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5833 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5834 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5835 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications Auxiliary Power Outlet: Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 5841 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 5844 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5845 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation High-Voltage Converter/Inverter DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point The DC/AC inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC current with a rating of less than 150 watts. DC/DC Converter The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the vehicle low voltage battery systems. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Auxiliary Power Outlet: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Principles Of Operation High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Principles of Operation DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point The DC/AC inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC current with a rating of less than 150 watts. The 110 volts AC created by the inverter will measure differently than a conventional AC outlet (utility-generated) with some multi-meters. The power point will automatically shut off if the load exceeds 150 watts. This prevents damage to the inverter or load. The inverter supplies 110 volts AC power only when the key is in the ON/START position. This reduces the draw on the 12-volt system when the vehicle is not running. The DC/AC inverter outlet (AC power point) is equipped with a green LED that indicates the system integrity. The green LED illuminates continuously when the key is in the ON/START position and the system is operating normally. The green LED flashes constantly if the key is in the ON/START position and a fault is detected. Short circuits, overloads or overheating of the inverter will cause the green LED to flash and the power to be cut off to the outlet. If the LED is flashing, the problem must be corrected (short circuit or excessive load). If the inverter is overheated, it must be allowed time to cool off (without the load connected). Refer to Owner's Literature for a list of appropriate electrical loads/devices that can be used. DC/DC Converter The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power, while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the vehicle low voltage battery systems. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter. Inspection And Verification High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Inspection and Verification WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5848 WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 5. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the Self Test Diagnostics for the PCM. 6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to this concern, go to the DTC Chart. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5849 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions High-Voltage Converter/Inverter P1A0C Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5850 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Symptom Chart Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5851 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power At The AC Power Point High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power at the AC Power Point Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 cycle 110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). NOTE: The electrical device that is powered by the AC power point must not exceed 150 watts. NOTE: If the green LED is flashing, the AC power point may be overloaded, overheated or shorted. Unplug the electrical device from the AC power point and cycle the key. Refer to the Owner's Literature to determine if the electrical device is appropriate for the AC power point. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuses - Circuits - DC/AC inverter - AC power point PINPOINT TEST A: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO POWER AT THE AC POWER POINT NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK CIRCUITS SBP04 (GN/RD) AND CBP35 (YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293a. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-1, circuit SBP04 (GN/RD), harness side and ground. - Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and ground - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to A2. No CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 1 (30A) and 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5852 A2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293a-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to A3. No REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK CIRCUITS HYA01 (OG/GN) AND HYA02 (OG/WH) FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292. - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293b. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-1, circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side and AC power point C2292-1 circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side; - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-5, circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side and AC power point C2292-3 circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to A4. No REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-1, component side and AC power point C2292-2. - Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-3, component side and AC power point C2292-1. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5853 - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation. No INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED Indicator Is Never On High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED Indicator is Never On Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 cycle 110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). If a fault in the system is detected, the LED flashes when the key is in the ON position. The LED continuously illuminates if the system is operating correctly when the key is in the ON position. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuses - Circuits - DC/AC inverter - AC power point PINPOINT TEST B: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE AC POWER POINT LED INDICATOR IS NEVER ON NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP35 (YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293a. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and ground - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5854 GO to B2. No CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293a-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to B3. No REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK CIRCUITS LYA03 (YE/VT) AND RYA03 (BU/BN) FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293b. - Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-9, circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side and AC power point C2292-6 circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side; and between DC/AC inverter C2293b-8, circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side and AC power point C2292-5 circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to B4. No REPAIR the circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT LED - Test the diode between AC power point C2292-5, component side and AC power point C2292-6, component side in both directions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5855 - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms in one direction and between 10-20 ohms in the opposite direction? Yes INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation. No INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the vehicle low voltage battery system. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - PCM - 12-volt battery - Battery cables - DC/DC converter PINPOINT TEST C: THE DC/DC CONVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY ------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE PCM FOR DTCs WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test/Retrieve and Record On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5856 - Are any PCM DTCs present? Yes For DTC P1A0C only, GO to C2. For all other DTCs, REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information. No GO to C2. ------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF THE 12-VOLT BATTERY - Ignition OFF. - Carry out the Battery - Condition Test to determine if the battery can hold a charge and is OK for use. Refer to Battery. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests - Did the battery pass the condition test? Yes GO to C3. No INSTALL a new 12-volt battery. ------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS - Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing in Battery. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection - Are any circuits causing excessive current drains? Yes REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to C4. ------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE 12-VOLT BATTERY - Start the engine. - NOTE: The vehicle will start when the ignition switch is turned to the START position, but after a short period of time (approximately 2 minutes) the engine may shut down with the ignition switch still in the ON position. The DC/DC converter will output a normal charging rate with the engine running or not, but the engine MUST have run at least once. The state of charge of the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) will have a direct affect on the length of engine running time. - With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), monitor the voltage at the 12-volt battery. - Is the voltage between 13.2-16.0 volts? Yes The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to C5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5857 ------------------------------------------------- C5 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE - With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter positive C1457c, post side and 12-volt battery positive C1100a, post side. - Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt? Yes GO to C6. No REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE - With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter negative C1457b, post side and DC/DC converter ground G105, ground bolt side. - Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt? Yes GO to C7. No REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- C7 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER OPERATION - Disconnect all of the DC/DC converter connectors. - Check for: corrosion. - pushed-out pins. - Connect all of the DC/DC converter connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter . TEST the system for normal operation. No Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5858 The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair High Voltage Converter/Inverter Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. 2. Remove the console trim insert. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the AC power point. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5861 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. 2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the DC/AC inverter. 4. Remove the 2 DC/AC inverter nuts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Remove the DC/AC inverter bolt. - To install, tighten 11 Nm (97 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5862 6. Remove the DC/AC inverter. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5863 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Point Power Point Removal NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location. 1. Open the power point cover. 2. Install the Power Point Socket Remover in one of the power point socket slots. 3. Position the Power Point Socket Remover so that it engages in the adjacent slot. 4. Using the Power Point Socket Remover, pull the power point socket out of the retainer. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector. Installation 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5867 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 5872 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 5873 Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 5874 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 5877 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 5878 Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 5879 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5884 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5885 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5886 Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5887 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5888 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5891 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5892 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5893 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5894 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5895 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5896 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5897 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5898 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5899 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5900 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5901 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5902 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5903 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5904 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5905 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5906 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5907 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5908 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5909 Fuse Block: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5910 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5911 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5912 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5913 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5914 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5915 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5916 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5917 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5918 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5922 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5927 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5928 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5929 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5930 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5931 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5932 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5933 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5934 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5935 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5936 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5937 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5938 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5939 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5940 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5941 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5942 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5943 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5944 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5945 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5946 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5947 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5948 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5949 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5950 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5951 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5952 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5953 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5954 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5955 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5956 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5957 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5958 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5959 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5960 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Smart Junction Box (SJB) Removal NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box (SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB. NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows: - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5964 Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. 2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 4. Remove the floor console finish panel. 5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB. Installation 1. Install the SJB. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB cover. 4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6 seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key. NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the SJB. 5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful, this step will clear DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. 7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position. This will make sure that all displays are visible under all lighting conditions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5968 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5973 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Smart Junction Box (SJB) Removal NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box (SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB. NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows: - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5977 Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. 2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 4. Remove the floor console finish panel. 5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB. Installation 1. Install the SJB. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB cover. 4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6 seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key. NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the SJB. 5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful, this step will clear DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. 7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position. This will make sure that all displays are visible under all lighting conditions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5981 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5986 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5987 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5988 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5989 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5990 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5993 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5994 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5995 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5996 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5997 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5998 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5999 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6001 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6004 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6005 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6006 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6011 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6012 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6013 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6014 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6015 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6018 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6019 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6020 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6021 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6022 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6023 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6024 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6025 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6026 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6029 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6030 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6031 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation Alignment: Specifications Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 6037 Alignment: Specifications Material Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 6038 Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications Alignment Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 6039 Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Wheel Alignment Angles Camber Negative and Positive Camber Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct effect on tire wear. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 6042 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Wheel Alignment Angles Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest caster. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 6043 Alignment: Description and Operation Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Wheel Alignment Angles Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 6044 Alignment: Description and Operation Drift/Pull Wheel Alignment Angles Drift/Pull Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep the vehicle going straight. Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel. - A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect. - Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 6045 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Wheel Alignment Angles Camber Negative and Positive Camber Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct effect on tire wear. Caster Wheel Alignment Angles Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest caster. Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Wheel Alignment Angles Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 6046 Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking. Drift/Pull Wheel Alignment Angles Drift/Pull Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep the vehicle going straight. Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel. - A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect. - Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown). Nibble Wheel Alignment Angles Nibble Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel. Poor Groove Feel Wheel Alignment Angles Poor Groove Feel Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center." - Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch. - In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between wander and poor groove feel. Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Wheel Alignment Angles Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn or steering correction. Shimmy Wheel Alignment Angles Shimmy Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements. Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface. Toe Wheel Alignment Angles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 6047 Toe Positive Toe (Toe In) Negative Toe (Toe Out) The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability. Wander Wheel Alignment Angles Wander Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment Camber and Caster Adjustment Front Camber and Caster Adjustment 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. 3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5. 4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position. NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle. Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment. 5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position. NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle. Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6050 6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6051 Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement Ride Height Measurement Front Ride Height Measurement NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel. 1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position. 2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge position (measurement 2). 3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the forward lower arm bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position. 4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge position (measurement 3). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6052 5. Subtract measurement 3 from measurement 2 to obtain the front ride height. - Refer to Specifications. Rear Ride Height Measurement NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel. 1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower bolt (measurement 2). 2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower arm inner bolt (measurement 3). 3. Subtract measurement 2 from measurement 3 to obtain the rear ride height. - Refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6053 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position using a suitable holding device. 3. Check the toe settings following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is rotated. Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s). 5. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut(s). - Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie-rod threads. 6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe. 7. NOTICE: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut, or damage to the boot can occur. NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s). Tighten the tie-rod end jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6054 9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. Rear Toe Adjustment 1. NOTICE: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping. NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean the area using only mild liquids. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position. Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment. 2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut. Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts. 3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification. 4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts. - Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel knuckle bolt. - Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). 5. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and Testing of Steering. See: Steering/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6060 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6061 Steering Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6062 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6063 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6064 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 6071 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. NOTE: Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 6077 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 6078 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel Front Steering Knuckle: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel TSB 09-5-5 03/23/09 LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT 10/21/2008-10/31/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from 10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage. 2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics. 3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs. Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 6088 Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Correct Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3K186 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel Front Steering Knuckle: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel TSB 09-5-5 03/23/09 LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT 10/21/2008-10/31/2008 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from 10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage. 2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics. 3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs. Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 6094 Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Correct Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3K186 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set TSB 09-15-1 08/10/09 TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light, a slight brake drag condition may be observed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement. NOTE DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH CAN OCCUR. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6105 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the brake disc. 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the outer CV joint spindle from the wheel hub. 4. Remove and discard the tie-rod end nut. 5. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to the wheel knuckle can result. NOTICE: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the Tie-Rod End Remover. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6106 6. Remove and discard the lower ball joint bolt and nut. 7. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside. 8. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts and the wheel knuckle. - Discard the nuts and bolts. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the new lower ball joint bolt and nut. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 4. Install the wheel speed sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Position the tie-rod end into the wheel knuckle and install the new tie-rod end nut. - Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 6. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the brake disc. 8. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the new front wheel hub nut. - Tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft). 9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Power Steering Fluid This vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power-Assisted Steering (EPAS) System. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6114 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6115 Steering Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6116 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6117 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6118 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6123 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6124 Steering Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6125 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6126 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6127 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 6133 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Engine Control Components Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6139 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6140 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition to OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. 8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6141 clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6142 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6143 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6144 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6145 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. - When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6146 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Steering Column Lock: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 6155 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Steering Column Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 6161 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose TSB 11-3-5 03/15/11 3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner housing. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-12. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps Steering Damper: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps TSB 10-18-8 09/27/10 VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F (-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. 2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent. 3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency. a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04. b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to Step 4. c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Install a revised steering wheel damper. a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel. c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering damper. (Figure 1) d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 6180 e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps Steering Damper: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps TSB 10-18-8 09/27/10 VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F (-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. 2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent. 3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency. a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04. b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to Step 4. c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Install a revised steering wheel damper. a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel. c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering damper. (Figure 1) d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 6186 e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Steering Gear Steering Gear - Exploded View Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the front wheels and tires. 2. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. - Remove the ignition key. 3. NOTICE: Do not allow the steering wheel to rotate while the intermediate shaft is disconnected or damage to the clockspring can result. If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering gear bolt and disconnect the coupling from the steering gear. To install, tighten the new bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 4. From the engine compartment, loosen the 2 steering gear bolts. 5. If equipped, remove the 3 pin-type retainers and the steering gear shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6191 6. Remove and discard the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. - To install, tighten the new nuts to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 7. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to the wheel knuckle can result. Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the tie-rod ends from the wheel knuckles. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles (except Hybrid) 8. Remove the rear transaxle insulator through bolt. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles with automatic transaxle - 2.5L 9. Remove the 3 transmission damper bolts and the transmission damper. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). All vehicles 10. Remove and discard the 2 steering gear bolts. - To install, tighten the new bolts to 125 Nm (92 lb-ft). 11. NOTE: For All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles (except Hybrid), it is necessary to grasp the driveshaft by hand and apply slight downward pressure to obtain clearance for the removal of the steering gear. Rotate the steering gear 90 degrees clockwise and remove it from the LH side of the vehicle. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 13. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6192 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Boot Steering Gear Boot Removal and Installation 1. Remove the outer tie-rod end. For additional information, refer to Tie Rod End - Outer See: Tie Rod/Service and Repair/Tie Rod End - Outer. 2. Remove the tie-rod end jam nut. 3. Remove and discard the 2 steering gear boot clamps and the steering gear boot. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6201 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6207 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6208 Steering Shaft: Service and Repair Steering Column Shaft Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the LH instrument panel side finish panel. 3. Through the side finish panel opening, remove the ground wire eyelet bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6209 - Position the 2 ground wire eyelets and wires aside. 4. Through the side finish panel opening, disconnect the 2 instrument panel wiring harness electrical connectors and, if equipped, the battery high-voltage jumper switch electrical connector. Position the connectors and harnesses aside. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and rotate the steering wheel clockwise until the steering column coupling-to-steering column bolt is accessible. 6. Through the side finish panel opening, remove and discard the steering column shaft coupling-to-steering column bolt. - To install, tighten the new bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 7. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key. - Rotate the steering wheel counter clockwise until the column locks. 8. NOTICE: Do not allow the steering column shaft to rotate while the lower shaft is disconnected or damage to the clockspring can result. If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Separate the steering column coupling from the steering column. 9. Remove the 3 steering column dash seal nuts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 10. From the passenger compartment, slide the dash seal upwards on the steering column shaft. 11. Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt. - To install, tighten the new bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 12. Remove the steering column shaft and dash seal. 13. Remove the steering column dash seal from the shaft. - Inspect the dash seal and clip-type retainers for damage and, if necessary, install a new dash seal. 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft Coupler: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6218 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft Coupler: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6224 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps TSB 10-18-8 09/27/10 VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F (-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. 2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent. 3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency. a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04. b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to Step 4. c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Install a revised steering wheel damper. a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel. c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering damper. (Figure 1) d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 6233 e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps TSB 10-18-8 09/27/10 VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F (-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. 2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent. 3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency. a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04. b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to Step 4. c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Install a revised steering wheel damper. a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel. c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering damper. (Figure 1) d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 6239 e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 09-6-7 > Apr > 09 > Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully Release Parking Brake Pedal: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully Release TSB 09-6-7 04/06/09 PARKING BRAKE PEDAL WILL NOT FULLY RETURN WHEN RELEASED - INDICATOR STAYS ON FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, built on 10/1/2008 through and including 1/26/2009, may exhibit a parking brake indicator on the dash, due to the parking brake pedal not returning to the fully released position. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify parking brake indicator is illuminated in the dash. 2. Pull the pedal up to the fully released position by hand. 3. If the indicator does not go out, this procedure does not apply. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-00. 4. If the indicator does go out, replace the parking brake control assembly following WSM, Section 206-05. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090607A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.9 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Parking Brake Control Assembly (Do Not Use With 2780A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2780 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch > Page 6252 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Page 6253 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Removal and Installation 1. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 2. Disconnect the steering wheel switch electrical connector from the clockspring. - Detach the steering wheel switch wiring from the retainers and position the wires aside. 3. Remove the steering wheel bolt. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. NOTICE: Do not allow the Steering Wheel Puller to damage the steering wheel switch wires and connector while removing the steering wheel. Using the Steering Wheel Puller, remove the steering wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Page 6254 5. Tape the clockspring center rotor to the outer housing to keep it from rotating. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tie Rod End - Inner Tie Rod: Service and Repair Tie Rod End - Inner Tie Rod End - Inner Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Turn the steering wheel fully in the direction of the inner tie-rod end that is being removed. 3. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. Remove and discard the outer tie-rod end nut. - To install, tighten the new nut to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 5. Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the outer tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle and remove the tie rod. 6. Remove the tie-rod end jam nut. 7. Remove and discard the boot clamps and the steering gear boot. 8. Using a suitable tool, hold the steering gear rack. 9. Using a suitable tool, remove the inner tie-rod end. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 10. NOTE: Using a suitable tool, hold the steering gear rack while tightening the inner tie rod. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tie Rod End - Inner > Page 6259 Tie Rod: Service and Repair Tie Rod End - Outer Tie Rod End - Outer Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 3. Remove and discard the outer tie-rod end nut. - To install, tighten the new nut to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 4. Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the outer tie-rod end from the front wheel knuckle. 5. Remove the outer tie-rod end. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint Deflection Lower................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection Control Arm Bushing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection TSB 09-5-1 03/23/09 LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING INSPECTION PROCEDURE FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Many states and Canadian provinces require annual safety inspections which include the evaluation of suspension components. The information in this procedure is intended to assist the technician performing the inspection with specific criteria for 2001-2009 Escape and Mariner lower control arm (LCA) bushings and will prevent the unnecessary replacement of good components. ACTION Inspect according to the procedure below. INSPECTION PROCEDURE The LCA bushing is located at the rear of the front suspension lower control arm. The bushing is identified as number 1 of Figure 1. The control arm is mounted in the front subframe with bolts number 2 and number 3. The bushing is part of the LCA and cannot be serviced separately from the arm. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 6269 Figure 2 - Shows a new bushing prior to assembly into the control arm. Bolt number 2 passes through the inner sleeve and the outer sleeve is pressed into the control arm. The rubber bushing is bonded to both the inner and outer sleeves. Figure 3 - Illustrates a generic bushing showing minor sur[ace cracks that do not adversely affect the performance of the bushing. Bushings exhibiting sur[ace cracks with a depth less than 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and will continue to function normally. These do not require replacement. Figure 4 - Illustrates a partial separation between the rubber and the outer sleeve. The bushing may show signs of movement on the rubber surface, making the surface shiny. Bushings with a separation or crack depth less than or equal to 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and meet all functional requirements. These do not require replacement. Bushings with a separation or crack greater than 3/8" (10 mm) in depth should be replaced. The customer may hear a bang or clunk in the front suspension if there is enough separation for the arm to contact the subframe. This does not affect the retention of the control arm to the vehicle as the bushing is sandwiched in the subframe and held in place with the bolt. The vehicle can be safely operated in this condition until the bushing is replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 6270 WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle - Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6274 Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the wheel hub from rotating. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6275 Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor ring. 4. Remove the brake drum. 5. Using the Front Hub Remover and Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent tools, remove the wheel hub. 6. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using a suitable press and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, press the inner bearing race from the wheel knuckle. 7. Remove the brake shoes. 8. Remove the parking brake cable bracket-to-control arm bolt. 9. Unclip the wheel speed harness retainer from the parking brake cable and disconnect the cable from the brake backing plate. 10. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 wheel speed sensor harness bolts. 11. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor from the wheel knuckle, and position the sensor and harness aside. 12. Remove the stabilizer bar link lower nut and disconnect the link from the wheel knuckle. - Discard the nut. 13. Remove the coil spring. For additional information, refer to Spring See: Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf )/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. 14. Remove and discard the lower ball joint nut. 15. Index-mark the notch on the cam nut adjustment cam. 16. Remove and discard the wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut. 17. Remove the wheel knuckle. 18. Remove the wheel bearing. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing - Front Wheel Drive (FWD) See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. Installation 1. Install the wheel bearing. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing - Front Wheel Drive (FWD) See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. 2. NOTICE: The joint area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping. NOTE: Align the notch on the cam nut with the index marks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6276 Position the wheel knuckle and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut. 3. Using a suitable tool, hold the cam nut stationary while tightening the new wheel knuckle bolt. - Tighten to 125 Nm (92 lb-ft). 4. Position the lower ball joint into the wheel knuckle and install the new lower ball joint nut. - Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 5. Install the coil spring. For additional information, refer to Spring See: Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf )/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. 6. Connect the stabilizer bar link and install the nut. - Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 7. Position the wheel speed sensor harness and the sensor. 8. Install the wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 wheel speed sensor harness bolts. - Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 9. Connect the brake tube to the wheel cylinder. - Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 10. Install the brake tube bracket bolt. - Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 11. Connect the parking brake cable to the brake backing plate and install the parking brake cable bracket bolt. - Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 12. Install the brake shoes and brake drum. 13. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the wheel hub from rotating. Install a new wheel hub nut. - Tighten the nut to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). 14. Bleed the brake system. 15. Check and, if necessary, align the rear end. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Stabilizer Bar Bushing Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. NOTICE: When installing the stabilizer bar bushings, make sure the bushings are correctly oriented with the bushing flanges in the up position and the bushing split pointing to the front of the vehicle. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2 stabilizer bar bushing bracket bolts and the stabilizer bar bushing bracket. - Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten the new bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). 3. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar bushing for wear. If necessary, install a new part. Remove the stabilizer bar bushing. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps Stabilizer Link: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps TSB 09-24-2 12/14/09 CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009 FORD: 2005-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links? a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2. 2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any evidence present of loose upper nuts? a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01. NOTE THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK LOWER ATTACHMENT. b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01. Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to replace the stabilizer bar end link. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test, Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End Links (Do Not Use With Any Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 6289 Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5K483 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps Stabilizer Link: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps TSB 09-24-2 12/14/09 CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009 FORD: 2005-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links? a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2. 2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any evidence present of loose upper nuts? a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01. NOTE THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK LOWER ATTACHMENT. b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01. Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to replace the stabilizer bar end link. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test, Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End Links (Do Not Use With Any Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 6295 Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5K483 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6296 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Stabilizer Bar Link Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. NOTICE: Do not use power tools to remove or install the stabilizer bar link nuts. Damage to the stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots may occur. NOTICE: Do not hold the stabilizer bar link boot with any tool or damage to the boot may occur. NOTE: The stabilizer bar links are designed with low friction ball joints that have a low breakaway torque. NOTE: When installing the stabilizer link to the stabilizer bar, make sure the stabilizer bar is perpendicular to the stabilizer link when tightening the link nut or the link nut may not seat properly. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut. - To install, tighten the new nut to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 3. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer link nut. Remove and discard the lower stabilizer bar link nut. - To install, tighten the new nut to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots for wear. If necessary, install new parts. Remove the stabilizer bar link. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6306 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6307 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6313 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6314 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6315 Front Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6316 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6317 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6318 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6319 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6320 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6321 Front Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - FRONT Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6322 Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Shown, All Other Vehicles Similar NOTE: Escape and Mariner only. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6323 Escape And Mariner Only NOTE: Escape Hybrid only. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6324 Escape Hybrid Only All vehicles NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6325 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead position and remove the key. Hybrid vehicles 3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. 4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer. All vehicles 5. Remove the front tires. 6. NOTICE: - Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or damage to the vehicle may occur. - Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or damage to the vehicle may occur. NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing. Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. To install, tighten to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft). - Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). 9. Remove the 6 bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield. 10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6326 11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Hybrid vehicles only 12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer bracket. All vehicles 13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. - To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). All vehicles except hybrid 14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6327 - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). All vehicles 15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt. - To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft). 16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle. 18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and installing the stabilizer link nut. Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts. To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and the bolts. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe. 21. NOTE: - Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing. - When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification. Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts. To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts. - To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). 23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same time the subframe is lowered. With an assistant, remove the front subframe. 24. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer the components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6336 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6337 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6343 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6344 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6345 Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6346 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6347 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6348 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6349 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6350 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6359 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6360 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6366 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6367 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6368 Rear Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6369 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6370 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6371 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6372 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6373 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6374 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - REAR Subframe - Rear Removal All vehicles 1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 2. Remove the rear axle assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6375 All vehicles 3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and position the 4 rear control arms aside. 5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe. 6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe. Installation All vehicles 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts. - To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). - To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe. 3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts. Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. Loosely install the bolts. 4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Vehicles with AWD 5. Install the rear axle assembly. All vehicles 6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6376 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6385 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6386 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6392 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6393 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) Clutch Release Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) TSB 09-18-4 MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2009 Escape ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs. clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7B546 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6399 Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6400 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6401 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6402 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6403 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6404 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Removal and Replacement Front Suspension Strut and Spring Assembly Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. 1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip. 3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove the hose from the bracket and position the brake jounce hose aside. 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bolt. 5. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut. 6. Remove and discard the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts. 7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6409 Remove and discard the 4 strut upper bushing nuts. 8. NOTICE: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod constant velocity (CV) joint can result in the separation of internal parts, causing failure of the axle shaft. Remove the strut and spring assembly. 9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly, refer to Strut and Spring Assembly See: Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Overhaul. Installation 1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender. 2. Align the 4 new strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks. - Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 4. Install the new upper stabilizer bar link nut. - Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 5. Install the wheel speed sensor harness bolt. - Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip. 7. Check the front end alignment and adjust as necessary. Rear Suspension Spring NOTE: All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle shown, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicle similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6410 Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt. 3. Disconnect the brake tube from the wheel cylinder and position the brake tube and bracket assembly aside. 4. Using a suitable jackstand, support the wheel knuckle. 5. Remove and discard the shock absorber lower nut, washer and bolt. 6. Remove the upper arm. For additional information, refer to Upper Arm See: Control Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension/Upper Arm. 7. Loosen the lower arm inner bolt. 8. NOTE: Note the position of the coil spring insulators and coil spring for installation. Using the jackstand, carefully lower the wheel knuckle. 9. Remove the coil spring. Installation 1. Align the coil spring and coil spring insulators to the previously noted position. 2. Using a suitable jackstand, carefully raise the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the new shock absorber lower bolt, washer and nut. - Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 4. Install the upper arm. For additional information, refer to Upper Arm See: Control Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension/Upper Arm. 5. Connect the brake tube fitting to the wheel cylinder. - Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6411 6. Install the brake tube bracket bolt. - Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 7. Install the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt. - Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 8. Bleed the rear wheel cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6412 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Overhaul Front Strut and Spring Assembly Disassembly and Assembly NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. 1. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the strut rod nut. Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor. 2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly. 3. Remove and discard the strut rod nut. - To assemble, tighten the new nut to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 4. Remove the strut. 5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator. 6. Remove the coil spring. 7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator. 8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6413 the strut is installed. Remove the bearing plate. 9. Remove the bearing. 10. Remove the strut upper bushing. 11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper. 12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises TSB 09-6-5 04/06/09 NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009 may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut area during slow parking lot type maneuvers? a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure and install new dust boot designed for this concern. d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM, Section 204-00 diagnostics. 2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02. b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight down, out of the upper spring seat. c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover. d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut. f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. 3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009). a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01. b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6422 C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot. (3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01. e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots, Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6423 Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18A179 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises TSB 09-6-5 04/06/09 NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009 may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut area during slow parking lot type maneuvers? a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure and install new dust boot designed for this concern. d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM, Section 204-00 diagnostics. 2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02. b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight down, out of the upper spring seat. c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover. d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut. f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. 3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009). a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01. b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6429 C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot. (3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01. e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots, Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6430 Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18A179 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement Front Suspension Front Strut and Spring Assembly Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. 1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip. 3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove the hose from the bracket and position the brake jounce hose aside. 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bolt. 5. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut. 6. Remove and discard the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts. 7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6433 Remove and discard the 4 strut upper bushing nuts. 8. NOTICE: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod constant velocity (CV) joint can result in the separation of internal parts, causing failure of the axle shaft. Remove the strut and spring assembly. 9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly, refer to Strut and Spring Assembly See: Overhaul. Installation 1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender. 2. Align the 4 new strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks. - Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 4. Install the new upper stabilizer bar link nut. - Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 5. Install the wheel speed sensor harness bolt. - Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip. 7. Check the front end alignment and adjust as necessary. Rear Suspension Rear Shock Absorber Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6434 1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the wheel and tire. 3. Using a suitable jackstand, support the rear suspension. 4. Remove and discard the upper shock absorber nut and bushing assembly. - To install, tighten the new nut and bushing assembly to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Remove and discard the lower shock absorber nut, washer and bolt. - To install, tighten the new nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 6. Remove the shock absorber. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6435 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul Front Strut and Spring Assembly Disassembly and Assembly NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. 1. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the strut rod nut. Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor. 2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly. 3. Remove and discard the strut rod nut. - To assemble, tighten the new nut to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 4. Remove the strut. 5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator. 6. Remove the coil spring. 7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator. 8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6436 the strut is installed. Remove the bearing plate. 9. Remove the bearing. 10. Remove the strut upper bushing. 11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper. 12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6441 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. 2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise. 2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6442 5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6443 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Bearing - Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6444 Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor ring. 4. Remove the brake drum. 5. Using the Front Hub Remover and Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent tools, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6445 6. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using a suitable press and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, press the inner bearing race from the wheel knuckle. 7. Remove and discard the wheel bearing snap ring. 8. Using the Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent and the Axle Bearing Remover, remove the bearing from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Using the Half Shaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. Install the wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the brake drum. 6. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the new wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6446 - Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to..................................................................................... ..............................................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft). Front Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to..................................................................................... ..............................................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation Jacking and Lifting WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other purpose. NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on lift without first checking for possible interference. NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. NOTE: Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 6460 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 6461 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. NOTE: Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 6467 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 6468 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises TSB 09-5-8 03/23/09 ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009 and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF THE POWERTRAIN. 1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h). 2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting noise. 3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 6477 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises TSB 09-5-8 03/23/09 ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009 and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF THE POWERTRAIN. 1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h). 2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting noise. 3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 6483 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6488 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. 2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise. 2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6489 5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6490 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Bearing - Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6491 Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor ring. 4. Remove the brake drum. 5. Using the Front Hub Remover and Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent tools, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6492 6. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using a suitable press and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, press the inner bearing race from the wheel knuckle. 7. Remove and discard the wheel bearing snap ring. 8. Using the Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent and the Axle Bearing Remover, remove the bearing from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Using the Half Shaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. Install the wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the brake drum. 6. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the new wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6493 - Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to..................................................................................... ..............................................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft). Front Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to..................................................................................... ..............................................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Install the 5 wheel nuts. Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern. Tighten to....................................... ............................................................................................................................................................1 35 Nm (100 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Studs Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub. - Discard the wheel stud. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6503 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Studs Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts. NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove a wheel stud. Damage to the wheel hub may result. 1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, remove the wheel stud. 3. NOTE: Make sure to use washers that have an ID that is larger than the OD of the wheel stud serrations. Use enough washers (approximately 4) to allow the wheel stud to fully seat against the hub flange. Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made by the original wheel stud. - Place approximately 4 washers over the outside end of the wheel stud and thread a standard wheel nut onto the wheel stud with the flat side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6504 against the washers. - Tighten the wheel nut until the wheel stud head seats against the back side of the wheel hub flange. 4. Remove the wheel nut and washers. 5. Install the brake shoes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C Side To Side Temperature Variations Air Door Actuator / Motor: Customer Interest A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations TSB 10-8-6 05/10/10 CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURE VARIATION FROM SIDE TO SIDE-BUILT BEFORE 12/17/2008 FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-12-6 to update the Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2008 may exhibit intermittent or erratic side to side temperature difference and/or temp fluctuation from the climate control vents. The concern may be with the temperature blend door actuator. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove temperature blend door actuator(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01. 2. Inspect the 5 digit manufacturer's date code on the temperature blend door actuator. It will be the last 5 digits on the second line of manufacturer's data. The first three digits equal day of year. The last two digits equal year. (Figure 1) a. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30708 or lower - replace the temperature blend door actuator assembly. b. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30808 or higher - reinstall the actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section 412-00. c. If the part number is something other than 8L84-19E616-EA - reinstall the actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section 412-00. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC), AND EITHER ONE OF THE ACTUATORS EXHIBITS THIS CONCERN AND HAS SUSPECT DATE CODE, THEN REPLACE BOTH RIGHT (RH) AND LEFT HAND (LH) ACTUATORS AS A SET. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C Side To Side Temperature Variations > Page 6515 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100806A 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.3 Hrs. Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100806A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.7 Hrs. Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100806B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.8 Hrs Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100806B 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.4 Hrs. Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19E616 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations Air Door Actuator / Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations TSB 10-8-6 05/10/10 CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURE VARIATION FROM SIDE TO SIDE-BUILT BEFORE 12/17/2008 FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-12-6 to update the Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2008 may exhibit intermittent or erratic side to side temperature difference and/or temp fluctuation from the climate control vents. The concern may be with the temperature blend door actuator. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove temperature blend door actuator(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01. 2. Inspect the 5 digit manufacturer's date code on the temperature blend door actuator. It will be the last 5 digits on the second line of manufacturer's data. The first three digits equal day of year. The last two digits equal year. (Figure 1) a. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30708 or lower - replace the temperature blend door actuator assembly. b. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30808 or higher - reinstall the actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section 412-00. c. If the part number is something other than 8L84-19E616-EA - reinstall the actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section 412-00. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC), AND EITHER ONE OF THE ACTUATORS EXHIBITS THIS CONCERN AND HAS SUSPECT DATE CODE, THEN REPLACE BOTH RIGHT (RH) AND LEFT HAND (LH) ACTUATORS AS A SET. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations > Page 6521 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100806A 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.3 Hrs. Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100806A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.7 Hrs. Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100806B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.8 Hrs Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100806B 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.4 Hrs. Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19E616 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger (DATC) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger (DATC) > Page 6524 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger (DATC) > Page 6525 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger (DATC) > Page 6526 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger (DATC) > Page 6527 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6530 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6531 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6532 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6533 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Air Door Actuator / Motor: Procedures Auxiliary Mode Door Actuator Removal and Installation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2 auxiliary line floorpan bracket nuts. To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6536 3. NOTE: The D-pillar bracket mill remain in place. Remove the LH D-pillar trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim 4. NOTE: When installing, tighten the screws on the High voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) first to make sure the duct is sealed correctly. Remove the 4 battery airflow duct screws, the 1 pin-type retainer and the battery airflow duct assembly To install, tighten 12 Nm (18 lb-in) 5. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control fresh air inlet duct nuts ^ To install tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 6. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control housing bolts. ^ To install tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 7. Remove the D-pillar bracket pin-type retainer. 8. Remove the D-pillar bracket upper pin-type retainer and bolt end remove the D-pillar bracket. 9. Disconnect the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator electrical connector 10. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be slightly repositioned to remove the screws. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6537 actuator screws. ^ Disconnect the rod. ^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 11. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator 12. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be installed behind the lower portion of the D-pillar bracket. When installed correctly, the auxiliary climate control housing bolt will go through the D-pillar bracket first, then through the housing mounting location. NOTE: Before the D-pillar trim panel and LH quarter trim panel are installed, correct auxiliary mode door actuator operation can be verified by carrying out the Traction Battery Control Module (TBCM) self-test while visually verifying correct actuator operation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6538 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Removal and Replacement Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Removal and Installation NOTE: The defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator can be accessed from below the LH side of the instrument panel. 1. Disconnect the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door Removal and Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6539 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the air inlet mode door actuator electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH Removal and Installation NOTE: On vehicles equipped with dual-zone Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC), the RH temperature blend door actuator is used to control only the RH temperature blend door. On vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC), the RH temperature blend door actuator is used to control the single temperature blend door for both sides of the vehicle. 1. Remove the upper center instrument panel finish panel. 2. Remove the passenger airbag module. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 3. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the RH panel duct screw. 4. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the upper RH center panel duct screw Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6540 5. NOTE: The lower RH center panel duct screw is located just below the RH lower rear corner of the Audio Control Module (ACM). Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw. 1. Detach the wire harness pin-type retainer. 2. Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw. 6. Working through the glove compartment opening, detach the wire harness pin-type retainer above the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 7. Disconnect the RH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector. 8. NOTICE: Use care to avoid dropping the RH temperature blend door actuator screws into the plenum chamber when removing the screws. If a screw is dropped into the plenum chamber, it may cause the airflow mode doors to jam, or may cause noise concerns. NOTE: The RH center instrument panel duct must be slightly repositioned to allow access to the RH temperature blend door actuator screws. Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 9. Remove the RH temperature blend door actuator. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6541 Removal and Installation NOTE: The LH temperature blend door actuator is present on dual-zone Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) vehicles to control the LH temperature blend door only. Vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) are not equipped with this actuator. For EMTC vehicles, refer to Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH See: Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH. 1. Disconnect the LH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 LH temperature blend door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Duct: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6550 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6551 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Duct: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6557 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6558 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Air Duct: Removal and Replacement Footwell Duct - Rear Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panels and the lower A-pillar trim panels. Vehicles with automatic transmission 4. Detach the selector lever cable from the gearshift assembly. 1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the gearshift lever. 2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6561 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6562 Air Duct: Overhaul Instrument Panel Air Distribution Ducts Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6563 Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the passenger airbag module. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 2. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). 3. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC). 4. Remove the instrument panel. 5. Remove the 4 defroster duct adapter screws and the defroster duct adapter. 6. Remove the 4 Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) screws and the FDIM. - Disconnect the FDIM electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 instrument cluster opening instrument panel trim screws. 8. Remove the 4 instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket screws. 9. Remove the 2 instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket nuts. 10. Remove the 3 glove compartment screws and the glove compartment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6564 11. Remove the 2 glove compartment latch striker screws and the glove compartment latch striker. 12. Remove the lower center instrument panel trim screw. 13. Remove the 4 lower steering column opening instrument panel trim screws. 14. Disconnect the headlamp switch and the message center switch electrical connectors. 15. Remove the 2 upper corner instrument panel trim screws. 16. Remove the 2 lower corner instrument panel trim screws. 17. Remove the 2 instrument panel support-to-defroster duct screws. 18. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel support to access the LH duct assembly upper center screw. Remove the 4 LH duct assembly screws and remove the LH duct assembly. 19. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel support to access the RH duct assembly upper center screw. Remove the 4 RH duct assembly screws and remove the RH duct assembly. 20. To assemble, reverse the assembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6573 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6574 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6580 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6581 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Register - Passenger Side Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Passenger Side Register - Passenger Side Removal and Installation 1. NOTICE: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim ring. Prying on the register trim ring will damage the register assembly. Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while working around the perimeter of the register. 2. Remove the passenger side register. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Register - Passenger Side > Page 6584 Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Center Register - Center Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The center registers are available only as part of the upper center instrument panel finish panel assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Register - Passenger Side > Page 6585 Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Driver Side Register - Driver Side Removal and Installation 1. NOTICE: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim ring. Prying on the register trim ring will damage the register assembly. Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while working around the perimeter of the register. 2. Remove the driver side register. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6589 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6590 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests Ambient Temperature Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. Remove the LH lower engine splash shield. 4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose. 5. Release the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose. 6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly. 9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other detergents. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6594 - Fill the engine cooling system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6600 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6601 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6602 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6603 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6604 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6605 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6606 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6607 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6608 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6609 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6610 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6611 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6612 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6613 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6614 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6615 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6616 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6617 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6618 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6619 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 2. Release the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and pull the vent tube down until it is disengaged from the heater core and evaporator core housing. 3. NOTE: The carpet below the blower motor must be slightly repositioned to remove the blower motor. Rotate the blower motor counterclockwise to disengage it from the housing and remove the blower motor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6623 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6624 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6628 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6629 Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests Blower Motor Resistor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6630 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair Blower Motor Resistor Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor resistor screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the blower motor resistor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6634 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6635 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Blower Motor Speed Control Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the blower motor speed control. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations Cabin Air Filter: Locations A cabin air filter is available for this vehicle as a dealer installed accessory. The accessory cabin air filter will be located in the air inlet under the RH side of the cowl panel grille, if installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 6639 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair A cabin air filter is available for this vehicle as a dealer installed accessory. The accessory cabin air filter will be located in the air inlet under the RH side of the cowl panel grille, if installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6643 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6644 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown. In-vehicle temperature sensor similar. Removal and Installation 1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument cluster finish panel could result. Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor. 2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor electrical connector. 4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing. 5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel. 6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing for installation. When installing the venturi, it must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to indicated that it is correctly attached. Remove the venturi (if needed). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 6647 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper. 2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications Compressor Clutch: Specifications Air gap between pulley and hub........................................................................................................... ........................................0.3-0.6 mm (0.012-0.024 in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6652 Compressor Clutch: Adjustments Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Air Gap Adjustment 1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at 3 equally spaced places between the clutch plate and the A/C clutch pulley. 2. If the A/C clutch air gap is out of range, remove the clutch plate. Add or remove spacers between the clutch plate hub and the compressor shaft until the clearance is within specification. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6656 Compressor Clutch Coil: Service and Repair Clutch and Clutch Field Coil - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal 1. Remove the A/C compressor. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 2.5L See: Service and Repair or Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 3.0L (4V) See: Service and Repair. 2. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt. 1. Using a suitable spanner-type wrench, hold the A/C clutch disc and hub. 2. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6657 3. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub and the A/C clutch disc and hub spacer(s). 4. Remove the A/C compressor pulley snap ring. 5. NOTICE: Do not use air tools. Damage to the Air Conditioning (A/C) clutch pulley or A/C compressor may result. Remove the A/C compressor pulley. 1. Install the A/C Compressor Shaft Protector. 2. Install a suitable 3-jaw puller on the A/C compressor shaft protector and A/C compressor pulley. 3. Remove the A/C compressor pulley. 6. Remove the 4 A/C clutch field coil screws. 7. Remove the A/C clutch field coil. Installation NOTE: A new A/C compressor may come equipped with a clutch and pulley. If not, the A/C clutch components should be reused unless obvious signs of damage are found. 1. Visually inspect the A/C clutch disc and hub, A/C compressor pulley and A/C clutch field coil for damage. - Inspect for physical damage, including cracked or melted components or discoloration due to excessive heat. - Inspect for excessive wear, including grooving in the A/C clutch disc and hub or A/C compressor pulley that is more than fingernail depth. - Inspect for roughness in the A/C compressor pulley bearing. 2. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces. 3. Install the A/C clutch field coil. 4. Install the 4 A/C clutch field coil screws. 5. NOTICE: The Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor must be positioned on the press so that only the flat part of the A/C compressor housing is contacting the base with the A/C compressor shaft aligned with the center of the press shaft. If the A/C compressor is not installed correctly on the press, the A/C compressor and/or A/C compressor pulley will be damaged. Install the A/C compressor pulley. 1. Install the A/C compressor on a suitable press. 2. Position the A/C compressor pulley on the A/C compressor. 3. Install the A/C Clutch Installer on the A/C compressor pulley. 4. Using the press, install the A/C compressor pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6658 6. Install the A/C compressor pulley snap ring with the bevel side out. 7. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch disc and hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening. 8. Install the A/C clutch disc and hub. 9. Install the A/C compressor clutch disc and hub bolt. 1. Hold the A/C clutch disc and hub with a suitable spanner-type wrench. 2. Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 10. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch disc and hub spacers. 11. Install the A/C compressor. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 2.5L See: Service and Repair or Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 3.0L (4V) See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6662 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Relay (A/CCR) Note: The PCM parameter identifiers (PIDs) wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff (WAC) and wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WAC_F) are used to monitor the A/CCR output. The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C operation and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position), the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/CCR. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6663 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6664 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation Air Conditioning A/C Condenser The A/C condenser is an aluminum fin-and-micro-channel design heat exchanger located in front of the vehicle radiator. It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over fins and tubes to extract heat and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled. On 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the top portion of the condenser is partitioned from the refrigerant system and is used for transmission fluid cooling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6668 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser Core - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation NOTE: If a condenser core leak is suspected, the condenser core must be leak tested before it is removed from the vehicle. All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the 4 radiator bracket bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6669 5. Detach and remove the RH and LH radiator brackets. 6. Remove the condenser outlet and inlet fitting nuts and disconnect the fittings. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). Vehicles with automatic transmission 7. NOTE: The transmission cooler hose inlet (upper tube) attaches to the transmission outlet line (passenger side front of transmission). The transmission cooler outlet (lower tube) attaches to the transmission inlet line (driver side of transmission). Release the 2 transmission cooler line clamps and disconnect the lines from the A/C condenser. All vehicles 8. Remove the 2 condenser bolts. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 9. Remove the condenser core. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module Control Assembly: Service and Repair Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module Removal and Installation NOTE: When installing a new HVAC module on vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC), the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be carried out to configure the new module to the vehicle. Refer to Information Bus. 1. Remove the middle center instrument panel finish panel. 2. Remove the 4 HVAC module screws. 3. Remove the HVAC module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module > Page 6674 Control Assembly: Service and Repair Passenger Zone Valve Passenger Zone Valve Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Disconnect the passenger zone valve electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the 2 passenger zone valve fittings. - Discard the O-ring seals. - To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 4. Remove the passenger zone valve bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 5. Remove the passenger zone valve. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC > Page 6679 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-DATC Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6682 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6683 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-EMTC Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6684 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Refrigerant Line Fittings NOTICE: Use only a plastic or nonmetallic tool for removing O-ring seals and gasket seals from the refrigerant line fittings. Use of a metallic tool will create scratches on the sealing surface of the fitting that can result in refrigerant system leaks. Whenever a refrigerant line fitting is disconnected, the fitting must be cleaned of any foreign material and new O-ring seals and/or gasket seals must be installed. Use only the O-ring seals and gasket seals specified in the Ford Master Parts Catalog. If a refrigerant system line fitting must remain disconnected for an extended period of time, it should be capped to avoid contamination of the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6696 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6697 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6703 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6704 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 Throttle Body: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 TSB 09-23-5 11/30/09 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P2135 - BUILT BETWEEN 6/22/2009-10/15/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion, Milan, Fusion Hybrid, and Milan Hybrid vehicles, built on or between 6/22/2009 - 10/15/2009, may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or wrench light with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P2135. DTCs P2111 and/or P0122 may also be present. Drivability symptoms may include intermittent rough idle, idle speed below specification and/or reduced power. This concern may be attributed to Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) hardware. If the vehicle only exhibits DTCs P2111 or P0122 follow normal Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test (PPT) diagnostics. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check for DTCs and confirm vehicle build date. Is DTC P2135 present and vehicle built on or between 6/22/2009-10/15/2009? a. Yes - proceed to Step 2. b. No - Procedure does not apply. Refer to PC/ED PPT DV for appropriate diagnostic routines. 2. Replace the ETB per the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092305A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations) 092305A 2010 Fusion, Fusion 0.6 Hr. Hybrid, Milan, Milan Hybrid 2.5L Engine: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 6710 Other Operations) 092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr. Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9E926 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 6716 Other Operations) 092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr. Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9E926 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6717 Evaporator Core: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Evaporator Core NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator core is used for HVTB cooling on hybrid vehicles. The evaporator core is an aluminum plate/fin-type and is located in the heater core and evaporator core housing. A mixture of liquid refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the evaporator core through the evaporator core inlet tube and continues out of the evaporator core through the evaporator core outlet tube as a vapor. During A/C compressor operation, airflow from the blower motor is cooled and dehumidified as it flows through the evaporator core fins. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6718 Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests Evaporator/Condenser Core - On-Vehicle Leak Test 1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 2. Disconnect the suspect evaporator core (leave the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) attached to the evaporator core) or condenser core from the A/C system. 3. Clean the fittings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Fittings Set to the condenser or evaporator core/TXV tube connections. 5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to the test fittings. If available, use hoses without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the test fittings or install an adapter that will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open. Connect the red and blue hoses from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the test fittings on the evaporator core/TXV or condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump. 6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove any refrigerant from oil left in the evaporator core or condenser core. If the refrigerant is not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a refrigerant leak. 7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set connections before installing a new evaporator core or condenser core. 8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump. Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated. - If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge. - If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the evaporator core or condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum. - If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check for vacuum loss. 9. If the condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure, install a new condenser core. If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, as verified by the above procedure, disconnect the TXV and recheck the evaporator core for a leak. If the evaporator core does leak, install a new evaporator core or condenser core. TEST the system for normal operation. If the evaporator core does not leak, install new evaporator core/TXV seals and retest the evaporator core/TXV. If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, install a new TXV. TEST the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6722 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Air Conditioning Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary evaporator core on hybrid vehicles. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air temperature. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels. On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator core to warm to acceptable levels. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning > Page 6725 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Control Components Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects. The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling and improve defrost/demist performance. Note: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts. A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6726 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away from the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector. 4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) Air Conditioning Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) NOTE: A second (auxiliary) TXV is used for High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) cooling on hybrid vehicles. The TXV is located at the evaporator core inlet and outlet tubes at the dash panel at the rear of the engine compartment. The TXV provides a restriction to the flow of refrigerant from the high-pressure side of the refrigerant system and separates the low-pressure and high-pressure sides of the refrigerant system. Refrigerant entering and exiting the evaporator core passes through the TXV through 2 separate flow paths. An internal temperature sensing bulb senses the temperature of the refrigerant flowing out of the evaporator core and adjusts an internal pin-type valve to meter the refrigerant flow into the evaporator core. The internal pin-type valve decreases the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at lower temperatures and increases the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at higher temperatures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) > Page 6731 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Transducer Air Conditioning A/C Pressure Transducer (2.5L or 3.0L [4V] Only) The A/C pressure transducer monitors the compressor discharge pressure and communicates with the PCM. The PCM will interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event that the A/C pressure transducer indicates high system discharge pressures. It is also used to sense low charge conditions. If the pressure is below a predetermined value for a given ambient temperature, the PCM will not allow the clutch to engage. The A/C pressure transducer is located on the receiver/drier. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant before removing the A/C pressure transducer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6732 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair Thermostatic Expansion Valve Removal and Installation 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 3. Remove the 2 TXV bolts and the TXV. - Discard the O-ring seals. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the reverse the removal procedure. - If the TXV stud has become loose during removal, or has been removed for any reason, tighten the TXV stud to 6 Nm (53 lb-in) before the TXV fitting nut is reinstalled. - Install new O-ring seals and gasket seals. 5. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core 1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the Plugged Heater Core component test before the heater core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as follows: Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core. 2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the heater hose connection and damage the heater core. Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 6737 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Plugged Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core - Plugged 1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the heater. 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and outlet hoses to see if they are hot. 4. If the outlet only is not hot: - the heater core may have an air pocket. - the heater core may be plugged. 5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 6738 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Pressure Test Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test. 1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing. Drain the coolant from the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps. 5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the vehicle. 9. Carry out the Bench Test. See: Heater Core - Bench Test Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 6739 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Bench Test Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6740 Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core Removal and Installation NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. NOTE: Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle. 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the dash panel seal. 3. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the heater core. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Relief Valve - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the A/C pressure relief valve and O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. NOTE: A new O-ring seal will already be installed on the new A/C pressure relief valve service part. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Add the correct amount of clean PAG refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. 5. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line - 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield. 4. Remove the front bumper cover. 5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6748 6. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6749 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser To Receiver Drier Line Condenser to Receiver Drier Line Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the compressor manifold and tube bracket nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6750 - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal. 6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 8. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 9. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seal and O-ring seal. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6751 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line Evaporator Inlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the evaporator inlet line bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. Remove the evaporator inlet line. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6752 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line Evaporator Outlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield. 4. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. Detach the wire harness clip from the evaporator outlet line. 6. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6753 - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket. 8. Remove the evaporator outlet line. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and a new O-ring seal. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing Removal and Installation NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the instrument panel. 4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. Release the clamps and disconnect the heater inlet and outlet hoses from the heater core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6758 6. Remove the 6 heater core and evaporator core housing nuts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing in the following sequence. 1. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing from the dash panel studs. 2. Rotate the RH side of the heater core and evaporator core housing toward the rear of the vehicle while pulling the housing toward the RH door opening to detach it from the rear footwell duct. 3. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 8. Disassemble the heater core and evaporator core housing as needed. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6759 Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6760 Disassembly and Assembly Plenum chamber 1. Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 2. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the plenum chamber. 3. Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6761 4. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator. 5. Remove the 6 plenum chamber screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 6. Remove the plenum chamber. Air inlet duct 7. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the air inlet duct. 8. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 9. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator. Complete disassembly 10. Detach and remove the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness. 11. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 12. Remove the blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor. 13. Remove the heater core tube dash panel seal. 14. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 15. Remove the heater core. 16. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) dash panel seal. 17. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing drain dash panel seal. 18. Remove the 2 LH temperature blend door actuator screws (if equipped). 19. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator (if equipped). 20. Detach the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and disengage the vent tube from the heater core and evaporator core housing. 21. Rotate counterclockwise and remove the blower motor. 22. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation Receiver Dryer: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Receiver/Drier NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. Damage to the receiver/drier includes leaks, physical damage to the receiver/drier shell or desiccant, or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination results only from a complete loss of refrigerant, and equalization of the refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure for a period longer than one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present in the refrigerant system before repairs are carried out, a new receiver/drier should not be installed. The receiver/drier is mounted to the right of the radiator support for 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or at the RH shock tower for hybrid vehicles. It stores high-pressure liquid after it leaves the condenser core. A desiccant cartridge mounted inside the receiver/drier removes any retained moisture from the refrigerant. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6765 Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair Receiver Drier - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation NOTE: The receiver/drier fitting studs can be removed and installed separately from the receiver/drier and are available as service parts. If only the fitting studs are damaged, it is not necessary to install a new receiver/drier. NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. Damage to the receiver/drier includes leaks, physical damage to the receiver/drier shell or desiccant, or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination results only from a complete loss of refrigerant, and equalization of the refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure for a period longer than one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present in the refrigerant system before repairs are carried out, a new receiver/drier should not be installed. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. 3. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer electrical connector. 5. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6766 - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. 6. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket clip. 7. Remove the 2 receiver/drier nuts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 8. Remove the receiver/drier. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification........................................... ......................................................................................................................................................WS H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................... ...................................................................0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6771 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification........................................... ......................................................................................................................................................WS H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................... ...................................................................0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6772 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Refrigerant Identification Testing Refrigerant Identification 1. NOTE: A Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer must be used to identify gas samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system. Follow the instructions included with the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer to obtain the sample for testing. 2. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer will display one of the following: - If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS LED will light. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons and air will be displayed on the digital display. - If refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an alarm will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display. - If hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light, "Hydrocarbon High" will be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will also be displayed on the digital display. 3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or greater. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer eliminates the effect of air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is not considered a contaminant, although air can affect A/C system performance. When the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer has determined that a refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is 98% or greater by weight) and air concentration levels are 2% or greater by weight, it will prompt the user if an air purge is desired. 4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the refrigerant is indeed contaminated. Contaminated Refrigerant Handling NOTICE: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R-134a recovery/recycling equipment. Recovery of contaminated refrigerant will contaminate the recovered refrigerant supply and may damage the recovery/recycling equipment. NOTE: A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the A/C system flushing procedure. 1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant only. - If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in the area with the correct equipment to carry out this service. 2. Determine and correct the cause of the customers initial concern. 3. Flush the A/C system. 4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local regulations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging Refrigerant: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging Refrigerant System Recovery NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6775 facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer procedures and instructions. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends the use of R-134a refrigerant management equipment that meets the requirements of the SAE J2788 standard. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out recovery. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system recovery may be accomplished using a separate recovery station. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Prior to recovering, the purity of the refrigerant must be verified. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Identification Testing See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Refrigerant Identification Testing. 2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. Note the amount of oil removed during the refrigerant recovery (if any). Add that same amount back into the system once repairs are complete. 4. Once the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine has recovered the refrigerant, switch OFF the power supply. 5. Allow the system to set for about 2 minutes, and observe the system vacuum reading. If the vacuum is not lost, disconnect the recovery equipment. 6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for 2 minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs. Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out recovery, evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes. 3. Turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again. Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Vacuum Pump NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out evacuation of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Connect the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the low-side and high-side service gauge port valves. 2. Connect the center (yellow) hose from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the suction port on the Vacuum Pump. 3. Open all valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and both service gauge port valves. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6776 4. Turn on the Vacuum Pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes. 5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set (not the service gauge port valves) and turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. 6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again. Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. 2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low-side and high-side service gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. 2. Assemble the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set, Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a supply tank following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating instructions. 3. Charge the refrigerant system following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating instructions. 4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the engine, select MAX A/C operation and allow the refrigerant charge to complete. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6777 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation WARNING: Use extreme care and observe all safety and service precautions related to the use of refrigerants as outlined on refrigerant tank and on recovery and charging equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer's procedures and instructions. NOTICE: On vehicles being serviced for an internal compressor or desiccant failure, a new suction accumulator or receiver/drier, Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) or evaporator core orifice and any hoses containing mufflers must be installed prior to filtering the Air Conditioning (A/C) system. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible to correctly remove any foreign material. These components are typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses without mufflers can normally be reused unless they are clogged with foreign material. The filter is intended for use on one vehicle only. 1. Orient the filter inlet toward the A/C condenser core. 2. NOTICE: The flexible extension adapters included in the A/C Flush Adapter Kit are designed for low-pressure flushing and are not designed for use with a charged refrigerant system. Do not make the condenser fitting connections using the flexible extension adapters or damage to the adapters and loss of refrigerant will occur. NOTE: The F8VZ-19E773-AB pancake filter is not permanently installed and will be removed at the end of this procedure. Disconnect the condenser outlet fitting and temporarily install the pancake filter between the 2 halves of the fitting. - Use flexible refrigerant hose of 17,238 kPa (2,500 psi) burst rating. - Make the connections using the correct adapters from the A/C Flush Adapter Kit and/or A/C Flush and Purge Fitting Kit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6778 3. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. 4. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 5. Check all refrigerant system hoses, lines and the position of the newly installed filters to be sure they do not interfere with other engine compartment components. If necessary, use tie straps to make adjustments. 6. Provide adequate airflow to the front of the vehicle (with a fan, if necessary). Select A/C operation and set the blower motor speed to maximum. Start the engine and let it idle briefly. Make sure the A/C system is operating correctly. 7. Gradually bring the engine up to 1,200 rpm by running it at lower rpms for short periods (first at 800 rpm, then at 1,000 rpm). Set the engine at 1,200 rpm and run it for one hour with the A/C system operating. 8. Stop the engine. 9. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 10. Remove the adapters, flexible hoses and pancake filter from between the condenser and the condenser to evaporator tube. 11. Discard the pancake filter. It can be used one time only. 12. Reconnect the condenser outlet fitting. 13. Evacuate, charge and leak-test the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification............................................... ..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................ ......................................148 ml (5 fl oz) See: Service and Repair Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6783 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification............................................... ..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................ ......................................148 ml (5 fl oz) See: Service and Repair Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6784 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Refrigerant Oil Adding Refrigerant Oil Adding NOTE: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed, some of the PAG oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part. 1. Refer to the chart below for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation. a If an excessive amount of PAG oil is lost due to a hose rupture/separation or other damage, the total system PAG oil capacity must be added. b The amount specified may be used for one or multiple O-ring leak repairs. Do not multiply the PAG oil amount by the number of O-ring leaks being repaired. Adding Refrigerant Oil After A/C Compressor Replacement Service A/C compressors shipped without clutch and pulley 1. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft 6 to 8 revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring device. - If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 oz), pour the same amount plus 30 ml (1 oz) of clean PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) (YN-12-D) WSH M1C231-B or equivalent into the new A/C compressor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6785 - If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5 oz), pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) or equivalent into the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 oz), pour 85 ml (3 oz) of clean A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) or equivalent into the new A/C compressor. Service A/C compressors shipped with clutch and pulley 2. Rotate the old A/C compressor shaft 6 to 8 revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring device. - If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is less than 89 ml (3 oz), remove 118 ml (4 oz) from the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 89 ml (3 oz), remove 89 ml (3 oz) from the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 118 ml (4 oz), remove 59 ml (2 oz) from the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 148 ml (5 oz), remove 29 ml (1 oz) from the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is greater than 148 ml (5 oz), remove 0 ml (0 oz) from the new A/C compressor. Adding Refrigerant Oil After New Suction Accumulator or Receiver/Drier Replacement NOTE: This refrigerant oil adding method is to be used when a new suction accumulator or receiver drier only has been installed. If a new A/C compressor and evaporator core orifice or TXV have also been installed due to system contamination, refer to the appropriate heading. 1. Drill one 12.7 mm (1/2 in) hole in the old suction accumulator or receiver/drier cylinder and drain the oil into a clean measuring cup. 2. Add the same quantity of new PAG oil, plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery and 60 ml (2 fl oz). Adding Refrigerant Oil After Multiple Component Replacement After A/C System Contamination NOTE: This refrigerant oil adding method is to be used when a new A/C compressor, suction accumulator or receiver drier and evaporator core orifice or TXV have been installed due to system contamination and the A/C system has been flushed. NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without refrigerant oil. 1. Add 60 ml (2 fl oz) directly to the new A/C compressor suction port. 2. Inject the total vehicle PAG oil capacity minus 60 ml (2 fl oz) to the low-side service port during system charging. For the total PAG oil capacity specification, refer to the Specifications table. Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector NOTE: If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the dye may be added to the dye/lubricant injector, from the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set, along with the PAG oil. 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector and the correct adapters from the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set to match the amount of refrigerant compressor oil to be injected. 3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed. 4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of clean, new PAG oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6786 5. Install the dye/lubricant injector between the low-side service gauge port valve and the refrigerant service station or manifold gauge set. 6. Open all valves and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6790 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Engine Control Components Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to the Climate Control System Air Conditioning System Overview. Also, refer to the applicable Wiring Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. For additional information, refer to wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff (WAC). Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6793 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch Engine Control Components Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled for electric fan applications, or single function for all others. For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve. For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high speed fan to help reduce the pressure. For additional information, refer to the Climate Control System, Air Conditioning System Overview or the Wiring Diagrams. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6794 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor Engine Control Components Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control. A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage Vs Pressure Chart Typical ACP Transducer Sensor Typical ACP Transducer Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6799 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6800 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6804 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Relay (A/CCR) Note: The PCM parameter identifiers (PIDs) wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff (WAC) and wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WAC_F) are used to monitor the A/CCR output. The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C operation and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position), the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/CCR. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6805 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6806 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC > Page 6811 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-DATC Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6814 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6815 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-EMTC Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6816 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6821 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6822 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests Ambient Temperature Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6826 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6827 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Blower Motor Speed Control Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the blower motor speed control. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6831 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6832 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown. In-vehicle temperature sensor similar. Removal and Installation 1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument cluster finish panel could result. Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor. 2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor electrical connector. 4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing. 5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel. 6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing for installation. When installing the venturi, it must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to indicated that it is correctly attached. Remove the venturi (if needed). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 6835 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper. 2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6839 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Air Conditioning Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary evaporator core on hybrid vehicles. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air temperature. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels. On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator core to warm to acceptable levels. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning > Page 6842 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Engine Control Components Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects. The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling and improve defrost/demist performance. Note: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts. A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6843 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away from the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector. 4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6847 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Engine Control Components Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to the Climate Control System Air Conditioning System Overview. Also, refer to the applicable Wiring Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. For additional information, refer to wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff (WAC). Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6850 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch Engine Control Components Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled for electric fan applications, or single function for all others. For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve. For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high speed fan to help reduce the pressure. For additional information, refer to the Climate Control System, Air Conditioning System Overview or the Wiring Diagrams. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6851 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor Engine Control Components Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control. A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage Vs Pressure Chart Typical ACP Transducer Sensor Typical ACP Transducer Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Solar Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6857 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6858 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6859 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6860 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6861 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6862 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6863 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6864 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6865 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6866 Solar Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6867 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6868 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6869 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6870 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6871 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6872 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6873 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6874 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6875 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6876 Solar Sensor: Description and Operation SOLAR AMPLIFIER (SUNLOAD SENSOR) The solar amplifier (dual-channel sunload sensor), supplies information to the DATC module indicating LH side and RH side sunload. The sunload senor is capable of sensing the intensity and direction of the solar rediation entering the cabin of the car through the windshield for comfort of the driver and front passenger. The smart junction box processes this information to control the air conditioning system. For information on the location and service of the sunload sensor. See: Locations Diagrams By Number, Diagram set 55-004 Auto Climate Control System. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6877 Solar Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the A/C sunload sensor from the instrument panel upper finish panel. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Service Gauge Port Valves The high-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the receiver/drier inlet line. The low-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the evaporator outlet line. NOTE: Different valve cores are used for different engine applications. Use only the valve core listed in the Ford Master Parts Catalog for the vehicle and fitting being serviced. The fitting is an integral part of the refrigerant line or component. - Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side service gauge ports. - A very small amount of leakage will always be detectable around the Schrader-type valve with the service gauge port valve cap removed, and is considered normal. A new Schrader-type valve core can be installed if the seal leaks excessively. - The service gauge port valve caps are used as primary seals in the refrigerant system to prevent leakage through the Schrader-type valves from reaching the atmosphere. Always install and tighten the A/C service gauge port valve caps to the correct torque after they are removed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Solar Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6886 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6887 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6888 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6889 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6890 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6891 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6892 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6893 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6894 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6895 Solar Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6896 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6897 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6898 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6899 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6900 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6901 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6902 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6903 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6904 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6905 Solar Sensor: Description and Operation SOLAR AMPLIFIER (SUNLOAD SENSOR) The solar amplifier (dual-channel sunload sensor), supplies information to the DATC module indicating LH side and RH side sunload. The sunload senor is capable of sensing the intensity and direction of the solar rediation entering the cabin of the car through the windshield for comfort of the driver and front passenger. The smart junction box processes this information to control the air conditioning system. For information on the location and service of the sunload sensor. See: Locations Diagrams By Number, Diagram set 55-004 Auto Climate Control System. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6906 Solar Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the A/C sunload sensor from the instrument panel upper finish panel. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and possibly violate vehicle safety standards. NOTE: After diagnosing or repairing a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the restraint system diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. NOTE: Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in various combinations depending on the impact event. NOTE: Always refer to the appropriate diagnostic/repair information procedures prior to carrying out vehicle repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being installed. When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the Restraints Control Module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the vehicle SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new deployable devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and installation of a new RCM. DTCs must be cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried out. Vehicles with Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system 2. NOTE: After installation of new Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset procedure as instructed in the diagnostic/repair information. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic/repair information for OCS system removal and installation procedure. When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) has DTC B1231/B1193:00 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include the following procedures for the specified system: For rail-type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary. Install new OCS system rails. Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be cleared. - For weight sensor bolt-type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be cleared from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset. Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231/B1193:00 cannot be cleared. - NOTE: Most bladder-type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after deployment. The DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM. For bladder-type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed. All vehicles 3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred, repair or install new mounting points and mounting hardware as needed. 4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed. 5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt pretensioners. For additional information, refer to Seat Belt Systems. 6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components: - Steering column (deployable column if equipped) - Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points - Instrument panel braces and brackets Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 6912 - Instrument panel and mounting points - Seats and seat mounting points - Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors. For additional information, refer to Seat Belt Systems - SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors 7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new components as needed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 6913 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After A Collision Safety Belt Procedure After a Collision 1. WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been subjected to severe stress. Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching areas must be inspected for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and distorted, the sheet metal must be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity. Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Carry out the Functional Test. See: Seat Belt Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6919 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6920 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition to OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. 8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6921 clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6922 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6923 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6924 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6925 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. - When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6926 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6931 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6932 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6933 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Module, Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Module, Left > Page 6936 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Module, Left > Page 6937 Air Bag: Diagrams Passenger Air Bag Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Module, Left > Page 6938 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Module, Left > Page 6939 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger Air Bag: Service and Repair Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger Removal WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Do not use any sharp tools to separate the passenger air bag module trim cover from the passenger air bag module canister. Sharp tools may damage the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Do not unpack or unroll the passenger air bag module soft pack. If the soft pack becomes unpacked or unrolled, install a new passenger air bag module assembly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Do not manipulate or compromise the passenger air bag module hooks during the removal or installation procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. Remove the passenger air bag module. For additional information, refer to Passenger Air Bag Module See: Passenger Air Bag Module. 2. Place a mark on top of the passenger air bag module canister for correct installation. 3. Carefully lift the passenger air bag module cover from the bottom of the air bag module canister, separating the windows from the canister hooks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6942 4. NOTE: Place an X mark on the old air bag cover to avoid reinstalling. Remove the passenger air bag cover from the canister, separating the top windows from the canister hooks. Installation 1. Place the passenger air bag cover on a clean work surface once it is removed from the shipping package. 2. WARNING: Carefully inspect the passenger air bag trim cover, canister and soft pack before assembly. If any foreign objects are found, remove them before attaching the passenger air bag trim cover to the canister. If the canister or soft pack is damaged, install a new passenger air bag module assembly. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Match the number of cover windows to the number of canister hooks before attaching the passenger air bag cover to the canister. 3. Match the top of the passenger air bag cover with the canister mark from the removal procedure. 4. Position the canister onto the passenger air bag cover and engage the bottom hooks into the air bag cover windows. 5. Push the top of the passenger air bag cover to engage the top canister hooks. 6. Inspect the passenger air bag cover windows-to-canister hooks to verify that every window has a hook installed and the sides are not tucked or folded against the air bag canister. 7. Install the passenger air bag module. For additional information, refer to Passenger Air Bag Module See: Passenger Air Bag Module. 8. NOTE: The video procedure utilizes a Fusion/Milan passenger air bag module assembly. It also applies to vehicles with similar passenger air bag module designs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6943 Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module Driver Air Bag Module Removal WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 2. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. 3. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and/or the steering wheel. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6944 4. Disconnect the horn and 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. Installation 1. Connect the driver air bag module and horn electrical connectors. 2. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks. - When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure all 3 hooks are fully seated. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 3. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6945 Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Module Passenger Air Bag Module Removal WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTICE: Do not install a new passenger air bag module assembly due to a damaged or discolored passenger air bag cover. The passenger air bag cover can be serviced separately from the passenger air bag module assembly. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Trim Cover Passenger See: Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 2. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the passenger air bag cover. Failure to follow these Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6946 instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the passenger air bag cover clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module passenger air bag cover clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. 4. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 5. NOTICE: During installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6947 Air Bag: Service and Repair Safety Canopy Module Safety Canopy Module NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. Removal WARNING: Always carry or place a live Safety Canopy(R), or side air curtain module, with the module and tear seam pointed away from your body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Anytime the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module has deployed, a new headliner and new A-, B- and C-pillar upper trim panels and attaching hardware must be installed. Remove any other damaged components and hardware and install new components and hardware as needed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6948 NOTE: There are different safety canopy modules for vehicles equipped with a moon roof and vehicles without a moon roof. The safety canopy modules are NOT interchangeable. If installing a new safety canopy module, the correct safety canopy module MUST be installed for the vehicle application. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Detach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer from the A-pillar. 4. Remove the A-pillar tether bolt. - If the vehicle is equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, note the roof opening panel drain hose and/or rear window washer solvent hose position and routing for installation purposes. 5. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars. 6. Disconnect the safety canopy module electrical connector and detach the connector from the D-pillar. 7. Detach the safety canopy module wiring clip from the roof panel brace. 8. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the ignitor (between the C- and D-pillars). 9. If equipped with a roof opening panel, disconnect the drain hose. 10. If equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, detach the hose clip and position the hose aside. 11. Remove the remaining 2 safety canopy module bolts (1 near the top of the C-pillar and 1 between the B- and C-pillars). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6949 12. Lift to unhook the safety canopy module from the C-pillar. 13. Move the safety canopy module forward and release the rear hook. Installation WARNING: Before installing a Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module, inspect the roofline for any damage. If necessary, the sheet metal must be reworked to its original condition and structural integrity. Install new fasteners if damaged and remove foreign material. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Never put any type of fastener or tie strap around any part of a Safety Canopy(R) module, side air curtain module or interior trim panel. This will prevent the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module from deploying correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the Safety Canopy(R) in the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: When installing a new headliner on a vehicle equipped with Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules, make sure the headliner has the word AIRBAG on the headliner where it meets each B-pillar trim panel. Otherwise, you have the wrong headliner. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module not deploying or deploying incorrectly, increasing the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. 1. WARNING: Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the Safety Canopy(R) in the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Install new safety canopy module J-nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6950 2. NOTE: If equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, make sure of correct roof opening panel drain hose and/or rear window solvent hose routing. Position the safety canopy module and insert the rear hook into the sheet metal cavity. 3. Hook the safety canopy module into the C-pillar. 4. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. Attach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer to the A-pillar. 6. NOTE: If equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, do not pinch the front roof opening panel drain hose and/or rear window washer solvent hose. Install the A-pillar tether bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 7. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the top of the C-pillar and between the B- and C-pillars. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 8. If equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, position the hose and attach the hose clip. 9. If equipped with a roof opening panel, connect the roof opening panel rear drain hose. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6951 10. Connect the safety canopy module electrical connector and attach the connector to the D-pillar. 11. Install the safety canopy module wiring clip to the roof panel brace. 12. Install the remaining 2 rear safety canopy module bolts near the ignitor (between the C- and D-pillars). - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 13. Install the headliner. 14. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6952 Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Air Bag Module Side Air Bag Module NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover, side air bag module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. Remove the front seat and depower the SRS. 2. NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6953 Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. 1. Remove the rear screw. - For driver seat, remove the front and rear screws. 2. Push the side shield forward to release. 3. NOTICE: Note the position of the wiring harness, to aid installation. An incorrectly routed wiring harness could become damaged when the seat is moved. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track. Detach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Seats with manual lumbar adjust 4. Turn the manual lumbar knob clockwise until it stops, releasing all tension on the manual lumbar support cable. 5. Pull and remove the manual lumbar knob. All seats 6. Release the seat backrest trim cover J-clip. 7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip. The hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam pad. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. Place a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and the seat backrest foam pad and carefully separate the hook-and-loop strips. 8. Carefully roll up the seat back trim cover in an inside out fashion to the side air bag module. 9. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6954 10. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips out through the side air bag module seat backrest foam opening. 11. Continue to roll the seat backrest trim cover up to access the side air bag module. 12. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers from the seat backrest frame. 13. Through the back of the seat backrest, position out the seat backrest foam pad. Remove the 2 side air bag module nuts and remove the side air bag module. Installation WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly: - Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material. - Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad. - Install new parts if damaged. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the mounting bracket. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage and may cause system failure. All seats Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6955 1. Install the side air bag module and nuts onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 2. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame. 3. Roll down the seat trim cover to the side air bag module. 4. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute must not be repaired. If there is any damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips back through the side air bag module seat backrest foam opening. 5. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and closed, the seat side air bag module may not deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Install the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips around the side air bag module and seat backrest frame. 6. Roll the seat backrest trim cover down in position and attach the hook-and-loop strips. 7. Feed the seat backrest trim cover rear J-clip through seat between the seat backrest and seat cushion. 8. Attach the seat backrest trim cover J-clips. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6956 Seats with manual lumbar adjust 9. Install the manual lumbar control knob. All seats 10. Attach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Connect the side air bag module electrical connector and attach it to the seat track. 11. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield and screw. 12. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6960 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6961 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6962 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6963 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6964 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Restraints Control Module (RCM) Removal WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: When installing a new Restraints Control Module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option that is disabled. The RCM and Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) must be configured correctly to fully support 911 assist functionality. 1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6965 2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts. 4. Remove the RCM access cover. - Remove the scrivet. - Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover. 5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector. 1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops. 2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector. 7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM. Installation 1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting to connect the connector. 3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM on an angle can cause bad electrical Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6966 connections and damage components. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM. - NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM) before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt. 4. Connect the RCM electrical connector. - Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place. 5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in. 6. Install the RCM access cover. - Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace. - Install the scrivet. 7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6967 8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module Installation (PMI). 10. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: The Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) indicator is part of the upper instrument panel center finish panel. 1. NOTE: The ignition must be in the OFF position before disconnecting the PAD indicator electrical connector. Otherwise, a DTC will be set in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) memory and must be cleared before releasing the vehicle to the customer. Turn the ignition OFF and wait at least one minute. 2. NOTE: The passenger air bag module is not shown for clarity. Open and lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the PAD indicator electrical connector. - Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector. 3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the instrument panel upper center finish panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6974 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6978 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair Clockspring Removal NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Tilt the steering wheel in the downward position and lock the tilt handle. 4. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the clockspring make sure the road wheels are in the straight-ahead position. Remove the steering wheel. 5. NOTE: The upper steering column shroud is a 2-piece design and must be removed as an assembly. Release the tabs and remove the 2-piece upper steering column shroud as an assembly. 6. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. Then release the tilt column locking lever and remove the lower steering column shroud. 7. Disconnect the clockspring electrical connector. 8. Remove the 2 screws and clockspring. Installation 1. NOTICE: If installing a new clockspring, do not remove the clockspring anti-rotation key until the steering wheel is installed. If the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6979 anti-rotation key has been removed before installing the steering wheel, the clockspring must be centered. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. Install the clockspring and 2 screws. 2. Connect the clockspring electrical connector. 3. Install the lower steering column shroud and 3 screws. 4. Attach the upper steering column shroud to the lower steering column shroud. 5. WARNING: If the clockspring is not correctly centralized, it may fail prematurely. If in doubt, repeat the centralizing procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: Do not over-rotate the clockspring inner rotor. The internal ribbon wire is connected to the clockspring rotor. The internal ribbon wire acts as a stop and can be broken from its internal connection. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has not been removed proceed to Step 7. If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has been removed before the steering wheel is installed or the same clockspring is being installed, rotate the clockspring inner rotor counterclockwise and carefully feel for the ribbon wire to run out of length with slight resistance. Stop rotating the clockspring inner rotor at this point. 6. Starting with the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector in the 12 o'clock position, rotate the inner rotor clockwise through 4 revolutions to center the clockspring. Verify that the clockspring is correctly centered by observing that after 4 revolutions: the clockspring rotor window is in the 4 o'clock position and the yellow indicator shows in the window. - the 2 arrows located on the inner and outer rotor of the clockspring line up in the 6 o'clock position. - the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector are in the 12 o'clock position. 7. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the clockspring, make sure the road wheels are in the 12 o'clock position to install the steering wheel. Install the steering wheel. 8. If a new clockspring was installed, remove the anti-rotation key. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6980 9. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 10. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6985 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6986 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6987 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6988 Impact Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6989 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6990 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6991 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6992 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6993 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6994 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Diagrams Front Impact Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 6997 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 6998 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 6999 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor Front Impact Severity Sensor Removal and Installation WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7002 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar NOTE: RH shown, LH similar. Removal WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor. - Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7003 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Removal WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor. - Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7007 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7011 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7014 Removal NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips. 1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. 4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7015 5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. 6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad. 7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM. 9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly with the bladder. Installation NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7016 Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening. 3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan. 8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. - To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest. 10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector. 2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan. 4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7017 12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset. 14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. 16. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7018 sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7019 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7020 Removal WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)) must be installed as an assembly. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left unplugged and secured by a tie strap. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS. 2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. 4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7021 6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan. 8. Remove the OCS. - Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. Installation NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7022 before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. 3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is not used. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 3. Install the rivets. 4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan. 5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7023 - To aid in installation, recline the seat. 6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose. Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan. 3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside. 5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside. 8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the OCS system reset. 10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. 12. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7024 - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. 13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS. The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company. Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder, OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part OCS only). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7028 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7029 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Seat Position Sensor NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the driver seat. 2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip. Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat position sensor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7034 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7035 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7036 Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7037 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7038 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Restraints Control Module (RCM) Removal WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: When installing a new Restraints Control Module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option that is disabled. The RCM and Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) must be configured correctly to fully support 911 assist functionality. 1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7039 2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts. 4. Remove the RCM access cover. - Remove the scrivet. - Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover. 5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector. 1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops. 2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector. 7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM. Installation 1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting to connect the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7040 3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM on an angle can cause bad electrical connections and damage components. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM. - NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM) before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt. 4. Connect the RCM electrical connector. - Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place. 5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in. 6. Install the RCM access cover. - Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace. - Install the scrivet. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7041 7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws. 8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module Installation (PMI). 10. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7045 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7051 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7052 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition to OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. 8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7053 clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7054 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7055 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7056 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7057 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. - When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7058 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover by releasing the top anchor end of the cover first and rocking the cover off of the anchor bolt end. 2. Remove the bolt and child safety seat tether anchor. - To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 3. WARNING: Always tighten the child safety seat tether anchor/bolt to specification. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the child's safety seat being incorrectly secured, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death to the child in a sudden stop or crash. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7063 To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation Safety Belt System WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog. Safety Belt Buckles Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner The safety belt buckle and pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from the safety belt when deployed. When the pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward, removing excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts. If the vehicle is involved in a crash that results in pretensioner deployment, a new safety belt buckle and pretensioner must be installed. For safety belt buckle and pretensioner diagnosis and disposal information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Second row safety belt buckles The second row safety belt buckles can be serviced separately. After any crash, new safety belt systems components (including retractors and buckles) must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7067 Seat Belt Buckle: Testing and Inspection Safety Belt System Component Test WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification. Functional Test - Safety Belt Buckle and Tongue The safety belt buckle and tongue assembly must operate freely during the latching and unlatching function. Fasten the safety belt by inserting the tongue (male portion) into the buckle (female portion). 1. Verify the following during the latching sequence: - Tongue insertion is not hindered by excessive effort. - A click is heard when the safety belt buckle latches the tongue. 2. Verify the system integrity by forcefully pulling on the safety belt webbing. 3. Unlatch the safety belt by fully depressing the safety belt buckle release button and allowing the safety belt to release and retract. 4. Verify the following during the unlatching process: - Push-button depression does not require excessive effort. - The tongue can be removed easily from the buckle. 5. Repeat the above steps 3 times. 6. If the functional test reveals a concern(s), install a new safety belt buckle or safety belt retractor as required. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Power Seat (Driver Only) Manual Seat NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7070 Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the seat. 2. Remove the screws and inboard seat cushion side shield. 3. Disconnect the 2 safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical connectors. 4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for correct installation. Detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer from the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 5. For the driver seat, remove the seat position sensor wiring harness tie strap from the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 6. Detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track and detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. 7. Remove the bolt and safety belt buckle and pretensioner. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7071 9. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7072 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Rear Safety Belt Buckle - Rear Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. NOTE: To access the center and passenger side rear safety belt buckles, pivot the rear seat cushion forward and the rear seat backrest rearward. Remove the bolt and rear center and RH safety belt buckle assembly. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 2. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 3. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 7077 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 7080 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed, install new D-ring cover and bolt. Remove the D-ring cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the bottom. 2. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7084 3. Lower the height adjuster and remove the upper bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Raise the height adjuster and remove the lower bolt and height adjuster. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Service and Repair Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating Preparation 1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R). 2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual transaxle). 3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 4. Close all the vehicle doors. 5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts. Deactivating/Activating NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position. 1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute). 3. NOTE: Steps 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns off. For seating position being disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3 times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state. - After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds. 4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. - This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds. - This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds. 5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating Preparation 1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R). 2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual transaxle). 3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 4. Close all the vehicle doors. 5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts. Deactivating/Activating NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position. 1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute). 3. NOTE: Steps 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns off. For seating position being disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3 times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state. - After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds. 4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. - This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds. - This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds. 5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation Safety Belt System WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog. Safety Belt Retractors - Safety belt retractors with pretensioners (front only) - Dual locking mode Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) - Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) (all except driver seat) - BTS (front passenger only) Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) The ALR mode is used when locking a child seat in an outboard seating position. The ALR mode is automatically activated when the safety belt webbing is fully extracted from the retractor and then allowed to retract. As the safety belt webbing is retracted back onto the spool, an audible clicking sound is made indicating the safety belt retractor is in ALR mode and the safety belt webbing will not pull back out of the safety belt retractor. To disengage the ALR mode, allow the safety belt webbing to fully retract back onto the spool. For testing, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) The ELR is a vehicle-sensitive feature designed to activate and lock the safety belt webbing during braking hard, cornering hard or in an impact of approximately 24 km/h (15 mph). The ELR feature helps to reduce the forward movement of the driver and passengers. For testing, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor Safety Belt System Component Test WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification. Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor The safety belt retractor must be freely operational for extraction and retraction of the safety belt webbing between full extension and in-vehicle stowed positions. 1. Extract and retract the safety belt between the full extension and stowed positions. 2. Verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding. 3. Install a new safety belt retractor if any concern is found or the complaint has been verified. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7096 Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode Safety Belt System Component Test WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification. Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode 1. Position the seat backrest fully upright (if adjustable). 2. Position the safety belt shoulder height adjuster (if equipped) in the full down or up position. 3. Fasten the safety belt. 4. Pull out the safety belt webbing until the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature is activated. 5. Allow the safety belt webbing to retract until it stops. 6. Pull on the safety belt webbing to check that the safety belt retractor has remained in the ALR mode. If the safety belt retractor is not locked, install a new safety belt retractor. 7. Unfasten the safety belt and allow the safety belt webbing to retract to its stowed position. 8. Pull out and retract the safety belt webbing to verify the safety belt retractor has converted automatically out of ALR mode. If the safety belt retractor remains locked in the ALR mode, install a new safety belt retractor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7097 Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Road Test Inspection Safety Belt System Component Test WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification. Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Road Test Inspection WARNING: The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the safety belt retractor does not lock. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Make sure there is no excessive slack in the safety belt webbing across the torso during testing. NOTE: Do not jerk on the safety belt webbing when carrying out this test. 1. Test the safety belts in the following sequence: 1. Fasten the safety belts and proceed to a safe area. 2. Attain a speed of 24 km/h (15 mph). 3. WARNING: Apply maximum brake force only on dry concrete or equivalent hard surface, NEVER on wet pavement or gravel. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Grasp the shoulder harness, lean forward and apply the brakes, making a maximum braking application without a skid. 4. The safety belts should lock up with minimum webbing extension. 5. If there is a lockup of all safety belt retractors being tested, the safety belt retractors are functioning correctly. If any safety belt retractor fails to lock up, install a new safety belt retractor(s). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor Safety Belt Retractor NOTE: Passenger side shown, driver similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7100 belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures portion of Air Bag Systems. 2. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed, install a new D-ring cover and bolt. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the bottom. 3. Remove the bolt and D-ring. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. 5. For passenger retractor, disconnect the Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) electrical connector. 6. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 7. Remove the bolt and safety belt retractor. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 8. Disconnect the pretensioner electrical connector. 9. Unhook and remove the safety belt retractor. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 11. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures portion of Air Bag Systems. 12. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7101 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7102 - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. Remove the 60 percent seat backrest. 2. Remove the head restraints. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the latch cover. 4. Remove the 2 seat latch release lever screws. 5. Remove the seat latch release lever. 1. Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release lever. - To aid installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before connecting the latch rod. 2. Remove the seat latch release lever. 6. Remove the 2 screws and safety belt shield. 7. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip. 8. Unzip the backrest trim cover zipper. 9. NOTE: The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable. NOTE: The head restraint guides incorporate an alignment tab that must be aligned correctly when installed. Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint guide and pull the 4 guides out of the frame tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7103 10. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam pad. Separate the hook-and-loop fasteners and remove the seat backrest trim cover. 11. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame. 12. Release the seat latch cable from the retractor. 13. Remove the 2 nuts and safety belt guide. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 14. Remove the nut and safety belt retractor. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 15. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 16. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7104 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear Safety Belt Retractor - Rear NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the cover and D-ring bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Remove the bolt and rear safety belt retractor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7105 - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation Safety Belt System WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog. Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 7113 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 7114 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 7115 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 7116 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7117 Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Safety Belt System WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog. Safety Belt Retractors - Safety belt retractors with pretensioners (front only) - Dual locking mode Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) - Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) (all except driver seat) - BTS (front passenger only) Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) The ALR mode is used when locking a child seat in an outboard seating position. The ALR mode is automatically activated when the safety belt webbing is fully extracted from the retractor and then allowed to retract. As the safety belt webbing is retracted back onto the spool, an audible clicking sound is made indicating the safety belt retractor is in ALR mode and the safety belt webbing will not pull back out of the safety belt retractor. To disengage the ALR mode, allow the safety belt webbing to fully retract back onto the spool. For testing, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) The ELR is a vehicle-sensitive feature designed to activate and lock the safety belt webbing during braking hard, cornering hard or in an impact of approximately 24 km/h (15 mph). The ELR feature helps to reduce the forward movement of the driver and passengers. For testing, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7122 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7127 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7128 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7129 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7130 Impact Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7131 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7132 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7133 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7134 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7135 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7136 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Diagrams Front Impact Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7139 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7140 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7141 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor Front Impact Severity Sensor Removal and Installation WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7144 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar NOTE: RH shown, LH similar. Removal WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor. - Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7145 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Removal WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor. - Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 7150 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 7153 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation Safety Belt System WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog. Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7160 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7163 Removal NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips. 1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. 4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7164 5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. 6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad. 7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM. 9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly with the bladder. Installation NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7165 Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening. 3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan. 8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. - To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest. 10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector. 2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan. 4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7166 12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset. 14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. 16. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7167 sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7168 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7169 Removal WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)) must be installed as an assembly. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left unplugged and secured by a tie strap. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS. 2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. 4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7170 6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan. 8. Remove the OCS. - Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. Installation NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7171 before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. 3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is not used. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 3. Install the rivets. 4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan. 5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7172 - To aid in installation, recline the seat. 6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose. Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan. 3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside. 5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside. 8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the OCS system reset. 10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. 12. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7173 - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. 13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS. The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company. Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder, OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part OCS only). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7177 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7178 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Seat Position Sensor NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the driver seat. 2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip. Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat position sensor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Control Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Accessory Control Display: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio Time Displays Twice In CD Mode Accessory Control Display: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode TSB 09-11-9 06/15/09 NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on. ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19C116 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Control Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accessory Control Display: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode Accessory Control Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode TSB 09-11-9 06/15/09 NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on. ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19C116 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7197 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7198 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - AM/FM Antenna Cable - AM/FM NOTE: View shown from behind instrument panel for clarity. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Audio Control Module (ACM) See: Cellular Phone/Communications Control Module/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Audio Control Module (ACM). 2. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna cable from the AM/FM antenna. 3. NOTE: Lower the glove compartment completely to access the pin-type retainers. Release the AM/FM antenna cable pin-type retainers. 4. Remove the AM/FM antenna cable. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM > Page 7205 Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio Removal and Installation NOTE: This procedure applies to the vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, a new satellite radio antenna must be laid over the harness and secured. 1. Remove the RH A-pillar trim panel. 2. Remove the RH sun visor. 3. Lower the front of the headliner enough to gain access to the satellite radio antenna electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the satellite radio antenna electrical connector. 5. Remove the satellite radio antenna. - Disconnect the satellite radio antenna cable-to-Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM > Page 7206 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair Alarm System Transmitter: Service and Repair Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Transceiver Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening cover. 2. Remove the 3 screws and the lower steering column shroud. 3. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. NOTE: Replacement of the PATS transceiver does not require the PATS keys to be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) again. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Page 7214 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 7219 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 7220 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Keypad Code Programming Programming a Personal Code NOTE: Up to 3 personal codes can be programmed. Once there are 3 personal programmed codes, any attempt to program additional codes will be unsuccessful. 1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad. 3. Enter the new 5-digit personal keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within 5 seconds of each other. 4. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm the new code is programmed. Erasing the Personal Codes 1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release. 3. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button on the keypad for 2 seconds. 4. All personal codes are now erased and only the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code will work. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 7221 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair Keyless Entry Keypad Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the keypad retaining clip. 4. Remove the keypad from the door. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming NOTE: This procedure is for programming conventional keyfobs only. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) is programmed automatically during the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming. For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment in Antitheft and Alarm Systems to program the IKT. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: All RKE transmitters must be programmed at the same time. NOTE: Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and the transmitters will not be programmed. 1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10 seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN. If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors. 3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the programming sequence ends (the doors lock and unlock to confirm that programming is complete). Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each RKE transmitter. 4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs: - The key transitions to the OFF position - 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was programmed - The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed 5. Check the operation of the RKE transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed RKE transmitter(s), wait several seconds and press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Locks, Latches and Entry Systems See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection. (Make sure that no more than the maximum number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be programmed.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7226 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position. 3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. 6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle the autolock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the autolock feature has been enabled. 9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to indicate the procedure is complete. Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped) 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button. 5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled. Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped) 1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position. 3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7227 Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. 6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle the auto-unlock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled. 9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to indicate the procedure is complete. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped) 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button 2 times. 5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped) 1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or OFF. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7228 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming Programming the Perimeter Lighting Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch NOTE: The following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the procedure will need to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait 30 seconds between programming sessions. 1. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position. 2. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times. 3. Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the OFF position. 4. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The horn chirps one time to indicate that programming mode is entered. 6. NOTE: The unlock button must be pressed twice within 5 seconds. Within 30 seconds of entering the programming mode, press the unlock button on the door lock control switch twice to enable/disable the perimeter lighting feature. The horn chirps once if the perimeter lighting is disabled or a chirp followed by a honk if the perimeter lighting is enabled. 7. Programming ends when the ignition switch state changes or times out after 2 minutes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7229 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming Stepped Unlock Programming 1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter simultaneously for 4 seconds. The turn signals flash twice to indicate the mode change. 2. Repeat Step 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality Technical Service Bulletin # 10-25-12 Date: 101223 SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality TSB 10-25-12 12/23/10 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2011 Focus 2008-2010 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009-2010 F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex 2009-2011 Escape, Expedition LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009-2011 MKS 2008-2010 MKX 2009-2011 Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable 2008-2010 Mountaineer 2009-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-8-4 to update the vehicle model years, Service Procedure and the Part List. The new SYNC service Microphone kit now includes a voltage filter incorporated into the jumper harness. ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2011 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102512 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Service Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7239 The following procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH HEADLINER MICROPHONE OR DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Go to Step 2 if the vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 3.0 Traffic and Directions or has already been upgraded to latest available consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE without E911/VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later versions. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-1 4D544-AE without E9 11 /VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later version. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. The jumper harness is equipped with a voltage filter. The filter will need to be wrapped in soft foam 164-R4901 or flock tape 164-R4903 from the Rotunda squeak and rattle kit 164-R4900 to prevent interior squeak/rattle noise. a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place the microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7240 ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C210. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Escape / Mariner 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7241 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD182 from C214. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD1 82. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Navigator / Expedition 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07, RMNO7 and DMN07 (shield) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17C712 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C298. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7242 ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO7, RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield) from C248 (Sport Trac uses C260). Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBPO5 and GD143 from C248. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBPO5 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD143. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. F-150 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 from C315 and GD133 from C314. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7243 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. F-Super Duty 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C264. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Flex Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7244 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Focus 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 10) Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the interior lamp trim. 2. Lower the interior lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7245 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install interior lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the interior lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CPL6O and GD161 from C934. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CPL6O and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD161. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Fusion / Milan / MKZ 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBPO2 and GD139 from C913. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBPO2 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD139. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Taurus / Sable / Taurus X Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7246 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMN02 and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMN02 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps. MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7247 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMNO2 and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C911 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM Section 417-01 for additional information. These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO2 and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMNO2 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C911. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps. Final Test / Service Steps 1. After splicing/soldering is complete, apply power to the vehicle and confirm the voltage at the jumper inline connector before connecting the microphone. ^ Jumper blue wire equal 12V positive. ^ Jumper black wire equal ground reference. ^ Jumper yellow wire equal microphone return signal circuit less than IV. 2. Turn off ignition and attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. Make sure that the connector tabs have locked together after connecting. Reversing this connector would cause a failure of the microphone. 3. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality Cellular Phone Microphone: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality TSB 09-13-5 07/13/09 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7252 a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. 2008-2009 Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 Escape / Mariner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7253 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7254 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the male side of the connector (17C712 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2009 Expedition/Navigator only). 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only. ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7255 ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 F-150 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7256 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2009 F-Super Duty Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7257 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 Flex Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7258 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Focus Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7259 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim. 2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7260 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7261 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional information. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7262 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector (mirror) are no longer used. ^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 7268 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality Technical Service Bulletin # 10-25-12 Date: 101223 SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality TSB 10-25-12 12/23/10 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2011 Focus 2008-2010 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009-2010 F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex 2009-2011 Escape, Expedition LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009-2011 MKS 2008-2010 MKX 2009-2011 Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable 2008-2010 Mountaineer 2009-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-8-4 to update the vehicle model years, Service Procedure and the Part List. The new SYNC service Microphone kit now includes a voltage filter incorporated into the jumper harness. ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2011 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102512 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Service Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7278 The following procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH HEADLINER MICROPHONE OR DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Go to Step 2 if the vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 3.0 Traffic and Directions or has already been upgraded to latest available consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE without E911/VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later versions. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-1 4D544-AE without E9 11 /VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later version. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. The jumper harness is equipped with a voltage filter. The filter will need to be wrapped in soft foam 164-R4901 or flock tape 164-R4903 from the Rotunda squeak and rattle kit 164-R4900 to prevent interior squeak/rattle noise. a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place the microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7279 ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C210. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Escape / Mariner 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7280 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD182 from C214. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD1 82. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Navigator / Expedition 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07, RMNO7 and DMN07 (shield) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17C712 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C298. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7281 ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO7, RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield) from C248 (Sport Trac uses C260). Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBPO5 and GD143 from C248. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBPO5 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD143. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. F-150 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 from C315 and GD133 from C314. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7282 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. F-Super Duty 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C264. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Flex Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7283 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Focus 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 10) Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the interior lamp trim. 2. Lower the interior lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7284 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install interior lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the interior lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CPL6O and GD161 from C934. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CPL6O and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD161. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Fusion / Milan / MKZ 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBPO2 and GD139 from C913. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBPO2 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD139. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Taurus / Sable / Taurus X Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7285 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMN02 and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMN02 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps. MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7286 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMNO2 and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C911 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM Section 417-01 for additional information. These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO2 and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMNO2 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C911. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps. Final Test / Service Steps 1. After splicing/soldering is complete, apply power to the vehicle and confirm the voltage at the jumper inline connector before connecting the microphone. ^ Jumper blue wire equal 12V positive. ^ Jumper black wire equal ground reference. ^ Jumper yellow wire equal microphone return signal circuit less than IV. 2. Turn off ignition and attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. Make sure that the connector tabs have locked together after connecting. Reversing this connector would cause a failure of the microphone. 3. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality Cellular Phone Microphone: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality TSB 09-13-5 07/13/09 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7291 a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. 2008-2009 Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 Escape / Mariner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7292 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7293 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the male side of the connector (17C712 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2009 Expedition/Navigator only). 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only. ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7294 ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 F-150 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7295 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2009 F-Super Duty Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7296 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 Flex Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7297 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Focus Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7298 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim. 2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7299 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7300 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional information. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7301 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector (mirror) are no longer used. ^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality Technical Service Bulletin # 10-25-12 Date: 101223 SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality TSB 10-25-12 12/23/10 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2011 Focus 2008-2010 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009-2010 F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex 2009-2011 Escape, Expedition LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009-2011 MKS 2008-2010 MKX 2009-2011 Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable 2008-2010 Mountaineer 2009-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-8-4 to update the vehicle model years, Service Procedure and the Part List. The new SYNC service Microphone kit now includes a voltage filter incorporated into the jumper harness. ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2011 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102512 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Service Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7307 The following procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH HEADLINER MICROPHONE OR DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Go to Step 2 if the vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 3.0 Traffic and Directions or has already been upgraded to latest available consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE without E911/VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later versions. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-1 4D544-AE without E9 11 /VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later version. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. The jumper harness is equipped with a voltage filter. The filter will need to be wrapped in soft foam 164-R4901 or flock tape 164-R4903 from the Rotunda squeak and rattle kit 164-R4900 to prevent interior squeak/rattle noise. a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place the microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7308 ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C210. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Escape / Mariner 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7309 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD182 from C214. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD1 82. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Navigator / Expedition 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07, RMNO7 and DMN07 (shield) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17C712 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C298. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7310 ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO7, RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield) from C248 (Sport Trac uses C260). Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBPO5 and GD143 from C248. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBPO5 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD143. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. F-150 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 from C315 and GD133 from C314. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7311 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. F-Super Duty 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C264. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Flex Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7312 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Focus 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 10) Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the interior lamp trim. 2. Lower the interior lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7313 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install interior lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the interior lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CPL6O and GD161 from C934. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CPL6O and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD161. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Fusion / Milan / MKZ 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBPO2 and GD139 from C913. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBPO2 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD139. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Taurus / Sable / Taurus X Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7314 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMN02 and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMN02 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps. MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7315 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMNO2 and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C911 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM Section 417-01 for additional information. These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO2 and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMNO2 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C911. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps. Final Test / Service Steps 1. After splicing/soldering is complete, apply power to the vehicle and confirm the voltage at the jumper inline connector before connecting the microphone. ^ Jumper blue wire equal 12V positive. ^ Jumper black wire equal ground reference. ^ Jumper yellow wire equal microphone return signal circuit less than IV. 2. Turn off ignition and attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. Make sure that the connector tabs have locked together after connecting. Reversing this connector would cause a failure of the microphone. 3. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 7324 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7337 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7338 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set TSB 09-14-3 07/27/09 SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) ^ SYNC display menus/options blank ^ USB port inoperative ^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity ^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative ^ Lack of APIM communication ^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery disconnect/reconnect. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels: ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7343 button and select the SYNC button. 1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS. a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2. b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3. 2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if communication can be established. If not, perform an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery. a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3. b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM. 3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure. NOTE SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. NOTE CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID AND PASSWORD. a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. c. Turn the ignition key to the on position. d. Launch IDS tool. e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. f. Close the IDS tool. g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. i. Press read APIM button. j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. k. Program the processor in the APIM. l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port. m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7344 n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7354 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7355 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set TSB 09-14-3 07/27/09 SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) ^ SYNC display menus/options blank ^ USB port inoperative ^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity ^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative ^ Lack of APIM communication ^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery disconnect/reconnect. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels: ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7360 button and select the SYNC button. 1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS. a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2. b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3. 2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if communication can be established. If not, perform an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery. a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3. b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM. 3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure. NOTE SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. NOTE CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID AND PASSWORD. a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. c. Turn the ignition key to the on position. d. Launch IDS tool. e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. f. Close the IDS tool. g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. i. Press read APIM button. j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. k. Program the processor in the APIM. l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port. m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7361 n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 7367 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 7373 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7374 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7377 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7378 Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM) C240A Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7379 C240A Part 2 C240B Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7380 C240C Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Communications Control Module: Procedures Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool. 4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port. 5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). 6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet. 7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level. - The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels. 8. The scan tool displays the following information: - Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM - Installed date: date the APIM was installed - Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle - HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number - Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled - S/N: APIM serial number - Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation - VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time - CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7383 - Description: a description of the content of the software revision - History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation - VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time - CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time - Description: a description of the content of the software revision - Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected - Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision - VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection - CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection - Description: a description of the content of the software revision 9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software level, if desired. 10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB port, or exit the OASIS screen. Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode Audio Systems Without Navigation 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode. 3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins. - The display indicates each speaker as it is tested. 4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after step 3 by turning the ACM off. Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7384 5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off. Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval - Vehicles Without Navigation 1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode. 2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously. - The Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) displays on the screen. 3. Record the SDARS module ESN. 4. Turn the audio system off. Navigation Audio System 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode. 3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins. - The display indicates each speaker as it is tested. 4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to complete on its own. Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7385 5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu: 6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7386 Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement Audio Control Module (ACM) Audio Control Module (ACM) All Except Navigation Navigation Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7387 Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool. 2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel. 3. Remove the 4 ACM screws. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation). - To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation). Navigation 4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors. All except navigation 5. If equipped, remove the 4 screws and the ACM side support brackets. 6. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM. Remove the 2 ACM brackets. All vehicles 7. Remove the ACM. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the ACM. Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software and hardware level when a new APIM is being installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being replaced. Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7388 2. Remove the floor console. 3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical connector. 4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM. - Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port Floor Console Trim Panels Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port and Cable Removal and Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7389 NOTE: The original equipment Universal Serial Bus (USB) port and cable is part of the wiring harness. It can only be serviced by overlaying a new USB port and cable. 1. Remove the transmission selector level bezel by pulling straight up. 2. NOTE: Open the floor console storage bin door. Remove the floor console finish panel by pulling straight up. - Disconnect the electrical connector, if necessary. 3. Remove the center instrument panel lower panel by pulling straight back. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the USB cable and port. - Disconnect the cable from the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). - Cut the USB port and cable ends and secure them to prevent NVH concerns. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Secure the new USB port and cable, as necessary, to prevent NVH concerns. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7394 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7395 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Parking Aid Module (PAM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being installed. Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool. 2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows: - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Disengage the clips. - Remove the parking aid speaker. 4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows: - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Remove the 2 screws. - Remove the PAM. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the PAM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7400 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7401 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7402 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7405 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7406 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7407 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7408 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Parking Aid Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear bumper cover removal for access. Remove the rear bumper cover. 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s). - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7412 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7413 Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair Parking Aid Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 7420 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Reset Procedure Oil Life Reset Message Center Configuration Oil Life Reset NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%. Oil Life Start Value Message Center Configuration Oil Life Start Value NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %. 3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence over again beginning at 100%. Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center displays the newly desired percent. 4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure > Page 7423 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement Message Center Switch Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel. Hybrid vehicles 2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside. All vehicles 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set TSB 09-14-3 07/27/09 SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) ^ SYNC display menus/options blank ^ USB port inoperative ^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity ^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative ^ Lack of APIM communication ^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery disconnect/reconnect. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels: ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7432 button and select the SYNC button. 1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS. a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2. b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3. 2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if communication can be established. If not, perform an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery. a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3. b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM. 3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure. NOTE SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. NOTE CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID AND PASSWORD. a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. c. Turn the ignition key to the on position. d. Launch IDS tool. e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. f. Close the IDS tool. g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. i. Press read APIM button. j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. k. Program the processor in the APIM. l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port. m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7433 n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality TSB 09-13-5 07/13/09 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7438 a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. 2008-2009 Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 Escape / Mariner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7439 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7440 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the male side of the connector (17C712 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2009 Expedition/Navigator only). 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only. ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7441 ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 F-150 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7442 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2009 F-Super Duty Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7443 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 Flex Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7444 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Focus Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7445 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim. 2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7446 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7447 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional information. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7448 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector (mirror) are no longer used. ^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set TSB 09-14-3 07/27/09 SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) ^ SYNC display menus/options blank ^ USB port inoperative ^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity ^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative ^ Lack of APIM communication ^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery disconnect/reconnect. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels: ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7454 button and select the SYNC button. 1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS. a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2. b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3. 2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if communication can be established. If not, perform an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery. a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3. b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM. 3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure. NOTE SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. NOTE CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID AND PASSWORD. a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. c. Turn the ignition key to the on position. d. Launch IDS tool. e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. f. Close the IDS tool. g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. i. Press read APIM button. j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. k. Program the processor in the APIM. l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port. m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7455 n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality TSB 09-13-5 07/13/09 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7460 a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. 2008-2009 Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 Escape / Mariner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7461 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7462 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the male side of the connector (17C712 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2009 Expedition/Navigator only). 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only. ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7463 ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 F-150 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7464 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2009 F-Super Duty Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7465 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 Flex Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7466 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Focus Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7467 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim. 2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7468 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7469 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional information. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7470 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector (mirror) are no longer used. ^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade TSB 09-11-8 06/15/09 SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE SOFTWARE FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date. ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911 assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS) website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates: ^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009 ^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009 ^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008 ^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008 ^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report features and do not require updating. To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC 911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded. The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM). The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles operated within the US and Canada. Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure proper functionality before continuing. Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the latest software version. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 7475 For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website. 1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete. 2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. 4. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session. 6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher. 7. Close the IDS tool. 8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the go button. 9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab. 10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR. 11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM. NOTE TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON THE SYNC MENU. 12. Set ignition to off. 13. Open and close driver side door. 14. Set ignition to on. 15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu. 16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows. 17. Clear all DTC's on all modules. 18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator vehicles. Navigation Radio Instructions 911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation. 1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu. 2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display. 3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display. 4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display. 5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display. Non Navigation Radio Instructions 911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation. 1. Press phone button on steering wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 7476 2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok. 3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok. 4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed. Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if that application is desired. NOTE IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911 ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7482 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7483 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7489 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7490 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7495 Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Service and Repair Audio Input Jack Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Pull straight back to disengage the clips. Remove the instrument panel lower panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector(s). 2. Release the tabs and remove the audio input jack. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode Entertainment System Control Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode TSB 09-11-9 06/15/09 NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on. ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19C116 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode Entertainment System Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode TSB 09-11-9 06/15/09 NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on. ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19C116 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) is being installed. Upload the FDIM configuration information to the scan tool. 2. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel by pulling straight back. 3. Remove the 4 FDIM screws. 4. Remove the FDIM. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the FDIM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) > Page 7513 Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) Removal and Installation NOTE: If the Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) is being replaced, it must be replaced as an assembly with the middle center instrument panel center finish panel. However, the middle center instrument panel center finish panel can be replaced individually if the FCIM does not need to be replaced. 1. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Audio Control Module (ACM) See: Cellular Phone/Communications Control Module/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Audio Control Module (ACM). 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7523 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7524 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7530 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7531 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Navigation Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7541 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7542 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7548 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7549 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) Clutch Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only) TSB 09-18-4 MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2009 Escape ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs. clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7B546 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Audio Amplifier Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Audio Amplifier > Page 7565 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7568 Amplifier: Diagrams Audio Amplifier Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7569 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Subwoofer Amplifier Amplifier: Service and Repair Subwoofer Amplifier Subwoofer Amplifier Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 3. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector. 4. Remove the 4 screws and the subwoofer amplifier. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7572 Amplifier: Service and Repair Audio Amplifier Audio Amplifier Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the audio amplifier electrical connectors. 2. NOTE: Move the passenger seat all the way back to access. Remove the 2 nuts, the bolt, and the audio amplifier. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7576 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7577 Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Removal and Installation NOTE: This procedure applies to vehicles without navigation only. For vehicle with navigation, the satellite radio receiver is built-in to the Audio Control Module (ACM). 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module is being installed. Upload the SDARS module configuration information to the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the SDARS module antenna cable and electrical connectors. 3. NOTE: Move the passenger seat all the way back to access. Remove the 2 nuts, the bolt, and the SDARS module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the SDARS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair Remote Control: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Controls Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the driver air bag module during this procedure. Using a suitable tool, pry the steering wheel controls out of the steering wheel. 2. NOTE: Do not allow the electrical connector to fall back into the steering wheel. Remove the steering wheel controls. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7585 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7586 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7587 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker Speaker: Service and Repair Door Speaker Door Speaker NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 screws and the door speaker. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker > Page 7590 Speaker: Service and Repair Subwoofer Speaker Subwoofer Speaker Removal and Installation NOTE: The subwoofer speaker, amplifier, and enclosure and only replaced as a complete assembly. 1. Remove the RH quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector. 3. Remove the 3 bolts and the subwoofer speaker. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7596 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7597 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7610 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7611 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set TSB 09-14-3 07/27/09 SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) ^ SYNC display menus/options blank ^ USB port inoperative ^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity ^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative ^ Lack of APIM communication ^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery disconnect/reconnect. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels: ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7616 button and select the SYNC button. 1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS. a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2. b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3. 2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if communication can be established. If not, perform an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery. a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3. b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM. 3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure. NOTE SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. NOTE CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID AND PASSWORD. a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. c. Turn the ignition key to the on position. d. Launch IDS tool. e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. f. Close the IDS tool. g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. i. Press read APIM button. j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. k. Program the processor in the APIM. l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port. m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7617 n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7627 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7628 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set TSB 09-14-3 07/27/09 SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) ^ SYNC display menus/options blank ^ USB port inoperative ^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity ^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative ^ Lack of APIM communication ^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery disconnect/reconnect. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels: ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7633 button and select the SYNC button. 1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS. a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2. b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3. 2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if communication can be established. If not, perform an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery. a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3. b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM. 3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure. NOTE SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. NOTE CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID AND PASSWORD. a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. c. Turn the ignition key to the on position. d. Launch IDS tool. e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. f. Close the IDS tool. g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. i. Press read APIM button. j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. k. Program the processor in the APIM. l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port. m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7634 n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts TSB 09-19-5 10/05/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E (SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is: a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14. b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps. 2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs. Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 7648 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 12A650 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts TSB 09-18-3 09/21/09 6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009 and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr. 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 7666 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 12A650 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7671 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7674 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7675 Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM) C240A Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7676 C240A Part 2 C240B Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7677 C240C Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Communications Control Module: Procedures Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool. 4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port. 5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). 6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet. 7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level. - The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels. 8. The scan tool displays the following information: - Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM - Installed date: date the APIM was installed - Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle - HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number - Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled - S/N: APIM serial number - Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation - VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time - CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7680 - Description: a description of the content of the software revision - History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation - VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time - CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time - Description: a description of the content of the software revision - Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected - Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision - VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection - CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection - Description: a description of the content of the software revision 9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software level, if desired. 10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB port, or exit the OASIS screen. Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode Audio Systems Without Navigation 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode. 3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins. - The display indicates each speaker as it is tested. 4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after step 3 by turning the ACM off. Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7681 5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off. Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval - Vehicles Without Navigation 1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode. 2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously. - The Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) displays on the screen. 3. Record the SDARS module ESN. 4. Turn the audio system off. Navigation Audio System 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode. 3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins. - The display indicates each speaker as it is tested. 4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to complete on its own. Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7682 5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu: 6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7683 Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement Audio Control Module (ACM) Audio Control Module (ACM) All Except Navigation Navigation Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7684 Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool. 2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel. 3. Remove the 4 ACM screws. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation). - To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation). Navigation 4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors. All except navigation 5. If equipped, remove the 4 screws and the ACM side support brackets. 6. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM. Remove the 2 ACM brackets. All vehicles 7. Remove the ACM. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the ACM. Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software and hardware level when a new APIM is being installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being replaced. Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7685 2. Remove the floor console. 3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical connector. 4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM. - Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port Floor Console Trim Panels Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port and Cable Removal and Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7686 NOTE: The original equipment Universal Serial Bus (USB) port and cable is part of the wiring harness. It can only be serviced by overlaying a new USB port and cable. 1. Remove the transmission selector level bezel by pulling straight up. 2. NOTE: Open the floor console storage bin door. Remove the floor console finish panel by pulling straight up. - Disconnect the electrical connector, if necessary. 3. Remove the center instrument panel lower panel by pulling straight back. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the USB cable and port. - Disconnect the cable from the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). - Cut the USB port and cable ends and secure them to prevent NVH concerns. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Secure the new USB port and cable, as necessary, to prevent NVH concerns. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set TSB 09-14-3 07/27/09 SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) ^ SYNC display menus/options blank ^ USB port inoperative ^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity ^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative ^ Lack of APIM communication ^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery disconnect/reconnect. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels: ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7695 button and select the SYNC button. 1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS. a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2. b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3. 2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if communication can be established. If not, perform an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery. a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3. b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM. 3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure. NOTE SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. NOTE CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID AND PASSWORD. a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. c. Turn the ignition key to the on position. d. Launch IDS tool. e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. f. Close the IDS tool. g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. i. Press read APIM button. j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. k. Program the processor in the APIM. l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port. m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7696 n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality TSB 09-13-5 07/13/09 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7701 a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. 2008-2009 Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 Escape / Mariner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7702 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7703 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the male side of the connector (17C712 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2009 Expedition/Navigator only). 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only. ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7704 ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 F-150 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7705 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2009 F-Super Duty Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7706 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 Flex Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7707 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Focus Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7708 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim. 2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7709 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7710 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional information. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7711 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector (mirror) are no longer used. ^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set TSB 09-14-3 07/27/09 SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) ^ SYNC display menus/options blank ^ USB port inoperative ^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity ^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative ^ Lack of APIM communication ^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery disconnect/reconnect. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels: ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD ^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7717 button and select the SYNC button. 1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS. a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2. b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3. 2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if communication can be established. If not, perform an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery. a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3. b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM. 3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure. NOTE SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE. NOTE CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID AND PASSWORD. a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. c. Turn the ignition key to the on position. d. Launch IDS tool. e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. f. Close the IDS tool. g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. i. Press read APIM button. j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. k. Program the processor in the APIM. l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port. m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7718 n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality TSB 09-13-5 07/13/09 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7723 a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. 2008-2009 Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 Escape / Mariner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7724 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7725 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the male side of the connector (17C712 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2009 Expedition/Navigator only). 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only. ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7726 ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07 (VT) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2009 F-150 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7727 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner. 2009 F-Super Duty Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7728 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 Flex Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7729 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Focus Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7730 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim. 2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7731 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7732 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925. 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the other cut wire ends as they are no longer used. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. 2009 MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional information. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7733 8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits: ^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK). ^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice. ^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield). ^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector (mirror) are no longer used. ^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner. 9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. 10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade TSB 09-11-8 06/15/09 SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE SOFTWARE FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date. ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911 assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS) website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates: ^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009 ^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009 ^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008 ^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008 ^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report features and do not require updating. To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC 911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded. The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM). The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles operated within the US and Canada. Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure proper functionality before continuing. Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the latest software version. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 7738 For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website. 1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete. 2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. 4. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session. 6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher. 7. Close the IDS tool. 8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the go button. 9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab. 10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR. 11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM. NOTE TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON THE SYNC MENU. 12. Set ignition to off. 13. Open and close driver side door. 14. Set ignition to on. 15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu. 16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows. 17. Clear all DTC's on all modules. 18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator vehicles. Navigation Radio Instructions 911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation. 1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu. 2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display. 3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display. 4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display. 5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display. Non Navigation Radio Instructions 911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation. 1. Press phone button on steering wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 7739 2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok. 3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok. 4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed. Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if that application is desired. NOTE IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911 ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade TSB 09-11-8 06/15/09 SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE SOFTWARE FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date. ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911 assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS) website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software. SERVICE PROCEDURE This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates: ^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009 ^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009 ^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008 ^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008 ^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report features and do not require updating. To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC 911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded. The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM). The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles operated within the US and Canada. Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure proper functionality before continuing. Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the latest software version. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 7745 For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website. 1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete. 2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software. 4. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session. 6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher. 7. Close the IDS tool. 8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the go button. 9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab. 10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR. 11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM. NOTE TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON THE SYNC MENU. 12. Set ignition to off. 13. Open and close driver side door. 14. Set ignition to on. 15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu. 16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows. 17. Clear all DTC's on all modules. 18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator vehicles. Navigation Radio Instructions 911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation. 1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu. 2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display. 3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display. 4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display. 5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display. Non Navigation Radio Instructions 911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation. 1. Press phone button on steering wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 7746 2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok. 3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok. 4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed. Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if that application is desired. NOTE IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911 ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode Entertainment System Control Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode TSB 09-11-9 06/15/09 NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on. ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19C116 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode Entertainment System Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode TSB 09-11-9 06/15/09 NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on. ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19C116 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7768 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7769 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7775 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7776 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Navigation Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7785 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7786 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns TSB 09-26-8 01/04/10 SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: ^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative. ^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices. ^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands. ^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality. ^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace processor (CIP) software levels. ^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) ^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report) Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. Reprogram the APIM Contains software fix updates for the following: ^ Phone book auto download inoperative. ^ USB audio muting. ^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative. ^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7792 ^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342. ^ Poor call sound quality. This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media players and the playing of file formats and podcasts. NOTE REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS. 1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software. 3. Turn the ignition key to the on position. 4. Launch IDS tool. 5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software. 6. Close the IDS tool. 7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle communication is established, press the GO button. 8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button. 9. Press read APIM button. 10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module. NOTE YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP. NOTE DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING. NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP. 11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP). NOTE DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE. a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and to the vehicle USB port. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and CIP). 12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been completed successfully screen will be displayed. 13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7793 Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus, Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft Coupler: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 7799 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 7805 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7809 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7810 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Parking Aid Module (PAM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being installed. Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool. 2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows: - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Disengage the clips. - Remove the parking aid speaker. 4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows: - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Remove the 2 screws. - Remove the PAM. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the PAM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7816 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7817 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7818 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7821 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7822 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7823 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7824 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Parking Aid Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear bumper cover removal for access. Remove the rear bumper cover. 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s). - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7828 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7829 Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair Parking Aid Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement Technical Service Bulletin # 10L06 Date: 100419 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED Yes, OASIS will only be activated on stock vehicles for this service action. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website for stock vehicles only on April 19, 2010. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES Dealer action is not required. Owner Guide Supplement booklets are being mailed to owners beginning April 30, 2010. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7839 Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS Stock Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets for stock vehicles are being mailed to dealerships the week of April 19, 2010. The package will be sent to the attention of the service manager. Sold Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets and installation instructions are being mailed directly to customers of the affected vehicles. A small quantity of booklets have been set aside in case an Owner Guide Supplement booklet is misplaced. To order an additional Owner Guide Supplement booklet, contact the Special Service Support Center. A VIN number will be required for each replacement booklet ordered. DEALER PRICE Dealers will not be charged for Owner Guide Supplement booklets ordered for this program. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7840 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7841 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7842 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7843 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7844 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7845 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7846 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7847 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement Technical Service Bulletin # 10L06 Date: 100419 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED Yes, OASIS will only be activated on stock vehicles for this service action. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website for stock vehicles only on April 19, 2010. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES Dealer action is not required. Owner Guide Supplement booklets are being mailed to owners beginning April 30, 2010. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7853 Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS Stock Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets for stock vehicles are being mailed to dealerships the week of April 19, 2010. The package will be sent to the attention of the service manager. Sold Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets and installation instructions are being mailed directly to customers of the affected vehicles. A small quantity of booklets have been set aside in case an Owner Guide Supplement booklet is misplaced. To order an additional Owner Guide Supplement booklet, contact the Special Service Support Center. A VIN number will be required for each replacement booklet ordered. DEALER PRICE Dealers will not be charged for Owner Guide Supplement booklets ordered for this program. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7854 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7855 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7856 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7857 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7858 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7859 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7860 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7861 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement Technical Service Bulletin # 10L06 Date: 100419 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED Yes, OASIS will only be activated on stock vehicles for this service action. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website for stock vehicles only on April 19, 2010. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES Dealer action is not required. Owner Guide Supplement booklets are being mailed to owners beginning April 30, 2010. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7867 Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS Stock Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets for stock vehicles are being mailed to dealerships the week of April 19, 2010. The package will be sent to the attention of the service manager. Sold Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets and installation instructions are being mailed directly to customers of the affected vehicles. A small quantity of booklets have been set aside in case an Owner Guide Supplement booklet is misplaced. To order an additional Owner Guide Supplement booklet, contact the Special Service Support Center. A VIN number will be required for each replacement booklet ordered. DEALER PRICE Dealers will not be charged for Owner Guide Supplement booklets ordered for this program. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7868 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7869 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7870 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7871 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7872 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7873 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7874 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7875 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines TSB 09-20-13 10/19/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground. Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines. 1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93 °C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1) 2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h). 3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time. 4. Start and run the engine for: a. 5 minutes before towing each day b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less. c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 7880 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines TSB 09-20-13 10/19/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground. Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines. 1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93 °C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1) 2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h). 3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time. 4. Start and run the engine for: a. 5 minutes before towing each day b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less. c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 7886 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 7892 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7897 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7898 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7899 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7900 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7901 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7902 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7903 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7904 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7905 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7906 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7907 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7908 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7909 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7910 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7911 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7912 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7913 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7914 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7915 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7916 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7917 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7922 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7923 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7924 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7925 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7926 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7927 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7928 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7929 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7930 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7931 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7932 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7933 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7934 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7935 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7936 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7937 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7938 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7939 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7940 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7941 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Trailer Lamps Principles of Operation Trailer Lamps Principles of Operation The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. They are energized to correspond with the exterior lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the trailer lamps. Inspection and Verification Trailer Lamps Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7944 Trailer Lamps: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Trailer Lamps Symptom Chart Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7945 Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Y: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Y: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The trailer tow connector receives ground through circuits RAT08 (WH) and GD149 (BK/GY) for all of the trailer lamps. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer PINPOINT TEST Y: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- Y1 CHECK CIRCUITS RAT08 (WH) AND GD149 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Measure the resistance between the trailer tow C439-4, circuit RAT08 (WH), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. No REPAIR circuit RAT08 (WH) or circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Z: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Z: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow stop/turn relays. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7946 grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE). The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow stop/turn relay - Trailer PINPOINT TEST Z: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER STOP/TURN LAMP NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- Z1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT06 (YE) OR CIRCUIT CAT09 (GN) FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground. - For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. No GO to Z2. ------------------------------------------------- Z2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY - Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relay. - Substitute a know good relay. - For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7947 - For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow stop/turn relay. TEST the system for normal operation. No REMOVE the known good relay. GO to Z3. ------------------------------------------------- Z3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS18 (GY/BN) OR CIRCUIT CLS19 (VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 2, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 2, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to Z4. No REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Z4 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB14 (BN/RD) FOR AN OPEN - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to Z5. No Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7948 VERIFY the BJB fuse 14 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB14 (BN/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. ------------------------------------------------- Z5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Measure the resistance between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH trailer stop/turn) or circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH trailer stop/turn) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. No REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow parking lamp relay - Trailer PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- AA1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT11 (BN) FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7949 - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. No GO to AA2. ------------------------------------------------- AA2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY - Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay. - Substitute a known good relay. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow parking lamp relay. TEST the system for normal operation. No REMOVE the known good relay. GO to AA3. ------------------------------------------------- AA3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN - Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 2, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to AA4. No REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7950 ------------------------------------------------- AA4 CHECK THE SBB08 (VT/RD) FOR AN OPEN - Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to AA5. No VERIFY the BJB fuse 8 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. ------------------------------------------------- AA5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Measure the resistance between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes REPAIR circuit CAT11 (BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. No REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Turn/Stoplamp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7951 The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE). The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN). Trailer Tow Parking The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow relay - Trailer PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY ------------------------------------------------- AB1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows: - Is any voltage present? Yes GO to AB2. No The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. ------------------------------------------------- AB2 CHECK THE SUSPECT RELAY - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Relay. - Carry out the component test for the suspect trailer tow relay. - Is the trailer tow relay OK? Yes REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH turn), circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH turn), or circuit CAT11 (BN) (parking lamps) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation. No Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7952 INSTALL a new turn trailer tow relay. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7957 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7958 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7961 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7962 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7963 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7964 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7965 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7970 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7971 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7972 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7973 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7974 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7975 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7976 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7977 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7978 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7979 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7980 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7981 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7982 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7983 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7984 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7985 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7986 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7987 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7988 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7989 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7990 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Description and Operation Body Control Systems: Description and Operation Module Controlled Functions NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). NOTE: The time out for the battery saver relay and the accessory delay relay (both are controlled by the SJB) is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80 km (50 miles). Once the vehicle passes the approximate mileage threshold of 80 km (50 miles), the time out for both relays will be the normal 10 minute time out, as described by the Owner's Literature. For the accessory delay relay, refer to Windows. The SJB is the only multifunction electronic module on this vehicle. The SJB is a combination of a multifunction electronic module and a Central Junction Box (CJB). The following systems are controlled by the SJB: - Auto locks - Exterior lamps - Illuminated entry and interior lamps - Keyless entry keypad - Power door locks - Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The SJB is located under the front (passenger side floor) console. Post Crash Alert The post crash alert function is controlled by the SJB. If the Restraints Control Module (RCM) determines an impact of severity enough to deploy the air bags has occurred (the air bags may or may not be deployed by the RCM), the RCM sends a message to the Instrument Cluster (IC) over the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN), which sends a message to the SJB over the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) and the SJB activates the post crash alert function by sounding the horn 3 times, then off for 4 seconds, then on 3 times, etc., until the battery dies or the function is turned off. The hazard lamps also flash with the horn sounding, however, the hazard lamps keep flashing during the horn off cycle. The post crash alert function can be turned off by: - pressing the hazard switch (may need to be pressed more than once). - pressing the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key UNLOCK button. - pressing the PANIC button. This feature acts similar to the perimeter alarm, but the horn cycle is different. Turning the ignition to the ON position will not deactivate this function, but will deactivate an activated perimeter alarm. The post crash alert function cannot be configured off. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Systems: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection And Verification Smart Junction Box (SJB) Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: - Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test: - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus. - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles Of Operation Smart Junction Box (SJB) Principles of Operation NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). NOTE: The time out for the battery saver relay and the accessory delay relay (both are controlled by the SJB) is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7997 km (50 miles). Once the vehicle passes the approximate mileage threshold of 80 km (50 miles), the time out for both relays will be the normal 10 minute time out, as described by the Owner's Literature. For the accessory delay relay, refer to Windows. The SJB is a multifunction electronic module that controls many of the vehicle systems. Several SJB functions utilize hardwired inputs and/or outputs. The SJB controls the following hardwired functions, using the corresponding inputs and outputs: In addition, the SJB is involved in other vehicle systems through communication over the Controller Area Network (CAN). For a detailed list of the SJB network inputs and outputs, refer to Information Bus. Some SJB parameters are programmable. Two types of programmable parameters are available: vehicle configuration and customer preference. Refer to Information Bus for programmable parameters. Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection The SJB utilizes a Field-Effect Transistor (FET) protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the headlamp output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically shorted circuits) and are shut down (turn off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at the time for the fault. The circuit resets after a customer demand (ignition cycle) of the function (which switches the component on, causing the 30-minute battery saver timer to be energized). When an excessive circuit load (from a shorted circuit) occurs several times, the module shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that was stored by the first failure does not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The SJB does not allow the DTC to be cleared or the normal circuit function restored until a successful self-test (retrieving on-demand DTCs) proves that the fault has been repaired. After the self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs present), the continuous DTC clear and the normal circuit function returns. The SJB has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC associated with the short circuit sets along with DTC B106E. These DTCs (B106E and the DTC associated with the shorted circuit) may be cleared using the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the fault itself has been corrected. Each and every time the scan tool retrieves DTCs from the module and a circuit is shorted, a level of short circuit tolerance is used up. If any of the circuits are shorted past the third level (if DTCs have been retrieved 3 successive times with the short circuit not having been repaired), then DTCs B106F and B1342 are set along with the associated continuous DTC. These DTCs (B106F and B1342) cannot be cleared and the module must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7998 The initial short circuit must be successfully repaired and its associated DTC is cleared before the SJB is replaced or the new SJB may experience one or more of the short circuit tolerance levels being used up, causing a repeat replacement of the module. The SJB FET protected output circuits for the handles, locks, latches and entry systems are the liftgate lock actuator circuit CPL10 (GN/WH) and the keypad illumination circuit CPK28 (WH/GN). DTC B106E sets when the SJB has disabled a circuit due to a repetitive fault causing a circuit overload. A corresponding DTC for the circuit in question will also be set as follows: - DTC B1034 - Radio Start Signal Circuit Failure - DTC B1218 - Horn Relay Coil Circuit Short to Vbatt - DTC B1304 - Accessory Delay Relay Coil Circuit Short To Battery - DTC B1316 - Battery Saver Relay Coil Circuit Short To Ground - DTC B1349 - Heated Backlite Relay Short To Battery - DTC B1474 - Battery Saver Power Relay Circuit Short To Battery - DTC B1502 - Lamp Turn Signal Left Circuit Short To Ground - DTC B1506 - Lamp Turn Signal Right Circuit Short To Ground - DTC B1626 - Lamp Keypad Output Short Circuit To Ground - DTC B2070 - Trailer Tow Relay Coil(s) Circuit Failure - DTC B2501 - LF Lamp Low Beam Circuit Failure - DTC B2503 - RF Lamp Low Beam Circuit Failure - DTC B2505 - LF Lamp High Beam Circuit Failure - DTC B2507 - RF Lamp High Beam Circuit Failure - DTC B2512 - Front Fog Lamp Relay Ckt Short to Battery - DTC C1788 - Stoplamp Relay Output Circuit Short to Ground - DTC C1961 - Park Lamp Relay Coil Circuit Failure - DTC P0930 - Gear Shift Lock Solenoid Circuit Low Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7999 Body Control Systems: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart NOTE: Most powertrain (P-code) DTCs are diagnosed in Computers and Control Systems Information. If the P-code retrieved is not listed below, refer to Computers and Control Systems Information to continue diagnostics. NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). NOTE: Some of these modules utilize a 5-character DTC followed by a 2-character failure-type code. The failure-type code provides information about specific fault conditions such as opens, or shorts to ground. Continuous memory DTCs have an additional 2-character DTC status code suffix to assist in determining DTC history. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8000 B0001:1A-B0011:13 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8001 B0011:2B-B0029:13 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8002 B0029:2B-B0092:11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8003 B00A0:4A-B0097:96 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8004 B00B5:11-B1155 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8005 B11BA:1C-B1214:12 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8006 B12A0-B1299 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8007 B12AB-B1318 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8008 B1318-B1520 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8009 B1A01:01-B2032 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8010 B2044-B2427 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8011 B273A-B2870 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8012 B2A20-B2965 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8013 B2A2A-B2A4D / C0001:49-C0018:49 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8014 C001C:49-C0034:29 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8015 C003A:01-C0063:64 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8016 C0064:28-C1018:62 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8017 C101A:62-C1133:64 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8018 C1134:28-C1699 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8019 C1B00:28-C2780 / P0512-P0563 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8020 P0A0A-P0727 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8021 P0AA6-P2613 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8022 PXXXX-P2806 / U0001-U0131 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8023 U0131:87-U0155:00 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8024 U0155:00-U0256:00 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8025 U0256:00-U2014:41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8026 U201A:51-U2100:56 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8027 U261A-U3003:17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8028 U3003:17 Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Charts B106E-B1342 / P062F / U0155-U2473 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8029 Body Control Systems: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Smart Junction Box (SJB) Symptom Chart Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8030 Body Control Systems: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: DTCs B106E/B106F Smart Junction Box (SJB) Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: DTCs B106E/B106F Normal Operation When a repetitive fault causing a circuit overload is detected on certain output circuits, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) disables the circuit by removing voltage, or ground, to the affected circuit. The circuit remains disabled until the fault is corrected and an on-demand self-test is run. When the on-demand self-test has been run after all faults have been corrected, any DTCs related to the fault are cleared. - DTC B106E (Solid State Driver Disabled Due to Short Circuit) - sets when the SJB has disabled a circuit due to a repetitive fault causing a circuit overload. For a complete list of corresponding DTCs, refer to the Principles of Operation. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Principles Of Operation - DTC B106F (Module Disabled Due to External Fault) - sets when one or more output functions are permanently disabled due to a repetitive circuit overload fault. When DTC B106F is present (DTC B1342 may also be present), the SJB must be replaced after the fault condition has been corrected. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Output circuit short to ground or voltage - SJB PINPOINT TEST A: DTCs B106E/B106F NOTICE: If DTC B106F is present and the Smart Junction Box (SJB) is to be replaced, the fault condition must be corrected first. Failure to correct the fault condition first may cause damage to the new SJB, resulting in a repeat repair. NOTICE: If DTC B106F is present, DTC B1342 may also be present. At this time, ignore these DTCs and follow the necessary diagnostics to resolve DTC B106E and any other DTCs that are present. DTC B106E will be present only when there is another DTC due to a software issue or a circuitry issue that must be resolved before another self-test is run. Each time a self-test is run, one of the 3 thresholds is used. Once the 3 thresholds are used, DTCs B106F and B1342 will be present and the SJB must be replaced. All other DTCs MUST be resolved first, or else the new SJB will begin to have its 3 thresholds used with each self-test that is run. ------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK FOR DTC B106E - Review the DTCs from the SJB self-test. - Is DTC B106E present? Yes GO to A2. No GO to A3. ------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK FOR OTHER DTCs - Review the DTCs from the SJB self-test. Are any SJB DTCs present other than DTC B106E? Yes CORRECT any other DTCs. REFER to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart. REPEAT the self-test (on-demand DTCs). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8031 No CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK FOR DTC B106F - Review the DTCs from the SJB self-test. - Is DTC B106F present? Yes CORRECT any other DTCs. REFER to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart. INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Smart Junction Box (SJB) See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern was caused by a fault in one of the output circuits. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: DTC B1317 Smart Junction Box (SJB) Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test B: DTC B1317 Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 13 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power Distribution/SJB for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Smart Junction Box (SJB) monitors the voltage from the battery to determine if it goes above or below specific thresholds and sets DTC B1317 in continuous memory and on-demand if the SJB detects high battery voltage above 15.5 volts on circuit SBB02 (YE/RD). - DTC B1317 (Battery Voltage High) - a continuous memory or on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects battery voltage above 15.5 volts on circuit SBB02 (YE/RD). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Charging system concern - SJB PINPOINT TEST B: DTC B1317 NOTE: DTC B1317 may be stored in the module memory due to previous battery charging or vehicle jump starting events. ------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK FOR DTC B1317, B1676 OR P0563 SET IN OTHER MODULES - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: (All CMDTCs) Self-Test. - Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs from all modules. Is DTC B1317, B1676 or P0563 (PCM) set in more than one module? Yes REFER to Charging System to diagnose an overcharging condition. No GO to B2. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8032 ------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE - Turn off all interior/exterior lights and accessories. - Start and run the engine at approximately 2,000 rpm for 3 minutes while monitoring the battery voltage. - Does the battery voltage rise to 15.5 volts or higher? Yes REFER to Charging System to diagnose an overcharging condition. No GO to B3. ------------------------------------------------- B3 RECHECK FOR DTC B1317 - Turn the engine off. - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Self-Test. - Clear the continuous memory DTCs. - Carry out the SJB self-test. - Is DTC B1317 present? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Smart Junction Box (SJB) See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set previously during battery charging or while jump starting the vehicle. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: DTC B1318 Smart Junction Box (SJB) Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test C: DTC B1318 Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 13 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power Distribution/SJB for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Smart Junction Box (SJB) monitors the voltage from the battery to determine if it goes above or below specific thresholds and sets DTC B1318 in continuous memory and on-demand if the SJB detects low battery voltage below 10 volts on circuit SBB02 (YE/RD). - DTC B1318 (Battery Voltage Low) - a continuous memory or on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects battery voltage below 10 volts on circuit SBB02 (YE/RD). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - High circuit resistance - SJB PINPOINT TEST C: DTC B1318 NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8033 NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- C1 RECHECK THE SJB DTCs - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Self-Test. - Clear the DTCs. Repeat the SJB self-test. - Is DTC B1318 still present? Yes GO to C2. No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set previously during battery charging or while jump starting the vehicle. ------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCs IN THE PCM - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: PCM Self-Test. - Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs from the PCM. - Is DTC P0620, P0625, P0626 or P065B set in the PCM? Yes REFER to Charging System. No GO to C3. ------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK THE BATTERY CONDITION AND STATE OF CHARGE - Ignition OFF. - Check the battery condition and verify the battery is fully charged. Refer to Battery, Battery Condition Test. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests - Is the battery OK and fully charged? Yes GO to C4. No REFER to Charging System. ------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE SJB VOLTAGE SUPPLY - Measure and record the voltage at the battery. - Disconnect: SJB C2280G. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the SJB C2280G-1, circuit SBB02 (YE/RD), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8034 - Is the voltage within 0.2 volt of the recorded battery voltage? Yes GO to C5. No REPAIR the circuit for high resistance. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- C5 CHECK THE SJB GROUND CIRCUIT - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Disconnect: SJB C2280D. - Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280D-7, 24, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to C6. No REPAIR the circuit for high resistance. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION - Connect: Negative Battery Cable. - Disconnect the SJB connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Smart Junction Box (SJB) See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8035 ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test D: DTC U0155 Smart Junction Box (SJB) Pinpoint Test D: DTC U0155 Normal Operation - DTC U0155 (Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster (IC) Control Module) - set by the Smart Junction Box (SJB) if data messages received from the Instrument Cluster (IC) over the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) are missing for 5 minutes. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Module communication - IC PINPOINT TEST D: DTC U0155 ------------------------------------------------- D1 VERIFY CUSTOMER CONCERN - Ignition ON. - Verify that there is an observable symptom present. - Is an observable symptom present? Yes GO to D2. No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network traffic or intermittent fault condition. ------------------------------------------------- D2 CHECK THE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test. - Carry out the network test. - Does the IC pass the network test? Yes GO to D3. No REFER to Information Bus. ------------------------------------------------- D3 RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SELF-TEST - Check for recorded SJB DTCs from the self-test. - Is DTC B1317 or B1318 recorded? Yes For DTC B1317, Go To Pinpoint Test b. See: Pinpoint Test B: DTC B1317 For DTC B1318, Go To Pinpoint Test c. See: Pinpoint Test C: DTC B1318 No GO to D4. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8036 ------------------------------------------------- D4 RECHECK THE SJB DTCs NOTE: If new modules were installed prior to the DTC being set, the module configuration may be incorrectly set during Programmable Module Installation (PMI) or the PMI may not have been carried out. - Clear the DTCs. Repeat the SJB self-test. - Is DTC U0155 still present? Yes INSTALL a new IC. TEST the system for normal operation. REPEAT the SJB self-test. If DTC U0155 is still present, INSTALL a new SJB. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network traffic or intermittent fault condition. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair Running Board Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the running board trim bezel push clips and remove the running board trim bezel. 3. Remove the 4 running board bolts and remove the running board. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Remove the body-to-running board bracket screw. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures Tab Repair - Bumper 1. NOTE: Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of quality of appearance, fit and durability. Will labor and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a new replacement bumper cover? If the bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the following steps. NOTE: The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives or patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly. Remove the affected bumper. 2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover. 3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with compressed air. 4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area. 5. Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the tab, then slope back in a wedge shape approximately 51 mm (2 in) from original tab. 6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected area. - Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape. 7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme care to not sand through the exterior surface. 8. NOTICE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) in a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) can be affected and damaged by excessively high temperatures. The temperature in some body shop paint booths can exceed 60°C (140°F). Therefore, during refinishing operations, the paint booth temperature must be set at or below 60°C (140°F) with a bake time of 45 minutes or less. Temperatures in excess of 60°C (140°F) or bake durations longer than 45 minutes will require the HVTB be removed from the vehicle prior to placing in the paint booth. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint systems. 9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8046 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement Bumper Cover - Front Removal and Installation NOTICE: Prior to removal of the front bumper cover, place tape at the corners of the bumper cover and below the headlamps to prevent damage to the paint. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 6 pushpins from inside the front splash shield (3 each side). 3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield-to-air deflector bolts (2 each side). - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Remove the 3 air deflector bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. Remove the 2 front bumper cover center pushpins from the front bumper cover. 6. If equipped, disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors. 7. If equipped, disconnect the front parking aid sensor harness. 8. Remove the 2 bolts that attach the grille to the radiator support bracket. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Position the front bumper cover. - Push inward on the sides of the bumper cover near the bottom corner of the headlamp until the bumper cover snap onto the bumper slides. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures Tab Repair - Bumper 1. NOTE: Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of quality of appearance, fit and durability. Will labor and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a new replacement bumper cover? If the bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the following steps. NOTE: The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives or patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly. Remove the affected bumper. 2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover. 3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with compressed air. 4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area. 5. Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the tab, then slope back in a wedge shape approximately 51 mm (2 in) from original tab. 6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected area. - Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape. 7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme care to not sand through the exterior surface. 8. NOTICE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) in a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) can be affected and damaged by excessively high temperatures. The temperature in some body shop paint booths can exceed 60°C (140°F). Therefore, during refinishing operations, the paint booth temperature must be set at or below 60°C (140°F) with a bake time of 45 minutes or less. Temperatures in excess of 60°C (140°F) or bake durations longer than 45 minutes will require the HVTB be removed from the vehicle prior to placing in the paint booth. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint systems. 9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8052 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement Bumper Cover - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 4 rear bumper cover center screws. 2. Remove the 2 rear splash shields. - Remove the 4 splash shield pin-type retainers (2 each side). - Remove the 4 splash shield screws (2 each side). - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Remove the 2 rear bumper cover upper screws (1 each side). - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Remove the 2 liftgate alignment bumper bolts and the 2 liftgate alignment bumpers. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. If equipped, disconnect the parking aid system or trailer tow electrical connector. 6. Remove the rear bumper cover. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - When installing, position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides. - Transfer all necessary components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Panel Grille Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers. 4. Remove the cowl end caps. 5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush Front Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 8069 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush Front Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 8075 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 8076 Front Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 8077 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 8078 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 8079 Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 8080 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 8081 Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front Removal and Installation NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised. 1. Remove the exterior front door handle. For additional information, refer to Exterior Front Door Handle See: Exterior Front Door Handle. 2. Disconnect the door latch carrier. 1. Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside. 2. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement screw. 3. Disconnect the actuating rods. - If necessary, disconnect the lock cylinder actuating rod from the exterior front door handle reinforcement. - Disconnect the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the front door latch. 4. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement with the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 5. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page 8084 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page 8085 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Exterior Front Door Handle Exterior Front Door Handle Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the exterior front door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement. 4. Remove the exterior front door handle bezel. 1. Pull the exterior front door handle open. 2. Pivot the rear of the exterior front door handle bezel and remove. 5. Remove the exterior front door handle. - Open and pull the exterior front door handle rearward to release and remove. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page 8086 6. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle seals. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page 8087 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches Exploded View Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View > Page 8092 Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Interior Door Handle - Front Interior Door Handle - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Release the interior front door handle retaining tabs and remove the interior front door handle. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Hinge: Adjustments Door Alignment - Front All alignments NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side similar. 1. Remove the door latch striker plate. Front door in and out, up and down alignment 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the front door hinge-to-front door fasteners enough to allow door alignment. Front door fore, aft and tilt alignment 3. Remove the front fender. 4. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper front door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door alignment. 5. Remove the front door scuff plate. 6. Partially remove the front door weatherstrip. 7. Remove the lower cowl trim panel. - Remove the pin-type retainer. - Remove the lower cowl trim panel. 8. Remove the front door hinge-to-body bolts inside at the inside A-pillar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments > Page 8096 9. Position the weather shield aside and loosen, but do not remove, the front door lower hinge nut. 10. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower front door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door alignment. All alignments 11. Adjust the door. 12. Tighten the door fasteners. - Tighten the front door hinge-to-front door fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Tighten the front door hinge-to-body fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 13. Install and adjust the door striker as necessary. - Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Hinge - Upper, Front Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Door Hinge - Upper, Front Door Hinge - Upper, Front 1. Remove the front door. For additional information, refer to Door See: Service and Repair. 2. Remove the instrument panel. 3. Remove the hinge-to-body bolts and remove the hinge. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Hinge - Upper, Front > Page 8099 Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Door Hinge - Lower, Front Door Hinge - Lower, Front 1. Remove the front door. For additional information, refer to Door See: Service and Repair. 2. Remove the scuff plate trim panel pin-type retainers. 3. Remove the scuff plate trim panel. 4. Pull outward to release the cowl trim panel clips and remove the cowl trim panel. 5. Remove the hinge-to-body bolts and remove the hinge. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Front Door Latch: Procedures Latch Lubrication 1. Open the door. 2. Using a screwdriver, fully close the latch (two clicks). 3. Spray the multi-purpose grease into the opening on the door latch for approximately 5 seconds. 4. Open the latch using either the interior or exterior door handle. 5. Open and close the door several times to circulate the lubricant inside the latch. 6. Wipe off any excess grease. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8104 Front Door Latch: Removal and Replacement Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8105 Front Door Latch Front Door Latch Removal and Installation NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised. 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front See: Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front. 4. Remove and discard the 3 front door latch bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the front door latch electrical connector. 6. Remove the front door latch. - Slide the front door latch towards the front of the vehicle. - Remove the front door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. 7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the front door latch to striker surfaces after installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Door Trim Panel - Front NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar. Removal and Installation NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. 1. Remove the door sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the power mirror electrical connector. 2. Open and remove the door handle finish panel. - Pull the door handle outward to fully access the door handle finish panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8109 3. Remove the door handle screw. 4. Remove the door pull cup screw cover. 5. Remove the door pull cup screw. 6. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws. 7. Remove the door trim panel. - Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 8. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel. - Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8119 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8120 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8125 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8131 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8132 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8137 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door > Page 8140 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front Door Glass Top Run - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front Door See: Service and Repair/Window Glass Front Door. 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts. - To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Remove the front door glass top run. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 8148 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Front Door Window Regulator - Front Door Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly. 4. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield to the inner door. Position the watershield aside. 5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front door window glass screws. 7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 8. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 9. Support the front door window glass in the full UP position with tape. 10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector. 11. Remove the front door window regulator and motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 8149 12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush Rear Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 8160 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush Rear Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 8166 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set TSB 10-19-1 10/11/10 3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/1/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List and production fix date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010. a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for normal diagnostics. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2. 2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs. Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 8172 101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs. Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 8173 Rear Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 8174 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 8175 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 8176 Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 8177 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 8178 Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear Removal and Installation NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised. 1. Remove the exterior rear door handle. For additional information, refer to Exterior Rear Door Handle See: Exterior Rear Door Handle. 2. Disconnect the door latch carrier. 1. Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside. 2. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement screw. 3. Disconnect the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the rear door latch. 4. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement with the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 5. If necessary, remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page 8181 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Exterior Rear Door Handle Exterior Rear Door Handle Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the rear window channel bolt and position the window channel aside. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. Remove the exterior rear door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement. 5. Remove the exterior rear door handle bezel. 1. Pull the exterior rear door handle open. 2. Pivot the rear of the exterior rear door handle bezel and remove. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page 8182 6. Remove the exterior rear door handle. - Open and pull the exterior rear door handle rearward to release and remove. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page 8183 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Interior Door Handle - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the rear interior door handle retaining tabs and remove the rear interior door handle from the door trim panel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Hinge: Adjustments Door Alignment - Rear NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side similar. All alignments 1. Remove the door latch striker plate. Rear door in and out, up and down alignment 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the rear door hinge-to-rear door fasteners enough to allow door alignment. Front door fore, aft and tilt alignment 3. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper rear door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door alignment. 4. Remove the front door scuff plate. 5. Remove the rear door scuff plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments > Page 8190 6. Position aside the lower B-pillar trim panel. 7. Loosen the rear door hinge-to-body bolts inside at the inside B-pillar. 8. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower rear door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door alignment. All alignments 9. Adjust the door. 10. Tighten the door fasteners. - Tighten the rear door hinge-to-rear door fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Tighten the rear door hinge-to-body fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 11. Install and adjust the door striker as necessary. - Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft). - To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Rear Door Latch: Procedures Latch Lubrication 1. Open the door. 2. Using a screwdriver, fully close the latch (two clicks). 3. Spray the multi-purpose grease into the opening on the door latch for approximately 5 seconds. 4. Open the latch using either the interior or exterior door handle. 5. Open and close the door several times to circulate the lubricant inside the latch. 6. Wipe off any excess grease. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8195 Rear Door Latch: Removal and Replacement Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Rear Door Latch Rear Door Latch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8196 Removal and Installation NOTE: The rear door window glass must be completely raised. 1. Remove rear door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear See: Rear Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear. 4. Remove and discard the 3 rear door latch bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the rear door latch electrical connector. 6. Remove the rear door latch. - Slide the rear door latch toward the front of the vehicle. - Remove the rear door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. 7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the rear door latch to striker surfaces after installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Door Trim Panel - Rear NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar. Removal and Installation NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. 1. Open and remove the door handle finish panel. 2. Remove the door handle screw. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8200 3. Remove the door pull cup screw cover. 4. Remove the door pull cup screw. 5. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws. 6. Remove the door trim panel. - Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 7. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel. - Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel. - Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8210 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8211 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8217 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8218 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear Door Glass Top Run - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator - Rear Door. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. 6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear > Page 8221 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 8229 Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Rear Door Window Regulator - Rear Door Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield to the inner door. Position the watershield aside. 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear door window glass screws. 6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full UP position with tape. 9. Disconnect the rear door window motor electrical connector. 10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 8230 - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Hood Latch Removal 1. NOTE: Do not remove the nut. Loosen the hood latch nut. 2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the hood latch bolts. Remove the 2 hood latch bolts. 3. Disconnect the hood latch release cable. 1. Release the cable conduit. 2. Disconnect the cable. 4. Remove the hood latch. 5. If necessary, remove the hood latch release lever. Installation 1. Connect the hood latch release cable to the hood latch. 1. Connect the cable. 2. Engage the cable conduit. 2. Slide the hood latch down onto the mounting bracket. 3. NOTE: When the hood latch is installed, the latch adjustment must be checked to make sure the latch is installed and aligned correctly. Position the hood latch with the alignment marks and install the 2 hood latch bolts. - Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 8236 4. Tighten the hood latch nut to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 8237 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View > Page 8242 Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Handle Hood Latch Release Handle Removal and Installation 1. Remove the hood latch. For additional information, refer to Hood Latch See: Hood Latch/Service and Repair/Hood Latch. 2. Disconnect the 3 hood latch release handle cable guides. - Note the routing of the hood latch release cable. 3. Remove the hood latch release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 4. NOTE: Breaking the tab does not require handle assembly replacement. Using a suitable tool, push up on the tab to snap it off and then slide the handle off the instrument panel. 5. NOTE: The hood latch release handle and cable assembly must be pulled through the cowl panel into the passenger compartment. Remove the hood latch release handle and cable assembly. - Pull the hood latch release cable through the cowl panel. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Window Glass - Liftgate Removal and Installation 1. Open the liftgate window glass. 2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers. 3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector. 4. Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector. 5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders. 1. Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket. 2. Disconnect the socket from the ball stud. 6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8250 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch Liftgate Release Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 8256 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8260 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Liftgate Trim Panel Removal and Installation 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim panel screws. 3. Release the 8 liftgate trim panel retaining clips. 4. NOTE: If equipped with a rear wiper, the rear glass must be open. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 5. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the liftgate trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and attach the to the liftgate trim panel before installing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 8271 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch Liftgate Latch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate latch electrical connectors. 3. Remove and discard the 3 liftgate latch bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Remove the liftgate latch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the liftgate latch to striker surfaces after installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 8272 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Window Latch Liftgate Window Latch Removal and Installation NOTE: Make sure the liftgate window glass is in the raised position. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Mark the position of the liftgate window latch prior to removing the liftgate window latch bolts. Remove the 2 bolts and the liftgate window latch. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. NOTE: The liftgate window latch must be checked to make sure the latch is installed and aligned correctly. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Service and Repair Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 8284 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 8290 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8291 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8292 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Panel Grille Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers. 4. Remove the cowl end caps. 5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Bracket: Service and Repair License Plate Housing 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the license plate housing electrical connector. 3. Remove the license plate housing retaining nuts (4 required). 4. Release the license plate housing from the push clips and remove the license plate housing from the liftgate. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Fender Splash Shield Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Fender Splash Shield Fender Splash Shield Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 3 fender splash shield bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 2. Remove the 7 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 3. Remove the 6 fender splash shield screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Remove the fender splash shield. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Fender Splash Shield > Page 8306 Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Front End Body Panels - Exploded View Front End Body Panels - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Description and Operation Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Description and Operation Subframe and Mounting Systems Front Subframe The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: - aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms. - provide a mounting point for the engine isolators. - provide the mounting surface for the steering gear. - provide the mounting surface for the sway bar. Rear Subframe The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: - aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear differential All-Wheel Drive (AWD). Welding Precautions The correct equipment and settings must be used when welding mild or high strength steel. Metal Inert Gas (MIG) and resistance spot welding are the preferred methods. Surfaces must be clean and free of foreign materials. - Do not weld on the subframe. - The correct protective clothing should always be worn. - Adequate ventilation must be provided to avoid accumulation of poisonous gases. - A test weld should always be carried out on a test sample. - Follow equipment manufacturer's prescribed procedures and equipment settings for the type of weld being used. - Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery. - On Hybrid vehicles, depower the high voltage traction battery system. Refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. - Disconnect on-vehicle modules and protect them from possible heat damage and electrical currents when welding. - Corrosion protection needs to be restored whenever it is necessary to sand or grind through painted surfaces or E-coat, or when bare metal repairs are carried out. Refer to Restoring Corrosion Protection Following Repair. Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the suspension parts and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening concerns, and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by incorrectly tightened bolts and body misalignment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8320 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8321 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8327 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8328 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8329 Front Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8330 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8331 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8332 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8333 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8334 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8335 Front Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - FRONT Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8336 Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Shown, All Other Vehicles Similar NOTE: Escape and Mariner only. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8337 Escape And Mariner Only NOTE: Escape Hybrid only. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8338 Escape Hybrid Only All vehicles NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8339 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead position and remove the key. Hybrid vehicles 3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. 4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer. All vehicles 5. Remove the front tires. 6. NOTICE: - Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or damage to the vehicle may occur. - Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or damage to the vehicle may occur. NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing. Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. To install, tighten to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft). - Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). 9. Remove the 6 bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield. 10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8340 11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Hybrid vehicles only 12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer bracket. All vehicles 13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. - To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). All vehicles except hybrid 14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8341 - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). All vehicles 15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt. - To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft). 16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle. 18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and installing the stabilizer link nut. Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts. To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and the bolts. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe. 21. NOTE: - Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing. - When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification. Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts. To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts. - To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). 23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same time the subframe is lowered. With an assistant, remove the front subframe. 24. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer the components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8350 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8351 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8357 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8358 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8359 Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8360 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8361 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8362 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8363 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8364 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8373 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8374 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8380 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8381 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8382 Rear Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8383 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8384 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8385 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8386 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8387 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8388 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - REAR Subframe - Rear Removal All vehicles 1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 2. Remove the rear axle assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8389 All vehicles 3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and position the 4 rear control arms aside. 5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe. 6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe. Installation All vehicles 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts. - To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). - To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe. 3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts. Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. Loosely install the bolts. 4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Vehicles with AWD 5. Install the rear axle assembly. All vehicles 6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8390 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8399 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8400 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8406 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8407 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8408 Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8409 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8410 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8411 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8412 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8413 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling Grille: Customer Interest Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling TSB 09-26-12 01/04/10 FRONT GRILLE - CHROME PEEL FORD: 2008-2009 Escape ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit chrome peel appearance at the base of the front grille stanchion. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If vehicle exhibits front grille chrome peel at the base of the stanchions, as specified in photo, with no evidence of impact damage, then replace the affected front grille(s). (Figure 1) Replace Only The Radiator Grille: 1. Remove the two (2) upper grille bolts. (Figure 2-A) 2. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower inside grille bolts. (Figure 2-B) 3. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille to the front bumper cover. (Figure 2-C) 4. Release the three (3) lower grille retainers from the upper bumper cover. (Figure 2-D) 5. Remove the radiator grille. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 8422 6. Install the new radiator grille and attach the three (3) lower grille retainers to the upper bumper cover by pushing the grille into the upper bumper cover. Make sure that all three (3) grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the upper bumper cover. 7. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug. 8. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug. 9. Tighten the two (2) upper grille bolts to 71 lb-in (8 N.m). Replace Both Grilles Or Bumper Grille Only: 1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-19 to remove the bumper cover. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 501-08 to remove radiator grille from bumper cover. 3. Place the bumper cover assembly on a clean work bench on top of a fender cover to prevent scratching of the paint. 4. Push out the six top retainer snap tabs. (Figure 3-A) 5. Remove the passenger side push pin using a flat screwdriver. (Figure 3-B) 6. Position aside the wiring harness. 7. Push out the three (3) lower valance panel retainer tabs. (Figure 3-C) 8. Using end cutting pliers or equivalent, cut off the four (4) retainer snap tabs while being careful not to damage the outer bumper cover. (Figures 3-D and 4) NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY BUMPER SLOTS OPEN TO RELEASE THE TABS AS THIS WILL RESULT IN VISIBLE DAMAGE TO THE OUTER BUMPER COVER. 9. Remove and discard old bumper grille from bumper cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 8423 10. Position the new bumper grille on the bumper cover slots and push in to engage the snap tabs. 11. Install the lower push pin. 12. Re-position wiring harness. 13. Install radiator grille to bumper cover, refer to WSM, Section 501-08. 14. Install the bumper cover assembly, refer to WSM section 501-19. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092612A 2008-2009 Escape: 0.3 Hr. Replace The Radiator Grille Following The Service Procedure (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092612B 2008-2009 Escape: 0.8 Hr. Replace The Bumper Grille And The Radiator Grille If Necessary Following The Service Procedure Includes Time To Remove And Install The Bumper Cover (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 8150 34 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling Grille: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling TSB 09-26-12 01/04/10 FRONT GRILLE - CHROME PEEL FORD: 2008-2009 Escape ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit chrome peel appearance at the base of the front grille stanchion. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If vehicle exhibits front grille chrome peel at the base of the stanchions, as specified in photo, with no evidence of impact damage, then replace the affected front grille(s). (Figure 1) Replace Only The Radiator Grille: 1. Remove the two (2) upper grille bolts. (Figure 2-A) 2. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower inside grille bolts. (Figure 2-B) 3. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille to the front bumper cover. (Figure 2-C) 4. Release the three (3) lower grille retainers from the upper bumper cover. (Figure 2-D) 5. Remove the radiator grille. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 8429 6. Install the new radiator grille and attach the three (3) lower grille retainers to the upper bumper cover by pushing the grille into the upper bumper cover. Make sure that all three (3) grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the upper bumper cover. 7. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug. 8. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug. 9. Tighten the two (2) upper grille bolts to 71 lb-in (8 N.m). Replace Both Grilles Or Bumper Grille Only: 1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-19 to remove the bumper cover. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 501-08 to remove radiator grille from bumper cover. 3. Place the bumper cover assembly on a clean work bench on top of a fender cover to prevent scratching of the paint. 4. Push out the six top retainer snap tabs. (Figure 3-A) 5. Remove the passenger side push pin using a flat screwdriver. (Figure 3-B) 6. Position aside the wiring harness. 7. Push out the three (3) lower valance panel retainer tabs. (Figure 3-C) 8. Using end cutting pliers or equivalent, cut off the four (4) retainer snap tabs while being careful not to damage the outer bumper cover. (Figures 3-D and 4) NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY BUMPER SLOTS OPEN TO RELEASE THE TABS AS THIS WILL RESULT IN VISIBLE DAMAGE TO THE OUTER BUMPER COVER. 9. Remove and discard old bumper grille from bumper cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 8430 10. Position the new bumper grille on the bumper cover slots and push in to engage the snap tabs. 11. Install the lower push pin. 12. Re-position wiring harness. 13. Install radiator grille to bumper cover, refer to WSM, Section 501-08. 14. Install the bumper cover assembly, refer to WSM section 501-19. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092612A 2008-2009 Escape: 0.3 Hr. Replace The Radiator Grille Following The Service Procedure (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092612B 2008-2009 Escape: 0.8 Hr. Replace The Bumper Grille And The Radiator Grille If Necessary Following The Service Procedure Includes Time To Remove And Install The Bumper Cover (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 8150 34 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Grille: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's Canister Purge Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's TSB 11-3-22 03/16/11 DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13. 2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in the evaporative emission canister? a. No - Proceed to Step 3. b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to step 3. 3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr. Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Grille: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 8436 110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs. Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C915 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Grille: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 8442 110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs. Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C915 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8443 Grille: Service and Repair Radiator Grille Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the front bumper cover. Escape only 2. Remove the 2 radiator grille-to-fascia screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8444 3. Remove the 2 radiator grille pinch nuts. 4. Release the 3 radiator grille retaining clips and remove the radiator grille from the fascia. Mariner only 5. Push outward on the 12 radiator grille clips to release the radiator grille from the bumper cover and remove the radiator grille. All vehicles 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8455 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8456 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition to OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. 8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8457 clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8458 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8459 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8460 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8461 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. - When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8462 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair Headliner: Service and Repair Headliner Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to A-Pillar Trim Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/A-Pillar Trim Panel. 2. Remove the LH and RH B-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to B-Pillar Trim Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/B-Pillar Trim Panel. 3. Remove the LH and RH C-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to C-Pillar Trim Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/C-Pillar Trim Panel. 4. Remove the LH and RH D-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to D-Pillar Trim Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/D-Pillar Trim Panel. 5. Open the overhead console door. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8466 6. Remove the 2 screws and the overhead console. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 7. Remove the LH and RH sun visors. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors. 8. NOTE: Do not fully remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips. Remove the LH and RH sun visor clips. - Partially remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips. - Pull downward on the sun visor clips to remove them from the headliner. 9. Using a small flat screwdriver, release and remove the interior lamp lens. 10. Remove the interior lamp. - Early build, remove the 2 screws. - Late build, remove the 2 pushpins. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 11. Remove the cargo lamp. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 12. Remove the 3 child seat tether anchor covers. 13. Remove the 3 bolts and the child seat tether anchors. - To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 14. If equipped, remove the screw and the garment hook. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8467 - Open the garment hook screw cover. - Remove the garment hook screw. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 15. NOTE: When installing the headliner trim ring, it should meet at the rear of the roof opening and have no gaps or overlaps. If equipped, remove the headliner trim ring. 16. Remove the 5 headliner pin-type retainers. 17. Remove the headliner. 18. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer parts as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View Trim Panel: Service and Repair Interior Trim - Exploded View Interior Trim - Exploded View Early Build Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8472 Late Build Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8473 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8474 Trim Panel: Service and Repair A-Pillar Trim Panel A-Pillar Trim Panel Removal All trim panels 1. Position the LH or RH front door weatherstrips aside. Passenger side only 2. Remove the A-pillar assist handle screw covers. 3. Remove the A-pillar assist handle screws and remove the assist handle. All trim panels 4. Pull inward on the upper A-pillar trim panel to release the A-pillar trim panel retaining clips. Driver side only 5. NOTE: Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel. Do not remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar unless a new tether is being installed. Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel. - Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the base of the A-pillar tether clip. - Apply downward pressure on the screwdriver, sliding the A-pillar tether clip base downwards. All trim panels 6. Remove the A-pillar trim panel. Installation All trim panels 1. Install the lower A-pillar trim panel into the instrument panel. Driver side only 2. WARNING: A new A-pillar trim panel tether must be installed if the tether is damaged or does not fasten correctly. During a side air curtain deployment the A-pillar trim panel tether helps prevent the trim from striking the occupant. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). Install the A-pillar tether clip base onto the A-pillar trim panel. Position the A-pillar tether clip base into the A-pillar tether holder located on the A-pillar trim panel. - Slide the A-pillar tether clip base upwards into the A-pillar tether holder until the tether is fully seated. 3. NOTICE: The A-pillar trim panel tether must be aligned correctly or damage to the tether will occur. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the A-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and attach them to the A-pillar trim panel before installing. NOTE: The A-pillar trim panel tether clip, located on the A-pillar, installs into the A-pillar trim panel tether base, located on the A-pillar trim panel. Install the A-pillar trim panel onto the A-pillar. Passenger side only Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8475 4. Install the A-pillar assist handle and install the screws. 5. Install the A-pillar assist handle screw covers. All trim panels 6. Install the LH or RH front door opening weatherstrips. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8476 Trim Panel: Service and Repair B-Pillar Trim Panel B-Pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation Upper 1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the safety belt guide cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the bottom. 2. Remove the safety belt bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Position the front and rear door opening weatherstrips aside. 4. NOTE: Lower the adjustable safety belt to access the B-pillar trim panel bolt. Remove the cover, bolt and the upper B-pillar trim panel. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). Lower 5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and the front door scuff plate trim panel. 6. Remove the 2 pin-type retainer and the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. All vehicles 8. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the B-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and attach them to the B-pillar trim panel before installing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8477 Trim Panel: Service and Repair C-Pillar Trim Panel C-Pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation Early and late build 1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt cover. 2. Remove the safety belt bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel . 4. Position the rear door weatherstrip aside. Early build 5. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the C-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and attach them to the C-pillar trim panel before installing. Remove the cover, the bolt and the C-pillar trim panel. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). Late build 6. Release the C-pillar coat hook by inserting a small flat screwdriver in the slot at the base of the coat hook. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8478 7. Remove the coat hook. - LH coat hook, twist clockwise. - RH coat hook, twist counterclockwise. 8. Remove the C-pillar trim panel bolt. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). Early and late build 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8479 Trim Panel: Service and Repair D-Pillar Trim Panel D-Pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation 1. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel . 2. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the D-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and attach them to the D-pillar trim panel before installing. Remove the D-pillar trim panel by pulling straight outward to release the retaining clips. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair Utility Storage Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel - Exploded View Instrument Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8483 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Door Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: Individual door lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative door lock cylinder and building a new door lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new door lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle. 1. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front. 2. Remove the door lock cylinder. 1. Release the clips. 2. Remove the door lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment Key: Testing and Inspection Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory. NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box (SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the vehicle. NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before the vehicle starts. NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key. NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC. 1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. From the scan tool menu select: IGNITION KEY CODE ERASE. Follow all Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) screen instructions until the key erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the process. 4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be removed at this time). 5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are programmed into the IC, then the RKE data transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into the SJB, the RKE functions does not operate. NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds. Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place). 6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place). 8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT should function. 9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8493 Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8494 Key: Testing and Inspection Key Programming Switch State Control Key Programming Switch State Control NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle driver. NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID. NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLED, the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This switch is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. 1. Insert a programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key (or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLED, when viewing the IC SPAREKEY PID. From the scan tool menu select: CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE - spare key programming procedure is accessible. - CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING DISABLE - spare key programming procedure is not accessible. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8495 Key: Testing and Inspection Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys NOTE: This procedure works only if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment. NOTE: The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID. The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the appropriate pinpoint tests. NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before the vehicle will starts. NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions. Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key. NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends. NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key. NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC. NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function, but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative. 1. Insert a programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. 3. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the first key. 4. Within 10 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 5. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. 6. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the second key. 7. Within 20 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed ignition key (new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key). 8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the vehicle. Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8496 9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8497 Key: Testing and Inspection Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode Enabling Unlimited Key Mode NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for their vehicle. NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT keys are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC) will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly. NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock cylinder. NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder security key code and programming this key code into all of the vehicle keys so they contain the same key code. NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed). 1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F. 2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be turned off before viewing the stored code. At this time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below. Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should not be the same key code. 3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF. 8. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 9. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder. 10. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 11. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. Disabling Unlimited Key Mode Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8498 NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the vehicle. 1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF. 5. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 6. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder. 7. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 8. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into the IC using the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8499 Key: Testing and Inspection Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory. NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box (SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the vehicle. NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before the vehicle starts. NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key. NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC. 1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. From the scan tool menu select: IGNITION KEY CODE ERASE. Follow all Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) screen instructions until the key erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the process. 4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be removed at this time). 5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are programmed into the IC, then the RKE data transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into the SJB, the RKE functions does not operate. NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds. Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place). 6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place). 8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT should function. 9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC), refer to Key Programming Using Two Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8500 Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. Key Programming Switch State Control Key Programming Switch State Control NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle driver. NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID. NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLED, the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This switch is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. 1. Insert a programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key (or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLED, when viewing the IC SPAREKEY PID. From the scan tool menu select: CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE - spare key programming procedure is accessible. - CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING DISABLE - spare key programming procedure is not accessible. Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys NOTE: This procedure works only if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment. NOTE: The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID. The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the appropriate pinpoint tests. NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before the vehicle will starts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8501 NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions. Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key. NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends. NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key. NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC. NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function, but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative. 1. Insert a programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. 3. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the first key. 4. Within 10 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 5. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. 6. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the second key. 7. Within 20 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed ignition key (new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key). 8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the vehicle. Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions. 9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7. Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode Enabling Unlimited Key Mode NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for their vehicle. NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT keys Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8502 are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC) will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly. NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock cylinder. NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder security key code and programming this key code into all of the vehicle keys so they contain the same key code. NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed). 1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F. 2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be turned off before viewing the stored code. At this time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below. Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should not be the same key code. 3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF. 8. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 9. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder. 10. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 11. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. Disabling Unlimited Key Mode NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the vehicle. 1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF. 5. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 6. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder. 7. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 8. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into the IC using the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8503 If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs to have an additional key programmed into the vehicle without erasing stored key codes, but does not have 2 programmed keys available. This procedure is also useful when attempting to determine if an ignition key is defective, as a new key can be installed without erasing keys or without having 2 programmed keys available. NOTE: Before programming, the new key must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock cylinder. NOTE: If 8 keys are already programmed, this procedure does not allow any more ignition keys to be programmed. The number of keys that are programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) can be determined by viewing the N_KEYCODE PID. 1. Turn the new key to be programmed from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. NOTE: Make sure the selection made is "Program additional ignition key". If the "Ignition Key Code Erase" selection is made, all of the keys will be erased from the system. From the scan tool menu select: "Program additional ignition key". 4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool. 5. Start the vehicle with the new PATS key. The vehicle will now start with the new PATS key and also with the original PATS keys. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions (if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed). Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset NOTE: When using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS), the Instrument Cluster (IC) and the PCM parameters are reset at the same time. NOTE: Once security access has been granted, multiple security access commands should be executed (if necessary) prior to exiting the command menu. This avoids an additional security access procedure and the associated 10 minute time delay. 1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8504 ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. From the scan tool, select: Parameter Reset and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 4. NOTE: If the IC was replaced, follow Steps 4-9. If the IC and the PCM were replaced, follow Steps 4-9. If only the PCM was replaced, cycle the key off, then back on, to complete the procedure. NOTE: If steps 4-9 are followed, 2 keys must be present. From the scan tool, select: Ignition Key Code Erase and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 5. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool. 6. NOTE: Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) data transfer to take place, while standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds. Turn the key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (if it is an IKT key). 7. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove it from the ignition lock cylinder. 8. Insert the second key and turn it to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (if it is an IKT key). 9. Both keys will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions of the vehicle (if they are IKT keys). 10. NOTE: The RKE data transfer will take place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are programmed into the IC, the RKE data will transfer from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into the SJB, the RKE functions will not operate. If more keys are required to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 8509 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 8510 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Keypad Code Programming Programming a Personal Code NOTE: Up to 3 personal codes can be programmed. Once there are 3 personal programmed codes, any attempt to program additional codes will be unsuccessful. 1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad. 3. Enter the new 5-digit personal keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within 5 seconds of each other. 4. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm the new code is programmed. Erasing the Personal Codes 1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release. 3. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button on the keypad for 2 seconds. 4. All personal codes are now erased and only the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code will work. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 8511 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair Keyless Entry Keypad Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the keypad retaining clip. 4. Remove the keypad from the door. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming NOTE: This procedure is for programming conventional keyfobs only. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) is programmed automatically during the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming. For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment in Antitheft and Alarm Systems to program the IKT. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: All RKE transmitters must be programmed at the same time. NOTE: Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and the transmitters will not be programmed. 1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10 seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN. If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors. 3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the programming sequence ends (the doors lock and unlock to confirm that programming is complete). Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each RKE transmitter. 4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs: - The key transitions to the OFF position - 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was programmed - The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed 5. Check the operation of the RKE transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed RKE transmitter(s), wait several seconds and press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Locks, Latches and Entry Systems See: Power Locks/Testing and Inspection. (Make sure that no more than the maximum number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be programmed.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 8516 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position. 3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. 6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle the autolock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the autolock feature has been enabled. 9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to indicate the procedure is complete. Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped) 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button. 5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled. Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped) 1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position. 3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 8517 Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. 6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle the auto-unlock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled. 9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to indicate the procedure is complete. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped) 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button 2 times. 5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped) 1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or OFF. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 8518 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming Programming the Perimeter Lighting Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch NOTE: The following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the procedure will need to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait 30 seconds between programming sessions. 1. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position. 2. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times. 3. Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the OFF position. 4. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The horn chirps one time to indicate that programming mode is entered. 6. NOTE: The unlock button must be pressed twice within 5 seconds. Within 30 seconds of entering the programming mode, press the unlock button on the door lock control switch twice to enable/disable the perimeter lighting feature. The horn chirps once if the perimeter lighting is disabled or a chirp followed by a honk if the perimeter lighting is enabled. 7. Programming ends when the ignition switch state changes or times out after 2 minutes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 8519 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming Stepped Unlock Programming 1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter simultaneously for 4 seconds. The turn signals flash twice to indicate the mode change. 2. Repeat Step 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear > Page 8525 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Unit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 8528 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 8529 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Actuator Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 8530 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8535 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 8538 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8539 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8540 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8541 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Door Lock Control Switch NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior Door Handle Front. 2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Service and Repair Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking Heated Element: Customer Interest Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking TSB 10-5-3 03/29/10 EXTERIOR HEATED REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS CRACK WHEN MIRROR DEFROST IS POWERED ON-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 03/31/2009 FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 03/31/2009 and equipped with heated exterior rear view mirrors may exhibit a glass thermal stress crack when mirror defrost is powered on. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace the exterior mirror glass only if there's no evidence of impact damage. (Figure 1) Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 501-09 for removal and installation. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100503A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On One Side (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100503B 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On Both Sides (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking > Page 8554 BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K707 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking Heated Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking TSB 10-5-3 03/29/10 EXTERIOR HEATED REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS CRACK WHEN MIRROR DEFROST IS POWERED ON-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 03/31/2009 FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 03/31/2009 and equipped with heated exterior rear view mirrors may exhibit a glass thermal stress crack when mirror defrost is powered on. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace the exterior mirror glass only if there's no evidence of impact damage. (Figure 1) Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 501-09 for removal and installation. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100503A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On One Side (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100503B 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On Both Sides (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking > Page 8560 BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K707 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heated Element: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration TSB 09-20-3 10/19/09 ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12 MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H) FORD: 2009 Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version. ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h). ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C219 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair Exterior Mirror Motor Removal and Installation 1. Remove the exterior mirror glass. For additional information, refer to Exterior Mirror Glass See: Service and Repair/Exterior Mirror Glass. 2. Remove the exterior mirror motor screw. 3. With a flat-blade tool, release the 3 exterior mirror motor tabs. 4. Remove the exterior mirror motor. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8577 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8578 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8579 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8580 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8581 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Exterior Mirror Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH sail panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch. - Press the 2 retaining tabs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Locations Radiator Support: Locations Front Structure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8589 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8590 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Relay, Passenger > Page 8595 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8598 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Driver Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8601 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8602 Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8603 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8607 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 8614 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Motor Roof Opening Panel Motor Removal and Installation NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the roof opening panel motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the 3 roof opening panel motor screws and the roof opening panel motor. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8618 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8619 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8620 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 8625 Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Trough Assembly Trough Assembly Removal and Installation NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Remove the roof opening panel glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Glass See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Roof Opening Panel Glass. 2. Remove the 2 roof opening panel drain channel screws and the drain channel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 8633 Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Frame Roof Opening Panel Frame Removal and Installation NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 4 roof opening panel drain hoses. 3. Release the wire harness locators. 4. Remove the 8 roof opening panel frame bolts and remove the roof opening panel frame. - To install tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify that the roof opening panel glass is centered and aligned correctly. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8637 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View 1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 8642 Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Glass Roof Opening Panel Glass NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Position the roof opening panel to the CLOSED position. 2. Remove the 4 roof opening panel glass screws and the roof opening panel glass. - To install tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 8643 Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Shield Roof Opening Panel Shield Removal and Installation NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Remove the roof opening panel drain trough. For additional information, refer to Trough Assembly See: Sunroof / Moonroof Track/Service and Repair/Trough Assembly. 2. Slide the roof opening panel shield forward halfway. 3. Disengage the roof opening panel shield guide feet. - Lift the front portion of the roof opening panel shield upward at center until able to disengage one of the front guide feet. 4. With one of the guide feet released, carefully rotate the roof opening panel shield in a clockwise manner to disengage the remaining guide feet. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8648 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8649 Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8650 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8651 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8655 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8656 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8657 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8658 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8659 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8660 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Seat Back: Removal and Replacement Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8665 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8666 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Seat Backrest - Front Seat Backrest - Front Removal and Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8667 NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front. 1. Remove the seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front. 2. Remove the recliner handle. 3. Remove the outboard side shield. - For passenger seat, remove the screw and slide the outboard side shield forward. Release the rear clip and push forward to release the front clip. - For driver seat, remove the 3 screws. If equipped, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the inboard side shield. - For driver seat, remove the 2 inboard side shield screws. - For passenger seat, remove the screw and slide the side shield forward to release the front hook. 5. Remove the wiring harness tie strap and detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer from the safety belt buckle pretensioner. 6. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track. - Detach the pin-type retainers and wiring harness from the seat cushion. 7. Remove the bolt and position aside the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector. - Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest cover. 9. NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the mounting bracket. Damage to the wire harness may occur. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector. - Route the side air bag wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame. 10. Remove the 4 backrest-to-seat track bolts (power seat) or 3 remaining backrest-to-seat track bolts (manual seat) and backrest. - To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Rear Seat Backrest Seat Backrest - Rear Removal NOTE: The RH rear seat backrest (40 percent) must be removed prior to the LH rear seat backrest (60 percent). NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Rear See: Service and Repair/Rear Seat - Exploded View. Both rear seat backrests 1. Position both rear seat cushions forward. 2. Route the safety belt buckles from the elastic straps. 3. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt. LH rear seat backrest Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8668 4. Remove the center safety belt anchor bolt. 5. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt. Both rear seat backrests 6. Release and position both rear backrests downward. 7. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and position the carpet aside. 8. Remove the bolt cover. 9. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut, inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard backrest-to-floor bolt. 10. Lift and remove the RH rear seat backrest. LH rear seat backrest 11. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. 12. Lift and remove the LH rear seat backrest. Installation NOTE: The LH rear seat backrest (60 percent) must be installed prior to the RH rear seat backrest (40 percent). NOTE: The seat-to-floor fasteners must be tightened in the sequence described in this procedure. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants. LH rear seat backrest 1. Position the LH rear seat backrest in the vehicle. 2. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. Do not tighten at this time. RH rear seat backrest 3. Position the RH rear seat backrest in the vehicle. 4. Install the inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard backrest-to-floor bolt. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Install the bolt cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8669 6. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Both rear seat backrests 7. Tighten the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. Position the carpet and install the 2 pin-type retainers. 9. Position upward and latch both rear backrests. 10. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 11. Install the center safety belt anchor bolt. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). RH rear seat backrest 12. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 13. Route the safety belt buckles through the elastic straps. 14. Position both rear seat cushions in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8670 Seat Back: Overhaul Seat Backrest - Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger similar. Disassembly WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. 1. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Removal and Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8671 Front. 2. Remove the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat Backrest Cover - Front. 3. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers. 4. Remove the 2 side air bag module nuts and side air bag module. 5. Remove the backrest foam pad. 6. If equipped, remove the lumbar assembly. - Remove the 2 screws and position aside the lumbar adjuster. - Release the lumbar assembly from the backrest frame wires and remove. Assembly WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly: - Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material. - Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad. - Install new parts if damaged. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the mounting bracket. Damage to the wire harness may occur. 1. If equipped, install the lumbar assembly. - Install the lumbar assembly to the backrest frame wires. - Install the lumbar adjuster and 2 screws. 2. Install the side air bag module and 2 nuts to the backrest frame mounting bracket. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame. 4. Install the backrest foam pad to the backrest frame. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8672 5. Install the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat Backrest Cover - Front. 6. Install the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Removal and Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest Front. Seat Backrest - Rear Seat Backrest - Rear NOTE: LH (60 percent) shown, RH (40 percent) similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8673 Disassembly and Assembly Both rear seat backrests 1. Remove the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Rear See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Seat Backrest Cover. 2. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame. Sixty percent seat backrest 3. Release the seat latch cable from the center safety belt retractor. - For installation, make sure the rear safety belt retractor is not in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode after installation. For additional information, refer to Seat Belt Systems. 4. Remove the 2 nuts and safety belt guide. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Remove the nut and center safety belt retractor. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Both rear seat backrests 6. Remove the 2 bolts and backrest latch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8674 - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. Remove the bolt and inboard pivot bracket. - To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 8. Remove the bolt and outboard pivot bracket. - To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 9. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers Seat Cover: Customer Interest Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers TSB 09-23-3 11/30/09 CLOTH SEAT STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/14/2009 (EXCLUDES XLS) FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles (excludes Mariner) equipped with Cloth seats (excludes XLS) and built on or before 5/14/2009, may exhibit stains with a white ring outline around them. An updated seat cover is now available to reduce this specific type of staining. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seat cover stain for a white ring outline. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 8683 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 8684 2. If the white ring stain is present, then replace the seat cover with latest level part. (Figures 2-3) Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-10 Seating Disassembly and Assembly. NOTE ONLY APPLIES TO STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE. REFER TO WARRANTY AND POLICY MANUAL FOR ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVER STAINS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 8685 092303A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303 2008-2009 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Front Seat Cushion Cover Includes Time To Reset The Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303C 2008-2009 Escape, 1.6 Hrs. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Cushion Covers Includes Time To Reset The Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303D 2008-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace One Front Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303E 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303F 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace One Rear Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, H, J, Or K) 092303G 2008-2009 Escape, 0.4 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Cushion Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, H, J, Or K) 092303H 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Rear Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 8686 With A, B, C, E, F, G) 092303J 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, D, E, F, And G) 092303K 2008-2009 Escape, 1.2 Hrs. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, D, F, And G) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7862901 D4 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers TSB 09-23-3 11/30/09 CLOTH SEAT STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/14/2009 (EXCLUDES XLS) FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles (excludes Mariner) equipped with Cloth seats (excludes XLS) and built on or before 5/14/2009, may exhibit stains with a white ring outline around them. An updated seat cover is now available to reduce this specific type of staining. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seat cover stain for a white ring outline. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 8692 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 8693 2. If the white ring stain is present, then replace the seat cover with latest level part. (Figures 2-3) Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-10 Seating Disassembly and Assembly. NOTE ONLY APPLIES TO STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE. REFER TO WARRANTY AND POLICY MANUAL FOR ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVER STAINS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 8694 092303A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303 2008-2009 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Front Seat Cushion Cover Includes Time To Reset The Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303C 2008-2009 Escape, 1.6 Hrs. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Cushion Covers Includes Time To Reset The Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303D 2008-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace One Front Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303E 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303F 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace One Rear Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, H, J, Or K) 092303G 2008-2009 Escape, 0.4 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Cushion Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, H, J, Or K) 092303H 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Rear Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 8695 With A, B, C, E, F, G) 092303J 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, D, E, F, And G) 092303K 2008-2009 Escape, 1.2 Hrs. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, D, F, And G) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7862901 D4 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats Seat Cover: Service and Repair Front Seats Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 8698 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 8699 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Seat Backrest Cover - Front Seat Backrest Cover - Front Removal and Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 8700 WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures portion of Air Bag Systems. 2. Press the buttons and remove the head restraint. 3. NOTE: The head restraint guides are not interchangeable. Pull and remove the 2 head restraint guides. 4. If equipped, remove the lumbar adjust knob. 5. Release the J-clip at the bottom of the front seat backrest cover. 6. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector and route through the elastic loop in the backrest trim cover. 7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam. Partially invert the backrest cover up to the side air bag. - Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 8. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 8701 9. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute must not be repaired. If there is any damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Pull the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips through the opening in the backrest foam pad. Note positioning of the deployment chute for correct installation. 10. Invert and remove the backrest trim cover. 11. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and closed, the seat side air bag module may not deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 12. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures portion of Air Bag Systems. Seat Cushion Cover - Front Seat Cushion Cover - Front Removal and Installation NOTICE: Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to Air Bag Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure. All seats 1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front. 2. Remove the front seat cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Front See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat Cushion. 3. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 8702 Release the J-clips and remove the cushion trim cover. - Separate the hook-and-loop strips. - If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for correct installation. 4. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front. Passenger seat 6. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset. 7. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 8. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in Air Bag Systems. 9. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 8703 SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 8704 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Rear Seat Backrest Cover Seat Backrest Cover - Rear NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Rear See: Service and Repair/Rear Seat - Exploded View. 1. Remove the rear seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Rear See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat Backrest. 2. Remove the head restraint(s). 3. Remove the 2 screws and latch cover. 4. Remove the 2 seat latch release handle screws. 5. Remove the seat latch release handle. 1. Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release handle. - To aid installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before connecting the latch rod. 2. Remove the seat latch release handle. 6. Release the backrest cover J-clip. 7. Unzip the backrest trim cover zipper. 8. NOTE: The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable. Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint guide and remove from the backrest frame. - Note the alignment tab position for correct installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 8705 9. If 60 percent backrest, remove the 2 screws and safety belt shield. 10. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam pad. Separate the hook-and-loop strips and remove the seat backrest trim cover. 11. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Seat Cushion: Removal and Replacement Front Seat Cushion Seat Cushion - Front Removal and Installation NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front. All seats 1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front. Passenger seat 2. NOTE: To identify between a production Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: If removing a production OCS system or an OCS system service kit, refer to the appropriate procedure in Air Bag Systems. Disconnect the OCS wiring harness. For an original equipment OCS system, disconnect the OCSM and pressure sensor electrical connectors. - For an OCS system service kit, disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. Heated seat 3. Disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector. - Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest cover. 4. Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector. 5. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame. All seats 6. Detach all wiring harness pin-type retainers from the seat cushion frame. - Note wiring harness routing for correct installation. 7. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 8. Remove the seat cushion. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 10. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8710 additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front. Passenger seat 11. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the OCS system reset. 12. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 13. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in Air Bag Systems. 14. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and OCSM using a scan tool. Rear Seat Cushion Cover Seat Cushion Cover - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. - Position the seat cushion forward. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8711 - Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward. 2. Unzip the cushion cover zipper. 3. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Invert and remove the cushion cover. 4. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8712 Seat Cushion: Overhaul Seat Cushion - Driver Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual similar. Disassembly 1. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Front. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8713 2. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track. - Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. - Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector(s). - Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness. - If equipped, disconnect the power seat track electrical connector and detach the wiring harness. - Detach the seat harness electrical connector from the seat track. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and seat track. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. If equipped, disconnect the cushion heater mat electrical connector. 6. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Release the all the retainers and remove the cushion cover. 7. Remove the cushion foam pad. - If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for correct installation. 8. If equipped, release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame. - Disconnect the relay electrical connector. 9. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Side Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Side NOTE: Seat equipped with a production Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system shown. For OCS system service components, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit procedure in Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8714 Disassembly NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8715 Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to Air Bag Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure. NOTE: OCS system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM), are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. All seats 1. Remove the seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front. 2. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Front. 3. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track. - Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. - Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame. 4. NOTE: Note wiring harness routing for installation. Detach the seat harness electrical connector and wiring harness from the seat track. 5. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. 6. If equipped, disconnect the heated seat system components. - Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector. - Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame. - Disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector. Seat with original equipment Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system 7. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. Disconnect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1. Disconnect the OCSM electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. - Detach the wiring harness retainers and wiring harness from the cushion frame. 8. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Release all cushion cover retainers and remove the cushion cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8716 9. Remove the cushion foam pad. 10. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure off the bracket. 11. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM. 12. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame. 13. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion frame opening and remove as an assembly with the bladder. Seat with OCS system service kit 14. Disconnect the electrical connector and wiring clips. 1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCSM electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion frame. 15. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Release all cushion cover retainers and remove the cushion cover. 16. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure off the bracket. 17. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion frame. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8717 18. Remove the OCS. - Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors) through the seat cushion frame opening. Assembly All seats 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. Seat with original equipment OCS system 2. NOTICE: Failure to route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening can cause component failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure. Feed the OCS system components (pressure sensor and hose) through the opening in the seat cushion frame. 3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion frame. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame. 5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion frame bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket and install the rivets. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8718 - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the Restraints Control Module (RCM). 7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion frame. 8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Install the cushion cover and attach the retainers to the cushion frame. 9. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure. Position the seat cushion assembly to the seat track and install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 10. Install the wiring harness. 1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector. 2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. - Attach the wiring harness to the cushion frame. Seat with OCS system service kit 11. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion frame and support assembly for any foreign objects, before installing the OCS to the seat cushion frame. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Failure to route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening can cause component failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure. Route the OCS system service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and connectors) through the opening in the seat cushion frame. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8719 12. NOTE: When installing a service part OCS, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is not used. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the OCS system components to the seat cushion frame. 1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion frame bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 3. Install the rivets. 13. Install the cushion cover and attach the retainers to the seat cushion frame. 14. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure. Position the seat cushion assembly to the seat track and install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 15. NOTE: Do not tie strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose. - Connect the seat wire harness OCS system electrical connector to the service part OCS system electrical connector. - Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion frame. - Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8720 - Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safety aside. All seats 16. If equipped, connect the heated seat components. - Install the heated seat relay to the bracket on the cushion frame. - Connect the heated seat relay electrical connector. - Connect the cushion heater mat electrical connector and attach to the cushion frame. 17. Attach the seat electrical connector and wiring harness to the seat track. 18. Connect the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors. - Route the wiring harness between the seat track and cushion frame. - Attach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. 19. Install the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Front. 20. Install the seat. Do not prove out the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front. 21. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the OCS system reset. 22. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 23. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in Air Bag Systems. 24. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8721 - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and OCSM using a scan tool. Rear Seat Cushion Seat Cushion - Rear NOTE: RH (40 percent) shown, LH (60 percent) similar. Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. - Position the seat cushion forward. - Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8722 2. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Unzip the cushion cover zipper. 3. Invert and remove the cushion cover. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and cushion pivot upper link. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Remove the 2 cushion hinge floor bracket bolts and cushion support-to-floor bracket. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 6. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8727 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8728 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8729 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8730 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8731 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8732 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8733 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8734 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8735 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8736 Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8737 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8738 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8739 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8740 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8741 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8742 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8743 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8744 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8745 Seat Heater: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8746 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8747 Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 119-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8748 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8749 Seat Heater: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8750 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8751 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8755 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8756 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Relay, Passenger > Page 8761 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8764 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Driver Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8767 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8768 Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8769 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8774 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8775 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8776 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch Seat Control Switch Removal and Installation NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front. 1. Remove the recliner handle cover. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. 3. Remove the outboard side shield. - Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield. - Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the knob and seat control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Track Seat Track: Service and Repair Seat Track Seat Track Removal and Installation NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front. 1. Remove the front seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Front. 2. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track. - Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. - Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, detach the wiring harness from the seat track. - If driver seat, disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. - If equipped, disconnect the power seat motor electrical connector. - Detach the seat harness electrical connector from the seat track. Note wiring harness routing for correct installation. 4. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Track > Page 8781 Seat Track: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Track > Page 8782 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Track > Page 8783 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Console Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8792 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 8795 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8796 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8797 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8798 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Door Lock Control Switch NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior Door Handle Front. 2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8802 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8803 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8804 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8805 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8806 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Exterior Mirror Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH sail panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch. - Press the 2 retaining tabs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8810 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8811 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8812 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8813 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8814 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8815 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch Liftgate Release Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 8821 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8826 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8827 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8828 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch Seat Control Switch Removal and Installation NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front. 1. Remove the recliner handle cover. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. 3. Remove the outboard side shield. - Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield. - Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the knob and seat control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8832 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8833 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8834 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8838 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 8847 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 8853 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises TSB 09-5-8 03/23/09 ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009 and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF THE POWERTRAIN. 1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h). 2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting noise. 3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 8859 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 8865 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8866 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8867 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Insulation Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation Insulation Insulation Insulation is used as a sound-deadener to reduce exterior road and powertrain noises from the interior of the vehicle. Mastic insulators are also used as insulation. For information on the location of the mastic insulators, refer to Sound Deadeners and Insulators. See: Sound Deadeners and Insulators Insulation is installed: - under the roof. - above and below the instrument panel. - at the cowl side panels. - over the front and rear floor pans. - inside the A-, B-, D-pillar sections. - behind the rear quarter trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Insulation > Page 8872 Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation Sound Deadeners and Insulators SOUND DEADENERS AND INSULATORS WARNING: Always refer to Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) when handling chemicals and wear protective equipment as directed. Examples may include but are not limited to respirators and chemically resistant gloves. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: - Mastic is made of a combustible material and should be removed prior to carrying out welding procedures to the area. Heat zones from welding near the mastic can cause the mastic material to burn. - Corrosion protection must be restored to the area AFTER the mastic material is applied. Corrosion protection products may be wax based and loss of adhesion may occur. NOTE: - To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and insulators should be installed with the correct service replacement component. - The following illustrations serve as a reference to indicate mastic patch (butyl pad) locations. Additional insulators and sound deadeners are used beyond those indicated in the illustration. Sound Deadeners and Insulators Floor Pan Sound Deadeners NOTE: To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and insulators should be installed with the correct service replacement component. Sound deadeners in this illustration all use base part number 99P30A3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Insulation > Page 8873 Floor Pan Sound Deadeners Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Panel Grille Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers. 4. Remove the cowl end caps. 5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8888 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8889 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8894 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8900 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8901 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8906 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 8909 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front Door Glass Top Run - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front Door See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair/Window Glass - Front Door. 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts. - To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Remove the front door glass top run. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8918 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8919 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8925 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8926 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear Door Glass Top Run - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator Rear Door. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. 6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear > Page 8929 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8934 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 8937 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch Speed Control Switch Escape and Mariner shown, Hybrid similar Removal and Installation 1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch > Page 8945 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Deactivator Switch Speed Control Deactivator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn. 3. Remove the speed control deactivator switch. 4. NOTE: When installing the speed control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to the correct position. Do not pull up or push down on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the speed control deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8950 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 8953 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch Speed Control Switch Escape and Mariner shown, Hybrid similar Removal and Installation 1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch > Page 8961 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Deactivator Switch Speed Control Deactivator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn. 3. Remove the speed control deactivator switch. 4. NOTE: When installing the speed control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to the correct position. Do not pull up or push down on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the speed control deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: The Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) indicator is part of the upper instrument panel center finish panel. 1. NOTE: The ignition must be in the OFF position before disconnecting the PAD indicator electrical connector. Otherwise, a DTC will be set in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) memory and must be cleared before releasing the vehicle to the customer. Turn the ignition OFF and wait at least one minute. 2. NOTE: The passenger air bag module is not shown for clarity. Open and lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the PAD indicator electrical connector. - Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector. 3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the instrument panel upper center finish panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8970 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8971 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8972 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8973 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8974 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8975 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8976 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8977 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8978 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8979 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8980 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8981 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8982 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8983 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8984 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8985 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8986 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8987 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8988 Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 44-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8989 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Description and Operation Compass: Description and Operation Electronic Compass The compass display is incorporated into the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) for vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, the compass display is incorporated into the Audio Control Module (ACM). Refer to Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc. Vehicles With Navigation The compass signal originates from the Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna. No calibration or zone adjustment is available, as the compass heading is based on the GPS signal. Refer to Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc. The vehicle heading is displayed as a 1 or 2 character display located in the ACM and indicates the current direction of the vehicle (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW). Vehicles Without Navigation The compass signal originates from the compass module, which is integrated into the interior rear view mirror. Refer to Mirrors. The vehicle heading is displayed as a 1 or 2 character display located in the lower LH side of the FDIM and indicates the current direction of the vehicle (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW). The compass continuously re-calibrates due to changes in the magnetic field and remains accurate during most driving conditions. All Vehicles The MODE button that allows the driver to operate the calibration and zone setting procedures is located on the center bottom of the interior rear view mirror. The compass display is on with the key in the ON or START positions. When the key is first turned to the ON or START position, there is a momentary delay of approximately 6 seconds before the compass display illuminates. If the battery saver has been activated and the key is turned to ON or START, the momentary delay before the compass display illuminates is approximately 3 seconds. The compass display will turn off as soon as the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position. Compass Accuracy (without Navigation) Driving near power lines, or driving in the area of large iron or steel structures can temporarily change the compass heading. If the compass remains inaccurate after driving near such objects, calibrate the compass. Refer to Compass Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration. Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is 4 degrees between the adjacent zones and becomes noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting eliminates the error. Refer to Compass Zone Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment. Compass Accuracy (with Navigation) Driving near power lines, or driving in the area of large iron or steel structures have no effect on the compass heading. Compass calibration and compass zone setting procedures are not required if the vehicle is equipped with navigation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Compass: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Electronic Compass Inspection And Verification Electronic Compass Inspection and Verification NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: - Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8995 - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the FDIM and the Instrument Cluster (IC). 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8996 Compass: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Electronic Compass DTC Charts B2097 / U2013 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8997 Compass: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Electronic Compass Symptom Chart Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8998 Compass: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The Compass Is Inoperative Electronic Compass Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The Compass Is Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number NOTE: This pinpoint test is for vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, refer to Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc. Normal Operation The compass display (located in the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)) receives battery voltage from the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) through circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground for the FDIM is supplied through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The compass module provides vehicle directional inputs to the Instrument Cluster (IC), which sends the compass information to the FDIM over the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). The FDIM will display the compass direction according to the information that has been provided by the compass module to the IC. - DTC B2097 (Compass Module Failure) - sets when the IC attempts a self-test of the compass module and its associated circuits and a failure results. - DTC U2013 (Compass Module is Not Responding) - sets when the IC does not receive any communications from the compass module. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuses - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Compass module - FDIM (compass display) - IC PINPOINT TEST A: THE COMPASS IS INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK THE COMPASS DISPLAY - Ignition ON. - Check the compass display. - Does the compass display illuminate? Yes If the compass display illuminates with only 2 bars, GO to A3. If the compass display turns on, but it does not display all directions, or indicates CAL, Go To Pinpoint Test b. See: Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate No GO to A2. ------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK THE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION - Verify the vehicle is equipped with the compass feature. - Is the vehicle equipped with the compass feature? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8999 Yes REFER to Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc to diagnose the FDIM display. No RETURN the vehicle to the customer and ADVISE them the vehicle is not equipped with a compass display feature. ------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP41 (BU) FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the interior rear view mirror C9012-1, circuit CBP41 (BU), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to A4. No VERIFY the SJB fuse 41 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror C9012-3, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to A5. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- A5 CHECK CIRCUIT VMC31 (YE/GN) FOR AN OPEN OR A SHORT TO GROUND - Disconnect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9000 - Disconnect: IC C220. - Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror C9012-6, circuit VMC31 (YE/GN), harness side and the IC C220-16, circuit VMC31 (YE/GN), harness side; and between the interior rear view mirror C9012-6, circuit VMC31 (YE/GN), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and the IC, and greater than 10,000 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and ground? Yes GO to A6. No REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- A6 CHECK CIRCUIT VMC30 (BU/GY) FOR AN OPEN OR A SHORT TO GROUND - Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror C9012-7, circuit VMC30 (BU/GY), harness side and the IC C220-17, circuit VMC30 (BU/GY), harness side; and between the interior rear view mirror C9012-7, circuit VMC30 (BU/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and the IC, and greater than 10,000 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and ground? Yes GO to A7. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- A7 CHECK FOR DTC U2013 - Connect: Negative Battery Cable. - Connect: IC C220. - Connect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012. - Ignition ON. - Clear the DTCs. - Ignition OFF. - Ignition ON. - Wait 10 seconds. - Retrieve the IC DTCs. - Is DTC U2013 present? Yes INSTALL a new interior rear view mirror. ADJUST the zone setting. REFER to Compass Zone Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9001 Adjustment. CALIBRATE the compass. REFER to Compass Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to A8. ------------------------------------------------- A8 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION - Disconnect the IC connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new IC. RESET the parameters in both the IC and the PCM. REFER to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. PROGRAM the PATS keys into the new IC. REFER to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. CYCLE the ignition. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. CYCLE the ignition. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate Electronic Compass Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate NOTE: This pinpoint test is for vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, refer to Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc. Normal Operation The compass display (located in the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)) receives battery voltage from the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) through circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground for the compass display is supplied through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The compass module (integral to the interior rear view mirror) provides vehicle directional inputs to the Instrument Cluster (IC), which sends the compass information to the FDIM over the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). The FDIM will display the compass direction according to the information that has been provided by the compass module to the IC. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Magnetized vehicle - Compass zone setting - Compass calibration - Compass module PINPOINT TEST B: THE COMPASS IS INACCURATE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- B1 DEMAGNETIZE THE VEHICLE - Demagnetize the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Demagnetizing See: Adjustments/Vehicle Demagnetizing. - Does the compass operate correctly? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9002 Yes The compass is OK. The concern may have been caused by an incorrect zone setting, a magnetized vehicle, or the compass was out of calibration. No GO to B2. ------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE COMPASS ACCURACY - Position the vehicle and observe the compass display as follows: - Does the compass display as indicated? Yes The compass is OK. The concern may have been caused by an incorrect zone setting, a magnetized vehicle, or the compass was out of calibration. No INSTALL a new compass module. SET the zone. REFER to Compass Zone Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment. CALIBRATE the compass. REFER to Compass Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment Compass: Adjustments Compass Zone Adjustment Compass Zone Adjustment 1. Refer to the compass calibration zone map to select the correct compass zone setting for the geographic location of the vehicle. 2. With the ignition in the ON position, press and hold the MODE button (for approximately 5 seconds) until the display shows the current zone setting. Release the MODE button. 3. NOTE: After approximately 5 seconds, the compass display will exit the zone setting mode after the button has been released. Before the zone setting mode turns off (within 5 seconds), momentarily press and release the MODE button to increase the zone increment by one. Set the zone display number to match the vehicle geographical location on the compass calibration zone map. 4. Release the switch for 5 seconds to exit the zone setting mode. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 9005 Compass: Adjustments Vehicle Demagnetizing Vehicle Demagnetizing NOTICE: During demagnetizing, the demagnetizer coil pulls toward the vehicle. Place a cloth over the vehicle roof to protect the vehicle surface if contact occurs. Make sure the cloth covers the front third and the entire width of the roof. NOTE: The demagnetizing process requires the use of a demagnetizing coil commonly used by television repair technicians to demagnetize television tubes. NOTE: To demagnetize, use a constant circular motion over the vehicle roof. Do not turn off the demagnetizer while sweeping the vehicle roof to prevent remagnetizing ferrous materials contained in the vehicle. NOTE: During the demagnetizing process, make sure the phenolic surface of the tool (the side opposite the handle) is closest to the vehicle surface. 1. Demagnetize the front third of the vehicle roof. 1. Turn on the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from the vehicle. 2. Holding the demagnetizer no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) from the vehicle roof and starting on the passenger side, demagnetize the front third of the vehicle roof closest to the windshield using a constant circular motion. Keep the circle radius within 30 cm (12 in) while sweeping across the entire surface of the vehicle roof closest to the windshield. Continue the circular motion 4 times. 3. After the fourth pass and without stopping, move the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from the vehicle. 4. Turn the demagnetizer off. 2. Carry out the compass zone adjustment procedure. For additional information, refer to Compass Zone Adjustment See: Compass Zone Adjustment. 3. Carry out the compass calibration adjustment procedure. For additional information, refer to Compass Calibration See: Compass Calibration. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 9006 Compass: Adjustments Compass Calibration Compass Calibration NOTE: This procedure is applicable only to vehicles not equipped with navigation. 1. NOTE: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away from large metallic objects or structures. Switch off all non-essential electrical accessories (heated rear window, heater fan, A/C, map lamps, and wipers) and make sure all doors are closed. Start the vehicle. 2. NOTE: It is not possible to exit the CAL mode unless the vehicle is driven in circles. NOTE: While holding the MODE button down, the compass display will first enter the ZONE setting mode (after 5 seconds) and then after another 5 seconds (10 seconds total), the compass display will enter the CAL mode. Press and hold (for approximately 10 seconds) the MODE button until CAL appears in the display, then release the MODE button. 3. NOTE: If the CAL indicator does not turn off after the vehicle is driven in a circle at least 5 times, repeat the procedure. Drive the vehicle slowly at less than 5 km/h (3 mph) in a continuous circle until CAL disappears from the display and the compass heading is shown. 4. If the CAL message does not turn off within 5 circles (and the procedure has been repeated at least once), install a new compass module (integral to the interior rear view mirror). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9012 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9013 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition to OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. 8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9014 clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9015 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9016 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9017 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9018 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. - When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9019 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC) finish panel. 2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from behind. Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9026 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 9030 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Reset Procedure Oil Life Reset Message Center Configuration Oil Life Reset NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%. Oil Life Start Value Message Center Configuration Oil Life Start Value NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %. 3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence over again beginning at 100%. Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center displays the newly desired percent. 4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure > Page 9033 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement Message Center Switch Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel. Hybrid vehicles 2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside. All vehicles 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Check Fuel Cap Indicator The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines there is a concern in the EVAP system due to the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe not being sealed correctly. This is detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank after a fueling event. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module Engine Control Components Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 9041 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir Engine Control Components Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 9044 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 9045 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 9046 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 9047 7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9053 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9054 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition to OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams. 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. 8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9055 clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9056 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9057 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9058 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9059 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. - When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9060 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. - The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol. - The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately four seconds. - The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: - an emission-related concern and DTC exists. - the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL controlled through the communication link). - the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS). - The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or three consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern. - For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/No Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) Present Symptom Chart Index. - If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist. - If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low. - The MIL flashes after a period of time with the ignition in the RUN position (engine not running) if DTC P1000 is set. CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON, or ISO Standard Engine Symbol Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Oil Life An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center. USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS. To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change ( approximately 7,500 miles ( 12,000 km ) or 12 months ) perform the following: 1. Press and release the SETUP control to display "OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW". 2. Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds and release. Oil life is set to 100% and "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed. 3. While "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed, if a lower oil life is start value is desired , press and release the RESET control to reduce the start value. Each press of the RESET control reduces the value by 10 percent. Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles ( 12,000 km ) or 12 months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life start value to 4,500 miles ( 7,200 km ) and 108 days. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 9083 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 9084 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing. Remove the engine oil filter. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees. 3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the EOP switch. - To install, tighten to 14 Nm (124 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Outside Temperature Display: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Outside Temperature Display: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Outside Temperature Display: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Outside Temperature Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9104 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9105 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. - To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Service and Repair Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating Preparation 1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R). 2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual transaxle). 3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 4. Close all the vehicle doors. 5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts. Deactivating/Activating NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position. 1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute). 3. NOTE: Steps 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns off. For seating position being disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3 times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state. - After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds. 4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. - This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds. - This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds. 5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating Preparation 1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R). 2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual transaxle). 3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 4. Close all the vehicle doors. 5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts. Deactivating/Activating NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position. 1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute). 3. NOTE: Steps 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns off. For seating position being disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3 times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state. - After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds. 4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. - This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds. - This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds. 5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC) finish panel. 2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from behind. Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9133 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module Engine Control Components Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 9138 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir Engine Control Components Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 9141 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 9142 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 9143 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 9144 7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9148 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9149 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. - To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. NOTE: Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 9155 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 9156 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 9165 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 9168 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9169 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair Light Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9174 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9175 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9179 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9180 Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Reversing Lamp Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9185 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9186 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9187 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9188 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9189 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9190 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9191 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9192 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9193 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9194 Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9195 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9196 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9197 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9198 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9199 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9200 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9201 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9202 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9203 Brake Lamp: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9204 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9205 Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 90-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9206 90-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Stoplamps Principles Of Operation Stoplamps Principles of Operation NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). The Smart Junction Box (SJB) monitors the input from the stoplamp switch. When the brake pedal is applied, voltage is routed to the SJB and the high mounted stoplamp. The SJB then supplies voltage to the stoplamps. Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection Field-Effect Transistor (FET) is a type of transistor that when used with module software can be used to monitor and control current flow on module outputs. The FET protection strategy is used to prevent module damage in the event of excessive current flow. The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, a headlamp output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and are shut down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault event is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at the fault event and a cumulative counter is started. When the demand for the output is no longer present, the module resets the FET circuit protection to allow the circuit to function. The next time the driver requests a circuit to activate that has been shut down by a previous short (FET protection) and the circuit remains shorted, the FET protection shuts off the circuit again and the cumulative counter advances. When the excessive circuit load occurs often enough, the module shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out. Each FET protected circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance based on the harmful effect of each circuit fault on the FET and the ability of the FET to withstand it. A module lifetime level of fault events is established based upon the durability of the FET. If the total tolerance level is determined to be 600 fault events, the 3 predefined levels would be 200, 400 and 600 fault events. When each tolerance level is reached, the continuous DTC that was stored on the first failure cannot be cleared by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module does not allow this code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal operation until a successful self-test proves that the fault has been repaired. After the self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs present), DTC B106E and the associated continuous DTC (the DTC related to the shorted circuit) automatically clears and the circuit function returns. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC (associated with the short circuit) sets along with DTC B106E. These DTCs can be Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9209 cleared using the module on-demand self-test, then the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool (if the on-demand test shows the fault corrected). The module never resets the fault event counter to zero and continues to advance the fault event counter as short circuit fault events occur. If the number of short circuit fault events reach the third level, then DTCs B106F and B1342 set along with the associated continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and the module must be replaced. The SJB FET protected output circuits for the stoplamp system are the LH rear stop/turn lamp and the RH rear stop/turn lamp output circuits. Inspection And Verification Stoplamps Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: - Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus. - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart See: Testing and Inspection. For all other DTCs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9210 Brake Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Stoplamps Symptom Chart Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9211 Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test I: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative Stoplamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test I: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The stoplamp switch is supplied voltage through circuit SBP02 (YE/RD) from the Smart Junction Box (SJB). When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage back to the SJB and the high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). The SJB provides voltage to the rear lamps when it receives input from the stoplamp switch indicating that the brake pedal is applied. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Stoplamp switch - SJB PINPOINT TEST I: ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- I1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C278. - Measure the voltage between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to I2. No VERIFY the SJB fuse 2 (15A) is OK. If OK, GO to I3. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. ------------------------------------------------- I2 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH - Connect a fused jumper wire between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side and the stoplamp switch C278-4, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9212 - Are the stoplamps illuminated? Yes INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to Stoplamp Switch See: Brake Light Switch/Service and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation. No REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- I3 CHECK CIRCUIT SBP02 (YE/RD) FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: SJB C2280d. - Measure the resistance between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side and the SJB C2280d-13, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to I4. No REPAIR SBP02 (YE/RD) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- I4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION - Disconnect all the SJB connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test J: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9213 Stoplamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test J: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). When the SJB detects the brake pedal is applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps through circuits CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. Ground for the LH and RH rear stoplamps is provided through circuit GD149 (BK/GY). Ground for the high mounted stoplamp is provided through circuit GD183 (BK/WH). NOTE: SJB fuse 6 (20A) supplies voltage for both combination rear stop/turn lamps and both front turn lamps. B106E-B2047 This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - High mounted stoplamp - Bulb holder - SJB PINPOINT TEST J: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- J1 DETERMINE THE INOPERATIVE STOPLAMP - Ignition OFF. - Apply the brake pedal and observe the stoplamps. - Are all the stoplamps inoperative? Yes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9214 Go To Pinpoint Test H. See: Headlamp/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Autolamps/Pinpoint Test H: The Autolamps Are On Continuously No For the high mounted stoplamp, GO to J2. If only one side (the LH or RH rear stoplamp) is inoperative, GO to J6. If both sides (LH and RH rear stoplamps) are inoperative, VERIFY the SJB fuse 6 (20A) is OK. If OK, GO to J4. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. After the repair: If no DTCs are present, TEST the system for normal operation. If DTC B106E is present, CLEAR the DTCs and REPEAT the self-test (required to enable the stoplamp output driver if DTC B106E is present). TEST the system for normal operation. If DTC B106F is present, INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- J2 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HIGH MOUNTED STOPLAMP - Disconnect: High Mounted Stoplamp C475. - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the high mounted stoplamp C475-1, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to J3. No REPAIR CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- J3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HIGH MOUNTED STOPLAMP USING THE CONNECTOR GROUND - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the high mounted stoplamp C475-1, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side and the high mounted stoplamp C475-2, circuit GD183 (BK/WH), harness side. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes INSTALL a new high mounted stoplamp. TEST the system for normal operation. No Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9215 REPAIR circuit GD183 (BK/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- J4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LH STOPLAMP - Disconnect: LH Rear Lamp C4035. - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to J5. ------------------------------------------------- J5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SJB - Disconnect: SJB C2280b. - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the SJB C2280b-40, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to J11. No REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- J6 USE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB SELF-TEST - Clear the DTCs and repeat the on-demand self-test. - Is DTC B2045 or DTC B2047 present? Yes GO to J7. No GO to J10. ------------------------------------------------- J7 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE BULB HOLDER - Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Lamp. - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9216 - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to J8. No GO to J9. ------------------------------------------------- J8 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE INOPERATIVE STOPLAMP USING THE CONNECTOR GROUND - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and the LH rear lamp C4035-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and the RH rear lamp C4032-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes INSTALL a new bulb holder. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. No REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- J9 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS18 (GY/BN) OR CIRCUIT CLS19 (VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: SJB C2280d. - Measure the resistance between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and the SJB C2280d-25, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and the SJB C2280d-26, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side. Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to J12. No REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- J10 CHECK THE BULB HOLDER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9217 - Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Lamp. - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Self-Test. - Clear the DTCs and repeat the self-test (required to enable the turn lamp output driver if DTC B106E is present). - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes INSTALL a new bulb holder. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to J11. ------------------------------------------------- J11 CHECK THE SJB STOPLAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: SJB C2280d. - Disconnect: LH and RH Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relays. - Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280d-25, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the SJB C2280d-26, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms? Yes GO to J12. No REPAIR circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) (LH rear stoplamp) or circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) (RH rear stoplamp) for a short to ground. After the repair: If no DTCs are present, TEST the system for normal operation. If DTC B106E is present, CLEAR the DTCs and REPEAT the self-test (required to enable the turn lamp output driver if DTC B106E is present). TEST the system for normal operation. If DTC B106F is present, INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- J12 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION - Disconnect all the SJB connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9218 - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test K: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously Stoplamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test K: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the Smart Junction Box (SJB), the high mounted stoplamp, the PCM and the speed control actuator through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). When the SJB detects the brake pedal is applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps through circuits CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. If equipped with trailer tow, voltage is also supplied to the respective trailer tow stop/turn relay. - DTC B1485 (Brake Pedal Input Short to Battery) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage from the stoplamp switch input circuit. - DTC B2045 (Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage from the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. - DTC B2047 (Right Rear Stoplamp Circuit Open) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage from the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Stoplamp switch - PCM - SJB PINPOINT TEST K: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY ------------------------------------------------- K1 DETERMINE IF ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE ILLUMINATED - Ignition OFF. - Observe the stoplamps with the brake pedal released. - Are all of the stoplamps illuminated? Yes GO to K3. No GO to K2. ------------------------------------------------- K2 CHECK THE STOPLAMPS VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE - Disconnect: SJB C2280d. - Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9219 Yes If the LH rear lamp continues to illuminate, REPAIR circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) for a short to voltage. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If the RH rear lamp continues to illuminate, REPAIR circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) for a short to voltage. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. No GO to K7. ------------------------------------------------- K3 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH - Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C278. - Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate? Yes GO to K4 . No INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to Stoplamp Switch See: Brake Light Switch/Service and Repair. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- K4 CHECK THE PCM - Disconnect: PCM C175b. - Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate? Yes GO to K5. No GO to K6. ------------------------------------------------- K5 CHECK CIRCUIT CCB08 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE - Disconnect: SJB C2280b. Does the high mounted stoplamp continue to illuminate? Yes REPAIR circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) for a short to voltage. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. No GO to K7. ------------------------------------------------- K6 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION - Disconnect all the PCM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9220 INSTALL a new PCM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- K7 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION - Disconnect all the SJB connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set TSB 09-15-1 08/10/09 TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light, a slight brake drag condition may be observed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement. NOTE DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH CAN OCCUR. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set TSB 09-15-1 08/10/09 TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light, a slight brake drag condition may be observed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement. NOTE DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH CAN OCCUR. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9234 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9235 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9236 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9237 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Stoplamp Switch Removal and Installation NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur. 1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. 2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Cargo Lamp: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9251 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Daytime Running Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9256 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9257 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9258 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9259 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9260 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9261 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9262 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9263 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9264 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9265 Daytime Running Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9266 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9267 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9268 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9269 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9270 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9271 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9273 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9274 Daytime Running Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 97-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9275 97-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Daytime Running Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Principles Of Operation Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Principles of Operation NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). NOTE: When installing a new SJB, it must be configured for this feature, if originally equipped. Refer to Information Bus. The SJB controls the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) by using various inputs to determine whether or not the DRL should be illuminated. These inputs include: - Ignition switch position - Headlamp switch position - Headlamps on or off - Transmission gear selection (automatic transmission) - Parking brake applied or released (manual transmission) When the DRL is active, the SJB provides a pulse-width modulated voltage to the low beam headlamps. This illuminates the headlamps at a reduced intensity. The SJB can be configured to turn the DRL on for this vehicle. Refer to Information Bus for additional information on this programmable parameter. Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Inspection And Verification Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 3. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 4. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: - Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. 5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9278 - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM. 6. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus. - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 7. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM, the Smart Junction Box (SJB), and the Instrument Cluster (IC). 8. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Computers and Control Systems Information or Body Control Systems. 9. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9279 Daytime Running Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Symptom Chart Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9280 Daytime Running Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test AC: The Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Are Inoperative Normal Operation When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the headlamps are not on (from the autolamp system or manual control from the headlamp switch), the transaxle is not in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or the parking brake is not applied (manual transaxle), the Smart Junction Box (SJB) provides a pulse-width modulated voltage to the low beam headlamps. This illuminates the headlamps at a reduced intensity. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Exterior lighting system input/output - Ignition switch input - Transaxle gear input (automatic transaxle) - Parking brake switch input (manual transaxle) - SJB PINPOINT TEST AC: THE DRL ARE INOPERATIVE ------------------------------------------------- AC1 VERIFY THE DRL OPERATION - Ignition ON. - Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. - If equipped with an automatic transaxle, place the gear selector lever in any gear other than PARK (P). - If equipped with a manual transaxle, release the parking brake. Do the DRL illuminate? Yes The system is operating correctly. INFORM the customer of the conditions required for the DRL to operate correctly. No GO to AC2. ------------------------------------------------- AC2 CHECK FOR RECORDED SJB DTCs - Review the recorded results from the SJB self-test. - Are any DTCs present? Yes REFER to Body Control Systems. No GO to AC3. ------------------------------------------------- AC3 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE HEADLAMPS - Place the headlamp switch in each of its positions (including autolamps if equipped) and observe the headlamps. - Do the headlamps and autolamps (if equipped) operate correctly? Yes GO to AC4. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9281 No REFER to Headlamps See: Headlamp/Testing and Inspection or Autolamps See: Headlamp/Testing and Inspection. ------------------------------------------------- AC4 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH INPUT - Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger. - Monitor the SJB ignition switch PID (IGN_A_ECU, IGN_O_ECU, IGN_R_ECU) while cycling the ignition switch through all positions (states). - Does the PID agree with the ignition switch positions? Yes For vehicles with an automatic transaxle, GO to AC5. For vehicles with a manual transaxle, GO to AC6. No REFER to Steering Column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Testing and Inspection ------------------------------------------------- AC5 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE GEAR INPUT - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger. - Monitor the PCM transmission gear status PID (TR) while placing the gear selector lever through all its positions. - Does the PID agree with the gear selection? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation. No Refer to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection ------------------------------------------------- AC6 CHECK THE BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR OPERATION - Ignition ON. - Apply and release the parking brake while observing the brake warning indicator. - Does the brake warning indicator operate correctly? Yes GO to AC7 No REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. ------------------------------------------------- AC7 CHECK THE SJB FOR DRL CONFIGURATION - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Module Programming. - Check the SJB configuration and make sure the DRL feature is enabled. - Is the SJB DRL configuration enabled? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation. No Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9282 ENABLE the DRL configuration. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9283 Daytime Running Lamp: Adjustments Autolamps Time Delay Adjustment NOTE: The time delay can be programmed through the instrument cluster message center using the message center buttons (if equipped) or using the following steps. NOTE: Steps 2 through 5 must be carried out within a 10-second period. 1. Start with the ignition switch off and the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position. 2. Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. 3. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. 4. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 5. Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position. The exterior lamps turn on at this point. 6. Wait the desired amount of time and place the headlamp switch in the OFF position (maximum of 3 minutes). The exterior lamps turn off and the autolamp time delay is now set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC) finish panel. 2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from behind. Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Dome Lamp: Service and Repair Interior Lamp Removal and Installation 1. Open the overhead console storage door to access the screws. - Remove the 2 screws. 2. Pull the overhead console down and remove the console from the headliner retainer. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9293 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Fog Lamp Bulb Mariner Escape Removal and Installation WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTICE: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed. NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9298 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Escape 2. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. - Position the fender splash shield aside. 4. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connector. 5. Squeeze both tabs on the fog lamp bulb simultaneously and remove it from the fog lamp. Mariner 6. Rotate the fog lamp bulb approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove. - Disconnect the electrical connector. All vehicles 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Hazard Warning Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9303 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9304 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9305 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9306 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9307 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9308 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9309 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9310 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9311 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9312 Hazard Warning Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9313 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9314 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9315 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9316 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9317 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9318 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9319 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9320 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9321 Hazard Warning Lamps: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 90-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9322 90-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb Removal and Installation WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTICE: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed. NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position. 1. Disconnect the headlamp bulb electrical connector. 2. Rotate the headlamp bulb one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove the headlamp bulb. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9330 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 9333 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9334 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9335 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9336 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9340 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9341 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9342 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9343 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Headlamp Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9351 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9352 Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center console finish panel. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9357 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9358 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9359 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9360 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9361 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9362 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9363 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9364 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9365 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9366 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9367 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9368 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9369 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9370 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9371 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9372 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9373 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9374 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9375 License Plate Lamp: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9376 License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9377 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Marker Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9382 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9383 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9384 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9385 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9386 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9387 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9388 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9389 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9390 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9391 Marker Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9392 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9393 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9394 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9395 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9396 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9397 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9398 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9399 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9400 Marker Lamp: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9401 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9402 Marker Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9403 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9404 Marker Lamp: Service and Repair Side Lamp/Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Side Lamp (Escape) Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9405 Removal and Installation Front turn signal lamp 1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector. 2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly. - Separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Side lamp 3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the screw and position the fender splash shield aside. 7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly. 8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder. Front turn signal lamp or side lamp 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Parking Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9410 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9411 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9412 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9413 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9414 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9415 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9416 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9417 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9418 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9419 Parking Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9420 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9421 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9422 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9423 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9424 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9425 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9426 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9427 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9428 Parking Lamp: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9429 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9430 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9431 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9432 Parking Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9433 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Parking Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Principles Of Operation Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps Principles of Operation NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). The SJB monitors the headlamp switch position by sending voltage reference signals on multiple circuits to the headlamp switch. There is one circuit for each headlamp switch position. At any given time, one of the signal circuits is routed to ground. If the SJB does not detect any of the inputs to the headlamp switch is active (routed to ground) for 5 seconds, the SJB turns on the exterior lights and keeps them on for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off (or 10 minutes from the time the SJB does not detect any headlamp switch input if the ignition switch was already off). Additionally, if the SJB detects multiple circuits short to ground, the SJB implements a planned strategy depending on the multiple inputs received. Based on the multiple inputs received, the autolamps, the headlamps and/or parking lamps are turned on. If either of these situations occur, the SJB cannot be ruled immediately as being at fault. This is normal behavior of the SJB design as it has detected a fault with the inputs from the headlamp switch. When the SJB receives an input from the headlamp switch indicating a request for the parking lamps, the SJB energizes the parking lamp relay, which supplies voltage to the exterior lamps. Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps Inspection And Verification Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9436 Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: - Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus. - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart See: Testing and Inspection. For all other DTCs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9437 Parking Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps Symptom Chart Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9438 Parking Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Q: The Parking, Rear Or License Plate Lamps Are On Continuously Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Q: The Parking, Rear Or License Plate Lamps Are On Continuously Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 92 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Parking, Rear and License Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Smart Junction Box (SJB) monitors the parking lamp request input from the headlamp switch through circuit CLS05 (BU/GY). The SJB provides a ground for the parking lamp relay coil (integral to the SJB) when a request for the parking lamps is received. When the parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) to the rear and front parking lamps. - DTC B1578 (Lamp Park Input Circuit Short to Ground) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground from the parking lamps on input circuit. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Headlamp switch - SJB PINPOINT TEST Q: THE PARKING, REAR OR LICENSE PLATE LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY ------------------------------------------------- Q1 USE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB SELF-TEST - Check the recorded results from the SJB self-test. - Was DTC B1578 recorded? Yes GO to Q2. No GO to Q4. ------------------------------------------------- Q2 CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Headlamp Switch C205. - Carry out the headlamp switch component test. - Is the headlamp switch OK? Yes GO to Q3. No INSTALL a new headlamp switch. REFER to Headlamp Switch See: Headlamp/Headlamp Switch/Service and Repair. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- Q3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS05 (BU/GY) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9439 - Disconnect: SJB C2280b. - Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch C205-5, circuit CLS05 (BU/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms? Yes GO to Q6. No REPAIR circuit CLS05 (BU/GY) for a short to ground. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- Q4 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE (TO REAR LAMPS) - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: SJB C2280d. - Ignition ON. - Do the rear parking lamps continue to illuminate? Yes REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to Q5. ------------------------------------------------- Q5 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE (TO FRONT LAMPS) - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: SJB C2280e. - Ignition ON. - Do the front parking lamps continue to illuminate? Yes REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to Q6. ------------------------------------------------- Q6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect all the SJB connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9440 - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test P: One Or More Parking, Rear Or License Plate Lamps Are Inoperative Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test P: One Or More Parking, Rear or License Plate Lamps Are Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 92 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Parking, Rear and License Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation When the headlamp switch is placed in the PARKING LAMPS ON position, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) energizes the parking lamp relay (integrated into the SJB). When the parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) to the rear and front parking lamps. Ground is provided to the rear parking and license plate lamps through circuit GD149 (BK/GY). Ground is provided to the front parking and side marker lamps through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Bulb holder - SJB PINPOINT TEST P: ONE OR MORE PARKING, REAR OR LICENSE PLATE LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- P1 DETERMINE IF ALL THE PARKING LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - Ignition OFF. - Place the headlamp switch to the PARKING LAMPS ON position. - Are all the parking lamps inoperative? Yes PLACE the headlamp switch in the OFF position. VERIFY the SJB fuse 22 (15A) is OK. If OK, GO to P6. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. No If all the front parking lamps are inoperative, GO to P2. If all the rear parking and license plate lamps are inoperative, GO to P3. For all others, GO to P4. ------------------------------------------------- P2 CHECK THE SJB FRONT PARKING LAMPS OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN (REAR LAMPS) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9441 - Disconnect: SJB C2280e. - Connect a fused jumper wire between the SJB C2280e-1, circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side and the SJB C2280e-6, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), harness side. - Ignition ON. - Do the front parking lamps illuminate? Yes REMOVE the jumper wire. GO to P6. No REMOVE the jumper wire. REPAIR circuit CLS32 (BN/YE) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- P3 CHECK THE SJB REAR PARKING LAMPS OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN (REAR LAMPS) - Disconnect: SJB C2280d. - Connect a fused jumper wire between the positive battery terminal and the SJB C2280d-20, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), harness side Do the rear parking lamps illuminate? Yes REMOVE the jumper wire. GO to P6. No REMOVE the jumper wire. REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- P4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE INOPERATIVE PARKING LAMP - Disconnect: Inoperative Lamp. - Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position. - Measure the voltage between the inoperative lamp, harness side and ground as follows: - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9442 Yes For the license plate lamps, REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. For all others, GO to P5. No REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) or (RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- P5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE INOPERATIVE PARKING LAMP USING THE CONNECTOR GROUND - Measure the voltage between the inoperative lamp pins, harness side as follows: - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes INSTALL a new bulb holder. TEST the system for normal operation. No REPAIR the ground circuit in question for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- P6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION - Disconnect all the SJB connectors. - Check for: - corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9447 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9448 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9452 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9453 Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center console finish panel. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9458 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9459 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9462 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9463 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9464 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9465 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9466 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 9472 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 9475 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9476 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair Light Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9480 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9481 Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Reversing Lamp Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set TSB 09-15-1 08/10/09 TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light, a slight brake drag condition may be observed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement. NOTE DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH CAN OCCUR. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set TSB 09-15-1 08/10/09 TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009 FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light, a slight brake drag condition may be observed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement. NOTE DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH CAN OCCUR. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9495 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9496 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9497 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9498 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Stoplamp Switch Removal and Installation NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur. 1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. 2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Console Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9505 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9509 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 9512 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9513 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9514 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9515 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9519 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9520 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9521 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9522 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Headlamp Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9529 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9533 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9534 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9535 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9540 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9541 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9542 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9543 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9544 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9545 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9546 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9547 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9548 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9549 Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9550 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9551 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9552 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9553 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9554 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9555 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9556 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9557 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9558 Tail Lamp: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9559 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9560 Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9561 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9566 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9567 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9568 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9569 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9570 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9571 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9572 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9573 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9574 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9575 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9576 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9577 Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9578 Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9579 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9580 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9581 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9582 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9583 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9584 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9585 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Trailer Lamps Principles of Operation Trailer Lamps Principles of Operation The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. They are energized to correspond with the exterior lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the trailer lamps. Inspection and Verification Trailer Lamps Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9588 Trailer Lamps: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Trailer Lamps Symptom Chart Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9589 Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Y: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Y: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The trailer tow connector receives ground through circuits RAT08 (WH) and GD149 (BK/GY) for all of the trailer lamps. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer PINPOINT TEST Y: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- Y1 CHECK CIRCUITS RAT08 (WH) AND GD149 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Measure the resistance between the trailer tow C439-4, circuit RAT08 (WH), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. No REPAIR circuit RAT08 (WH) or circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Z: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Z: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow stop/turn relays. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9590 grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE). The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow stop/turn relay - Trailer PINPOINT TEST Z: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER STOP/TURN LAMP NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- Z1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT06 (YE) OR CIRCUIT CAT09 (GN) FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground. - For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. No GO to Z2. ------------------------------------------------- Z2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY - Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relay. - Substitute a know good relay. - For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9591 - For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow stop/turn relay. TEST the system for normal operation. No REMOVE the known good relay. GO to Z3. ------------------------------------------------- Z3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS18 (GY/BN) OR CIRCUIT CLS19 (VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 2, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 2, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to Z4. No REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Z4 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB14 (BN/RD) FOR AN OPEN - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to Z5. No Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9592 VERIFY the BJB fuse 14 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB14 (BN/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. ------------------------------------------------- Z5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Measure the resistance between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH trailer stop/turn) or circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH trailer stop/turn) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. No REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow parking lamp relay - Trailer PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- AA1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT11 (BN) FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9593 - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. No GO to AA2. ------------------------------------------------- AA2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY - Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay. - Substitute a known good relay. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow parking lamp relay. TEST the system for normal operation. No REMOVE the known good relay. GO to AA3. ------------------------------------------------- AA3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN - Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 2, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to AA4. No REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9594 ------------------------------------------------- AA4 CHECK THE SBB08 (VT/RD) FOR AN OPEN - Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to AA5. No VERIFY the BJB fuse 8 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. ------------------------------------------------- AA5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Measure the resistance between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes REPAIR circuit CAT11 (BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. No REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Turn/Stoplamp Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9595 The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE). The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN). Trailer Tow Parking The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow relay - Trailer PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY ------------------------------------------------- AB1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows: - Is any voltage present? Yes GO to AB2. No The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. ------------------------------------------------- AB2 CHECK THE SUSPECT RELAY - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Relay. - Carry out the component test for the suspect trailer tow relay. - Is the trailer tow relay OK? Yes REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH turn), circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH turn), or circuit CAT11 (BN) (parking lamps) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation. No Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9596 INSTALL a new turn trailer tow relay. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9601 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9602 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9605 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9606 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9607 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9608 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9609 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Side Lamp/Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Side Lamp (Escape) Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9615 Removal and Installation Front turn signal lamp 1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector. 2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly. - Separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Side lamp 3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the screw and position the fender splash shield aside. 7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly. 8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder. Front turn signal lamp or side lamp 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9619 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9620 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9621 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp, Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp, Left > Page 9626 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9632 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9633 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9638 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9639 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9645 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9646 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9647 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 9650 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 9651 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 9652 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9655 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9656 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9657 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9658 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9659 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9660 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Window Control Switch Removal and Installation NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar. NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. 1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9673 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9674 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9675 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 9678 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 9679 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 9680 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9683 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9684 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9685 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9686 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9687 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9688 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Window Control Switch Removal and Installation NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar. NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. 1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9699 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9700 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 9705 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9711 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9712 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 9717 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 9720 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front Door Glass Top Run - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front Door See: Service and Repair/Window Glass Front Door. 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts. - To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Remove the front door glass top run. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Window Glass - Liftgate Removal and Installation 1. Open the liftgate window glass. 2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers. 3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector. 4. Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector. 5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders. 1. Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket. 2. Disconnect the socket from the ball stud. 6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Window Glass - Rear Quarter Removal LH rear quarter window glass 1. If equipped, remove the auxiliary climate control housing. 2. If equipped, remove the bolt and the auxiliary climate control upper housing bracket. All rear quarter window glass 3. Remove the headliner. 4. Before cutting the urethane adhesive, remove dirt and other foreign material from the pinch weld area. - Use a clean shop towel or oil-free, compressed air. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9727 5. Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool when cutting. 6. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: To avoid rust formation, use extreme care not to scratch the paint or primer or otherwise damage the pinch weld during glass removal. NOTE: Locating pins need to be cut through in order to remove the rear quarter window glass. The new quarter window glass will be equipped with new locating pins. Using the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the quarter window glass starting at the top center and working toward the bottom corners and remove the rear quarter window glass. 7. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld. Installation All rear quarter window glass 1. Dry fit the rear quarter window glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil. 2. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural component of the vehicle. Corrosion left unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. Repair all minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch weld following manufacturer's instructions. Use the same brand pinch weld primer, glass primer and urethane adhesive. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm to 2 mm (0.04 in to 0.08 in) base of original equipment urethane adhesive on the pinchweld. 3. Using a clean shop towel, brush or oil-free compressed air, clean the pinch weld area around the existing urethane adhesive. Remove any foreign material or water that may have entered during glass removal. 4. If installing the original rear quarter window glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive. 5. Clean the inside of the rear quarter window glass with glass cleaner. 6. NOTICE: If installing a LH rear quarter window on the Escape Hybrid, do not apply urethane glass prep to the polycarbonate vent of the window assembly. NOTE: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the urethane adhesive and glass primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane adhesive and glass primer. For additional information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure. If installing a new rear window glass, apply glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions. Allow at least 6 minutes to dry. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9728 7. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. 8. NOTE: The rear quarter glass must be positioned within 10 minutes of applying the urethane adhesive. NOTE: Use caution when applying urethane adhesive. Apply to the outside edges of locating pins on the glass surface. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead. Apply a bead of urethane adhesive starting at the bottom and work around to the sides of the rear quarter window glass to specification, making sure there are no gaps in the bead. 9. WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane adhesive seal has cured. Follow urethane adhesive manufacturer's curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane adhesive seal will adversely affect glass retention. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). NOTICE: Before positioning the rear quarter window glass, open vehicle windows to prevent the air pressure of closing doors from affecting the urethane adhesive bond. Install the rear quarter window glass, aligning it to the marks previously made. 10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or water leaks. After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed. 11. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the quarter window glass. 12. Install the headliner. LH quarter window glass 13. If equipped, install the auxiliary climate control upper housing bracket and the bolt. 14. If equipped, install the auxiliary climate control housing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9738 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9739 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9745 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9746 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear Door Glass Top Run - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Window Regulator/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator - Rear Door. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. 6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear > Page 9749 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 9755 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Front Door Window Regulator - Front Door Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly. 4. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield to the inner door. Position the watershield aside. 5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front door window glass screws. 7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 8. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 9. Support the front door window glass in the full UP position with tape. 10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector. 11. Remove the front door window regulator and motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 9756 12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door 1. For additional information, refer to the procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 9761 Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Rear Door Window Regulator - Rear Door Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield to the inner door. Position the watershield aside. 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear door window glass screws. 6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full UP position with tape. 9. Disconnect the rear door window motor electrical connector. 10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 9762 - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Glass Windshield: Service and Repair Windshield Glass Windshield Glass Removal 1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. 2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Glass > Page 9767 3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the interior rear view mirror. 5. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors. 6. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material. 7. Remove the cowl panel grille. 8. Before cutting the urethane adhesive, remove dirt and other foreign material from the windshield pinch weld area. - Use a clean shop towel or oil-free, compressed air. 9. Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool when cutting. 10. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: To avoid rust formation, use extreme care not to scratch the paint or primer or otherwise damage the pinch weld during glass removal. NOTE: Insert the blade into the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool so that the flat side is against the glass. This will leave the entire urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld and allow a dry fit of the replacement windshield glass. Insert the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool at the upper center of the windshield glass and work toward the bottom corners. 11. Using The Pumper, distance the windshield glass from the body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Glass > Page 9768 12. Using the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the windshield glass. 13. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld. Installation 1. Dry-fit the new windshield glass on the existing urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld. - Position the windshield glass on the pinch weld. - Center the windshield glass in the opening. - Adjust the windshield glass stop blocks (if equipped) as needed for best fit. - Make alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil (preferably at the windshield glass stop blocks if equipped) on the windshield glass and the body. 2. After the dry-fit alignment, remove the glass from the windshield opening and place on a stable work surface with the interior side of the glass facing up. 3. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural component of the vehicle. Corrosion left unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. Repair all minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch weld following manufacturer's instructions. Use the same brand pinch weld, glass primer and urethane adhesive. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm to 2 mm (0.04 in to 0.08 in) base of original equipment urethane adhesive on the pinchweld. 4. Using a clean shop towel, brush or oil-free, compressed air, clean the pinch weld area around the existing urethane adhesive. Remove any foreign material or water that may have entered during windshield removal. 5. If reinstalling the same windshield glass, remove the windshield moulding and remaining urethane adhesive from the glass leaving a thin layer to bond with the new urethane adhesive bead. 6. Clean the inside of the new windshield glass with glass cleaner. 7. NOTE: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the urethane adhesive and glass primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane adhesive and glass primer. For additional information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure. If installing a new windshield glass, apply glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions. Allow at least 6 minutes to dry. 8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Glass > Page 9769 9. NOTE: The windshield glass must be positioned within 10 minutes of applying the urethane adhesive. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld, starting and ending at the bottom of the windshield near the center, make sure there are no gaps in the bead. 10. WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane adhesive seal has cured. Follow urethane adhesive manufacturer's curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane adhesive seal will adversely affect glass retention. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). NOTICE: Before positioning the windshield glass, open vehicle windows to prevent the air pressure of closing doors from affecting the urethane adhesive bond. Install the windshield glass, aligning it to the marks previously made. 11. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air and water leaks. After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed. 12. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the windshield glass. 13. Install the cowl panel grille. 14. Reposition the front portion of the headliner. 15. Install the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips. - If equipped, connect the electrical connectors. 16. Install the interior rear view mirror. 17. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws. - If equipped, connect the electrical connector. 18. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 19. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Glass > Page 9770 Windshield: Service and Repair Glass Reseal - Windshield Glass Reseal - Windshield 1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. 2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors. 5. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material. 6. Remove the cowl panel grille. 7. Clean the interior and exterior of the windshield glass surface with glass cleaner. 8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. 9. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead. NOTE: Make sure there are no gaps in the urethane adhesive bead. Apply urethane adhesive over the top of the existing urethane adhesive. - Apply the urethane adhesive to the top and sides of the windshield from the interior of the vehicle. - Apply the urethane adhesive to the bottom of the windshield from the exterior of the vehicle. 10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or water leaks. After the urethane adhesive has cured, check the windshield seal for air or water leaks through the urethane adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary. 11. Install the cowl panel grille. 12. Position the front portion of the headliner. 13. Install the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips. - If equipped, connect the electrical connectors. 14. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Glass > Page 9771 - If equipped, connect the electrical connector. 15. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 16. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Check Valve: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9790 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9791 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9792 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9793 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9794 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9798 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9799 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9800 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9801 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9802 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Washer Hose Repair NOTE: This procedure may be carried out on rubber hoses only. If a plastic washer hose is leaking, a new washer hose must be installed. 1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose. 2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose. 3. Install a windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose. 4. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required. Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) ID black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose and clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9809 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump Washer Pump Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. 3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the washer pump hose. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before washer pump removal. Disconnect the washer pump hoses. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees. - The hose should slide easily out of the connection. - To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place. 5. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and may prevent it from correctly locking in place when reassembled, resulting in a leak. Rotate the lock ring back to the original location. 6. NOTICE: When installing a new washer pump, be careful not to damage the rubber grommet. Remove the washer pump. 7. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 9814 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir Washer Pump and Reservoir Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. 3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the washer pump hose. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before removal. Disconnect the washer pump hoses. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees. - The hose should slide easily out of the connection. - To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place. 5. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and may prevent it from correctly locking in place when reassembled, resulting in a leak. Rotate the lock ring back to the original location. 6. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. 3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the washer pump hose. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before removal. Disconnect the washer pump hoses. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees. - The hose should slide easily out of the connection. - To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place. 5. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and may prevent it from correctly locking in place when reassembled, resulting in a leak. Rotate the lock ring back to the original location. 6. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9834 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9835 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9836 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9837 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9838 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield 1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers. 2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. NOTE: Make sure there is no mechanical binding in the linkage preventing the wiper arms from returning to the fully parked position. If not within specification, remove the nuts and the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition them to the correct locations. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield > Page 9843 Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear 1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper. 2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition it to the correct location. For additional information, refer to Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear See: Service and Repair/Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arm nuts. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield See: Adjustments/Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 9846 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft Removal and Installation 1. Remove the cowl panel grille. 2. Remove the 3 windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly bolts and the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the wiper motor assembly. For additional information, refer to Wiper Motor - Windshield See: Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Wiper Motor - Windshield. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 9847 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Open the wiper pivot arm cover. 2. Remove the pivot arm nut. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3. Remove the wiper pivot arm. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear See: Adjustments/Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Blade - Rear Removal NOTICE: Lifting the wiper arm beyond its maximum angle may result in damage to the wiper arm or the wiper arm heel. NOTICE: Allowing the wiper arm to contact the glass may result in damage to the glass. 1. Hold the wiper arm with one hand close to the wiper arm and wiper blade pivot joint and lift the arm to its maximum angle. 2. Hold the primary structure of the wiper blade with the other hand close to the wiper arm and wiper blade pivot joint. 3. Tightly grip and push on the wiper arm and wiper blade joint from beneath and separate the blade from the arm. Installation 1. Attach the new wiper blade on the wiper arm and press it into place until a snap is heard. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield Wiper Motor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 9855 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield Wiper Motor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 9858 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor - Windshield Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Windshield Wiper Motor - Windshield Removal and Installation NOTE: A new wiper motor assembly comes with the linkage arm installed. 1. Remove the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. For additional information, refer to Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft. 2. NOTICE: Do not remove the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper motor assembly. If the arm is removed, the wiper arms may not park in the correct location. Separate the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. - Use a suitable tool at the location shown to separate the wiper linkage arm from the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. 3. Remove the 3 bolts and the wiper motor. - To install, tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor - Windshield > Page 9861 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Rear Window Wiper Motor - Rear Window Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear pivot arm. For additional information, refer to Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Pivot Arm Rear. 2. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover. 3. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut. - To install, manually finger-tighten the nut, then tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Open the liftgate window. 5. Remove the rear wiper motor cover trim panel. 6. Remove the rear wiper motor. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 rear window wiper motor nuts. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 3. Remove the rear window wiper motor. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9865 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9866 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9867 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9868